OSN 9800 Commissioning Guide (U2000) 03

OSN 9800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Commissioning Guide (U2000)
Issue 03
Date 2019-11-14
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2020. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: https://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

Commissioning Guide (U2000) About This Document
About This Document
Version
The following table lists the earliest product version to which this document can
be applied.
Product Earliest Version
OSN 9800 V100R001C20
This document describes the configuration of all versions. To use all functions
described in this document, ensure that the NMS version is U2000 V200R018C50
or later.
The screenshots in this document are for reference only.
Intended Audience
This document provides information about commissioning and testing operations
after hardware installation. It describes the preparations, methods and procedures
for station and network commissioning.
This document is intended for:
● Installation and commissioning engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if

not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk

which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if

not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if

not avoided, could result in equipment damage,
data loss, performance deterioration, or
unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to
personal injury.
Supplements the important information in the main

text.
NOTE is used to address information not related to
personal injury, equipment damage, and
environment deterioration.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and

dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by

the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create >
Folder.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document
issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2019-11-14)

This issue is the third official release.
● Optimized the short description of Setting NE IDs and Setting NE IP
Addresses.
● Added the topics of Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the SCC/SCU
Boards, Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the CXP Boards and
Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the CTU Boards.
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

● The Connecting to NEs topic has been updated with descriptions of

P32/M24/M12 subrack.

This issue is the second official release.
Added the operation method and precautions for upgrading the M24 subrack from
1:1 cross mode to 1:3 cross mode.

This issue is the first official release.
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

Commissioning Guide (U2000) Contents
Contents
About This Document................................................................................................................ ii

1 Preparations for Commissioning..........................................................................................1
1.1 Safety Operation Guide......................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols............................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.2 Safe Usage of Fibers........................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on........................................................................................................... 4
1.1.4 ESD............................................................................................................................................................................................ 5
1.2 Preparing License Files.......................................................................................................................................................... 6
1.3 Instruments and Tools........................................................................................................................................................... 6
1.4 Engineering Design Information........................................................................................................................................ 8
1.4.1 Engineering Survey Document........................................................................................................................................ 8
1.4.2 Engineering Design Document........................................................................................................................................8
1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check .................................................................................................................................... 8
1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers................................................................................................................. 9
1.7 Testing Connection Points..................................................................................................................................................10
1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer.......................................................................................................................................10
1.8.1 Connecting the NMS Server Directly.......................................................................................................................... 10
1.8.2 Connecting the NMS Server Through a LAN........................................................................................................... 12
2 Quick Guide............................................................................................................................ 14
2.1 Starting the Web LCT.......................................................................................................................................................... 14
2.1.1 Installing the Web LCT.................................................................................................................................................... 14
2.1.2 Connecting to NEs.............................................................................................................................................................16
2.1.3 Logging In to the Web LCT............................................................................................................................................ 17
2.1.4 Exiting the Web LCT......................................................................................................................................................... 18
2.2 Quck Guide of the U2000.................................................................................................................................................. 18
2.2.1 Logging In to the U2000 Client.................................................................................................................................... 18
2.2.2 Getting to Know the U2000...........................................................................................................................................21
2.2.2.1 Main Topology................................................................................................................................................................ 21
2.2.2.2 NE Explorer.......................................................................................................................................................................24
2.2.2.3 Emulation NE Panel for OptiX OSN 9800 U64/U32/U16.................................................................................25
2.2.2.4 Service View for U64/U32/U16................................................................................................................................. 28
2.2.2.5 Using Shortcut Icon....................................................................................................................................................... 31
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

2.2.2.6 Using Shortcut Keys...................................................................................................................................................... 35

2.2.3 Shutting Down the U2000 Client................................................................................................................................. 37
2.2.4 Using Online Help............................................................................................................................................................. 37
3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During Deployment (OptiX OSN

9800)............................................................................................................................................ 38
4 Commissioning the Optical Power of OSC......................................................................44
5 Configuring NE and Network (Using WebLCT on Site)............................................... 66
5.1 Initial Commissioning Flow............................................................................................................................................... 66
5.2 Configuring NE Attributes..................................................................................................................................................67
5.2.1 Searching and Adding NEs............................................................................................................................................. 67
5.2.2 Logging In to an NE......................................................................................................................................................... 69
5.2.3 Setting NE IDs..................................................................................................................................................................... 70
5.2.4 Setting NE IP Addresses.................................................................................................................................................. 71
5.3 Configuring Power Supplies.............................................................................................................................................. 71
5.3.1 Configuring Power Supplies (U64E/U32E/U64/U32)............................................................................................ 71
5.3.2 Configuring Power Supplies (U16).............................................................................................................................. 78
5.3.3 Configuring Power Supplies (M24/M12).................................................................................................................. 82
5.4 Checking Board Slots........................................................................................................................................................... 88
5.5 Checking the Communication Between the GNE and NMS Center.................................................................... 89
6 Configuring NE and Network (Network Management Center)................................ 90

6.1 Creating NEs by Searching.................................................................................................................................................92
6.2 Creating Optical NEs........................................................................................................................................................... 97
6.3 Logging In to an NE............................................................................................................................................................. 99
6.4 Setting the NE Power Consumption Threshold........................................................................................................100
6.5 Creating Subnets.................................................................................................................................................................102
6.6 Uploading the NE Data.................................................................................................................................................... 103
6.7 Adding Boards..................................................................................................................................................................... 104
6.8 Setting License or Loading RTU.................................................................................................................................... 106
6.9 (Optional) Setting NE ID and IP................................................................................................................................... 114
6.10 Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS/Web LCT Server Manually......................................................... 117
6.11 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE......................................................................................118
6.12 Checking Master/Slave Subracks................................................................................................................................ 121
6.12.1 Checking the Master/Slave Subrack for Universal Platform Subrack.........................................................121
6.13 Configuring Subrack Cascading Mode of an NE................................................................................................... 139
6.14 Configuring Extended ECC in Specified Mode........................................................................................................140
6.15 Configuring Primary and Secondary GNEs............................................................................................................. 146
6.16 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions........................................................................................................... 147
6.17 Configuring Line Boards of a Beyond 100G System............................................................................................ 149
6.17.1 Configuration Process of Boards in a Beyond 100G System......................................................................... 149
6.17.2 Configuring the Working Mode of an N401P/N402P Line Board............................................................... 151
6.17.3 Configuring the Operating Wavelength of a Beyond 100G Line Board.................................................... 152
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

6.18 Configuring Boards.......................................................................................................................................................... 156

6.18.1 Configuring Service Board Parameters..................................................................................................................156
6.18.2 Setting the Board Relay Mode for the Line Boards.......................................................................................... 160
6.18.3 Commissioning Multi-Carrier Line Board............................................................................................................. 161
6.18.4 Setting the Port Type................................................................................................................................................... 164
6.18.5 Setting the Operating Wavelength of a Line Board......................................................................................... 167
6.18.6 Setting the FEC Mode and Optical Port Speed Mode of the Line Board.................................................. 169
6.18.7 Monitoring the Optical Power by MCA/OPM8 Board......................................................................................169
6.18.8 Locking Wavelength by WMU Board.....................................................................................................................171
6.19 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode........................................................................................................ 172
6.20 Setting the Fiber Parameters....................................................................................................................................... 177
6.21 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection............................................................................................... 179
6.22 Configuring Flexible ROADM....................................................................................................................................... 181
6.23 Configuring a Superchannel......................................................................................................................................... 184
6.23.1 Creating Superchannels and Subcarriers.............................................................................................................. 184
6.23.2 Adding a Subcarrier..................................................................................................................................................... 190
6.23.3 Managing Superchannels and Subcarriers.......................................................................................................... 194
6.24 Searching for WDM Trails............................................................................................................................................. 198
6.25 Verifying the Source and Sink of a Wavelength....................................................................................................199
6.26 Upgrading the Cross-Connect Mode of the OSN 9800 M24............................................................................ 200
7 Checking Networkwide Configuration.......................................................................... 205

8 Commissioning Optical Power......................................................................................... 208
8.1 Commissioning Optical Power on Site........................................................................................................................ 208
8.1.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power....................................................................................................... 208
8.1.1.1 Basic Requirements..................................................................................................................................................... 209
8.1.1.2 General Commissioning Sequence........................................................................................................................ 209
8.1.1.3 Commissioning Tools and Instruments................................................................................................................ 211
8.1.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board....................................................................................................... 211
8.1.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light................................................................................................................... 211
8.1.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU Board............................................................................................212
8.1.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board.............................................................................................. 213
8.1.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board........................................................................................................214
8.1.5 Commissioning Turbo WDM boards of OptiX OSN 9800 (200G/400G/800G).......................................... 214
8.1.6 Commissioning Optical Power of Packet Service Board.................................................................................... 218
8.1.7 Testing Specifications of an TDM Board................................................................................................................. 218
8.1.7.1 Testing the Mean Launched Optical Power of Optical Interface Boards................................................. 219
8.1.7.2 Testing the Actual Received Optical Power of an Optical Interface Board............................................. 221
8.1.8 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board.................................................................. 223
8.1.8.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Optical Amplifier Board................................................................... 224
8.1.8.2 Adjusting the Gains for the Optical Amplifier Board...................................................................................... 226
8.1.8.3 Specifications.................................................................................................................................................................227
8.1.9 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier.................................................................................................... 230
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

8.1.9.1 Preparations...................................................................................................................................................................232
8.1.9.2 Safety Mechanism and Safety Precautions.........................................................................................................233
8.1.9.3 Requirements on Cleanness of the Fiber Connector Endface...................................................................... 234
8.1.9.4 Requirements on the Fiber Line............................................................................................................................. 236
8.1.9.5 Method for Testing the Fiber Cabling Quality...................................................................................................236
8.1.9.6 Checking the Fiber Connections............................................................................................................................. 240
8.1.9.7 Connecting the Fiber Jumpers on the Line Side............................................................................................... 241
8.1.9.8 Checking the Configuration of the IPA Function.............................................................................................. 243
8.1.9.9 Configuring the Working Mode and Fiber Type for the Raman Board.................................................... 244
8.1.9.10 Adjusting the Gains for the Raman Board....................................................................................................... 245
8.1.9.11 Adjusting the On-off Gain of the Raman Board............................................................................................ 251
8.1.9.12 Adjusting the Gain Spectrum................................................................................................................................ 253
8.1.9.13 Adjusting the Optical Power of Dummy Light................................................................................................254
8.1.10 Commissioning the Optical Power of OA Boards Intended for the Submarine Cable System..........257
8.1.11 Commissioning the Optical Power of ESC Board.............................................................................................. 266
8.1.12 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board................................................. 266
8.1.12.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V Boards..................................................................................... 266
8.1.12.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of M48V Boards..................................................................................... 267
8.1.12.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU/SFIU Board................................................................................. 268
8.1.13 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Board.............................................................................................. 270
8.1.14 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board............................................................................................. 271
8.1.14.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+WSM9)..........................................................271
8.1.14.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+RMU9).......................................................... 273
8.1.14.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (RDU9+WSM9).......................................................... 275
8.1.14.4 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMDx+WSMDx)................................................... 276
8.1.14.5 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (DWSS20+TM20/TD20).......................................... 278
8.1.14.6 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (DWSS20+MCS0816)............................................... 280
8.1.15 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM.................................................................................................................282
8.1.16 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System.283
8.1.16.1 Example Description.................................................................................................................................................283
8.1.16.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station...........................................................284
8.1.16.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.............................................................................................................. 287
8.1.16.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End.................................................................................... 289
8.1.16.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board).................... 292
8.1.16.6 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (MRx+MRx).............................................................................. 293
8.1.16.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)...................................................................... 295
8.1.16.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (RDU9+WSM9)....................................................................... 298
8.1.16.9 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4)............................................................... 302
8.1.16.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD9+WSMD9)............................................................. 305
8.2 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power................................................................................................................... 307
8.2.1 General Commissioning Sequence............................................................................................................................ 308
8.2.1.1 Commissioning Procedure for the Chain Network...........................................................................................310
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

8.2.1.2 Commissioning Procedure for the Ring Network............................................................................................. 312

8.2.1.3 Commissioning Procedure for the Mesh Network........................................................................................... 314
8.2.2 OTM/ROADM/OLA Station Commissioning Reference......................................................................................316
8.2.3 Common Operations Required for Optical Power Commissioning............................................................... 327
8.2.3.1 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board ................................................................................................... 327
8.2.3.1.1 Forcing the Line Board to Emit Light................................................................................................................ 327
8.2.3.1.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Line Board......................................................................................... 328
8.2.3.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OAU................................................................................................................ 330
8.2.3.3 Adjusting Internal Attenuators on Boards.......................................................................................................... 332
8.2.4 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the Chain Network.................................................. 333
8.2.4.1 Example Description................................................................................................................................................... 333
8.2.4.2 Commissioning Procedure........................................................................................................................................ 335
8.2.4.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A................................... 340
8.2.4.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B............................................................................ 344
8.2.4.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station C
(WSD9+RMU9)........................................................................................................................................................................... 348
8.2.4.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C
(WSD9+WSM9).......................................................................................................................................................................... 355
(RDU9+WSM9)........................................................................................................................................................................... 357
(WSMDx+WSMDx).................................................................................................................................................................... 361
8.2.4.9 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station D....................................................................................362
8.2.4.10 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E ..................... 362
8.2.4.11 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (Multiplexer
Board+Demultiplexer Board)................................................................................................................................................. 364
8.2.4.12 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station F.................................................................................. 366
8.2.4.13 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OTM Station G................................................................................ 367
8.2.4.14 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization........... 368
8.2.4.15 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for Equalization............ 373
8.2.4.16 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Station E and OLA Station F for Equalization.............. 374
8.2.4.17 Commissioning Optical Power (Without MCAs)............................................................................................ 374
8.2.4.18 Commissioning Input Optical Power of OTU Boards....................................................................................376
8.2.4.19 Commissioning OSNR.............................................................................................................................................. 377
8.2.5 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long Spans........................................................................ 378
8.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System...................381
8.3.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System................................................................................................................. 381
8.3.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System............................................................................................................. 386
8.3.3 Preparations for Commissioning................................................................................................................................ 387
8.3.3.1 Checking Design Documents................................................................................................................................... 387
8.3.3.2 40G Commissioning Meter....................................................................................................................................... 391
8.3.4 Remote Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength Non-Coherent System
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 393
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

8.3.4.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the OTM Station................................395
8.3.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station and the OTM Station at the Receive
End.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 396
8.3.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization...............................................................................................398
8.3.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength Non-Coherent System
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 399
8.3.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station............................................................. 402
8.3.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station..........................................................................................404
8.3.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station............................................................... 407
8.3.5.5 Commissioning Optical Power for Equalization................................................................................................408
8.3.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System............................................................................................................ 409
8.3.7 OSNR Penalties................................................................................................................................................................ 416
8.3.8 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation.........................................................................................................................430
8.3.9 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G System....................................................................... 433
8.3.9.1 Incorrect Setting of Board Parameters................................................................................................................. 433
8.3.9.2 OSNR Failure................................................................................................................................................................. 434
8.3.9.3 Excessively High Incident Optical Power............................................................................................................. 434
8.3.9.4 Incorrect Dispersion Configuration........................................................................................................................434
8.3.9.5 Methods for Handling Other Faults...................................................................................................................... 435
8.4 Commissioning the Optical Power of the 100G Coherent System....................................................................436
8.4.1 Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission System...............................436
8.4.2 Process for Commissioning coherent transmission system.............................................................................. 445
8.4.4 Remote Commissioning Optical Power Of Coherent System.......................................................................... 447
8.4.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station and OTM Station at the Receive End
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 451
8.4.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Drop Wavelengths and Links at the ROADM Station... 453
8.4.4.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Pass-through Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 455
8.4.4.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the ROADM Station......................... 458
8.4.5 FAQs on Coherent System Commissioning............................................................................................................ 464
8.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Beyond 100G Coherent System....................................................464
8.5.1 Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Beyond 100G Coherent Transmission System...465
8.5.2 Process for Commissioning coherent transmission system.............................................................................. 476
8.5.4 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems with Coherent System............................................................478
8.5.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of a 40-Wavelength System Whose Single Wavelengths Are
Beyond 100G............................................................................................................................................................................... 479
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 484
8.5.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of an 80-Wavelength System Whose Single Wavelengths Are
Beyond 100G............................................................................................................................................................................... 489
8.5.6.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the ROADM Station......................... 490
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 492
8.5.6.4 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Drop Wavelengths and Links at the ROADM Station... 494
8.6 Checking Optical Power Commissioning Results.................................................................................................... 496
9 Commissioning OLSP 1:1 Optical Line Protection.......................................................499

9.1 Commissioning Scenario 1: No OA Board Is Available on the Working and Protection Trails................499
9.2 Commissioning Scenario 2: OA Boards Are Available on the Working and Protection Trails..................501
10 Commissioning a Flexible ROADM Transmission System........................................503

10.1 Optical Power Adjustment in the Wavelength Add Direction for a Flexible ROADM Transmission
System........................................................................................................................................................................................... 503
10.2 Optical Power Adjustment in the Pass-Through Direction for a Flexible ROADM Transmission System
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 506
10.3 Optical Power Adjustment in the Wavelength Drop Direction for a Flexible ROADM Transmission
System........................................................................................................................................................................................... 508
11 Commissioning the Network......................................................................................... 510

11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms........................................................... 511
11.2 Testing Protection Switching........................................................................................................................................ 512
11.2.1 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the SCC/SCU Boards..................................................................... 513
11.2.2 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the CTU Boards...............................................................................513
11.2.3 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the CXP Boards............................................................................... 514
11.2.4 Testing M:N Protection Switching of the XCS/UXCS/SXCL board................................................................ 515
11.2.5 Testing Load Sharing Protection of UCXCS/CCXCS........................................................................................... 516
11.2.6 1+1Testing Optical Line 1+1 Protection Switching........................................................................................... 520
11.2.7 Testing Optical Line 1:1 Protection Switching.................................................................................................... 522
11.2.8 Testing Intra-Board 1+1 Protection Switching.................................................................................................... 525
11.2.9 Verifying Client 1+1 Protection Switching............................................................................................................527
11.2.10 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching.............................................................................................................. 530
11.2.11 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection Switching.........................................................................................................533
11.2.12 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection Switching................................................................................................... 536
11.2.13 Testing the Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection Switching of the SXCL Boards................................ 538
11.3 Testing System Features................................................................................................................................................ 539
11.3.1 Testing IPA....................................................................................................................................................................... 539
11.3.2 Testing IPA of Raman System (RPC01/RAU1/RAU2/SRAU/SRAPXF + Detection Board + Auxiliary
Detection Board)........................................................................................................................................................................541
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

11.3.3 Testing IPA of Raman System (RAU1/RAU2/SRAU/SRAPXF + Auxiliary Detection Board).................543

11.3.4 Testing ALC..................................................................................................................................................................... 545
11.3.5 Testing APE..................................................................................................................................................................... 547
11.4 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks.......................................................................................................................................548
11.5 Testing IEEE 1588v2........................................................................................................................................................ 550
11.5.1 Testing Process...............................................................................................................................................................550
11.5.2 Testing Delay Compensation.................................................................................................................................... 552
11.5.3 Testing Items.................................................................................................................................................................. 555
11.6 Testing ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2................................................................................................................................ 558
11.6.1 Testing Process...............................................................................................................................................................558
11.6.2 Testing Delay Compensation.................................................................................................................................... 560
11.6.3 Testing Items.................................................................................................................................................................. 563
11.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels............................................................................................................................. 566
11.7.1 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using Laptops...................................................................................... 566
11.7.2 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using the Ethernet OAM Function............................................... 568
11.8 Testing Packet Service Channels................................................................................................................................. 569
11.8.1 Testing Tunnel Performance Using MPLS-TP Tunnel OAM............................................................................ 569
11.8.2 Testing PW Performance Using MPLS-TP PW OAM......................................................................................... 570
11.9 Testing Packet Ethernet Services................................................................................................................................ 571
11.9.1 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Availability by Using Ping Commands....................................................571
11.9.2 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Availability by Using ETH-OAM................................................................573
11.9.3 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Performance Using ETH OAM................................................................... 574
11.9.4 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Performance by Using SmartBits..............................................................575
11.10 Testing Orderwire.......................................................................................................................................................... 577
11.10.1 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System.............................................................................................................. 577
11.10.1.1 Setting the Orderwire Board............................................................................................................................... 577
11.10.1.2 Configuring Orderwire.......................................................................................................................................... 579
11.10.1.3 Configuring Conference Calls............................................................................................................................. 580
11.10.1.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets................................................................................................................................ 581
11.10.2 Testing Orderwire Functions...................................................................................................................................584
11.11 Testing CES Services...................................................................................................................................................... 584
12 Testing Bit Errors Using A Signal Analyzer................................................................. 587

12.1 Testing Single-Channel Bit Errors............................................................................................................................... 588
12.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors...................................................................................................................................... 589
13 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data..............................................................................592

13.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods.............................................................................. 593
13.2 Backing Up the NE Database to the CTU Board................................................................................................... 596
13.3 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card......................................................................................... 598
13.4 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client..................................................................... 599
13.5 Restoring the NE Database from the System Control Board............................................................................603
13.6 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card....................................................................................................... 604
13.7 Recovering Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client.................................................................606
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii

13.8 Disaster Restoration of NE Configuration Data.................................................................................................... 608
14 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment.................................................... 612

15 Analyzing and Handling Common Deployment Problems..................................... 614
15.1 OSC/ESC Conflict.............................................................................................................................................................. 614
15.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports........................................................................................................................616
16 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration........................619

16.1 Configuring the NE Data............................................................................................................................................... 622
16.1.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually........................................................................................................................ 622
16.1.2 Replicating the NE Data............................................................................................................................................. 624
16.2 Configuring Wavelength Grooming...........................................................................................................................625
16.2.1 Basic Concepts............................................................................................................................................................... 625
16.2.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow........................................................................................................ 626
16.2.3 Configuring the ROADM............................................................................................................................................ 627
16.2.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................... 627
16.2.3.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation............................................................................................ 628
16.2.3.3 Configuration Process.............................................................................................................................................. 631
16.2.3.4 Enabling the Port Blocking Function.................................................................................................................. 633
16.3 Configuring the NE Time............................................................................................................................................... 634
16.3.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the NMS/Web LCT and NEs................................................................. 634
16.3.2 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with the NMS Time.................................................635
16.3.3 Configuring the Standard NTP Key........................................................................................................................ 636
16.3.4 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server Time................................................................ 638
16.4 Performance Management........................................................................................................................................... 639
16.4.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold...........................................................................................................639
16.4.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters..................................................................................................... 641
16.4.2.1 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board............................................................................641
16.4.2.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE............................................................................... 642
16.4.2.3 Viewing Statistics Group Performance of an Ethernet Port....................................................................... 643
16.4.2.4 Setting NE Performance Store Period................................................................................................................ 643
16.4.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers................................................................................................................647
16.5 Modifying the Attributes of NEs................................................................................................................................. 648
16.5.1 Modifying the NE Name............................................................................................................................................ 648
16.5.2 Modifying the Optical NE Name.............................................................................................................................649
16.5.3 Modifying GNE Parameters.......................................................................................................................................650
16.5.4 Changing the GNE for NEs........................................................................................................................................ 652
16.5.5 Changing a GNE to a Non-GNE.............................................................................................................................. 654
16.5.6 Changing a Non-GNE to a GNE.............................................................................................................................. 655
16.5.7 Deleting NEs................................................................................................................................................................... 657
16.6 Modifying the Boards Configuration......................................................................................................................... 659
16.6.1 Deleting Boards............................................................................................................................................................. 659
16.6.2 Adding Boards................................................................................................................................................................661
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

16.7 Modifying the Fibers Configuration...........................................................................................................................662

16.7.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information........................................................................................................................662
16.7.2 Deleting Fibers............................................................................................................................................................... 665
16.8 Creating a Single NE....................................................................................................................................................... 667
16.9 Creating Virtual NE......................................................................................................................................................... 669
16.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User................................................................................................................................ 671
16.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode.............................................................................................................. 674
16.12 Configuring the Edge Port.......................................................................................................................................... 677
16.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection............................................................................................................ 678
16.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes.............................................................................................................. 680
16.15 Configuring Board SDH Interface Attributes........................................................................................................681
16.16 Monitoring Wavelengths by Using the Spectrum Analyzer Board............................................................... 682
16.17 Opening/Closing Lasers............................................................................................................................................... 683
16.18 Open and Close the Laser on the SDH Board..................................................................................................... 684
16.19 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards................................................................................................. 685
16.20 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC).................................................................................................................... 686
16.21 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board................................................................................. 687
16.22 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board................................................................................... 689
16.23 Setting the NULL Mapping Status........................................................................................................................... 689
16.24 Configuring Path Binding............................................................................................................................................691
16.25 Locking Wavelength by WMU Board......................................................................................................................691
16.26 Querying and Setting the Service Type on the Client Side of a Board....................................................... 693
16.27 Setting the FEC Mode.................................................................................................................................................. 694
16.28 Enabling the FEC Function......................................................................................................................................... 695
16.29 Enabling and Disabling LPT....................................................................................................................................... 696
16.30 Setting the Speed Level of Fans............................................................................................................................... 697
16.31 Configuring Ethernet Boards..................................................................................................................................... 697
16.31.1 Configuring Internal Ports.......................................................................................................................................698
16.31.2 Configuring External Ports...................................................................................................................................... 699
16.32 Configuring the PRBS Test.......................................................................................................................................... 701
16.32.1 PRBS Test....................................................................................................................................................................... 701
16.32.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary Board............................................................................ 705
16.32.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter Board .....................................................................................................706
16.32.4 Performing the PRBS Test in E2E Mode............................................................................................................. 707
16.33 Managing NE Power Consumption......................................................................................................................... 710
16.33.1 Monitoring NE Power Consumption....................................................................................................................710
16.33.1.1 Querying the Power Consumption of an NE.................................................................................................710
16.33.1.2 Querying the Power Consumption of a Board............................................................................................. 712
16.33.2 Configuring Energy Conservation for an NE.....................................................................................................713
16.33.3 Viewing the Network-wide NE Power Consumption Report.......................................................................715
16.34 Measuring Trail Latency.............................................................................................................................................. 716
16.35 Enabling the ASON Feature ......................................................................................................................................721
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv

16.36 Configuring Housekeeping Alarm Inputs.............................................................................................................. 722
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

Commissioning Guide (U2000) 1 Preparations for Commissioning
1 Preparations for Commissioning
This chapter describes how to prepare for commissioning.
1.1 Safety Operation Guide

This section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal
safety regulations and equipment operating regulations. These regulations must
be followed to prevent personal injuries or damages to the equipment during
operations.
1.2 Preparing License Files
This topic describes the license file required for commissioning and the method of
obtaining license files.
1.3 Instruments and Tools
This section describes the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning.
1.4 Engineering Design Information
This section describes the engineering design information required for equipment
commissioning.
1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check
Before commissioning equipment, check the commissioning conditions.
1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers
This section describes the requirements for commissioning engineers.
1.7 Testing Connection Points
This section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding
function and connection types.
1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer
This section describes how to connect the NMS computer to an NE, so that the
NMS manages the NE.
1.1 Safety Operation Guide

This section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal
safety regulations and equipment operating regulations. These regulations must
be followed to prevent personal injuries or damages to the equipment during
operations.
Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols

During equipment installation and maintenance, observe the precautions indicated
by the alarm and safety symbols to help prevent personal injury or equipment
damage.
Table 1-1 describes the alarm and safety symbols on the WDM equipment.
Table 1-1 Symbols on the WDM equipment
Symbol Describes
ESD protection symbol.

You must wear an ESD wrist strap
or glove to avoid damage caused
by electrostatic discharge to
boards.
Laser level symbol.

Indicates the laser level and warns
that laser beams can cause
injuries to eyes.
Grounding symbol.
Indicates the position of the
grounding point.
Fan warning symbol.

Warns you not to touch the fan
blade until the fan stops moving.
High Electrical Leakage symbol.

Indicates a danger that earth
connection is essential before
supply and/or telecommunication
network connections.
1.1.2 Safe Usage of Fibers

This section describes how to safely use fibers.

Laser beams on the optical interface board or inside the optical fiber can cause
damage to your eyes. When installing and maintaining optical interface boards
and optical fibers, avoid directly exposing your eyes to the laser beams originating
from the optical interfaces or fiber connectors.
Protection of Optical Connectors

All idle optical connectors for fiber jumpers and optical ports on the optical
interface boards must be covered with protective caps. The optical ports on the
replaced boards must be promptly covered with protective caps. In addition,
properly store these boards in their packages to keep the optical ports clean.
Recommended protective caps are shown in Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1 Recommended protective caps
Protective caps that are not recommended are shown in Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2 Protective caps that are not recommended

Do not use protective caps that are made of soft rubber. These caps tend to collect dust and
other material. These caps are hard to clean and do not resist the build-up of dust.
Connecting Fibers
When applying a physical fiber loopback between two optical ports, increase the
attenuation to avoid equipment damage in case the laser optical power is
excessively high. For boards that have the capability of having optical attenuators
added, add an optical attenuator at the Rx optical port rather than at the Tx
optical port.
Insert fibers into optical connectors carefully when connecting fibers. If the optical
power is excessively high, add a fixed optical attenuator before the optical port to
avoid damages to the device caused by a high input of optical power.
Cleaning Fibers
NOTICE
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is

seriously affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flanges for each external fiber
must be cleaned before the fibers from the ODF are inserted into the optical ports
on the boards in the equipment.
The fiber connectors and optical ports for the lasers must be cleaned by using
special cleaning tools and materials. Some common cleaning tools are:
● Cleaning solvent. Isoamylol is preferred, propyl can be used (alcohol or
formalin is never used)
● Non-woven lens tissue
● Special compressed gas
● Dust-free cotton stick
● Special cleaning roll used along with cleaning solvent, either isoamylol or
propyl
● Fiberscope
1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on

This section describes the requirements for performing operations on the
equipment when the power is on.
Follow these requirements when performing operations on the equipment when
the power is on:
● Do not install or disassemble equipment when the power is on.

● Do not install or remove power cables when the power is on.

● Before connecting a cable, ensure that the cable and cable label comply with
installation requirements.
1.1.4 ESD
During installation and maintenance, follow ESD procedures to prevent equipment
damage:
● Always wear an ESD wrist strap during the operation.
● Check that the equipment is securely grounded.
NOTICE
Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch equipment or boards.
Make sure that the wrist strap touches your skin. Insert the ESD strap connector
into the ESD socket of the equipment.
For information about how to wear an ESD wrist strap, see Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3 Wearing an ESD wrist strap
When you are following ESD procedures, take the following precautions:
● Check the validity and functionality of the wrist strap. Its resistance value
must be between 0.75 mega ohm to 10 mega ohm. If the wrist strap validity
period (usually two years) has expired, or if the resistance value fails to meet
requirements, replace it with a wrist strap that provides the required
resistance value.
● Do not touch a board with your clothing. Clothing generates static electricity
that is not protected by the wrist strap.
● Wear an ESD wrist strap and place the board on an ESD pad when you
replace boards or chips. Use ESD tweezers or extraction tools to replace chips.
Do not touch chips, circuits, or pins with your bare hands.

● Keep the boards and other ESD-sensitive parts you are installing in ESD bags.
Place the removed boards and components on an ESD pad or ESD material.
Do not use non-antistatic materials such as white foams, common plastic
bags, or paper bags to pack boards, and do not let these materials touch the
boards.
● Wear an ESD wrist strap when operating the ports of boards because they are
also ESD-sensitive. Discharge the static electricity of cables and protective
sleeves before you connect them to the ports.
● Keep packing materials (such as, ESD boxes and bags) available in the
equipment room for packing boards in the future.
ESD complies with IEC Publication 1000, EN 55022, EN 55024, IEC 61000 and
GR-1089-CORE.
1.2 Preparing License Files

This topic describes the license file required for commissioning and the method of
obtaining license files.
License files required for device commissioning are classified into commercial
licenses and temporary licenses. You can apply for licenses on the ESDP
platform(http://esdp.huawei.com) of Huawei.
For details about license configuration on the device side, see 6.8 Setting License
or Loading RTU.
1.3 Instruments and Tools

This section describes the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning.
Table 1-2 describes how the tools and testing instruments are used for equipment
commissioning.
Table 1-2 Instruments and tools required for commissioning

Tool or Tester Usage
Laptop Used to install the NMS Web LCT during network

element (NE) commissioning.
Optical power meter Used to measure the received optical power, receiver
sensitivity, and receiver overload at an optical port. It
is mainly used to measure the optical power on the
client side and the WDM side of the OTU. This meter
also measures the total optical power of the
multiplexed signals.

Optical spectrum Used mainly to test the optical power, optical signal-
analyzer to-noise ratio (OSNR), and central wavelength for
each wavelength in the multiplexed signals.
NOTE
In a DWDM system, the optical power of a single wavelength
in the multiplexed signals needs to be measured using an
optical spectrum analyzer. The commissioning result from this
method is more accurate. When using this method, the noise
impact does not need to be considered.
Calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to
perform the test. Use the following method to verify the
calibration: measure the optical power of the OUT optical
port on the OTU using the optical spectrum analyzer. Then
compare it with the optical power obtained by using an
optical power meter. If the difference is less than 0.5 dB, the
calibration is acceptable. If the difference is greater than 0.5
dB, recalibrate the optical spectrum analyzer.
SDH analyzer Used for network commissioning and SDH service

testing.
GE analyzer Used for the GE service testing.
OTN analyzer Used for the OTN service testing.
ESCON analyzer Used for the ESCON service testing.
Ethernet analyzer Used for the data service testing.
FICON/FC analyzer Used for the FICON service and FC service testing.
Multimeter Used to test the voltage, resistance, and current

intensity during a power test.
Fiber microscope Used for checking the cleanliness of fiber end faces.
Phillips screwdriver Used to install or uninstall the board screws.
Compressed gas Used to clean optical ports of boards.
Fiber jumper Used for connections during the optical power test of
optical ports on the optical distribution frame (ODF)
side.
Cassette cleaner or Used to clean fiber end faces.

lens tissue
Flange Used to transfer the fiber jumper.
Fixed optical Used to attenuate the received optical power, which

attenuator may damage the optical component, during the
received optical power test for an optical port.

Variable optical Used for testing the receiver sensitivity and overload
attenuator (VOA) optical power of an optical port.
NOTE
● The attenuation increases when the VOA is adjusted
clockwise while decreases when adjusted
counterclockwise.
● When adjusting the VOA counterclockwise, observe the
optical power closely. When the attenuation stops
decreasing, stop the adjustment immediately to avoid
damages to the VOA.
1.4 Engineering Design Information

This section describes the engineering design information required for equipment
commissioning.
1.4.1 Engineering Survey Document

This section describes the required engineering survey documents.
The required engineering survey documents include the survey report and the
work instructions associated with the engineering survey.
1.4.2 Engineering Design Document

This section describes the engineering design documents required during
equipment commissioning.
The following engineering design documents are required for equipment
commissioning:
● Network diagram (including the networking diagram for the entire network,
the basic topological diagram, and the network management diagram)
● Board layout diagram of the
● Wavelength allocation diagram
● fiber connection diagram
● Configuration diagram of the optical amplifiers
● Fiber connection diagram
● Optical attenuator list
● Design description file
1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check

Before commissioning equipment, check the commissioning conditions.
For details about checking the commissioning conditions, see the Installation
Reference.

Table 1-3 Checking items

No. Task Item
1 Operating Environment ● Equipment Room

and Grounding Environment
Specifications Requirements
● Power Supply
● Lighting
● Protection System
● Antistatic Protection
● Lightening Protection
and Grounding
Requirements
2 Installation Checklist ● Checking the Cabinet

Installation
● Checking the Cabinet
Reenforcement
● Checking the Subrack
and Board
● Checking the Cable
and Fiber Routing
● Checking the DCM
and CRPC Modules
● Checking the Cabinet
Door Installation
3 Grounding Specifications ● General Grounding

Specifications
● Equipment Grounding
Specifications
● Specifications for
Managing Ground
Cables
4 Others ● Engineering Labels

● Checking Cabling and
Bundling
● Inspecting and
Cleaning the Optical
Fiber Connectors
1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers

This section describes the requirements for commissioning engineers.

Commissioning engineers must have received professional training on optical

network commissioning and are skilled in using the test equipment.
Commissioning engineers must be familiar with:
● WDM, SDH, and Ethernet theories
● WDM equipment
● NMS/Web LCT and service configuration by using the NMS/Web LCT
● Analyzers (WDM, SDH and Ethernet)
1.7 Testing Connection Points

This section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding
function and connection types.
Table 1-4 Function description of the testing buttons
Interface Silk-Screen Function Description
RESET Used to reset the SCC board.
ALM CUT The trigger switch is used to mute the alarm from the
subrack. You can either hide the prompt of current
alarms by pressing and then immediately releasing the
button, or mute the alarms by pressing the button for
five seconds. When the audible alarm function is
turned off, the ALMC indicator on the SCC board
remains on. Otherwise, the audible alarm function is
turned on, and the ALMC indicator on the SCC board
remains off.
LAMP TEST Used to test the indicators. After you press this button,
all indicators are lit.
1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer

This section describes how to connect the NMS computer to an NE, so that the
NMS manages the NE.
1.8.1 Connecting the NMS Server Directly

This section describes how to connect the NMS server to Ethernet port in the
subrack using a cable.
Prerequisites
The subrack must work normally.
The IP address of the NE and the IP address of the NMS server belong to the same
network segment.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

NMS, network cable
Precautions
If the connection mode for subracks is the master/slave mode, connect the NMS
server to the master subrack through a network cable.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the cable. One end of the cable should be connected to the network port of
the NMS computer. The other end should be connected to the NM port of the CTU
board.
Step 2 Determine if the green indicator of the network card interface of the NMS
computer remains constantly on.
Step 3 Check the indicators on the NM port of the CTU board. The green "LINK" indicator
should remain constantly on. The orange "ACT" indicator should blink.
Step 4 On Windows XP on the NMS server, click Start. Select Control Panel from the
Start Menu. The Control Panel window is displayed.
Step 5 Click Network and Internet Connection. The Network and Internet Connection
window is displayed.
Step 6 Click Network Connection. The Network Connection window is displayed.
Step 7 Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties. The Local Area
Connection Properties window is displayed.
Step 8 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties. The Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) window is displayed.
Step 9 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter
an IP address that is in the same network segment with the NE, for example,
129.9.0.N, where N is an integer from 1 to 255. Note that the IP address must be
unique and cannot be the same as any of the existing IP addresses.
Step 10 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.
NOTICE
When configuring the Use the following IP address check box in a direct
connection, do not configure the gateway. Otherwise, the configured gateway may
lead to a failed connection. If the NMS server has more than one network card,
select the corresponding local connection for the network card connected to the
subrack.
Step 11 Click OK.
----End

1.8.2 Connecting the NMS Server Through a LAN

This section describes how to connect the NMS server to the NE through a LAN.
Prerequisites
When the NMS server connects to the NE through a LAN, the IP address is set in a
way that is similar to connecting the U2000 server to an Ethernet port in the
subrack using a cable. Note the following requirements:
● The subrack must work normally.

● The IP address of the NE and the IP address of the NMS server belong to the
same network segment.

NMS, network cable
Precautions
If the connection mode for subracks is the master/slave mode, connect the NMS
server to the master subrack through a network cable.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the NMS computer into the LAN.
Step 2 Check the cable. The NMS computer is connected to the LAN using cables. The
equipment is connected to the LAN through the NM port of the CTU board using
cables.
Step 3 Determine if the indicator for the network card interface of the NMS computer
remains constantly on.
Step 4 Check the indicators on the NM port of the CTU board. The green "LINK" indicator
should remain constantly on. The orange "ACT" indicator should blink.
Step 5 In Windows XP on the NMS server, click Start. Select Control Panel from the
Start Menu. The Control Panel window is displayed.
Step 6 Click Network and Internet Connection. The Network and Internet Connection
Step 7 Click Network Connection. The Network Connection window is displayed.
Step 8 Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties. The Local Area
Connection Properties window is displayed.
Step 9 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties. The Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) window is displayed.
Step 10 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter
an IP address that is in the same network segment with the NE, for example,
129.9.0.N, where N is an integer from 1 to 255. Note that the IP address is unique
and cannot be the same as any of the existing IP addresses.

Step 11 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.
NOTICE
When configuring the Use the following IP address check box in a direct
connection, do not configure the gateway. Otherwise the configured gateway may
lead to a failed connection. If the NMS server has more than one network cards,
select the corresponding local connection for the network card connected to the
subrack.
Step 12 Click OK.
----End

Commissioning Guide (U2000) 2 Quick Guide
2 Quick Guide
The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web
LCT and the NMS.
The NMS is an integrated management platform for all Huawei equipment. It can
centrally manage transport equipment, access equipment, and IP equipment
(including routers, security equipment, and Metro Ethernet equipment). With
powerful management functions at the NE and network layers, the NMS is the
major future-oriented network management product and solution for Huawei
equipment. In the telecommunication management network (TMN) hierarchy, the
NMS is located between the element management layer and network
management layer, and supports all functions of the NE and network layers.
The Web LCT is an element management system (EMS) in an optical transport

network. In the TMN, the Web LCT is located at the NE layer. Based on the
browser/server architecture, the Web LCT allows you to perform all operations of
NE-level configuration and maintenance. The Web LCT accesses a local NE
through a LAN or a serial port, and accesses a remote NE over data
communications channels (DCCs).
2.1 Starting the Web LCT
LCT.
2.2 Quck Guide of the U2000
The following topics introduce some preparation operations that will ensure a
smooth, trouble-free launch of the U2000.
2.1 Starting the Web LCT

LCT.
2.1.1 Installing the Web LCT

You can install the Web LCT using a CD or DVD, or by copying and decompressing
the software package that contains the Web LCT.

Installing the Web LCT by Copying and Decompressing the Software

Package
1. Obtain the software package that contains the Web LCT from Huawei
engineers.
2. Decompress the installation software package that includes
U2000WebLCTversion_en_win32_x86.zip.
Ensure that the decompressing directory contains no spaces, punctuation, or non-

alphabetic characters.
Installing the Web LCT Using a CD or DVD

1. Insert the installation CD or DVD.
2. Run the setup.exe file.
3. Select the language version for Wizard, and click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. Select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and click Next.
6. Select the installation directory, and click Next.
When you click Browse to select a different installation folder, ensure that the
destination path does not contain spaces or punctuation.
7. The following dialog box is displayed. Select the features you want to install
based on the following NOTE. Click Next.

When you select the features to be installed, COMMON must be selected and other
features can be selected based on the managed equipment.
● For OTN equipment using the North American version only, select NA OTN.
● For OTN equipment using the global version only, select NG WDM.
● It is recommended that all the features are selected.
8. Click Install to install the Web LCT. The entire installation process lasts five
minutes.
9. After the installation is complete, the Installation finished dialog box is
displayed. Click Finish.
2.1.2 Connecting to NEs

Connect the computer where the Web LCT is installed to an NE using a crossover
or straight-through cable so the Web LCT can directly manage the connected NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the crossover or straight-through cable to the Web LCT. One end of the
cable should be connected to the network port of the computer.
Table 2-1 Specific port on a board

Product Board Name Port
OptiX OSN 9800 U64/U32 CTU NM
OptiX OSN 9800 U16 EFI NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2
OptiX OSN 9800 Universal EFI TN18EFI Type A:

Platform Subrack NM_ETH
TN18EFI Type B:
NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2
TN19EFI/TN55EFI:
NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2
OptiX OSN 9800 P32 EFI NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2
OptiX OSN 9800 M24 EFI NM_ETH
OptiX OSN 9800 M12 SCC NM_ETH
Step 2 Check the green indicator of the network adapter interface of the computer and
the indicators on the board that connect to the computer.

The indicator of the computer and the green "LINK" indicator on the board remain on. The
orange "ACT" indicator on the board should blink.
If the three indicators are malfunctioning:
● Replace the network cable with a new one. If the indicators are functioning correctly,
the original cable is faulty.
● If all the above-mentioned indicators are still malfunctioning, check whether the
network adapter of the computer and the board that connects to the network cable
are functioning correctly.
Step 3 Change the IP address of the computer being used to commission the NE so that
the computer IP address is on the same subnet as the default IP Address of the
NE.
● The default IP address of an NE ranges from 129.9.0.0 to 129.9.0.255 or from

129.9.191.0 to 129.9.191.255.
● Change the computer IP address that is in the same network segment as the NE, for
example, 129.9.0.N, where N is an integer from 1 to 255.
● Change the computer subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.
----End
2.1.3 Logging In to the Web LCT

Log in to the Web LCT before performing NE settings on the Web LCT.
Procedure
1. Double-click the startweblct_https.bat file at "WebLCT\WebLCT\Tomcat" to
launch the Web LCT application.
2. In the browser, enter the default value admin for User Name and
Changeme_123 for Password.
3. Enter the Verification Code according to the picture that is displayed on the
right side.
4. Click Login to display the NE List window.

Postrequisite
After logging in to the Web LCT,pay attention to the following if you need to
commission an NE on the Web LCT:
● When no U2000 user logs in to an NE and an LCT user requests to log in to
the NE, the NE does not refer to the LCT Access Control parameter and
allows the LCT access directly
● When a U2000 user has logged in to an NE and then an LCT user requests to
log in to the NE, the NE determines whether to allow the LCT user to log in
based on the LCT Access Control parameter.
● When an LCT user has logged in to an NE and then a U2000 user requests to
log in to the NE, the login of the LCT user does not affect the login of the
U2000 user, and the successful login of the U2000 user does not affect the
logged-in LCT user.
● When the LCT user and the U2000 user log in to the NE at the same time, set
LCT Access Control to Prohibit Access. This does not affect the LCT user that
has already logged in.
2.1.4 Exiting the Web LCT

After performing initial NE commissioning using the Web LCT, log out of the
commissioned NE, reconnect the network cables to the NE, and exit the Web LCT.
Procedure
Step 1 Highlight the NE that you are logged in to, and click the NE Logout at the bottom
of the screen.
Step 2 Physically disconnect the Web LCT from the NE
Step 3 Close the browser.
Step 4 Double-click the stopweblct.bat file at "WebLCT\WebLCT\Tomcat" to stop the
Web LCT application.
----End
2.2 Quck Guide of the U2000

The following topics introduce some preparation operations that will ensure a
smooth, trouble-free launch of the U2000.
2.2.1 Logging In to the U2000 Client

Log in to the U2000 client to manage NEs by performing management operations
on the U2000 client.
Prerequisites
Before logging in to the U2000 client, ensure that the following conditions are
met:

● The U2000 server is started.

● The network communication between the U2000 client and U2000 server is
available.
Run the ping peer_IP_address command to check network communication.

● The ports used between the U2000 client and U2000 server are not blocked
by the firewall.
● The IP address of the client must be contained in the access control list (ACL)
that is configured on the U2000 server.
The default ACL range is the entire network segment. It is recommended that you set
the ACL restriction range based on the security requirements.
● Legitimate U2000 user names and passwords have been allocated.
● U2000 licenses have been correctly loaded to the server.
Background Information
By default, after you enter an incorrect password three consecutive times, the user
account is locked by the U2000 server. The administrator user admin can unlock
the account of a common user. In addition, the system can automatically unlock
the account in 30 minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the operating system where the client program is installed.
● On a Windows OS, log in to the OS as user administrator.
● On a Solaris OS, log in to the GUI as user ossuser.
Step 2 On the OS desktop, double-click the U2000 Client shortcut icon. The Login dialog
box is displayed.

● For a Windows OS, double-click the startup_all_global.bat file in the D:\oss\client

directory to start the client.
● For a Solaris OS, run the command of ./startup_all_global.sh in the \opt\oss\client
directory to start the client.
Step 3 Optional: If the intended server is not configured, perform the following
operations to add a server:
1. Click the ... button. In the Server List dialog box, click Add.
2. In the Add Server Information dialog box, set the parameters of the U2000
server to be added, and click OK.
Table 2-2 Server parameter settings

Parameter Settings
Name It is recommended that you set this parameter to the IP

address for login or the related host name.
Server Name It is recommended that you set this parameter to an IP

(or IP Address) address.
– In a single-server system (centralized), the IP address is
the system IP address of the server.
– In a high availability system (centralized), the IP
address is the IP address of NMS application network
in the active site server.
Port There are two data transmission modes: Common and

Security(SSL). By default, port 31037 is used in Common
mode and port 31039 is used in Security(SSL) mode.
Mode There are two data transmission modes: Common and

Security(SSL). You can run the ssl_adm -cmd query
command to query data transmission modes on the
server. The ssl_adm -cmd query command must be run
as user nmsuser in Solaris OS. The default data
transmission mode is Common.
NOTE
– A client can log in to the U2000 server only when they work
in the same mode. If the client and server work in different
modes, even if they are installed on the same host, the client
cannot log in to the server.
3. In the Server List dialog box, select a record from the record list. Then, click
OK.
Step 4 In the Server drop-down list, select the server to be logged in to. Then, set User
Name and Password to the valid values, and click Login.

By default the user name is admin, The initial password of the admin user is
Changeme_123 (It is Admin_123 for a U2000 that comes preinstalled). The password must
be changed during the first login to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential
and change it regularly.
Step 5 Optional: When you log in to the U2000 client, if the system detects that the
local version is older than the server version, a prompt is displayed asking you
whether to upgrade the client.
● Click OK to upgrade the local version to the server version (recommended).
This ensures version consistency on the U2000 client and on the U2000 server.
● Click Cancel, which prevents you from logging in to the client of the server
version.
Step 6 After you log in to the U2000 client, the U2000 automatically displays the
workbench window where default shortcut icons are displayed.
----End
2.2.2 Getting to Know the U2000

This topic describes how to start the U2000 system, include: Main Topology, NE
Panel, NE Explorer, Frequently Used Shortcut Icon, Common Shortcut Keys.
2.2.2.1 Main Topology

All topology management functions can be accessed through the Main Topology
on the U2000. These functions include creating topological objects and subnets,
and searching for existing equipment in the network. You can search, view, create,
set, and manage NEs and subnets. You can also search, create, configure, and
maintain management functions on the Main Topology

Navigation Path
In the Workbench window, double-click the Main Topology shortcut icon.
GUI Description
Figure 2-1shows the Main Topology of the U2000 client.
Figure 2-1 Main Topology
No. Area Description
1 NMS name This area displays the full name of the U2000.
2 Menu bar You can operate the U2000 and NE using a

submenu bar. The operations include
configuring and managing tasks.
3 Shortcut icon By clicking a shortcut icon, you can perform a

simple task quickly; for example, exit the U2000,
lock the U2000 client, log out, manage U2000
users, stop the current alarm sound, access NE
manager, view alarms, and create connections.

4 Shortcut icon on the By clicking this icon, you can zoom in or out or
Main Topology page refresh or save the view, show or hide the
navigators, search objects, monitor object
attributes, and lock or unlock the view.
5 Alarm button bar The alarm pane provides fault information

about the entire network by collecting statistics
on the alarms of different severities and their
status according to the current alarm template.
The alarm pane can function as a monitoring
panel. On the alarm button bar, the alarms
severities are marked in different colors, and the
number indicates the number of uncleared
alarms.
6 Filter tree and In this area, you can set the display types of the
legend objects, and examine the descriptions of the
legends in a view.
7 Time and date Displays the client time in real time.
8 User name Displays the user name of the current logged-in

U2000 user.
9 Server IP address Displays the name that is set by the current

and name U2000 client and the IP address of the current
U2000 server.
10 Physical map Views NEs.

In the Main Topology, you can perform
operations such as Creating NEs, Configuring
the NE Data, Creating Connections, Browsing
Fibers/Cables, Deleting Topology Objects,
Browsing the Current Alarm, and Starting the
NE Data Collection; enter the NE Explorer to
configure the service for the NE and so on.
You can check the NE status and
communication status in the Filter Tree or on
the Legend tab.
11 Coordinate value Displays the current mouse coordinate in the

Main Topology.
12 Topology navigation Displays all the NEs managed by the U2000 so

tree they can be quickly located.
13 Current Alarms In this area, you can browse the alarms that
require attention and processing by setting the
filtering criteria of the current alarm.

In the Current View drop-down list, you can select Physical Root, Current View, and
Custom View.
2.2.2.2 NE Explorer
The NE Panel displays boards and ports in different colors indicating their current
status. On the U2000, most operations such as equipment configuration,
monitoring, and maintenance are performed in the NE Panel window.
Navigation Path
In the Main Topology, right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu.
GUI Description
Figure 2-2 shows an NE Explorer of the U2000 client.
Figure 2-2 NE Explorer
1 Object display Displays the current NE, subracks on the NE, and
area boards in each subrack.

2 Shortcut icon
● Click to display the NE panel.
● Click to switch to another NE.
● Click to back up the NE database.
● Click to obtain online help.
3 Function tree You can select a function from the Function Tree
to perform operations, such as configuring
services, creating connections, and querying
alarms on the current NE.
4 Right-hand Displays different windows based on the

window functions that are selected from the Function
Tree. You can click a shortcut icon to switch to
another window.
2.2.2.3 Emulation NE Panel for OptiX OSN 9800 U64/U32/U16

The NE Panel displays subracks, boards, and ports on an NE. The color of a
component icon indicates the current status of the component. On the U2000, the
NE Panel is an important location for equipment configuration, monitoring, and
maintenance. OptiX OSN 9800 is new-generation OTN equipment that uses
advance energy conservation technologies and provides huge access and cross-
connect capacities. In addition, it contains many subracks and boards and is large-
sized. Therefore, the NE Panel for OptiX OSN 9800 uses an emulation NE Panel,
which facilitates the management and configuration of the boards on the OptiX
OSN 9800 by adjusting the GUI layout and operation sequence of the NE Panel.
Navigation Path
In the main topology, double-click the icon of the OptiX OSN 9800 U64/U32. NE
Panel is displayed.
GUI Description
Figure 2-3 shows the emulation NE Panel for OptiX OSN 9800 U64/U32/U16.

Figure 2-3 NE Panel
1 NE Panel Displays the boards in the selected subrack.

Enables the user to view board configuration
parameters by adding or deleting boards.
2 Emulation board Displays the emulation view of the selected board.

view
3 Board function Displays the common configuration functions of

menu the selected board.

4 Toolbar The icons on the toolbar are described as follows:
● : When a board port is selected, the

user can click Attribute to query or set the port
attributes such as the port name and alarms.
● : provides a visual service piechart for

the user to configure single-station services.
● : When a board port is selected, the

user can click Optical Power to set and query
optical power parameters of the port.
● : When a board or port is selected, the

user can click Alarm to query and handle
alarms on the board or port.

user can click Config to query and configure
WDM attributes.

user can click Performance to query and
configure the performance.
● : provides a visual power view for the

user to configure and query cabinet power
supplies after the user clicks the icon.
● : When a board or a pluggable port is

selected, the user can click Delete to delete the
logical board or port from the U2000.

5 Toolbar view Displays the visual view of the selected icon.
2.2.2.4 Service View for U64/U32/U16

The NE Panel displays subracks, boards, and ports of an NE. The colors of
component icons indicate the current status. On the U2000, the NE Panel is an
important location for NE configuration, monitoring, and maintenance.
Navigation Path
In the Main Topology, double-click an OptiX OSN 9800 to display the NE Panel.
On the NE Panel, select a subrack and double-click Service on the toolbar. The
service view is displayed.
Precautions
● The "Auto Match SM TTI" function must be configured before using the
service view. This function detects the matching relationships between the
optical-layer connections of the NEs.
● NEs must communicate successfully at the optical layer.
NOTICE
The deactivation operation may interrupt services.
Context
In the service view, Local indicates local tributary services, which are cross-
connected to different line boards. If there is a connection line between a local
node and a non-local node, the local services need to be scheduled to the city
corresponding to the non-local node, the physical optical fiber has been already
connected and the optical layer service were unobstructed.
Function Implementation
1. The U2000 groups WDM line boards and tributary boards based on OCh trail
directions and fiber connection relationships by using the "Auto Match SM
TTI" function.
2. The U2000 displays grouped boards based on service directions.
Basic Operations in the Service View
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.
1. Creating a service
a. In the service view.

b. click Create and select the desired service level and direction respectively
from the Service Level and Direction drop-down lists.
c. Set the source port and source channel: Double-click Source Port and
select the desired source port in the service view. Then, choose the related
board and select an idle port or timeslot.
You can select multiple timeslots at the same time, and you can deselect the
timeslots by clicking them one more time.

d. Set the sink port and sink channel: The procedure is the same as that for
the source.
e. Optional: To create an SNCP service, select Open from the Protection
Setting drop-down list. In the dialog box that is displayed, set
parameters. Then, click OK.
f. Optional: Set ports and channels for the SNCP service by referring to
step 1.b.
g. Click Apply. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was
successful.
h. Click Close.
2. Maintaining a service
a. In the service view, select the desired service. To select multiple services
at a time, hold down Ctrl while selecting them.
b. A table lists all selected services.
c. Perform desired operations by clicking Activate, Deactive, or Clear.
3. Converting an ordinary cross-connection service and an SNCP service
a. Convert an ordinary cross-connection service to an SNCP service: Select a
desired service and select Open from the Protection Setting drop-down
list. In the dialog box that is displayed, set parameters. Then, click Apply.
b. Convert an SNCP service to an ordinary cross-connection service: Select
an SNCP service and select Close from the Protection Setting drop-down
list. Then, click Apply.

2.2.2.5 Using Shortcut Icon

This section describes the frequently used shortcut icons on the U2000 Client.
You can customize the toolbar so only the frequently used shortcut icons are
displayed on the toolbar. To do so, right-click the toolbar and choose a menu item
from the shortcut menu.
Table 2-3 The shortcut icons on the Main Topology

Button Name Description
Workbench ● Style of Favorites Folder: By

selecting it, you can modify
or delete the default
workbench.
● Style of Desktop: By
selecting it, you can return
to the workbench.
Exit Exits the client.
Log Out Logs out of the current user.
Lock Terminal Locks the current client.
Full Screen Displays the Main Topology in

full screen mode.
NMS User Manages user information

Management
Maintain SDH Displays the Maintenance SDH

Protection Subnet Protection Subnet window.
Manage SDH Trail Displays the Manage SDH Trail

window.
Create SDH Trail Displays the Create SDH Trail

window.
Manage WDM Displays the Manage WDM

Trail Trail window.
Browse Current Displays the Filter dialog box.

Alarm After the filter criteria is set,
displays the Browse Current
Alarm window.
Browse Alarm Displays the Filter dialog box.

Logs After the filter criteria is set,
displays the Browse Alarm
Logs window.

Stop the Current Clicks this shortcut to stop the

Alarm Sound current alarm sound.
Main Topology Switches to the Main Topology.
NE Explorer Displays the NE Explorer

window.
Create Fiber Creates fiber.
Browse SDH Displays the Browse SDH

Performance Performance window.
Browse WDM Displays the Browse WDM

Performance Performance window.
WDM Optical Displays the WDM Optical

Power Power Commissioning window.
Commissioning
IPA Management Displays the presence of the IPA

that is in the disabled state.
This icon blinks if a disabled IPA
exists. When you click this icon,
the IPA Management window
is displayed.
NM Tasks Displays the process of NMS

Management tasks management. When you
Progress click this icon, the
Configuration Data
Management Progress window
is displayed.
Networkwide Performs centralized monitoring

Maintenance over the maintenance and
Status operating status of the
equipment managed,including:
● Alarm Reversion
● DCC Enabling Status
● Path Loading
● Alarm Suppression
● Alarm Insertion
● Optical (Electrical) Interface
Loopback
● Cross-Connection Loopback
● Laser Status

Show alarm panel Displays the Alarm Panel

dialog box. The statistics of all
current alarms are displayed by
default.
Critical Alarm Dynamically displays critical

alarms. When you click this
icon, all critical alarm
information is displayed.
Major Alarm Dynamically displays major

icon, all major alarm
Minor Alarm Dynamically displays minor

icon, all minor alarm
Warning Alarm Dynamically displays

warnings,When you click this
icon, all warning or alarm
No new events Dynamically displays abnormal

events. This icon indicates that
there are no newly reported
events. When you click this
icon, the Query Event Logs
New events Dynamically displays abnormal

events. This icon indicates that
there are newly reported events.
When you click this icon, the
Query Event Logs window is
displayed.
New To create a custom view,

subnet, NE, and link.
NOTE
The NE cannot be created in the
custom view.
Back to Parent To return the parent interface.
Select To select a topology object.
Move View To move the topology view.

Search Displays the Search dialog box.

You can locate objects in the
topology.
Print To print the topology view.
Print Preview To preview the print effect of

the topology view.
Overview To provide a general view of

topology.
NE Statistics ● To collect statistics on the

NE types and number of the
objects selected in the
current topology view.
● If no object is selected in the
current topology view, the
system collects statistics on
the types and number of all
NEs in the current topology
view.
Refresh Refreshes the current view after

you click the button when the
data in the view is changed. For
example, if an IP link is
changed in the link
management window, you can
click this button to display the
latest IP link data in the Main
Topology.
Save Position To save the position

information of the topology
objects in the current
Legend & Filter & To display the legend/filter/

Attribute attribute panel.
Current Alarm To display the current Alarms.
Layout To arrange the topology objects

in the topology view.
Zoom In Zooms in topology view.
Zoom Out Zooms out topology view.

Local To enlarge the selected area. In

Amplification the topology view, drag the
mouse to generate a rectangle.
Topology objects in this
rectangle are magnified.
Lock View/Unlock Locks/Unlocks the current

View NE(s).
Ascending Lists the objects on the Object

Tree in an ascending or a
Descending descending order.
NOTE
Topology objects in the navigation
tree are sorted according to the
following rules:
● No matter whether topology
objects are sorted in ascending
or descending order, the order
of the types of topology objects
is unchanged, namely, local
NMS, subnets, NEs with
subnodes, and NEs without
subnodes. The local NMS is
always displayed on the top.
● The types of topology objects
are sorted by name
alphabetically. Object names
are case insensitive.
Table 2-4 The shortcut icons on the other GUI
2.2.2.6 Using Shortcut Keys

This following table describes the common shortcut keys. Using shortcut keys, you
can increase the operation efficiency.
Shortcut Key Description
F1 Opens the Help.
Enter Confirms the operation or moves downward to the next line.

If the cursor is on a button, pressing Enter confirms the
operation. If the cursor is in the list box, press Enter once
and the cursor then moves downward to the next line.
Esc Closes a dialog box.

Tab Switches between buttons if the cursor is on a button, or

switches between text boxes if the cursor is in a list box.
Ctrl+F Searches resources, such as the NEs, subnets, cards, frames,

interfaces, and VLANs in basic and rapid modes, by pressing
Ctrl+F in all views.
Ctrl+A Selects all the NEs or all the contents in a list. If the cursor is
in the view, press Ctrl+A to select all NEs. If the cursor is in a
list box, press Ctrl+A to select all contents in the list.
Ctrl+X Selects all NEs or selects all contents in the list. If the cursor
is in the view, press Ctrl+X to select all NEs. If the cursor is in
the list box, press Ctrl+X to select all contents in the list.
Ctrl+C Quickly copies the text in a table.
Ctrl+V Pastes the copied data to another data area.
Ctrl+Alt+U Unlocks a terminal.
Alt+F4 Exits the system.
Ctrl+S Saves the data.
F11 Displays full screen.
Ctrl+F4 Closes the current window.
Ctrl+F5 Restores down (when the service window in the public

window is maximized).
Ctrl+F9 Minimizes the window (applied to the service window in the

public window).
Ctrl+F10 Maximizes the window (when the service window in the

public window is restored).
Ctrl++ Zooms in the topology view.
Ctrl— Zooms out the topology view.
Alt+F Opens the File menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+E Opens the Edit menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+V Opens the View menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+U Opens the Fault menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+P Opens the Performance menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+C Opens the Configuration menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+R Opens the Service menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+I Opens the Inventory menu from the Main Menu.

Alt+S Opens the Administration menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+W Opens the Window menu from the Main Menu.
Alt+H Opens the Help menu from the Main Menu.
2.2.3 Shutting Down the U2000 Client

Ensure that all U2000 clients are shut down before you shut down the U2000
server.
Prerequisites
The U2000 clients must be started correctly.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the main menu.
Step 2 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK.
If certain operations are performed in the Main Topology on the U2000 client but
not saved, a prompt is displayed asking you whether to save them.
----End
2.2.4 Using Online Help

Online Help provides help information about the NMS.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Help > Help Topics from the Main Menu. The Online Help page is
displayed.
When using the NMS client, press the F1 key to quickly display the related Online Help
page.
----End

OSN 9800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure
Commissioning Guide (U2000) During Deployment (OptiX OSN 9800)
3
Commissioning and Configuration
Procedure During Deployment (OptiX OSN
9800)
This topic describes the general commissioning procedures.

The commissioning procedures for the equipment can be divided into two parts:
optical power commissioning and network commissioning.
● Optical power commissioning procedures individually commission the optical
power values of NEs and boards based on the optical signal flow. They also
remove the abnormal attenuation of lines or boards based on the
requirements of optical power, and the gain and insertion losses of the
boards.
● Network commissioning procedures include the commissioning protection
function, commissioning feature function, testing bit errors, and other
functional commissioning operations at the network level.
Figure 3-1 provides the general commissioning procedures.

Figure 3-1 General commissioning procedures
You can perform the commissioning and configuration during deployment of the
equipment by using either the iManager U2000 (U2000 for short) or the OptiX
iManager U2000 Web LCT (Web LCT for short). All the operations that can be
performed on the Web LCT can be performed on the U2000. Compared with NMS,
the Web LCT has lower requirements on the computer hardware and can be
started quickly.
Table 3-1 lists the tasks for the commissioning and configuration during
deployment.

Table 3-1 List of tasks for the commissioning and configuration during
deployment
No. Task Mandato Tool
ry/
Optional
1 Commissioning the optical power of OSC Mandato Optical power

ry meter, fixed
optical
attenuator
Performing Initial Configuration on Site
2 Searching for and creating NEs Mandato Web LCT or

ry NMS
NOTE
Logging in to an NE Mandato You are
ry advised to
perform these
Modifying an NE ID and Modifying the IP Optional tasks for
address of an NE gateway NEs
(GNEs).
Configuring Power Supplies Mandato
ry
Checking board slots Optional
Checking communication between NEs Mandato

ry
Backing Up the NE Database to the Optional

System Control Board
Configuring NE and Network on NMS center
3 Creating NEs in batches Mandato NMS

ry
4 Creating optical NEs Mandato NMS

ry
5 Logging in to an NE Mandato NMS

ry
6 Creating Subnets Optional NMS
7 Uploading the NE data Mandato NMS

ry
8 Setting License Optional NMS


ry/
Optional
9 Setting NE ID and NE IP Optional NMS

NOTE
You do not
need to
perform this
task on the
NMS center if
the NE ID and
IP address
have been
changed on
the Web LCT.
10 Synchronizing the NE time with the Mandato NMS

U2000/Web LCT server manually ry
11 Setting performance monitoring Mandato NMS or Web

parameters of an NE ry LCT
12 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX Optional NMS or Web

OSN 9800 Universal Platform Subrack. LCT
Configuring Subrack Cascading Mode of
an NE.
13 Setting manually extended ECC Optional NMS

communication. Perform this task when the
network uses HWECC for communication
and more than four Huawei equipment NEs
use the extended ECC for communication.
14 Configuring Primary and Secondary GNEs Optional NMS
15 Checking the software version Mandato NMS

networkwide ry
16 Configuring boards Mandato NMS

ry
17 Creating fiber connections in graphic Mandato NMS

mode on the NMS ry
18 Creating single-station optical cross- This task NMS or Web

connections. Perform this task when is LCT
ROADM stations are configured on the mandato
actual network. ry for an
ROADM
station
and is
not
involved
for other
stations.


ry/
Optional
19 Searching for WDM trails on the NMS Mandato NMS

ry
20 Verifying the source and sink of a Optional NMS

wavelength
21 Checking networkwide configuration Mandato NMS

ry
Optical power commissioning
22 Commissioning optical power using one of Mandato NMS

the following methods as required: ry
According to 8.2.2 OTM/ROADM/OLA
Station Commissioning Reference and
Commissioning Requirements, see Common
Operations Required for Optical Power
Commissioning to commission optical
power.
NOTE
This document uses a 40-channel system as an
example to describe optical power commissioning.
The optical power commissioning methods for an
80-channel system are similar. The main
difference is that the 40-channel system and 80-
channel system have different requirements on
nominal single-wavelength optical power and
single-wavelength incident optical power for OA
boards.
NOTE
See Remotely Commissioning Optical Power to
remotely commission optical power.
See Commissioning Optical Power on Site to
commission optical power on site.
See Example of Commissioning Optical Power
Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
to commission optical power of a 40 Gbit/s
system.
See Example for Commissioning the Optical
Power of the Coherent Transmission System to
commission optical power of the Coherent
Transmission System.
See Commissioning Guide of the Raman
Amplifier to commission optical power of the
Raman system.
23 Checking optical power commissioning Mandato NMS

results ry
Service and feature configuration


ry/
Optional
24 Configuring Services and System Features Mandato NMS

ry
System function commissioning
25 Performing Tests Mandato NMS

ry
Deployment commissioning wrap-up
26 Checking the entire network against the Mandato NMS

checklist for commissioning during ry
deployment. Ensure that the network
configurations are correct.
27 Backing up device data to the NMS server Mandato NMS

or the NMS client ry

Commissioning Guide (U2000) 4 Commissioning the Optical Power of OSC
4 Commissioning the Optical Power of

OSC
This topic describes how to commission the optical power of the OSC board.
Prerequisites
The commissioning of the optical power at the transmit end of the upstream
station must be complete.

Optical power meter, fixed optical attenuator (FOA)
Commissioning Requirements
The receive optical power of OSC is in the range of -48 dBm to -3 dBm. The
transmit optical power of OSC is in the range of -4 dBm to 0 dBm. Basic
requirements of the optical power commissioning on the OSC are as follows:
The receive optical power of the OSC should be in the range of -45 dBm to -8
dBm.
The receive optical power of the ST2 board is in the range of -41 dBm to -10 dBm.
To prevent the laser on the OSC board at the receive end from being burnt, FOAs
that are required must be configured properly by referring to the following tables.
● Principles for configuring an FOA on the OSC board (150Km).

Table 4-1 Principles for configuring an FOA on the OSC board

St Fix Attenuator on the ST2 (150Km) or DAS1 Board (Line Fix
an Insertion Loss Is the EOL Value) Attenu
da ator
rd on the
O SC1/SC
pt 2
ic Board
al (Line
Po Inserti
w on
er Loss Is
In the
ci EOL
de Value)
nt
Sc 0= 15=<IL<25 25=<IL 0= 20
en <I <I =<
ar L< L< IL
io 15 20
or
N
ot
A 15 NA NA 15 N
n dB dB A
EV a b
O
A
is
co
nfi
gu
re
d
be
fo
re
an
op
tic
al
a
m
plif
ier
at
th
e
re
ce
iv


da ator
rd on the
O SC1/SC
pt 2
ic Board
al (Line
Po Inserti
w on
er Loss Is
In the
ci EOL
de Value)
nt
Sc 0= 15=<IL<25 25=<IL 0= 20
en <I <I =<
ar L< L< IL
io 15 20
or
N
ot
e
en
d


da ator
rd on the
O SC1/SC
pt 2
ic Board
al (Line
Po Inserti
w on
er Loss Is
In the
ci EOL
de Value)
nt
Sc 0= 15=<IL<25 25=<IL 0= 20
en <I <I =<
ar L< L< IL
io 15 20
or
N
ot
N 20 10 dBa NA 15 N
o dB dB A
EV c b
O
A
is
co
nfi
gu
re
d
be
fo
re
an
op
tic
al
a
m
plif
ier
at
th
e
re
ce
iv
e


da ator
rd on the
O SC1/SC
pt 2
ic Board
al (Line
Po Inserti
w on
er Loss Is
In the
ci EOL
de Value)
nt
Sc 0= 15=<IL<25 25=<IL 0= 20
en <I <I =<
ar L< L< IL
io 15 20
or
N
ot
en
d
● a:Configure the FOA at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board or the TX
port on the DAS1 board.
● b:Configure the FOA at the TM port on the SC1 board or the TM1/TM2
port on the SC2 board.
● c:Configure the 10 dB FOA at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board or the
TX port on the DAS1 board. Configure the 10 dB FOA at the RM port on
the FIU board
● Principles for configuring an FOA on the OSC board (80Km).

Table 4-2 Principles for configuring an FOA on the OSC board

Sta Fix Attenuator on the ST2 (80Km) Board (Line Insertion Loss Is
nd the EOL Value)
ard
Op 0= 10=<IL<15 15=<IL<20 20
tic <IL =<I
al <1 L
Po 0
we
r
Inci
de
nt
Sce
nar
io
or
No
t
An 15 10 dBa 5 dBa NA
EV dBd
OA
is
conf
igu
red
bef
ore
an
opt
ical
am
plifi
er
at
the
rec
eiv
e
end

Sta Fix Attenuator on the ST2 (80Km) Board (Line Insertion Loss Is
nd the EOL Value)
ard
Op 0= 10=<IL<15 15=<IL<20 20
tic <IL =<I
al <1 L
Po 0
we
r
Inci
de
nt
Sce
nar
io
or
No
t
No 15 10 dBa 5 dBa NA
EV dBd
OA
is
conf
igu
red
bef
ore
an
opt
ical
am
plifi
er
at
the
rec
eiv
e
end
● a:Configure the FOA at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board or the TX
port on the DAS1 board.
● d:Configure the 10 dB FOA at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board or
the TX port on the DAS1 board. Configure the 5 dB FOA at the RM port
on the FIU board
● Principles for configuring an FOA on the OSC board for Raman System.

Table 4-3 Principles for configuring an FOA on the OSC board for Raman
System
Line Insertion Fix Attenuator on the OSC board of the ST2 or
Loss(EOL Value) DAS1 Board
0=<IL<24 NA
24=<IL<30 7 dBa
30=<IL NA
a: If a more than 7 dB FOA has been configured for the ST2 or DAS1 board
refer to Table 4-1, it does not need to configure other FOAs.
Commissioning Inter-Station Optical Paths

Commission the fibers between stations A and B based on the configurations of
the FOA and Table 4-4. Accordingly, commission the fibers between other stations
on the entire network and record the commissioning data for future network
maintenance.

Table 4-4 OSC commissioning

Station A Station B Reference Standard
N B P O Te N B P O Te
o. o or p st o. o or p st
ar t er in ar t er in
d at g d at g
io V io V
n al n al
u u
e e
(d (d
B/ B/
d d
B B
m m
) )
1 O T M a - - - - - Range of the output power

S M ea ()
C x su
re
th
e
o
pt
ic
al
p
o
w
er.

d at g d at g
io V io V
n al n al
u u
e e
(d (d
B/ B/
d d
B B
m m
) )
2 O T A A - - - - - -
S M d TT
C x d 1
th ()
e
F
O
A
A
TT
1
an
d
re
st
or
e
th
e
fi
be
r
co
n
ne
cti
o
ns
.

d at g d at g
io V io V
n al n al
u u
e e
(d (d
B/ B/
d d
B B
m m
) )
3 FI R A A - - - - - -
( U M d TT
O d 2
pt th ()
io e
na F
l) O
A
A
TT
2
an
d
re
st
or
e
th
e
fi
be
r
co
n
ne
cti
o
ns
.

d at g d at g
io V io V
n al n al
u u
e e
(d (d
B/ B/
d d
B B
m m
) )
4 FI O M b - - - - - FIU Specifications in Hardware

U U ea () Description
T su
re
th
e
o
pt
ic
al
p
o
w
er.
5 FI O Re N - - - - - -
U U st /A
T or
e
th
e
fi
be
r
co
n
ne
cti
o
ns
.

d at g d at g
io V io V
n al n al
u u
e e
(d (d
B/ B/
d d
B B
m m
) )
- - - - - 6 FI IN M c Line attenuation survey report

U ea ()
su
re
th
e
o
pt
ic
al
p
o
w
er.
- - - - - 7 FI IN Re N -
U st /A
or
e
th
e
fi
be
r
co
n
ne
cti
o
ns
.

d at g d at g
io V io V
n al n al
u u
e e
(d (d
B/ B/
d d
B B
m m
) )
- - - - - 8 O R M d Range of the input power

S M ea ()
C x su
re
th
e
o
pt
ic
al
p
o
w
er.
- - - - - 9 O R Re N -
S M st /A
C x or
e
fi
be
r
co
n
ne
cti
o
ns
.

d at g d at g
io V io V
n al n al
u u
e e
(d (d
B/ B/
d d
B B
m m
) )
- - - - - 10 O T M a' Range of the output power

S M ea ()
C x su
re
th
e
o
pt
ic
al
p
o
w
er.

d at g d at g
io V io V
n al n al
u u
e e
(d (d
B/ B/
d d
B B
m m
) )
- - - - - 11 O T A A -
S M d TT
C x d 1'
th ()
e
F
O
A
A
TT
1'
an
d
re
st
or
e
th
e
fi
be
r
co
n
ne
cti
o
ns
.

d at g d at g
io V io V
n al n al
u u
e e
(d (d
B/ B/
d d
B B
m m
) )
- - - - - 12 FI R A A -
( U M d TT
O d 2'
pt th ()
io e
na F
l) O
A
A
TT
2'
an
d
re
st
or
e
th
e
fi
be
r
co
n
ne
cti
o
ns
.

d at g d at g
io V io V
n al n al
u u
e e
(d (d
B/ B/
d d
B B
m m
) )
- - - - - 13 FI O M b' See FIU Specifications in

U U ea () Hardware Description
T su
re
th
e
o
pt
ic
al
p
o
w
er.
- - - - - 14 FI O Re N -
U U st /A
T or
e
th
e
fi
be
r
co
n
ne
cti
o
ns
.

d at g d at g
io V io V
n al n al
u u
e e
(d (d
B/ B/
d d
B B
m m
) )
15 FI IN M c' - - - - - Line attenuation survey report

U ea ()
su
re
th
e
o
pt
ic
al
p
o
w
er.
16 FI IN Re N - - - - - -
U st /A
or
e
th
e
fi
be
r
co
n
ne
cti
o
ns
.

d at g d at g
io V io V
n al n al
u u
e e
(d (d
B/ B/
d d
B B
m m
) )
17 O R M d' - - - - - Range of the input power

S M ea ()
C x su
re
th
e
o
pt
ic
al
p
o
w
er.
18 O R Re N - - - - - -
S M st /A
C x or
e
th
e
fi
be
r
co
n
ne
cti
o
ns
.

d at g d at g
io V io V
n al n al
u u
e e
(d (d
B/ B/
d d
B B
m m
) )
After the commissioning of inter-station OSCs is complete, check whether the

inter-station line attenuation is appropriate using the following formulas:
● a - b≤1.5dB+ATT1+ATT2; a'-b'≤1.5dB+ATT1'+ATT2'
● Line attenuation (in the survey report) - 1 dB ≤ b-c ≤ Line attenuation (in the
test report) + 1 dB; Line attenuation (in the test report) - 1 dB ≤ b' - c'≤ Line
attenuation (in the survey report) + 1 dB
● c - d ≤ 1.5 dB; c' - d'≤ 1.5 dB
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of the OSC board.
● The RM port of the OSC board connects to the TM port of the FIU board at
the local station.
● The TM port of the OSC board connects to the RM port of the FIU board at
the local station.
Step 2 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then measure the
transmit optical power of the OSC board. It should be in the range from -4 dBm to
0 dBm. If it does not meet the requirement, replace the board.
The supervisory channel on the ST2 board supports the following wavelengths: 1491 nm and
1511 nm.
Step 3 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then measure the
actual receive optical power of the OSC board. It should be in the range from -48

dBm to -3 dBm. The input optical power of the OSC board can be adjusted on the
basis of the actual optical power by adding, changing or removing the fixed
optical attenuators.
The supervisory channel on the ST2 board supports the following wavelengths: 1491 nm and
1511 nm.
If the result does not meet the requirements, clean the fiber connector. If the problem persists,
check whether the OSC board, the survey report, or line loss test report is faulty, and if so, clear
the fault.
Step 4 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then test the insertion
loss between the IN and TM ports, and between the RM and OUT ports of the FIU.
The values should be less than 1.5 dBm.
----End

OSN 9800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform 5 Configuring NE and Network (Using WebLCT on
Commissioning Guide (U2000) Site)
5 Configuring NE and Network (Using

WebLCT on Site)
This chapter describes how to configure NEs and networks using WebLCT/U2000
on site.
5.1 Initial Commissioning Flow

Some initial commissioning operations are optional and can be performed when
required.The OptiX OSN 9800 U64/U32/U16 supports the following operations
only on the U2000. The OptiX OSN 9800 UPS supports the following operations
either on the WebLCT or on the U2000.
5.2 Configuring NE Attributes
Configure NE attributes using the Web LCT.OSN 9800 supports the following
operations either on the WebLCT or on the U2000.
5.3 Configuring Power Supplies
Configure a visual power supply pool and manage power consumption using an
emulation NE Panel.
5.4 Checking Board Slots
Verify that the logical boards displayed on the Web LCT, physical boards inserted
into the equipment, and boards specified in the network plan are consistent so
future operations can be effectively performed.The OptiX OSN 9800 U64/U32/U16
supports the following operations only on the U2000. The OptiX OSN 9800 UPS
supports the following operations either on the WebLCT or on the U2000.
5.5 Checking the Communication Between the GNE and NMS Center
This topic describes how to check the communication between the gateway
network element (GNE) and the network management system (NMS) center after
the basic configuration of an NE is complete on the Web LCT.
5.1 Initial Commissioning Flow

Some initial commissioning operations are optional and can be performed when
required.The OptiX OSN 9800 U64/U32/U16 supports the following operations
only on the U2000. The OptiX OSN 9800 UPS supports the following operations
either on the WebLCT or on the U2000.

Figure 5-1 shows the flow for conducting initial commissioning using the Web LCT
or U2000.
Figure 5-1 Initial commissioning flow
5.2 Configuring NE Attributes

Configure NE attributes using the Web LCT.OSN 9800 supports the following
operations either on the WebLCT or on the U2000.
5.2.1 Searching and Adding NEs

When the Web LCT/NMS communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for
all NEs that communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the
network segment to which the IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs
in batches. This method is quicker and more accurate than manual creation.
Therefore, the method of creating NEs in batches is recommended.
Prerequisite
● You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher.
● The NMS must communicate properly with the GNE.
● The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.

For Web LCT, only NEs that use the Ethernet port to communicate can be searched
out.

Web LCT or NMS
Procedure on the NMS

None.
Procedure on the Web LCT

1. Click NE Search and select Advanced Search at the bottom of the Screen. A
Search NE window opens.
2. Click Manage Domain. A Manage Domain Search window opens.

3. Click Add and the New Domain window is displayed.
4. Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address, and enter an IP
address in the Domain Address field. Click OK.
Attribute Value
Domain Type ● GNE IP Domain: Search for all NEs in the specified IP
domain.
● GNE IP Address: Search for a specific NE using the
specified IP address.

Attribute Value
Domain ● If Domain Type is set to GNE IP Domain, enter an IP

Address domain value, for example, 10.191.255.255.
● If Domain Type is set to GNE IP Address, enter an IP
address, for example, 10.191.167.131.
5. Click Cancel to exit the Manage Domain Search window.

6. Select the entered NE IP Address in the Domain drop-down list on the Search
NE window.
7. Click Search. After the search for NEs is complete, click End Search.
8. Select the NE being commissioned and click Add NE.
9. Click OK then Cancel.
The NE to be commissioned is now in the list of NEs on the main Web LCT screen, and the
login status is Not Logged In or Logged In.
Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as
follows:
● The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the
NE user.
● The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a
valid NE user.
5.2.2 Logging In to an NE
On the Web LCT/NMS, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the
NE.
Prerequisites
On the NMS, the NE must be created and must be working normally.

Web LCT or NMS
On the Web LCT, log in to an NE that has been added if the NE indicates "Not
Logged In".
On the NMS, a user can see an NE only when the user has the authority to log in
to the NE.


1. Highlight the NE in the main Web LCT screen and click NE Login. Enter the
default value SONET for both User Name and Password.
2. Click OK. The login status is Logged In.
3. Click NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer of the selected NE.

1. Double-click the desired ONE icon in the Main Topology to display the NE
Panel for the ONE.
2. Right-click the NE and choose Login from the shortcut menu. Click Close in
the Operation Result dialog box.
5.2.3 Setting NE IDs

When planning the network, you must assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID
conflicts with another one, ECC routing collision is caused. In this case, some NEs
cannot be managed. Before the commissioning process, you need to change the
factory defaults according to the network planning.
Association Between the ID and IP Address of an NE

An NE ID consists of 24 bits, with 8 most significant bits for a subnet number and
16 least significant bits for a basic ID. The subnet number ranges from 0x1 to
0xFE, and the basic ID ranges from 0x1 to 0xBFEF. 0xFFFFFF is an internal reserved
value and is used as the broadcast address.
The association between the ID and IP address of an NE is described as follows: A
factory default NE IP address is provided together with the NE delivery. The
factory default NE IP address is derived from the NE ID and is in the format of
129.9.basic ID(8 most significant bits).basic ID(8 least significant bits). For
example, if the factory default NE ID is 0x070004, the default NE IP address is
129.9.0.4. If the NE IP address is not manually configured, it is associated with the
NE ID. To be specific, the NE IP address is changed accordingly if the NE ID is
changed. The association ends once the NE IP address is manually configured.

Web LCT or NMS

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute
from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID window, enter the New ID and
the New Extended ID. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box.

After you change the ID of the NE, a warm reset is performed on the SCC board. In this
case, you need to log in to the NE again after two minutes.
After changing the NE ID and resetting the NE, log in to the NE again, otherwise, when
you change the IP, an error message will be displayed prompting that you have not logged
in to the NE.

On the NMS, see 6.9 (Optional) Setting NE ID and IP to set NE IDs.
5.2.4 Setting NE IP Addresses

The IP addresses of NEs that are searched out and added are factory defaults,
which may be different from the planned IP addresses. The IP addresses of NEs
must be set according to the engineering design document so that commissioning
engineers can perform operations on the NEs using the NMS at the network
management center.

Web LCT or NMS

1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
2. Enter the IP Address of the NE.
3. Click Apply. Click OK in the two displayed Confirm dialog boxes. Then click
Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.
You will lose your connection to the NE at this point. To restore communications,
perform the following:
● Change the IP address of your computer to an address on the same network
segment as the NE.
● Re-run 5.2.1 Searching and Adding NEs and 5.2.2 Logging In to an NE.

On the NMS, see 6.9 (Optional) Setting NE ID and IP to set NE IP.
5.3 Configuring Power Supplies

Configure a visual power supply pool and manage power consumption using an
emulation NE Panel.
5.3.1 Configuring Power Supplies (U64E/U32E/U64/U32)

OSN 9800 U64/U32 subrack is supplied by a power supply pool comprising PIU
boards. OSN 9800 U64E/U32E subrack is supplied by a power supply pool

comprising PSU boards. Based on the physical power supply configuration, a user
can configure a visual power supply pool and manage power consumption using
an emulation NE Panel. The power supply configuration of U64E/U64/U32E/U32
subracks are the same,and the following description uses U32 as an example.
Prerequisites
● The OptiX OSN 9800 U64/U32 subrack has been powered on and is working
properly.
● An NE has been created and the NE data has been uploaded.

NMS or Web LCT
Precaution
● Short-circuit relationships between PIU boards can be set when a subrack is
powered on for the first time and cannot be modified after the subrack is
properly working. Short-circuit relationships cannot be modified before the
subrack is powered off.
● For a newly added board, if the total power consumption of the power supply
section where the new board is located is beyond the power supply capability,
the board will not be powered on and no logical board or services can be
created for the board.
● When only the PROG indicator is lit on a service board, the logical input
current of the corresponding PIU board has not been specified or it is
inadequate, leading to a failure for the board to work.
Context
● Fixed power supply sections are allocated for PIU boards. Therefore, PIU
boards can be flexibly configured based on the total consumption of physical
and logical boards.
● A short-circuit relationship can be set between two PIU boards to enable
them to share the same power supply. Therefore, the number of power
supplies is reduced and the power supply capability of a subrack is improved.
● The visual power consumption management function enables the user to
view the power consumption of a subrack based on the total power
consumption of installed boards and power consumption of current input
power supplies.
● For the configuration principles of the power supply pool, see Power Supply
Requirement for U64, Power Supply Requirement for U32 (Enhanced) and
Power Supply Requirement for U32 (Standard).
● In the visualized power supply view on the right, if Physic Board Power is
selected, the total maximum power consumption of all online physical boards
will be displayed; if Logic Board Power is selected, the total maximum power
consumption of all logical boards will be displayed.
The maximum power consumption is displayed as Nominal Power Consumption on the

NMS.

– Logical board power consumption: Statistics on the total maximum

power consumption are collected by logical board type. If the power
consumption of logical boards exceeds the power supply capability, the
logical boards cannot be added.
– Physical board power consumption: Statistics on the total maximum
power consumption are collected by physical board type. If the power
consumption of physical boards exceeds the power supply capability, the
newly installed physical boards cannot be powered on.
Logical and physical boards are decoupled in terms of power supplies. That is,
a logical board can be added when no physical board is installed, and a
physical board can be installed when no logical board is added.
Navigation Path of U2000

1. In the main topology, double-click an OptiX OSN 9800 U64/U32 icon to enter
the NE Panel.
2. Select the desired subrack and click . The power supply view is
displayed on the right.
Navigation Path of Web LCT

1. In the Board List, click NE Explorer, and NE Explorer tab is displayed.
2. Select the NE and click Configuration > Supply Management. The power
supply view is displayed on the right.
Procedure
Step 1 On the U2000, set the short-circuit relationship between PIU boards to be the
same as the actual short-circuit mode.
1. Select a PIU board. The target PIU boards that can be short-circuited with the
selected board are displayed.

The short-circuit relationship can be set only for the PIU boards which support the setting
but no short-circuit relationship is set for.
2. Click the dot above a PIU board. The dot indicates that a short-circuit
relationship can be set between the board and the selected board.
3. Click Apply.
Step 2 Set the input current.

1. Click the current display box (The green box changes to the yellow box). The
input current options are displayed.

2. Set the desired current value. After enter the desired current value, click the
Enter button on the keyboard to confirm it.
The current that is set must be the same as the actual current.
3. Click Apply. A confirmation dialog box is displayed, click OK.
Step 3 Set the input voltage.
1. Click behind Voltage.
2. Select a voltage (48V/60V).

3. Click Apply.
Step 4 Optional: Set the customize voltage.
1. Click behind Voltage,SelectCustomize.A Customize Voltage window

opens
2. Choose Distribution Voltage value on the left, and set Input Voltage on the
right,Click OK.

During the input voltage setting, pay attention to the following: The input voltage of the
device is mainly affected by the power distribution system in an equipment room, and a 48
V or 60 V power distribution system is generally applied in the equipment room. When the
power distribution system has batteries, you must also consider the voltage range of the
normal battery power supply during the device-side input voltage setting. To ensure
reliable device running, the battery cutoff voltage minus the line voltage drop from the
PDF to the device is generally used as the input voltage on the device side, and the
maximum input voltage cannot exceed the power distribution voltage (48 V or 60 V) of the
power supply system. Use a 48 V power supply system as an example. Generally, the
battery cutoff voltage is 43.2 V and the line voltage drop is not greater than 3.2 V.
Therefore, the input voltage on the device side is generally set to 40 V.
When a 48 V power distribution system is applied in a subrack, you can set the input
voltage in the text box to a value ranging from 41 to 48. If you directly choose 48 V from
the drop-down list, 40 V is taken as the input voltage of the device by default. When a 60
V power distribution system is applied in a subrack, you can set the input voltage in the
text box to a value ranging from 52 to 60. If you directly choose 60 V from the drop-down
list, 51 V is taken as the input voltage of the device by default.
3. Click Yes to confirm.
5. Set the customize voltage success.
Step 5 Set the prewarning threshold.

1. Click Alert Threshold Setting. The Alert Threshold Setting window is
displayed.

2. Select the Set Alert check box.

3. Set the prewarning parameters for the three power supply states based on the
live network requirements.
To restore the prewarning parameters for the three power supply states to the default
settings, click Default.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Close.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
To modify the short-circuit relationship between two PIU boards, perform the
following steps to delete the original short-circuit relationship and set a new
relationship by referring to Step 1.
1. To power off both the short-circuit relationship PIU boards and the backup
PIU boards.
2. Click the original short-circuit relationship. A red X is displayed.

3. Click the red X to delete the short-circuit relationship between the two PIU
boards.
4. According to the actual power supply, you should set the logical power supply
to 63 A or 0 A.
5. Click Apply.
5.3.2 Configuring Power Supplies (U16)

An OptiX OSN 9800 U16 subrack is supplied by a power supply pool comprising
PIU boards. Based on the physical power supply configuration, a user can
configure a visual power supply pool and manage power consumption using an
emulation NE Panel.
Prerequisites
● The OptiX OSN 9800 U16 subrack has been powered on and is working
properly.

NMS or Web LCT
Precaution
● Short-circuit relationships between PIU boards cannot be set.
Context
● Fixed power supply sections are allocated for PIU boards.


power supplies.
● For the configuration principles of the power supply pool, see Power Supply
Requirement for U16.

NMS.
Navigation Path of U2000

1. In the main topology, double-click an OptiX OSN 9800 U16 icon to enter the
NE Panel.
2. Select the desired subrack and click . The power supply view is
displayed on the right.
Navigation Path of Web LCT

1. In the Board List, click NE Explorer, and NE Explorer tab is displayed.
2. Select the NE and click Configuration > Supply Management. The power
supply view is displayed on the right.
Procedure
1. Click the red triangle in the current display box (The green box changes to the
yellow box), set the desired current value.

The current of each power supply can be set from 0 A to 63 A.

The current that is set must be the same as the actual current on the customer side.
2. Click Apply.
1. Click behind Voltage.
2. Select a voltage.
3. Click Apply.
Step 3 Optional: Set the customize voltage.
1. Click behind Voltage and select Customize. The Customize Voltage


2. Choose the Distribution Voltage value on the left, set Input Voltage on the
right, and click OK.
During the input voltage setting, pay attention to the following: The input voltage of the
device is mainly affected by the power distribution system in an equipment room, and a 48
V or 60 V power distribution system is generally applied in the equipment room. When the
power distribution system has batteries, you must also consider the voltage range of the
normal battery power supply during the device-side input voltage setting. To ensure
reliable device running, the battery cutoff voltage minus the line voltage drop from the
PDF to the device is generally used as the input voltage on the device side, and the
maximum input voltage cannot exceed the power distribution voltage (48 V or 60 V) of the
power supply system. Use a 48 V power supply system as an example. Generally, the
battery cutoff voltage is 43.2 V and the line voltage drop is not greater than 3.2 V.
Therefore, the input voltage on the device side is generally set to 40 V.
When a 48 V power distribution system is applied in a subrack, you can set the input
voltage in the text box to a value ranging from 41 to 48. If you directly choose 48 V from
the drop-down list, 40 V is taken as the input voltage of the device by default. When a 60
V power distribution system is applied in a subrack, you can set the input voltage in the
text box to a value ranging from 52 to 60. If you directly choose 60 V from the drop-down
list, 51 V is taken as the input voltage of the device by default.

5. Set the customize voltage success.

1. Click Alert Threshold Setting. The Alert Threshold Setting window is
displayed.
2. Select the Set Alert check box.

3. Set the prewarning parameters for the three power supply states based on the
live network requirements.
To restore the prewarning parameters for the three power supply states to the default
settings, click Default.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Close.
----End
5.3.3 Configuring Power Supplies (M24/M12)

A M24/M12 subrack is supplied by a power supply pool comprising PIU boards.
Based on the physical power supply configuration, a user can configure a visual
power supply pool and manage power consumption using an emulation NE Panel.
Prerequisites
● The M24/M12 subrack has been powered on and is working properly.

Precaution
● Short-circuit relationships between PIU boards can be set when a subrack is
powered on for the first time and cannot be modified after the subrack is
properly working. Short-circuit relationships cannot be modified before the
subrack is powered off.
Context
● Upon the subrack power-on for the first time, copper fittings can be
configured. Therefore, PIU boards of M24 subrack can be flexibly configured
based on the total consumption of physical and logical boards.
power supplies.

NMS.
Legend Information
Figure 1 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Figure 5-2 Legend Information
The following operation is an example of M24, and the operation of the M12 subrack is
similar.
Procedure
Step 1 In the main topology, double-click an M24 icon to enter the NE Panel.
● : Click the current icon. When changes to , the current setting box
is displayed.
● After copper fittings are configured, the power supply can be set to 32–120 A. After the
configuration of copper fittings is canceled, each power supply can be set to 0–63 A. The
current that is set must be the same as the actual current on the customer side.

● Select 48V (or 60V):

● Select Customize:
– During the input voltage setting, pay attention to the following: The input voltage
of the device is mainly affected by the power distribution system in an equipment
room, and a 48 V or 60 V power distribution system is generally applied in the
equipment room. When the power distribution system has batteries, you must also
consider the voltage range of the normal battery power supply during the device-
side input voltage setting. To ensure reliable device running, the battery cutoff
voltage minus the line voltage drop from the PDF to the device is generally used as
the input voltage on the device side, and the maximum input voltage cannot
exceed the power distribution voltage (48 V or 60 V) of the power supply system.
Use a 48 V power supply system as an example. Generally, the battery cutoff
voltage is 43.2 V and the line voltage drop is not greater than 3.2 V. Therefore, the
input voltage on the device side is generally set to 40 V.
– When a 48 V power distribution system is applied in a subrack, you can set the
input voltage in the text box to a value ranging from 41 to 48. If you directly
choose 48 V from the drop-down list, 40 V is taken as the input voltage of the
device by default. When a 60 V power distribution system is applied in a subrack,
you can set the input voltage in the text box to a value ranging from 52 to 60. If
you directly choose 60 V from the drop-down list, 51 V is taken as the input
voltage of the device by default.

Click the Default in the Alert Threshold Setting tab, to restore the prewarning parameters
for the three power supply states to the default settings.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
1. If the copper fitting configuration of power supplies needs to be modified, you
can delete the original copper fitting configuration.

2. Re-configure copper fittings for the power supplies.

5.4 Checking Board Slots

Verify that the logical boards displayed on the Web LCT, physical boards inserted
into the equipment, and boards specified in the network plan are consistent so
future operations can be effectively performed.The OptiX OSN 9800 U64/U32/U16
supports the following operations only on the U2000. The OptiX OSN 9800 UPS
supports the following operations either on the WebLCT or on the U2000.

Web LCT
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the logical boards and physical boards are consistent.
● If yes, go to the next step.
● If no, check as follows:
– If the number of logical boards is less than the number of physical
boards, verify that the physical boards are correctly inserted and add the
logical boards.
i. In the NE Explorer, select Slot Layout.
ii. Verify that the physical boards are correctly inserted. On the Slot
Layout pane, click the corresponding logical slot, and select the
required board type from the shortcut menu.
– If the logical board types are inconsistent with the physical board types,
delete and re-add the logical boards.
i. In the NE Explorer, select Slot Layout.
ii. Select the board and choose Delete from the shortcut menu of the
toolbar.

iii. Click the target logical slot and select the required board type from
the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Check whether the physical boards and the boards specified in the network plan
are consistent.
● If yes, you do not need to perform any other operations.
● If no, replace the physical boards, and delete and re-add the logical boards on
the panel layout.
----End
5.5 Checking the Communication Between the GNE

and NMS Center
This topic describes how to check the communication between the gateway
network element (GNE) and the network management system (NMS) center after
the basic configuration of an NE is complete on the Web LCT.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Run on the U2000 Server to display a dialog box. Enter the ping
command: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -n 20000 -l 64 -t.
Parameters for the Ping command:

● -n Num: transmit Num packets to the laptop at the opposite end
● -l Num: transmit buffer capacity is Num bytes
● -t: continuously transmit ping packets
Step 2 Click OK to run the ping command.

● A window is displayed to provide the feedback "Reply from xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:
bytes=64 time=1ms TTL=255". This information indicates the Ethernet channel
is normal.
● If the displayed window provides the feedback Request timed out, it
indicates that the Ethernet channel is abnormal. Check the network cable
connection and the configuration of the Ethernet service. Correct the fault,
and then continue the test.
The value of time and TTL is determined by the actual test environment. The value
discrepancy is normal.
----End

OSN 9800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform 6 Configuring NE and Network (Network
Commissioning Guide (U2000) Management Center)
6 Configuring NE and Network (Network

Management Center)
This chapter describes how to configure NEs and networks.
6.1 Creating NEs by Searching

When the NMS/Web LCT communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for
6.2 Creating Optical NEs
The NMS allocates the WDM equipment into different optical NEs for
management. There are four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OTM,
WDM_OLA, WDM_OADM, and WDM_OEQ.
6.3 Logging In to an NE
On the NMS, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.
6.4 Setting the NE Power Consumption Threshold
After an NE is powered on, set the NE power consumption threshold on the U2000
based on the actual power distribution of the NE.
6.5 Creating Subnets
The U2000 allocates the WDM equipment into different Subnets for management.
6.6 Uploading the NE Data
By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data
to the network management system directly. Therefore, it is recommended that
you configure the NE data by uploading the data.
6.7 Adding Boards
Boards must be added on the NE Panel or Slot Layout if NE data needs to be
manually configured.
6.8 Setting License or Loading RTU
This chapter introduces how to set licenses on the NMS. The procedures of loading
RTU are the same as setting licenses.
6.9 (Optional) Setting NE ID and IP
ECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word
for searching on the NMS interface and database. Therefore, when planning the

network, you must assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with
another one, ECC routing collision is caused. In this case, some NEs cannot be
managed. In the commissioning or expansion process, if you need to change the
NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can change the NE ID on the NMS.
6.10 Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS/Web LCT Server Manually
For NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, check whether the NE time
is consistent with the NMS/Web LCT server time, so that the NMS/Web LCT can
correctly record the time that an alarm is generated. Otherwise, it is
recommended to manually synchronize the NE time with the time of the
NMS/Web LCT server.
6.11 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE
By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the
performance monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance
record during the running of the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of
the NE running status performed by maintenance personnel.
6.12 Checking Master/Slave Subracks
6.13 Configuring Subrack Cascading Mode of an NE
To ensure proper functioning of the subracks and normal communication between
subracks on an NE, set Shelf Link Mode to be consistent with the actual physical
cascading mode of the subracks on the NMS.
6.14 Configuring Extended ECC in Specified Mode
When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the
NEs can be used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE
uses the extended ECC in autosensing mode.When the number of Huawei NEs
that use the extended ECC communication exceeds five, you must use extended
ECC in specified mode.
6.15 Configuring Primary and Secondary GNEs
After a network is divided into subnets or if there are multiple gateway network
elements (GNEs), configure primary and secondary GNEs for non-GNEs.
6.16 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions
After you query the software version, obtain the status and version information of
each board on the NE.
6.17 Configuring Line Boards of a Beyond 100G System
This topic describes how to configure a license, working mode, and operating
wavelength for a line board of a beyond 100G system.
6.18 Configuring Boards
This topic describes how to configure service boards and supervisory boards before
optical power commissioning.
6.19 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode
In graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the
signal flow diagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you
create a large number of fiber connections one by one.
6.20 Setting the Fiber Parameters
6.21 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection

Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation

of single-station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are
configured.
6.22 Configuring Flexible ROADM
Optical-connections are configured using the NMS to achieve flexible ROADM.
6.23 Configuring a Superchannel
This topic introduces how to configure a superchannel.
6.24 Searching for WDM Trails
After fibers are connected and services are configured on the WDM equipment,
there is no trail information on the U2000. Cross-connection or fiber connection
information can be uploaded to the U2000 and existing trails can be browsed and
managed using the WDM trails searching function.
6.25 Verifying the Source and Sink of a Wavelength
Automatic match of section monitoring (SM) trail trace identifiers (TTIs) comes
into play to detect the matching relationships between the optical-layer
connections of the source and sink NEs.
6.26 Upgrading the Cross-Connect Mode of the OSN 9800 M24
By default, the M24 subrack supports the 1:1 cross-connect mode. In
V100R007C00 and later versions, the M24 subrack also supports the 1:3 cross-
connect mode. This section describes how to upgrade the M24 subrack from the
1:1 cross-connect mode to the 1:3 cross-connect mode and the operation
precautions.
6.1 Creating NEs by Searching

When the NMS/Web LCT communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for
Prerequisite
● The NMS must communicate properly with the GNE.
For Web LCT, only NEs that use the Ethernet port to communicate can be searched
out.

NMS or Web LCT
Legend Information
Figure 6-1 shows legend information about NMS operations.


1. Visit the following navigation path.
2. Create NEs in batches.

a. Set the Search Mode as Search for NE.

: Set Address Type to IP Address Range of GNE, IP Address of GNE, or

NSAP Address.
You can repeat the above step 3 to step 5 to add more search domains. You can
delete the system default search domain.
● If you use IP address to search for NEs:
● only the NEs (not across routers) in the same network segment can be
searched out in normal conditions if you select the IP Address Range of
GNE because broadcasting is usually disabled for the routers in the
network (to prevent network storm).
● search out the NEs in the network segment by using the IP Address of
GNE if you need to search for the NEs across routers.
● If you search for NEs by using the NSAP address, you can only select NSAP
Address.
: Select Create NE after search, and enter NE user and Password.
:
● The default NE user is root.
● The default password is Changeme_123 or password.

1. If a message indicating that no communication port is found is displayed and

creating an NE fails, the certificate on the NE and the U2000 certificate may
be inconsistent. You need to switch the SSL certificate on the U2000 and
recreate the NE.
1. Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu and
cancel the filter conditions.
2. Click the GNE tab page and select the GNE filter conditions. Click OK.
3. Right-click the GNE to be modified and choose Modify GNE from the
shortcut menu.
4. In the Modify GNE dialog box, click next to SSL Certificate.

5. In the Select SSL Certificate dialog box, select default_RXXCXX and click
OK. (RXXCXX indicates the current U2000 version for short. For example,
if U2000 V200R017C50 is used, select default_R17C50 accordingly.)
2. If the NE fails to be created, another possible cause is that the NE Current
Time is not within the SSL certificate time range. In this case, you need to
create an NE in common connection mode, change the NE time, and then
recreate the NE. To change the NE time, perform the following steps:
1. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization
from the Function Tree. Then, click Query to display the current NE time
information.
2. Right-click the NE time below NE Current Time, and choose Synchronize
with NM Time from the shortcut menu. Before synchronizing the NE
time, ensure that the time of the computer where the U2000 server is
installed is correct. If the time of the computer needs to be changed, log
out of the U2000 and reset the time. Then, restart the U2000.
3. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.
4. In the displayed Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
b. Set the Search Mode as IP auto discovery.
If you fail to enter a network segment correctly, enable IP auto discovery. After
enabling IP auto discovery, you can obtain the IP address of the GNE and search
out all the NEs related to the GNE.
NOTICE
In the case of NEs that are connected to the NMS through the router,
these NEs cannot be searched out by IP auto discovery. They can be
searched out only by network segment.
3. Click Next and the Result area is displayed.
You can select the Display uncreated NEs to only display the uncreated NEs.
4. Optional: Select a created NE and click Change NE ID. Then, the Change NE
ID dialog box is displayed. Users can check against the Bar Code List by the
value of Bar Code, and then modify the NE Name, Extend NE ID, Base NE
ID, and IP Address fields accordingly.

The Bar Code List is provided by the hardware installation personnel to the software
commissioning personnel. The list contains the bar codes of stations.
5. Optional: If you select only Search for NE, after the U2000 completes the
search, you can select the uncreated NEs from the Result list and click
Create. The Create dialog box is displayed. Enter the NE User and Password.
Click OK.
6. Optional: Select the NEs from the Result list and click Set Gateway NE. The
Set Gateway NE dialog box is displayed. Enter the message, and click OK.

Step 1 Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE list. The Search NE dialog box is
displayed.
Step 2 Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click Add. The New Domain dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address. Enter an IP address in the
Domain Address field.
Step 5 Click OK.
Repeat 3.Click Add. The New Dom... through 5 to add multiple search domains.
Step 6 Close the Manage Domain Search dialog box.
Step 7 Select the appropriate IP addresses within the Domain and click Search.
● The NE search function searches for only the NEs in the specified network segment.
● When the search is in progress, you can click End Search.
Step 8 After the search is complete, select an NE from the list and click Add NE. A prompt
message is displayed, indicating that the NE is successfully added. Click OK.
Step 9 Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner
or right-click the NE and choose NE Login. In the NE Login dialog box that is
displayed, enter lct and Changeme_123 or password in the User Name and
Password fields, and then click OK.
You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift.

If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box, you can log in to
multiple NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line.
If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box, you
do not need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the
user name and password for login last time.
Keep the password confidential and change it regularly.
----End

Postrequisite
follows:
NE user.
valid NE user.
6.2 Creating Optical NEs

The NMS allocates the WDM equipment into different optical NEs for
management. There are four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OTM,
WDM_OLA, WDM_OADM, and WDM_OEQ.
Prerequisite
Tools, Equipment and Materials

NMS
Legend Information

1. Navigation path.

2. The Basic Attributes setting.
3. The Resource Division setting.

To re-allocate the resources of an optical NE that has been created, right-click the
optical NE and choose Object Attribute. Click the Resource Division tab, select an NE
or a board from the list on the left, and then click to allocate the NE or
board to the optical NE.
4. Click the Main Topology to create the optical NE icon.
Reference Information
Category Item Description
(Optional) Related Modifying the Optical See this section to

Operation NE Name change the name of an
optical NE
independently.
6.3 Logging In to an NE
On the NMS, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.
Prerequisites
● The NE must be created and must be working normally.
● The user must have logged in to the NMS.


NMS
On the NMS, a user can see an NE only when the user has the authority to log in
to the NE.
A NE only allows 15 users to log in at the same time.
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the desired ONE icon in the Main Topology to display the NE Panel
for the ONE.
Step 2 Right-click the NE and choose Login from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the
Operation Result dialog box.
----End
6.4 Setting the NE Power Consumption Threshold

After an NE is powered on, set the NE power consumption threshold on the U2000
based on the actual power distribution of the NE.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
Precaution
The NE Power Consumption Threshold (W) value specified on the U2000 must
match the actual power distribution capability; otherwise, alarms will be falsely
reported.

NMS
Legend Information


2. Set the NE power consumption threshold.

: The setting of NE Power Consumption Threshold depends on the area division.

For details about area division, see Power Redundancy. The NE Power Consumption
Threshold parameter needs to be set based on the network planning and practical
power distribution capability of the NE. For details about the maximum power
consumption of each subrack, see "Power Consumption" of the subrack.
6.5 Creating Subnets

The U2000 allocates the WDM equipment into different Subnets for management.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher.

NMS
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > Subnet
from the menu.
Step 2 The Create Physical Subnet window is displayed. On the Property tab, set the
subnet name.
Step 3 Optional: In the Select Objects tab, select the NEs to be associated with the
subnet.

Step 4 Click OK.
----End
6.6 Uploading the NE Data

By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data
to the network management system directly. Therefore, it is recommended that
you configure the NE data by uploading the data.
Prerequisite
● The NE must be created successfully.

NMS
Legend Information


1. Navigation path.
2. Uploading the NE Data.
When the upload is complete, an error is reported, indicating that no wavelength or

bandwidth have not been configured for the port. However, this error report does not
affect the upload and you can continue to perform the configuration.
Follow-up Procedure
1. For device, Cross-Connect Type and Cross-Connect Capacity must be set based
on the current license requirements; otherwise, the NE cannot be used.
2. After uploading the NE data, if the logical boards are not added, you can add
logical boards refer to 16.6.2 Adding Boards
6.7 Adding Boards

Prerequisite
● The NE has been created.
● There must be vacant slots on the NE Panel or Slot Layout.


NMS or Web LCT
Physical boards refer to the boards that are actually installed in a subrack. Logical
boards refers to the boards that are created on the NMS or Web LCT. After a
logical board is created, services can be configured on the board. Created services
are available only when the corresponding physical board is online.
Legend Information

1. In the Main topology, double-click an NE icon to open the NE Panel.
2. In the left pane on the NE Panel, select the NE for which logical boards need
to be added, and choose the desire subrack.


1. In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout.
2. Select the desired subrack, click a vacant slot, and select the desired board
from the list.
On the Web LCT, clicking Add Physical Boards adds corresponding logical boards on
all slots that house physical boards.
6.8 Setting License or Loading RTU

This chapter introduces how to set licenses on the NMS. The procedures of loading
RTU are the same as setting licenses.
Prerequisite
● You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.
● The license file has been installed. License files must be obtained from
Huawei engineers. Huawei engineers are responsible for loading and updating
the license files.
● The NE has been created on the NMS.

NMS
Background Information (OptiX OSN 9800)

Table 6-1 describes the license usage.

Table 6-1 License usage instruction

Lice Application Board Equipment Use Principle Paramet
nse Scenario Supported Type er
Descript
ion
Opti When TN56NS3 OSN 9800 U NE: Enabling ● Set

X receiving series the SDH (or the
OTN SDH services, subracks packet) service licens
platf TN56NS3 access e
orm, board need capability of numb
hybri to be each hybrid er to
d configured line board a
line with the requires a value
card license for license. in the
SDH the SDH form
enca encapsulation at of
psula capability of consu
tion the hybrid med
abilit line board on numb
y the OptiX er/
(per OTN autho
boar platform. rized
d) numb
er,
WSS When TN15WSM OSN 9800 NE: Enabling such
Flex supporting D9, Universal the Flexible as
Grid the Flexible TN15DWSS Platform Grid 10/10
funct Grid 20, Subrack wavelength 0.
ion wavelength TN15TM20 signal of each
● The
fee signals, , TN15WSMD9,
autho
(per TN15WSMD9 TN51DWSS TN15DWSS20,
rized
boar , 20 TN15TM20,
numb
d) TN15DWSS20 and
er is
, TN15TM20, TN51DWSS20
an
and board requires
integ
TN51DWSS20 a license.
er
boards need
rangi
to be
ng
configured
from
with WSS
0 to
Flex Grid
100,0
function fee
00,
licenses.
and
the
consu
med
numb
er
must
be


Descript
ion
DWS On the TN51DWSS ● Configuring small

S20 DWSS20 20 optical er
port board that cross- than
enab has 10 AM connections or
ling ports and 10 or fiber equal
(per DM ports, connections to
missi only 10 ports to 10 ports the
on to can be used does not autho
use by default. If require rized
more the licenses. numb
than remaining 10 ● Configuring er.
10 ports need to the optical
ports be used, the cross-
) DWSS20 port connection
enabling or fiber
license needs connection
to be to the 11th
configured. port
requires one
license.
● Configuring
optical
cross-
connections
or fiber
connections
to the 12th
and
remaining
ports does
not require
licenses.
● Deleting all
optical
cross-
connections
or fiber
connections
from 10 or
less ports
releases one
license.


Descript
ion
Opti To receive TNG1A212 OSN 9800 NE: Enabling

X and transmit M24 the SDH
OSN SDH services, service access
9800 you must capability of
-M configure an TNG1A212
platf "OptiX OSN requires a
orm 9800-M license.
SDH platform SDH
enca encapsulation
psula capability
tion (per board)"
capa license on the
bility TNG1A212
(per board.
boar
d)
Legend Information
Cross-Connect Capacity License Configuration

1. In the NE Explorer.

2. Set the license

● For OptiX OSN 9800 U series subracks and OptiX OSN 9800 M24subrack, Service Type
and Cross-Connect Capacity must be set based on the current license requirements. In
addition, Service Type must be the actual subrack type; otherwise, the NE cannot
properly function.
200G/400G License Configuration

Set 100G Capacity Expansion Fee License
1. This license controls whether a board supports the beyond 100G capacity.
2. Enter the number of license. 1 means 100G capacity.
3. No license needs to be configured if the 100G capacity is used.
4. If the 200G capacity of a 200G line card is required, enter two licenses.
Set 100G/200G Programmable License

:
1. This license controls whether the N401P board supports the 200G mode, and whether
the N402P board supports the 200G/400G mode.
2. Enter the number of license. 1 means 200G capacity.
3. When the port works in 100G or NULL mode, no license needs to be configured.
4. For example, a 400G capacity requires the configuration of two licenses.
Configuring Licenses for the Hybrid Line Card SDH Encapsulation Ability,
WSS Flex Grid Function Fee, and DWSS20 Port Enabling
Legend information:
Figure 6-7 Configuring licenses for the hybrid line card SDH encapsulation ability
and WSS Flex Grid function fee

Figure 6-8 Configuring the DWSS20 port enabling license
:For detailed license description, see Table 6-1.
Configuring "OptiX OSN 9800-M platform SDH encapsulation capability (per

board)" Licenses
1. Configure the service cross-connect capacity license of an OpitX OSN 9800
M24 with reference to Cross-Connect Capacity License Configuration.
2. In the Main Topology window, right-click a desired NE and choose NE
Explorer from the shortcut menu. The NE Explorer window is displayed. Then
configure an "OptiX OSN 9800-M platform SDH encapsulation capability (per
board)" license.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > NE License Authorization.
Step 2 Choose the Function Item as required, Set Number/License Status.
Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
6.9 (Optional) Setting NE ID and IP

ECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word
for searching on the NMS interface and database. Therefore, when planning the
network, you must assign a unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with
another one, ECC routing collision is caused. In this case, some NEs cannot be
managed. In the commissioning or expansion process, if you need to change the
NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can change the NE ID on the NMS.
Prerequisites
● You must be an NM user with NE and network operator authority or higher.
● The ECC GNE or ECC non-gateway NE must be created.

NMS
The master and slave subracks are displayed as one NE on the NMS. They share
one NE ID and one NE IP.

If the IP address of an NE is not changed before you change the NE ID, the IP
address of the NE varies with the NE ID. Once the IP address of the NE is changed,
the association between the NE ID and IP address is canceled automatically.
Association Between the ID and IP Address of an NE

An NE ID consists of 24 bits, with 8 most significant bits for a extended ID and 16
least significant bits for a basic ID. The extended ID ranges from 0x1 to 0xFE, and
the basic ID ranges from 0x1 to 0xBFEF. 0xFFFFFF is an internal reserved value and
is used as the broadcast address.
The association between the ID and IP address of an NE is described as follows: A
factory default NE IP address is provided together with the NE delivery. The
factory default NE IP address is derived from the NE ID and is in the format of
129.9.basic ID(8 most significant bits).basic ID(8 least significant bits). For
example, if the factory default NE ID is 0x070004, the default NE IP address is
129.9.0.4. If the NE IP address is not manually configured, it is associated with the
NE ID. To be specific, the NE IP address is changed accordingly if the NE ID is
changed. The association ends once the NE IP address is manually configured.
Precautions
NOTICE
● Changing the ID of an NE is a risky operation because it causes the NE to be

reset, which further results in an NE communication failure during the reset.
● Before changing the NE ID, delete the function connected with the NE ID, for
example, the Client 1+1 Protection group, the Intra-Board 1+1 Protection
group, the Optical Line Protection group, IPA, ALC, APE, OPA,OD,ECC,inter-NE
fiber connection and so on. After changing the NE ID, reconnect the fiber
connection and re-configure the protection group, IPA, ALC and other function
connected with NE ID on the NMS.
● Before changing the NE ID, delete the manually added monitoring
relationship between the WMU board and the OTU board on the NE. After
changing the NE ID, restore the deleted monitoring relationship on the NMS.
● After changing the NE ID and resetting the NE, log in to the NE again,
otherwise, when you change the IP, an error message will be displayed
prompting that you have not logged in to the NE.
Legend Information

Procedure
● Setting NEs ID
a. Modify the NE ID.
NOTICE
For GNEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between this
NE and other NEs on the NMS. Also, you need to specify the active GNE for
non-gateway NEs that are originally connected to the GNE.
NOTICE
For non-gateway NEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers
between this NE and other NEs on the NMS.
● Setting NEs IP

● The default NE IP should be changed in time to ensure system security.

● The communication mode between the NMS and an NE can be changed by setting
Connection Mode.
● If the IP address of an NE is not changed before you change the NE ID, the IP address
of the NE varies with the NE ID. Once the IP address of the NE is changed, the
association between the NE ID and IP address is deleted automatically.
● For GNEs, after you set the NE IP, you need to set the IP address of the GNE accordingly
in the DCN management and specify the active GNE for non-gateway NEs that are
originally connected to the GNE.
● When you change the IP address of an NE, to ensure normal communication between
the NE and the NMS, the network segments of the IP addresses allocated to adjacent
NEs must not overlap. For example, there are IP addresses 129.9.1.2/16 and
129.9.1.3/24. The network segment 129.9.0.0 to which the IP address 129.9.1.2/16
belongs contains the network segment 129.9.1.0 to which the IP address 129.9.1.3/24
belongs.
----End
6.10 Synchronizing the NE Time with the NMS/Web

LCT Server Manually
For NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, check whether the NE time
is consistent with the NMS/Web LCT server time, so that the NMS/Web LCT can
correctly record the time that an alarm is generated. Otherwise, it is
recommended to manually synchronize the NE time with the time of the
NMS/Web LCT server.
Prerequisite
● You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
● On the Web LCT, the synchronous mode of NE time must be set to NM or
NULL.

NMS or Web LCT
Synchronizing the NE time does not affect services. Before synchronizing the NE
time, verify that the system time on the NMS/Web LCT server is correct. If you
want to change the system time, exit the NMS/Web LCT to reset the time, and
then restart the NMS/Web LCT.
Legend Information


1. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS time.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time
Synchronization from the Function Tree.
2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.
3. Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. In this
manner, the NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.
6.11 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an

NE
Prerequisite
● The NE time must be synchronized with the NMS/Web LCT server time.

Precaution
If the latest period of the performance monitoring is not finished, after you reset
the beginning time for monitoring the NE performance, the incomplete historical
data of the performance monitoring will be lost.

NMS or Web LCT

2. Enable performance monitoring function.

: Select the check box 15-Minute, and click radio button Enabled; or select the
check box 24-Hour, and click radio button Enabled.
: Select the date, and enter the time to set the beginning time and end time for
monitoring. The start time must be later than the current time of the NMS and NE. If
you need to monitor the performance immediately, set the start time just a little later
than the current time of the NMS and NE. To set the end time, select the check box
before To first. The end time must be later than the start time. If the check box before
To is not selected, it indicates that the monitoring function is enabled all the time.

1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Performance > NE Performance
Monitor Time from the Function Tree. In NE Performance Monitor Time,
select the desired NE.
An NE must be selected at this step. Otherwise, it is impossible for you to proceed with
the task.
2. In the Set 15-Minute Monitoring field, select Enabled and click

behind the From field to set the start time for monitoring the 15-minute
performance of the NE.
The method of setting the time is as follows: In the hour, minute, or second time
control, right-click the time to increase it, or press Shift and right-click the time to
decrease it.

3. In the Set 24-Hour Monitoring field, select Enabled and click behind
the From field to set the start time for monitoring the 24-minute
performance of the NE.
4. Click Apply to apply the settings.
6.12 Checking Master/Slave Subracks
6.12.1 Checking the Master/Slave Subrack for Universal

Platform Subrack
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent
subrack ID conflict and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master
and slave subracks correctly. The ID of the master or slave subrack is set through
the EFI board in the subrack.
Prerequisites
● The NMS server and client should be started normally.
● The master/slave subracks should be installed.
● Fiber connection should be done.

U2000
Context
The master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/
ETH3 of the EFI. The EFI board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default
ID of a subrack is 0. The setting is implemented by DIP switches.
DIP switches on the board panel: Figure 6-11 shows the position of the DIP
switches on the EFI board.
● The TN18EFI board has a set of five DIP switches whose IDs are ID1-ID5 from
the lower bit to the higher bit. Each DIP switch can be used to set a binary
digit, 0 or 1. When the DIP switch is toggled to 0, the value of the
corresponding bit is set to 0. DIP switches must be toggled to the topmost or
the bottommost. Otherwise, the subrack ID cannot be intuitively identified.
● A maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0"
indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. As
shown in Figure 6-11, the value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 00001, which is
1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
DIP switches within the board: Figure 6-12 shows the position of the DIP switches
on the EFI board.
● The TN18EFI board has a set of eight DIP switches. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits
1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these ID
values, only ID1-ID5 are valid. ID6-ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low

are ID5-ID1. Each DIP switch can be used to set a binary digit, 0 or 1. When
the DIP switch is toggled to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
● A maximum of 32 states can be set. The value is 00000 by default. "0"
indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. As
shown in Figure 6-12, the value represented by the ID5-ID1 is 00001, which is
1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
Figure 6-11 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI panel
Figure 6-12 Position of the DIP switches within the EFI board

Figure 6-13 The ID of the subrack: 0-31
The LED front panel of the EFI/SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the
master subrack is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.
On the NMS, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as
one NE with one ID and one IP.
Precautions
NOTICE
Changing the subrack ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt service.

Subrack ID Conflict Scenarios and Solutions

The following table describes the subrack ID conflict scenarios and the rules and
methods for resolving conflicts.

Sc Applicable Version Impact on Services Handling Rule H

en an
ar dl
io in
g
M
et
h
o
d
Th V100R003C10 and The involved port has Resolve the subrack Fo

e later versions been isolated. ID conflict according r
po NOTE Therefore, the to the isolation alarm de
rt This function needs to subrack ID conflict indication. tai
th match the U2000 does not affect ls,
at V200R016C50 or later services. se
versions.
br e
in "P
gs ro
a ce
su du
br re
ac fo
k r
ID th
co e
nf Sc
lic en
t ari
(r o
ef W
er he
re re
d th
to e
as In
th vo
e lv
in ed
vo Po
lv rt
ed H
po as
rt) Be
ha en
s Is
be ol
en at
is ed
ol ".
at


en an
ar dl
io in
g
M
et
h
o
d
ed
.


en an
ar dl
io in
g
M
et
h
o
d
Th Versions earlier than Services are affected. Resolve the subrack Fo

e V100R003C10 When a subrack ID ID conflict and then r
in conflict occurs on an check for alarms. de
vo NE, the board tai
lv configurations may ls,
ed be incorrect, a se
po communication e
rt abnormality may "P
ha occur, and even worse ro
s protection switching ce
no and service running du
t may be affected. re
be fo
en r
is th
ol e
at Sc
ed en
in ari
ca o
se W
of he
a re
su th
br e
ac In
k vo
ID lv
co ed
nf Po
lic rt
t. H
as
N
ot
Be
en
Is
ol
at


en an
ar dl
io in
g
M
et
h
o
d
ed
".


en an
ar dl
io in
g
M
et
h
o
d
The involved port When the involved Resolve the subrack Fo

cannot be isolated in port cannot be ID conflict and then r
V100R003C10 and isolated or the port check for alarms. de
later versions. isolation becomes tai
NOTE invalid, services will ls,
This function needs to be frozen. Therefore, se
match the U2000 neither services nor e
V200R016C50 or later DCN is affected. "P
versions.
ro
ce
du
re
fo
r
th
e
Sc
en
ari
o
W
he
re
th
e
In
vo
lv
ed
Po
rt
H
as
N
ot
Be
en
Is
ol
at


en an
ar dl
io in
g
M
et
h
o
d
ed
".
When a subrack ID conflict occurs, service freezing of the conflict subrack is not affected before
the isolation takes effect or when the isolation fails or becomes invalid. Because the service
board communication is frozen when a subrack ID conflict occurs, other operations such as
service configuration and deployment commissioning cannot be performed. Therefore, handle
the subrack ID conflict as soon as possible.
Involved Port Cannot Be Isolated or Isolation Become Invalid
Table 6-2 Tree-like subrack cascading

Limitation Scenario Networking
Example
Isola When a A subrack

tion subrack ID conflict
fails. ID occurs
conflict before the
occurs SCC
before boards in
identific the
ation master
informa and slave
tion subracks
synchro synchroni
nization ze
, the identity
involve informati
d port on of the
cannot active SCC
be boards.
isolated
.


Example
NOTE After the
The ports that
SCC
boards
involve
in the the
master subrack
and ID conflict
slave are
subrac isolated,
ks
synchr
replace
onize the SCC
identit boards. A
y subrack
inform ID conflict
ation occurs
of the
active
again
SCC within 6
boards minutes.
to
identif
y the
local
NE.Wh
en no
subrac
k ID
conflic
t
occurs,
the
identifi
cation
inform
ation
of the
active
system
control
board
can be
update
d6
minute
s later
after
the
synchr
onizati
on.


Example
When When the

two ID of a
subrack new
s that subrack
have a conflicts
subrack with that
ID of an
conflict existing
are subrack,
powere the two
d off subracks
and are
they powered
are off and
powere then
d on powered
again on. The
at an new
interval subrack is
longer powered
than 6 on over 6
minutes minutes
, the earlier
involve than the
d port original
cannot subrack.
be
isolated
.


Example
For a Slave
subrack subrack 2
that has
has synchroni
synchro zed
nized identificat
identific ion
ation informati
informa on of the
tion of active
the system
active control
system board.
control When the
board, ID of
if the slave
subrack subrack 2
ID is is
change changed
d by to the
adjustin same as
g DIP that of
switche slave
s and subrack 1
conflict by
s with adjusting
the ID DIP
of an switches,
existing a subrack
subrack ID conflict
on the occurs
local after the
NE, the subracks
involve are
d port powered
cannot on.
be
isolated
.


Example
Isola When - -
tion the
beco involve
mes d port
inval has
id. been
isolated
in case
of a
subrack
ID
conflict,
handle
the
issue
based
on the
alarm
instruct
ions. If
the SCC
boards
in the
master
subrack
are
reset,
powere
d off,
or
switche
d, the
isolatio
n will
become
invalid.


Example
Man When The IDs of

ual the two slave
oper subrack subracks
atio IDs of conflict.
ns two Because
are NEs NE1 does
requ conflict not have
ired with slave
after each subrack 2,
isola other the
tion. and the subrack is
local automatic
NE ally
does installed.
not NOTE
have Slave
the subrack 2
specific that is
automati
subrack
cally
, the installed
logical mismatch
subrack es the
will be logical
automa subrack
of NE1,
tically
causing a
installe SUBRACK
d. After _TYPE_MI
the SMATCH
isolatio alarm.
n, the The
alarm is
logical
automati
subrack cally
needs cleared
to be after the
manual isolation.
ly
deleted.

Table 6-3 Ring-like subrack cascading

Example
Isola A Master
tion subrack subrack in
fails. is a version
added earlier
to the than
middle V100R003
of a C10.
ring
networ A slave
k and a subrack of
conflict any
occurs. version is
The added to
involve the
d port middle of
cannot a ring
be network.
isolated
.


Example
Isola A - -
tion subrack
beco is
mes added
inval to the
id. end of
a ring
networ
k and a
subrack
ID
conflict
occurs.
After
the
isolatio
n,
handle
the
issue
based
on the
alarm
instruct
ions.If
the SCC
boards
in the
subrack
are
reset or
switche
d, or
the
networ
k cable
of
another
subrack
is
remove
d and
re-
inserte
d, the
isolatio
n will
become
invalid.

Procedure for the Scenario Where the Involved Port Has Been Isolated
1. Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the system control boards in
the master and slave subracks. If subrack IDs are repeated or blinking, a
subrack ID conflict occurs.
● When the IDs of the master and slave subracks conflict, a SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT
alarm is reported. Then the master and slave subracks check for the conflict port and
disable the port.
● After the involved port is disabled, the SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT alarm is cleared and the
RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm indicating the involved port is disabled is reported.
Based on the new alarm, you can identify the port to which the conflict subrack is
connected.
2. Change the subrack ID.
After change the subrack ID, perform a reset on the subrack. The reset operation can be
implemented by restarting the subrack power supplies.
3. Enable the communication port.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > Access
Control from the navigation tree. Select the desired communication port and
change the port status to Enabled.
After the communication port is enabled, the RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm is cleared.

4. Ensure that the current alarms do not include the SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT or
RACK_CONFLICT_SCREEN alarm.
5. Upload the NE configuration data to the NMS. Insert a physical board into the
slave subrack, and add a logical board for the physical board on the NMS.
Check whether the board goes online and starts properly. To be specific, check
whether the board is displayed green on the NMS. If the board can properly
go online and start, the master and slave subracks are correctly configured.
Procedure for the Scenario Where the Involved Port Has Not Been Isolated
1. Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the system control boards in
the master and slave subracks. If two subrack IDs are repeated, it indicates a
subrack ID conflict.
2. Change the subrack ID.
After change the subrack ID, perform a reset on the subrack. The reset operation can be
implemented by restarting the subrack power supplies.
3. Double-click the optical NE on the NMS to view the status information of the
optical NE.
4. In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE and select Browse
Current Alarms to display the Browse Current Alarms.

5. Check for the SUBRACK_LOOP alarm among the current alarms.
If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between the
master subrack and the slave subracks are chains.
6. Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current alarms.
If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, change the subrack ID according

planning so that each subrack is unique.
7. Check for the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm among the current alarms.
If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, change the subrack ID according planning

to set the ID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LED
on the SCC board in this subrack.
8. Upload the NE configuration data to the NMS. Insert a physical board in the
slave subrack and add the corresponding logical board on the NMS. Check
whether the board goes online properly (displayed as green). If yes, the
configuration of the master/slave subrack is correct.
6.13 Configuring Subrack Cascading Mode of an NE

To ensure proper functioning of the subracks and normal communication between
subracks on an NE, set Shelf Link Mode to be consistent with the actual physical
cascading mode of the subracks on the NMS.
Prerequisite
● Cables for communication between subracks must be installed.

U2000 or Web LCT
Precautions
NOTICE
The cables for communication between subracks are properly installed and no
alarm indicating a cascading fault is reported.
The following operations are applicable only to the OptiX OSN 9800 universal
platform subrack.
Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT

1. Configure the subrack cascading mode of an NE.

: Select Tree or Ring based on the actual physical cascading mode of the
subracks.
6.14 Configuring Extended ECC in Specified Mode

When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the
NEs can be used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE
uses the extended ECC in autosensing mode.When the number of Huawei NEs
that use the extended ECC communication exceeds five, you must use extended
ECC in specified mode.
Prerequisites
● The equipment must be installed according to the planning. The connections
of the cables and fibers are correct.
● The optical port speed modes of two interconnected boards on two
interconnected NEs must be the same. For details on configuration process,
see Setting the FEC Mode and Optical Port Speed Mode of the Line Board.
● The user must log in to the NE.
Legend Information

Context
U2000 or Web LCT
Background Information (Configuring Extended ECC in Specified Mode)

The extended ECC Ethernet ports vary depending on the NG WDM series. The
details are as follows:
The extended ECC in specified mode can be set on site or remotely. When setting
the ECC extended mode remotely, strictly comply with the following sequence: set
the farthest NE without the OSC first, and then the NE with the OSC. Normally,
the NE with the OSC is configured as the server. In the case of the NE without the
OSC, the communication between the U2000 and the NE stops after the ECC
extended mode is set remotely. The communication between the U2000 and the
NE is restored automatically after the setting on the NE with the OSC at the
station is complete.
When configuring the extended ECC in specified mode, configure one or multiple
NEs as the servers and other NEs as the clients. An NE that is configured as a
server NE can also be the client of other server NEs. If an NE is only configured as
a server NE, it supports a maximum of eight client NEs. When eight client NEs are
fully configured, the server NE cannot be used as the client of any other server
NEs. To use a server NE as the client of another server NE, ensure that no more
than seven client NEs are configured for the server NE. All port numbers of server
NEs must be different.
NOTICE
● The ECC extended mode of the remote NEs must be modified first, and that of
the gateway NE must be modified last.
● The extended ECC communication is avoided between the subnet gateway NEs.
● Do not set the gateway NE to the server. The NE closest to the gateway NE is
recommended to be the server NE.
● When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, strictly comply with the
required setting sequence. Otherwise, the communication between the U2000
and the NE where the communication with the U2000 stops cannot be restored
automatically. In this case, on-site resetting is required. Hence, when setting the
ECC extended mode remotely, work out the ECC setting plan in advance to
ensure that the settings are correct.

For example, a station has eight NEs. The optical supervisory channel board is
configured at NE_a1. NE_a1 is the server end. NE_a7 is the client end of NE_a1
and the server end of NE_a8. Figure 6-15 shows the network topology and Table
6-4 provides the IP addresses of the NEs and the ECC setting plan.
Figure 6-15 Network topology of a station
NEs of the station are cascaded through network cables.
Table 6-4 Configuration plan for extended ECC in specified mode
NE IP Address Set Server Set Client
IP Port Opposite IP Port
NE_a1 10.37.49.130 0.0.0.0a 1601 - -
NE_a2 10.37.49.131 - - 10.37.49.130 160

1
NE_a3 10.37.49.132 - - 10.37.49.130 160

1
NE_a4 10.37.49.133 - - 10.37.49.130 160

1
NE_a5 10.37.49.134 - - 10.37.49.130 160

1

NE IP Address Set Server Set Client
IP Port Opposite IP Port
NE_a6 10.37.49.135 - - 10.37.49.130 160

1
NE_a7 10.37.49.136 0.0.0.0a 1602 10.37.49.130 160

1
NE_a8 10.37.49.137 - - 10.37.49.136 160

2
a: Indicates the local NE.

When remotely configuring the extended ECC in specified mode for a site, follow
the sequence below:
The default ECC extended mode is the autosensing mode.
NE_a8→NE_a7 client end→NE_a6, NE_a5, NE_a4, NE_a3 and NE_a2→NE_a1

server end→NE_a7 server end
During the configuration, the status of the communication between the U2000
and NEs changes frequently.
● After the setting at NE NE_a8 is complete, the communication between the
U2000 and NE NE_a8 stops.
● After the setting at NE NE_a7 client end is complete, the communication
between the U2000 and NE NE_a8 stops.
● After the settings on NEs NE_a2, NE_a3, NE_a4, NE_a5 and NE_a6 client end
are complete, the communication between the U2000 and NEs NE_a2, NE_a3,
NE_a4, NE_a5 and NE_a6 stops.
● After the setting at NE NE_a1 server end is complete, the communication
between the U2000 and NEs NE_a2, NE_a3, NE_a4, NE_a5 and NE_a6 restores
automatically.
● After the setting at NE NE_a7 server end is complete, the communication
between the U2000 and NE NE_a8 restores automatically.
Procedure
Step 1 Setting the Client NE

● The IP addresses of NEs cannot be repeated and must be within the same subnet.
● The port number is used by the local NE for communication with the server NE. The
port number cannot be the same as the value of the Port field in the Set Server area.
● The client NE can be the server NE of the next lower level. At that time, the client port
and the server port of the local NE cannot be the same. For specific procedure, see
"Setting the Server NE."
Step 2 Setting the server NE

● The port number is used by the local NE for communication with the client NE.
● The port number of the server NE must be the same as the port number of the client
NE.
----End
Parameters
Field Value Description
ECC Extended Autosensing Autosensing mode: An NE in this mode

Mode mode, Auto does not proactively send ECC discovery
Mode, packets to its interconnected neighbor
Specified NEs but receives and responds to such
Mode packets. Two neighbor NEs in autosensing
Default mode do not proactively establish an
Value: extended ECC connection with each other.
Autosensing Instead, an NE establishes an extended
mode ECC connection as a response only when
the automatic extended ECC is enabled for
its neighbor NE.
Auto Mode means that NEs automatically
achieve ECC communication through the
Ethernet. The configuration of the auto
mode is easy but extra connections are
established. Hence, the resource
utilization ratio is low. The auto mode is
used usually when the number of NEs is
less than 4. In addition, two NEs can
automatically establish extended ECC
communication only after the ECC
Extended Mode parameters of the two
NEs are set to Auto mode.
Specified Mode means that NEs realize
ECC communication only after you specify
the client and server. The reliability of the
connection that operates in the specified
mode is high and the bandwidth
utilization ratio is also high. In normal
cases, use the specified mode to establish
extended ECC communication.
An NE cannot operate in three modes at
the same time to establish ECC
communication with another NE.
To establish extended ECC communication
between two NEs in the specified mode,
you need to specify one NE as the server
and the other NE as the client.

Set IP 0.0.0.0 IP address of the NE. It cannot be

Server modified.
Port 1601 to 1699 Specifies the port of the current NE that is

Default: 1601 used for extended ECC communication.
Set Opposi - Specifies the IP address of the opposite

Client te IP NE.
Port 1601 to 1699 Specifies the port of the opposite NE that

Default: 1601 is used for extended ECC communication.
The ports used at the two NEs must be
the consistent.
6.15 Configuring Primary and Secondary GNEs

After a network is divided into subnets or if there are multiple gateway network
elements (GNEs), configure primary and secondary GNEs for non-GNEs.
Prerequisites
● You must be an NMS user with "maintainer" authority or higher.
● Ensure that an NE is a GNE before setting the NE as a secondary GNE. If the
NE is not a GNE, set it to a GNE. For details, see Changing a Normal NE to a
GNE.

U2000
Context
To ensure connection reliability for the NMS and network, Huawei recommends
that you configure a primary GNE and a secondary GNE for each non-GNE. If only
the primary GNE is configured for a non-GNE, the non-GNE will be unreachable
by the NMS once the primary GNE is faulty. This problem can be prevented by
configuring a secondary GNE for the non-GNE. When the primary GNE for NEs
fails, after an automatic switching to the secondary GNE, the NEs are connected
to the U2000 through the secondary GNE. During the switching of GNEs for NEs,
the communication may be interrupted transiently. But, this does not affect the
services. You can configure up to three secondary GNEs for an NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Administration > DCN Management from the main menu. In the Filter
NE dialog box, after setting the filter conditions, click OK. Then click the NE tab.
Step 2 Double-click GNE2 and select a GNE from the drop-down list.

● To configure multiple secondary GNEs, select a GNE from the GNE3 and GNE4 drop-
down lists.
● When the active GNE and secondary GNEs fail one by one, the switching sequence is
Primary GNE1, GNE2, GNE3, and GNE4.
● You can select multiple lines at a time to set secondary GNEs in batches.
Step 3 Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
----End
6.16 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions

After you query the software version, obtain the status and version information of
each board on the NE.
Prerequisites
The NMS server and client must be started up.

NMS
Legend Information

Procedure
1. Navigation path.
2. Checking Network-Wide Software Versions.
3. Obtain the software version of each board in the Software Version column
and make records.
The NEs that are loaded with the same software package should have the same software
version. Similarly, the same boards on different NEs that are loaded with the same
software package should also have the same software version. If version inconsistency
occurs, immediately provide feedback to the regional office of Huawei Technologies Co.
Ltd.

6.17 Configuring Line Boards of a Beyond 100G System

This topic describes how to configure a license, working mode, and operating
wavelength for a line board of a beyond 100G system.
6.17.1 Configuration Process of Boards in a Beyond 100G

System
This topic describes common configurations of boards in a beyond 100G system.
Configuration Process
Figure 6-17 Configuration flowchart
Table 6-5 describes the details about each step in the configuration flowchart.

Table 6-5 Configuration process

No. Oper Description
ation
N401P/ TNU2N50 TNU1 TNU TNS2N50 TNS2N50
N402P 1/ N501 5N5 4 2
TNU2N60 / 01P
1 TNU1
N601
1 6.8 Mandatory Mandator No Man Mandator Mandator

Setti y settin dator y y
ng g is y
Licen requir
se or ed.
Loadi
ng
RTU
2 6.17. Mandatorya No setting No Man Mandator Mandator

2 is settin dator yb yc
Confi required. g is y
gurin requir
g the ed.
Work
ing
Mod
e of
an
N401
P/
N402
P
Line
Boar
d
3 6.17. Mandatoryd Mandator Mand Man Mandator Mandator

3 y atory dator y y
Confi y
gurin
g the
Oper
ating
Wave
lengt
h of
a
Beyo
nd
100G
Line
Boar
d

● a: In a dual-carrier scenario, the IN1/OUT1 port rate mode of an N402P board is

400G_16QAM or 400G_QPSK, and the IN2/OUT2 port rate mode is NONE.
● b: In the dual-carrier scenario, physical port 1 and physical port 2 are combined to
implement 400G mode. The logical port number is port 1, and physical port 3 and
physical port 4 are combined to implement 400G mode. The logical port number is port
3. Physical port 2 and physical port 4 must be set to "NONE".
● c: In the dual-carrier scenario, physical port 1 and physical port 2 are combined to
implement 400G mode, and the logical port number is "port 1". Physical port 2 must be
set to "NONE".
● d: The operating wavelength on the line board at the source end must be the same as
that on the line board at the sink end; otherwise, services may not be provisioned.
6.17.2 Configuring the Working Mode of an N401P/N402P

Line Board
Before using an N401P/N402P line board, you need to configure the board
working mode and port working modes for the boards. Different port working
modes enable a board to process services differently.
Prerequisites
● The required boards must be created.
● Before changing the working mode or port working mode of a board, delete
the cross-connections on the board.
● Before you set the port rate for the N401P/N402P board, ensure that the
license with corresponding capacity is configured. For details, see 6.8 Setting
License or Loading RTU.

NMS/Web LCT
Context
● For N401P board, you must set the port to work in 100G_QPSK Mode or
200G_16QAM Mode.
● For N402P board, you must set the port to work in 100G_QPSK Mode,
200G_16QAM Mode, 200G_QPSK Mode, 400G_16QAM Mode, 400G_QPSK
Mode or NONE.

● 100G_QPSK Mode: The WDM-side rate of the port is 100 Gbit/s, and the line
modulation format is 100G ePDM-QPSK.
● 200G_16QAM Mode: The WDM-side rate of the port is 200 Gbit/s, and the line
modulation format is 200G ePDM-16QAM.
● 200G_QPSK Mode: The WDM-side rate of the port is 200 Gbit/s, and the line
modulation format is 200G ePDM-QPSK.
● 400G_16QAM Mode: The WDM-side rate of the ports is 400 Gbit/s, and the line
modulation format is 2 x 200G ePDM-16QAM.
● 400G_QPSK Mode: The WDM-side rate of the ports is 400 Gbit/s, and the line
modulation format is 2 x 200G ePDM-QPSK.
The N402P board provides ports 1 and 2. The two ports can be separately used to transmit
single-wavelength 100G or 200G services. The two ports can also be used together to
transmit 400G services in dual-carrier mode.
Both the 400G_16QAM mode and the 400G_QPSK mode are 400G modes. Only port 1 can
be set to 400G mode. Only when the port 2 is set to NONE, port 1 can be set to 400G
Mode.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the board that you want to configure and choose
Configuration > Working Mode from the Function Tree.
Step 2 In the Board Working Mode pane, select the desired optical port. Click the Port
Flex Rate field and select the corresponding mode from the drop-down list.
Figure 6-18 Configuring the port working mode of N402P
Step 3 Click Apply.In the displayed Result dialog box, click OK.
Step 4 Click Query.In the displayed Result dialog box, click OK. Confirm that the query
results are the same as the values that are set.
----End
6.17.3 Configuring the Operating Wavelength of a Beyond

100G Line Board
The logical and physical wavelengths of a board must be the same; otherwise,
services may be unavailable.
Prerequisites


NMS/Web LCT
Context
● By default, the receive and transmit wavelengths of the board are the same.
● The receive wavelength must be the same as the transmit wavelength at the
peer end.
● When 400G_16QAM Mode or 400G_QPSK Mode is configured for the board,
you are advised to set two consecutive wavelengths for the two channels of
dual-carrier optical signals.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the function tree.
Step 2 In the Advanced Attributes tab, select the desired port.
Step 3 Double-click the Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
and then click .
Step 4 Set bandwidths and wavelengths.

You can select existing frequencies or customize frequencies.
● The existing frequencies are 100GHz, Standard 50GHz, 37.5GHz, and
12.5GHz.
● User Define:12.5GHz*n: Set the value of n to an integer ranging from 1 to
32.
In the purple grid area, move the cursor over the desired grid and select the
wavelength according to the displayed frequency information. The selected
wavelength is displayed as green, and the wavelength range keeps consistent with
the bandwidth automatically.
For example, the selected bandwidth is 37.5GHz, and the selected wavelength
frequency is 196.01875THz, as shown in the following figure.


When the port rate of N402P is set to 200G_QPSK Mode and the bandwidth is set to Standard
50GHz in an 80-wavelength system, the center wavelength can be set to the median of two
adjacent standard wavelengths, that is a standard wavelength plus 25 GHz. As shown in the
following figure, standard wavelengths are numbered, standard wavelength 1 is 196.05 THz,
and standard wavelength 2 is 196.0 THz. The center wavelength of standard wavelengths 1 and
2 is 196.025 THz.
In this case, a wavelength occupies the frequency width (shown as or

) of two standard wavelengths. As shown in the following figure,
196.025 THz occupies the frequency width of standard wavelengths 1 and 2. To set another
center wavelength adjacent to 196.025 THz, you can select only the center wavelength between
3 and 4. The center wavelength between 2 and 3 cannot be selected because standard
wavelength 2 has been occupied.
Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 After a dialog box is displayed for confirming the modification, click OK.
Step 7 After another dialog box is displayed for reconfirming the modification, click OK.
----End
6.18 Configuring Boards

This topic describes how to configure service boards and supervisory boards before
optical power commissioning.
6.18.1 Configuring Service Board Parameters

Before you commission a network and configure the services, you need to
configure the parameters for boards, to ensure that the status of board
parameters is compliant with the actual networking requirements. When you need
to adjust the parameters that you set for a board, you can modify the parameters.
Prerequisite
● The actual boards must be running normally.
● The logical boards must be correctly created.

NMS
Procedure
Step 1 Choose the corresponding item from the Function Tree to configure the relevant
board parameters.
1. Configure the parameters for a line board.

Table 6-6 List of parameters for a line board

Parameter Navigation Path Application Procedure
Name Scenario
Laser Status 1. In the NE You can turn on See 16.17

Explorer, or shut down a Opening/
select the laser by setting Closing Lasers.
corresponding the laser status.
board.
2. Choose
Configuratio
n > WDM
Interface
from the
Function Tree.
3. Click By
Board/
Port(Channel
) and choose
Channel from
the drop-
down list.
4. Click Basic
Attributes
tab.
Planned 1. In the NE Used to set the See 6.18.5

Wavelength No./ Explorer, wavelength No, Setting the
Wavelength select the wavelength and Operating
(nm)/Frequency corresponding frequency of the Wavelength of
(THz) board. current optical a Line Board.
2. Choose port on the
Configuratio WDM side of a
n > WDM board.
Interface
FEC Working Sets whether the See 16.28
from the
State board performs Enabling the
Function Tree.
FEC processing FEC Function.
3. Click By on data.
Board/
FEC Mode Port(Channel After enabling See 16.27
) and choose the FEC function, Setting the FEC
Channel from set the FEC Mode.
the drop- mode of the
down list. board.
4. Click
Advanced
Attributes
tab.


Name Scenario
Board Mode 1. In the NE According to the See 6.18.2

Explorer, actual network Setting the
select the planning, set the Board Relay
corresponding board mode to Mode for the
board. line mode or Line Boards.
2. Choose relay mode.
Configuratio
n > WDM
Interface
from the
Function Tree.
3. Click By
Board/
Port(Channel
) and choose
Board from
the drop-
down list.
2. Configure the parameters for a tributary board.
Table 6-7 List of parameters for a tributary board

Name Scenario
Laser Status 1. In the NE You can turn on See 16.17

Explorer, or shut down a Opening/
select the laser by setting Closing Lasers.
corresponding the laser status.
board.
2. Choose
Configuratio
n > WDM
Interface
from the
Function Tree.
3. Click By
Board/
Port(Channel
) and choose
Channel from
the drop-
down list.
4. Click Basic
Attributes
tab.


Name Scenario
Automatic Laser When no light is See 16.21

Shutdown input, a laser is Setting
automatically Automatic Laser
shut down and Shutdown on
stops the WDM
transmitting Board.
optical signals.
The laser life can
be prolonged by
decreasing the
working time of
the laser. In
addition, this
function prevents
hazardous laser
radiation
exposure from
causing
permanent eye
damage.
LPT Enabled You can add the See 16.29

overhead byte Enabling and
that supports the Disabling LPT.
LPT protocol to
the frame format
of a WDM-side
signal, to
monitor the
running status of
the network
access point or
the service
network.
Service Type Sets the service See 16.26

type of the client Querying and
side. Setting the
Service Type on
the Client Side
of a Board.
FEC Working 1. In the NE Sets whether the See 16.28

State Explorer, board performs Enabling the
select the FEC processing FEC Function.
corresponding on data.
board.
2. Choose
Configuratio
n > WDM


Name Scenario
FEC Mode Interface After enabling See 16.27

from the the FEC function, Setting the FEC
Function Tree. set the FEC Mode.
3. Click By mode of the
Board/ board.
Port(Channel
) and choose
Channel from
the drop-
down list.
4. Click
Advanced
Attributes
tab.
Step 2 Click Apply.
----End
6.18.2 Setting the Board Relay Mode for the Line Boards
A line board works in the line board by default. If a line board is planned to work
in relay mode, configure the relay mode for the line board.
Prerequisites
● You must be an NM user with NM operator authority or higher.
● The board must be created.
Precaution
When configuring board parameters, you should configure the board mode for
priority. Otherwise if the board mode is modified, the services and other board
parameters of the board must be reconfigured.
Context
The Board Mode can be set to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.
When electrical-layer ASON are enabled, it does not matter whether the Board
Mode parameter is set to Optical Relay Mode or Electrical Relay Mode. The
parameter must be set to Optical Relay Mode for the line board in a non-ASON
system; otherwise, end-to-end management of ASON services is not available.

NMS or Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NMS. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology.
Step 2 Right-click and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer.
Step 3 Select the desired line board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
Step 4 Click Apply, and click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.
----End
6.18.3 Commissioning Multi-Carrier Line Board

This topic describes how to commission a multi-carrier line board.

Optical power meter
NMS
Context
First configure wavelengths in single-site mode and then create OChM trails in
search mode for management.
Figure 6-19 N601 Typical networking

Figure 6-20 N402P Typical networking
This section uses M40V/D40 as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning
procedures. Other typical networking see N402P Application.
Legend Information
Procedure for commissioning the N402P board

1. Create the physical and logical fiber connections between the ports of the
N402P and M40V/D40 boards by strictly following the network plan.
2. Configure Port Flex Rate of the IN1/OUT1 optical port of the N402P board as
400G_16QAM or 400G_QPSK; Configure Port Flex Rate of the IN2/OUT2
optical port as NONE

3. Configure wavelengths for the N402P board:
Because fixed wavelengths are used on the ports of M40V/D40, configure the wavelengths
for the N402P board strictly based on the wavelengths on M40V/D40. If the wavelength
information is inconsistent, the optical path will be unavailable.
4. Configure the fiber connections and wavelengths for the peer N402P board
using the same method.
5. Adjust the input optical power of the IN ports on the WDM side of the N402P
board to the optimal range:-5dBm~-13dBm.
6. To ensure that multi-carrier signals are synchronized, lock wavelengths before
services are received. For details, see Locking Wavelength by WMU Board.
Procedure for commissioning the N601 board

1. Create the physical and logical fiber connections between the ports of the
N601 and M40V/D40 boards by strictly following the network plan.
2. Configure wavelengths for the N601 board:

Because fixed wavelengths are used on the ports of M40V/D40, configure the wavelengths
for the N601 board strictly based on the wavelengths on M40V/D40. If the wavelength
information is inconsistent, the optical path will be unavailable.
3. Configure the fiber connections and wavelengths for the peer N601 board
using the same method.
4. Adjust the input optical power of the IN ports on the WDM side of the N601
board to the optimal range:-5dBm~-13dBm.
5. To ensure that multi-carrier signals are synchronized, lock wavelengths before
services are received. For details, see Locking Wavelength by WMU Board.
6.18.4 Setting the Port Type

On the tributary board, client-side ports support colored light and gray light. In
addition, client-side ports can be configured as electrical ports. On the line board,
WDM-side ports support colored light. Each port on a general service processing
board can be used as a tributary port or a line port. The port type needs to be
configured based on the actual optical module being used.
Prerequisites
Context
If a port is configured with services or protection, the type of the port cannot be
modified.

U2000
Legend Information
Figure 6-22 shows legend information about U2000 operations.

Setting the Port Type of a Tributary or Line Board

1. In the main topology, double-click an NE to open NE Panel.
2. Delete Port.
3. Set type of the port.
Configure the optical module type of the port based on the practical client-
side optical modules of the boards.

The client-side port type is CFP4*25G by default. When the QSFP28 optical module is used,
the port type must be changed to QSFP4*28G. Otherwise, services are interrupted.
Setting the Port Type of a General Service Processing Board

Setting the Port Type of a TDM Board


: If you need to change the Level value to a smaller one, delete the port first
and select the required rate level for the new port.
6.18.5 Setting the Operating Wavelength of a Line Board

The logical and physical wavelengths of a board must be the same; otherwise,
services may be unavailable.
Prerequisites
Context
NMS
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. Choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the function tree.
Step 2 Set the planned wavelength.
1. In the Advanced Attributes tab, select the desired port.
2. Configure wavelengths.
– For the board that supports only fixed spectra, perform the following
operations:
Double-click the Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz), set the wavelength No, wavelength and Frequency of
the board.
– For the board that supports flexible grid, perform the following
operations:

i. Double-click the Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/

Frequency (THz) and then click .
ii. Set bandwidths.

You can select existing frequencies or customize frequencies.
○ The existing frequencies are 100GHz, 75GHz, 62.5GHz,
Standard 75GHz, Standard 50GHz, 37.5GHz, 12.5GHz, and
6.25GHz.
○ User Define: 6.25GHz*n: Set the value of n to an integer
ranging from 1 to 64.
iii. Set the operating wavelength.
In the purple grid area, move the cursor over the desired grid and
select the wavelength according to the displayed frequency
information. The selected wavelength is displayed as green, and the
wavelength range keeps consistent with the bandwidth
automatically.
iv. Click OK.
3. Click Apply.
4. A dialog box is displayed for confirming the modification, click OK.
5. Another dialog box is displayed for reconfirming the modification, click OK.
Step 3 Optional: Set the receive wavelength of a coherent board.
The receive wavelength must be the same as the transmit wavelength of the peer board.
The receive wavelength of the board is the same as the transmit wavelength of the local
board by default.
1. In the Advanced Attributes tab, select the desired port.
2. Configure wavelengths.
– For the board that supports only fixed spectra, perform the following
operations:
Double-click the Receive Wavelength and Receive Band Type fields and
select the required service wavelength.
– For the board that supports flexible grid, perform the following
operations:
Double-click the Receive Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/
Frequency(THz) and click , and then set parameters with reference
to planned wavelength.
3. Click Apply.
----End

6.18.6 Setting the FEC Mode and Optical Port Speed Mode of
the Line Board
FEC modes and optical port speed modes of two connected boards must be the
same.
Prerequisites

NMS
Services or communications may be interrupted when the FEC modes and optical
port speed modes of two interconnected boards are not the same. To ensure
normal services, correctly set the FEC modes and optical port speed modes for two
interconnected boards.
Procedure
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board. In the navigation tree, choose
Configuration > WDM Interface.
2. Click By Board/Port(Channel) and select Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click FEC Mode of the desired
optical port and select the FEC type.
4. Double-click Optical Port Speed Mode of the desired optical port and select
the optical port speed mode.
5. Click Apply.
6. A dialog box is displayed for confirming the modification, click OK.
6.18.7 Monitoring the Optical Power by MCA/OPM8 Board

This section describes how to set the parameters for an MCA/OPM8 board so that
it monitors the optical power for the specified channels.
Prerequisites
● You are an NMS user with " NE operator" privilege or higher..

Impact on System
None

U2000
Legend Information
Procedure on the U2000

1. Configure wavelength monitoring for the MCA board.
2. Query the optical power and OSNR of the wavelengths on the specified
channels by using an MCA board.

6.18.8 Locking Wavelength by WMU Board

The WMU board is connected to the MON ports of the optical amplifier boards or
optical multiplexer boards in the two transmit directions. The board monitors the
wavelengths and reports information such as optical power of the wavelengths to
the system control. To achieve the function, the OTU board and NE where the
monitored wavelength is located must be configured on the , and the intra-
subrack and inter-subrack communication must be normal.
Prerequisite
● Ensure the normal DCN communication between NEs.
● The WMU board must be created after the physical WMU board is installed.

NMS/Web LCT (NMS is recommended)
Procedure on the NMS/Web LCT

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the WMU board and choose Configuration >
Wavelength Monitoring Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Wavelength Monitoring Unit field, and choose an optical port of the
WMU board from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click Query. The information about the wavelength monitoring that has been
configured is displayed.
Step 4 Click New. The New Monitored Object dialog box is displayed. Select the NE and
the OTU board where the wavelengths to be detected are located.

Click New. The system displays all the OTU boards that are not configured with wavelength
monitoring but support wavelength monitoring.
Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 A message is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close.
The wavelength monitoring that has been created is displayed in the user
interface.
● If the logical fiber connections are configured, click Calculate OTU. The system
calculates all the OTU boards that have been logically connected based on the fiber
connection relationship. Click Apply so that the wavelength monitoring configuration of
the OTU boards is delivered.
● After you click Calculate OTU, if some of the displayed boards do not need wavelength
monitoring, click Delete to remove them one by one.
----End
6.19 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode

In graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the
signal flow diagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you
create a large number of fiber connections one by one.
Prerequisite
● Optical NEs and NEs must be created.
● Logic board has been created on the NMS.
● Before the creation of fibers, it is recommended that you set Planned
Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of the port on the
tunable OTU as the designed wavelength.
● Applies to WDM equipment.

NMS
After the equipment commissioning is completed, the fiber connections might
exist on the NE. You can synchronize on the NMS the internal fiber connection
data of the NE with the NMS side.
Conflicting fibers refer to the different fibers configured on the NE and NMS sides.
Click Synchronize and Create Fiber/Cable, and then the conflicting fibers are
displayed in the Uncreated Fiber in NMS and Uncreated Fiber in NE user
interfaces. The conflicting fibers cannot be synchronized between the NMS and
the NE. In this case, based on the networking design, delete the incorrect fibers.
After that, click Create Fiber/Cable and re-create the remaining fibers.

Legend Information

Step 1 Optional: Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode.
1. Create fibers in the synchronization mode.

: Click Synchronize, and the data of the internal fiber connections on the NMS
side and that on the NE side are displayed.
– Synchronized Fiber/Cable: Indicates the fibers that exist on both the NMS and NE
sides. NMS is the same as the fiber data on NEs.
– Uncreated Fiber in NMS: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side.
– Uncreated Fiber/Cable in NE: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NMS side.
– Fiber/Cable on the NE Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side.
– Fiber/Cable on the NMS Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NMS side.
: Handle different situations as follows:

– If uncreated fiber in NMS or uncreated fiber in NE exists, select all the fibers.
Click Create Fiber/Cable, and the dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The
synchronized fibers are displayed in the list of Synchronized Fiber/Cable.
– If conflicting fibers exist, fibers cannot be created. You can click Delete Fiber/
Cable to delete the uncreated fibers in NMS or uncreated fibers in NEs, and then
click Create Fiber/Cable to re-create the remaining fibers.
Step 2 To create fiber connections inside an NE, do as follows:
The source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot edge ports. For how to select an edge
port, see 16.12 Configuring the Edge Port.

2. Select the source board and port and the sink board
When a wrong source or sink board or port is selected, right-click to cancel the
operation and exit object selection.
3. In the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the attributes of the fiber.

To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.
Step 3 To creating fiber connections between NEs, do as follows:
Creating fiber connections between NEs is performed on the Main Topology. In fact, the FIU
fiber connections between stations are created.
1. Click the shortcut icon on the Main Topology and the cursor is displayed
as "+" .
2. Click the source NE of the fiber on the Main Topology.
3. Select the source board and source port in the Select Fiber/Cable Source
dialog box displayed.
4. Click OK. The Main Topology is displayed and the cursor is displayed as "+"
again.
5. Click the sink NE of the fiber in the Main Topology.
6. Select the sink board and sink port in the Select Fiber/Cable Sink dialog box
displayed.
7. Click OK
8. Enter the attributes of the fiber in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box
displayed.

To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.
Step 4 Move the cursor to the fiber that is created and then information about the fiber
is displayed. Read the information to check whether the fiber is created correctly.
----End
Postrequisite
After you create fiber connections, you need to verify all fibers are created to
ensure that the fiber connections are correct and the line communication is
available.
6.20 Setting the Fiber Parameters

Before configuring the centralized monitoring function for the Optical Doctor
(OD), you need set an inter-site fiber type and fiber length. If the fiber type is not
configured or is incorrectly configured, the incident optical power will be
incorrectly calculated.. If the fiber length is not configured, there is no impact
because the fiber length will be automatically calculated. If the fiber length is
incorrectly configured, the OSNR calculation will be incorrect. The design end of
life (EOL) value of fiber loss must be set to determine whether the fiber loss
exceeds the design EOL value. If the EOL is incorrectly configured, the
SPAN_LOSS_EXCEED_EOL alarm will be reported, indicating that the fiber loss
exceeds the design EOL value. This topic describes how to set the fiber parameters
in batches.

Prerequisites
● You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.
● The EOL value has been obtained from the network design document.

U2000
Configuration Principles
● If the IN port on the receive optical amplifier (OA) board is equipped with a
dispersion compensation module (DCM), calculate the EOL value for the fiber
between the local NE and upstream NE using the following formula: EOL =
Design fiber loss + Maximum insertion loss of the DCM. If an OLP board is
installed in front of the receive OA board, the EOL value for the fiber between
the local NE and upstream NE is equal to the fiber loss between the upstream
OLP board and the local OLP board.
EOL value: historical reference value + 1.5 dB.

● Ensure that the inter-site fiber type and fiber type are the same as those in
the practical fiber configurations.
Procedure
1. Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link > Fiber/Cable/Microwave
Link Management from the main menu.
2. In the Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link Management window, click Filter. Clear
the Include internal fibers check box, and click Filter in the Set Fiber/Cable
Browse Filter Criteria dialog box.
3. Select one or multiple fibers/cables in the list and click Modify Fiber/Cable.
4. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box, set the Length (km), Designed
Loss(EOL)(dB), and Medium Type of the fibers/cables as required, and click
Apply.
To perform batch setting, select multiple lines, right-click the parameter column, and
choose Modify in Batches.
5. Click Apply Parameters to NE in the Result dialog box.

6. In the Please Select Setting Scope dialog box, select the desired parameters
and click OK.
7. Optional: Click NE Operation, and select Query. Click OK in the Please

Select Query Scope dialog box to view whether reference parameters are
delivered successfully.
6.21 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection

Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation
of single-station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are
configured.
Prerequisite
● The logic fiber connection inside a single station has been set up on the
NMS/Web LCT.
● The edge port must be configured.
● When an MCS0816 board is used, ensure that the optical NE where the
MCS0816 board is installed normally communicates with the electrical NE
where the line board is installed. If the communication is abnormal, services
cannot be provisioned.

NMS or Web LCT

When you create an optical cross-connection, the optical power can be adjusted
automatically or manually. If you select Auto, the dynamic optical add/drop
multiplexer board automatically adjusts the attenuation range of the optical
attenuator in the board. If you select Manual, you need to manually adjust the
attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the dynamic optical add/drop
multiplexer board. The Auto option is available for the several types of optical
cross-connection trails.
● The WSMD9/WSMD4 can be used to replace the WSD9 or WSM9.

● OA indicates the optical amplifier boards, such as OAU1 and OBU1.
● The FIU can be added before or after the OA.
● In drop networking, the demultiplexer boards, such as TD20, D40, can be added
between the WSD9 and OTU.
● In add networking, the multiplexer boards, such as TM20, M40, M40V, can be added
between the OTU and WSM9.
● The optical cross-connect services created are unidirectional. The reverse services need
to be configured in addition. The configuration in the other direction is similar. When
creating the unidirectional optical cross-connect services through RDU module, you
cannot select Auto. Otherwise it fails.
● Optical cross-connections are created by creating optical cross-connections on the board
or on a single station. Creating optical cross-connections on a single station is
recommended.
● After an optical cross-connection is created for an MCS0816 board, view the WDM
interface attribute McsSwitch Status of the MCS0816 board. If the value is on, the
optical cross-connection is successfully created and services are normal. If the value is
off, the optical cross-connection is successfully created and the OCh trail search
succeeds, but services are unavailable and an MCS_SWITCH_BLOCKED alarm is reported.
The possible cause is as follows: the current OTU board wavelength is inconsistent with
the cross-connect board wavelength.

1. Create the single-station optical cross-connection.

: Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the
button on the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Select the
wavelengths from the Available Wavelength list. Click to add the

wavelengths to Selected Wavelength. Click OK.
: The optical cross-connection created here does not belong to the optical cross-
connections mentioned in the background information. Therefore, OPA Mode can be
set only to Manual.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-
Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click NE-Level Optical
Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand pane.
2. Click Create. The Create NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection window is
displayed.
1. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on
the right of Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the wavelengths from
the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to

Selected Wavelengths. Click OK.
3. Click OK. The created single-station optical cross-connection is displayed in
the window.
(Optional) Configuring the Edge Port Setting an edge port is to set

Related an optical port of an NE as a
Operation connection point between this
NE and another NE.
Creating Board Optical Cross- The intra-board optical

Connection wavelength route can be set
for a board that performs
grooming at the optical layer.
The intra-board service route is
established through the
creation of single-board optical
cross-connection.
6.22 Configuring Flexible ROADM

Optical-connections are configured using the NMS to achieve flexible ROADM.

Prerequisites
● Boards supporting flexible ROADM have been configured.
● Internal fiber connections of the OAU board are completed.
● The edge port must be configured.
● The logic fiber connection inside a single station has been set up on the
NMS/Web LCT.
● When creating an optical cross-connection of a single station, make sure that
the optical cross-connection of a board in this single station does not occupy
the wavelength that the optical cross-connection of the single station uses.
● When an MCS0816 board is used, ensure that the optical NE where the
MCS0816 board is installed normally communicates with the electrical NE
where the line board is installed. If the communication is abnormal, services
cannot be provisioned.
Context
You can create NE- or board-level optical cross-connections on the NMS. The
following uses NE-level cross-connection configuration as an example.
● For wavelengths that have fixed optical spectra, the procedure for configuring
flexible ROADM is similar to that for configuring traditional ROADM.
● For wavelengths that have variable optical spectra, the procedure of
configuring flexible ROADM differs from that of configuring traditional
ROADM in wavelength selection.
● The optical cross-connect services created are unidirectional. The reverse services need
to be configured in addition. The configuration in the other direction is similar.
● After an optical cross-connection is created for an MCS0816 board, view the WDM
interface attribute McsSwitch Status of the MCS0816 board. If the value is on, the
optical cross-connection is successfully created and services are normal. If the value is
off, the optical cross-connection is successfully created and the OCh trail search
succeeds, but services are unavailable and an MCS_SWITCH_BLOCKED alarm is reported.
The possible cause is as follows: the current OTU board wavelength is inconsistent with
the cross-connect board wavelength.
Legend Information

Procedure
Step 1 Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port.
Step 2 Optional: For a wavelength with a fixed optical spectrum, select the wavelengths
: Select the wavelength as required.
: Repeat these steps to set the Sink Wavelength NO. .
Step 3 Optional: For a wavelength with a variable optical spectrum, select the required
frequency based on the wavelengths for the OTU or line board. Click the desired
grid.

: Select the frequency based as required. A bandwidth spacing of 6.25 GHz is present
between two lines of grids. When you move the cursor over a grid, the corresponding frequency
will be prompted.
: Wavelengths selected will be displayed in green. Clicking a green area will cancel the
selection of the wavelength.
: Wavelengths selected will be displayed here. Clicking a wavelength area will cancel the
selection of the wavelength.
: Repeat these steps to set the Sink Wavelength.

A bandwidth spacing of 6.25 GHz is present between two lines of grids. When you move the
cursor over a grid, the corresponding frequency will be prompted.
Note that there is a mapping between Source Wavelength and Source Wavelength No. and
between Sink Wavelength and Sink Wavelength No.. Therefore, if the settings of Source
Wavelength and Sink Wavelength are modified, Source Wavelength No and Sink
Wavelength No. will change accordingly.
The NMS displays an extra 25 GHz spectrum for flexible ROADM to be compatible with 100G
fixed-wavelength systems. However, this 25 GHz spectrum is used only for applying the 200G
ePDM-QPSK line modulation format in the 100 GHz fixed-wavelength spacing.
----End
6.23 Configuring a Superchannel

This topic introduces how to configure a superchannel.
6.23.1 Creating Superchannels and Subcarriers

This topic introduces how to create superchannels and subcarriers.
Prerequisites
● All physical boards are installed and physical fibers are connected.

● All logical boards and logical connections are created.
NOTICE
Before creating superchannels, make sure that physical and logical boards and
fiber connections are correctly created and configured. Otherwise, the route is
unreachable, and superchannels cannot be created.
Legend Information
Procedure
Step 1 Perform the steps shown in the following figure.
Step 2 Select the level and direction of the WDM trail.

Step 3 Select the source board, port, wavelength, and bandwidth of the OCh.
The wavelength to be selected here is used for path calculation only.
Step 4 Select the sink board, port, wavelength, and bandwidth of the OCh.

The wavelength to be selected here is used for path calculation only.
Step 5 Optional: You can click Calculate Route to calculate a route.
Step 6 Create a superchannel and select the waveband for the superchannel.

Step 7 Add the first subcarrier to the superchannel.

The selected subcarrier wavelength is the final wavelength that will be delivered to the
corresponding board.
----End

6.23.2 Adding a Subcarrier

This topic introduces how to add subcarriers to existing superchannels. The
created superchannels can be searched based on source and sink boards.
Prerequisites
● Superchannels are created.
Legend Information
Procedure
Step 2 Select the level and direction of the WDM trail.

Step 3 Select the source board, port, wavelength, and bandwidth of the subcarrier.
Step 4 Select the sink board, port, wavelength, and bandwidth of the subcarrier.

Step 5 Optional: You can click Calculate Route to calculate a route.
Step 6 According to the data plan, select the superchannel that the subcarrier matches.

: Enter the starting NE where the subcarrier resides to search for the superchannel.
: According to the value in Supper Channel, select the desired superchannel.
Step 7 Add the subcarrier.

----End
6.23.3 Managing Superchannels and Subcarriers

This chapter introduces how to manage existing superchannels and subcarriers.
Prerequisites
● All superchannels and subcarriers are created.

Legend Information
Procedure
Step 2 Specify the filter criteria.
Step 3 Select the subnet where superchannels reside.

Step 4 Sort by Super Channel to quickly locate the superchannel to be managed.
Subcarriers with the same waveband belong to the same superchannel. Each OCh represents
one subcarrier. For example, 195.44375THz+-100GHz is a superchannel, which contains eight
OCh subcarriers.
Step 5 Optional: Before deleting a subcarrier, delete the client-side service of the
subcarrier.

Check whether the corresponding OCh carries any client-side service. If yes, deactivate the OCh
and delete it.
Step 6 Before deleting a subcarrier, deactivate the OCh.
Step 7 Delete the subcarrier.

If the last subcarrier is deleted from the superchannel, the superchannel will be deleted
simultaneously.
----End
6.24 Searching for WDM Trails

After fibers are connected and services are configured on the WDM equipment,
there is no trail information on the U2000. Cross-connection or fiber connection
information can be uploaded to the U2000 and existing trails can be browsed and
managed using the WDM trails searching function.
Prerequisites
● You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" privilege or higher.
● Logical fiber connections have been configured correctly.

NMS
Procedure
Step 1 On the main menu of the U2000, choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for
WDM Trail.
Step 2 In the Advanced Settings area, set various processing policies associated with trail
searching.
Step 3 On the lower right of the window, click Next to start trail searching. Wait until the
status of the progress bar reaches 100%.
Step 4 Click Next to view the found trails.
Step 5 Click Next to view all discrete services on the network.

Step 6 When the searching completes, click Finish.

Step 7 In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM
Trail from the Main Menu.
2. On the Basic Settings tab, select the level of the service being queried for
Level.
3. Click Filter All.
In Manage WDM Trail, Check whether the trails on the subnet being queried
are consistent with the network design.
6.25 Verifying the Source and Sink of a Wavelength

Automatic match of section monitoring (SM) trail trace identifiers (TTIs) comes
into play to detect the matching relationships between the optical-layer
connections of the source and sink NEs.
Prerequisite
● Physical and logical fibers have been connected and consistent.
● An optical cross-connection has been configured.
● The TTI to be Sent of SM Overheads on the NE must be configured.
Precaution
If the SM overhead function has been configured in the NE Explorer, it will be
affected by this operation.
The "Auto Match SM TTI" function must be configured before using the service
view. This function detects the matching relationships between the optical-layer
connections of the NEs.

NMS
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Auto match SM TTI from the main menu.
Step 2 Select one or multiple subnets from the navigation tree and click .
Step 3 Click Query to query data from NEs. A progress bar is displayed.
Step 4 In the Result dialog box that is displayed after the query is complete, click Close.

In the upper pane, view the channels on NEs, operator specifics in to-be-
transmitted SM TTIs, and operator specifics in received SM TTIs.
Step 5 Click Set SM TTI Operator Specific. A progress bar is displayed.
● The operator specific in the TTI to be Sent can be set when it is blank.
● The operator specific in the TTI to be Sent can be changed it has been set in the
specified format.
Step 6 In the Result dialog box that is displayed after the setting is complete, click Close.
Step 7 Click Match. A match progress bar is displayed.
Step 8 In the Result dialog box that is displayed after the matching is complete, click
Close. You can view the matching results of the source and sink channels in the
Match results area.
Inter-NE connections fall into the following types:

● Unidirectional:
– The local NE receives overheads in the specified format, but the peer NE does not.
The cause is that the format of to-be-transmitted overheads has not been specified
on the local NE.
– The local NE receives overheads in the specified format, but the peer NE does not
although the format of to-be-transmitted overheads has been specified on the local
NE. The cause is that the local NE cannot send signals to the peer NE.
● Bidirectional: Both local and peer NEs receive overheads in the specified format.
● Discrete:
– The local NE is isolated.
– Neither the local nor the peer NE receives overheads in the specified format. The
cause is that the format of to-be-transmitted overheads has not been specified on
either NE.
– The peer NE is outside the subnet, or beyond the management domain of the NMS.
Step 9 Optional: Click Save As. Set Start row, End row, and File name. Then the
matching results are saved as a file in the specified directory.
The file is saved in the report subdirectory of client in the format of XLS, TXT, HTML, or
CSV. If necessary, you can change the file directory in the Saving Options dialog box.
----End
6.26 Upgrading the Cross-Connect Mode of the OSN

9800 M24
By default, the M24 subrack supports the 1:1 cross-connect mode. In
V100R007C00 and later versions, the M24 subrack also supports the 1:3 cross-
connect mode. This section describes how to upgrade the M24 subrack from the
1:1 cross-connect mode to the 1:3 cross-connect mode and the operation
precautions.

Prerequisites
● The NE software of the M24 subrack has been upgraded to V100R007C00 or a
later version.
● The physical CXCS board has been installed, and the logical CXCS board has
been added.
● Two CXP boards and two CXCS boards in the M24 subrack work normally.
– Board Work Status of the CXP boards must be Active. Board Work
Status of the CXCS boards must be Isolate.
– Board Good Status of the CXP and CXCS boards must be Good.
The board status can be queried on the NMS.
a. In the NE Explorer, select the NE where the M24 subrack is located.
b. Choose Configuration > Load Sharing Management > Board Load
Sharing Management from the Function Tree. Then, check the values of
Board Work Status and Board Good Status.
● The service boards work properly.

– No HARD_ERR/HARD_BAD/TS_SYNC_FAIL alarm is generated.
– The boards are online.
– The boards do not enter the BIOS state.
– The logical boards are the same as the physical boards.

NMS
Upgrade Description
When the M24 subrack is upgraded from the 1:1 mode to the 1:3 mode, an
intermediate upgrade state occurs. In this state, you can manually select rolling
back or continuing the submission.

● Perform the rollback operation to restore the 1:1 cross-connect mode of the
M24 subrack. After the rollback, delete the logical CXCS board from the NE.
In the upgrade state, if a cross-connect abnormality occurs (for example, the BUS_ERR/
HARD_BAD alarm occurs on a cross-connect board and the BUS_ERR/TS_SYNC_FAIL alarm
occurs on a service board), the system automatically triggers a rollback.
● Continue the submission. The M24 subrack is upgraded to the 1:3 cross-
connect mode. After the upgrade is completed, the M24 subrack can be
restored to the 1:1 cross-connect mode only by clearing the database.
NOTICE
When the M24 subrack is restored to the 1:1 cross-connect mode by clearing
the database, the NE configuration may be lost. Therefore, exercise caution
when performing this operation. You need contact Huawei technical support
engineers before clearing the database.
Function Impact
NOTICE
During the upgrade or downgrade of the cross-connect mode of the M24 subrack
(including the upgrade state and rollback):
● Logical boards and cross-connect services cannot be added or deleted.
● The switching of OTN SNCP, SDH SNCP, and SDH MSP is not supported.
● ASON rerouting and service provisioning are not supported.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology of the U2000, right-click an NE of the M24 subrack type and
choose Smooth Upgrade of Subrack Cross-connections from the shortcut menu.
The dialog box shown in Figure 6-29 is displayed.
Step 2 Confirm the upgrade impact and start the upgrade.

Figure 6-29 Update
Step 3 After the upgrade is successful, a dialog box shown in Figure 6-30 is displayed,
indicating that the system enters the upgrade state. Click Close to close the dialog
box.
Figure 6-30 Upgrade result
Step 4 In the dialog box that is displayed, select rolling back or continuing the
submission.
● Rollback: Click Cancel Upgrade to restore the 1:1 cross-connect mode of the
M24 subrack.

Figure 6-31 Performing a rollback
● Continue Submission: Click Submit to upgrade the M24 subrack to the 1:3
cross-connect mode.
Figure 6-32 Continuing the submission
----End

Commissioning Guide (U2000) 7 Checking Networkwide Configuration
7 Checking Networkwide Configuration
After the NE and network configuration is complete, check the configuration

results to ensure normal network operation.
Table 7-1 and Table 7-2 list the items to be checked after the NE and network
configuration is complete.
Table 7-1 Initial configuration checklist on site
N Item Related Operation

o.
1 On the Web LCT, NE ● Setting the NE ID

attributes are correctly ● Setting the NE IP Address
configured based on the
project plan. ● Configuring Power Supplies
● Checking Board Slots
2 The communication Checking the Communication Between

between the NEs and the the GNE and NMS Center
NMS server is reachable.
Table 7-2 Networkwide configuration checklist on NMS Center

o.
1 Communication between Creating NEs in Batches

NEs on the network is Creating Optical NEs
normal and logins to the
NEs are successful. Creating Subnets
Uploading the NE Data
2 NE ID and IP are changed Setting NE ID and IP

properly according to the
customer planning
requirements.


o.
3 All NEs are synchronized Synchronizing the NE Time with the

with the NMS time and NE NMS/Web LCT Server Manually
performance monitoring Setting Performance Monitoring
can be enabled normally. Parameters of an NE
4 When the network uses the Setting Manually Extended ECC

HWECC communication Communication
protocol, a proper extended
ECC communication mode
is selected when the
number of NEs that adopt
the extended ECC
communication exceeds
eight.
5 Attributes of every WDM Configuring Boards

optical port on a board are
set properly.
6 Logical fiber connections Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic

are created on the entire Mode
network and they are
consistent with actual fiber
connections.
7 Optical cross-connections at Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-

an ROADM station are Connections
complete.
8 OCh trails are complete and Searching for WDM Trails

no discrete service exists.


o.
9 No abnormal alarms are Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and

reported after the network Removing Abnormal Alarms
configuration is complete.
Among the reported alarms,
some are normal while
others are abnormal.
Determine the normal
alarms based on the actual
project situation and
remove them from the
U2000. For abnormal
alarms, isolate the fault
causes and rectify the faults
before removing them from
the U2000.
● Normal alarms include
the following:
PORT_MODULE_OFFLINE
, MUT_LOS, LAN_LOC,
R_LOS, REM_SF,
ALS_ACTIVE,
ODU0_PM_SSF,
OTU1_SSF,
ODU1_PM_SSF,
OTU2_SSF,
ODU2_PM_SSF,
OTU3_SSF,
ODU3_PM_SSF,
OTU4_SSF,
ODU4_PM_SSF,
ODUFLEX_PM_SSF,
OTU4_LOF, and
POWER_FAIL.
● Abnormal alarms include
the following:
BD_STATUS, BUS_ERR,
BOOTROM_BAD,
HARD_BAD, HARD_ERR,
RTC_FAIL, and
LSR_WILL_DIE.
In the actual commissioning and configuration process, you are recommended to check the
configurations of an NE after configuring the NE.

Commissioning Guide (U2000) 8 Commissioning Optical Power
8 Commissioning Optical Power
This charter describes the basic requirements and operation process for the single
station commissioning and system commissioning.
8.1 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

This chapter describes how to commission optical power on site.
8.2 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power
This chapter describes how to remotely commission optical power.
8.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-
Wavelength System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40 Gbit/s
(hereinafter referred to as 40G) OTM and OLA stations.
8.4 Commissioning the Optical Power of the 100G Coherent System
This topic describes how to commission the optical power of coherent system.The
requirements and commissioning process for the incident optical power of a WDM
system whose single–wavelength rate is greater than 100 Gbit/s are the same as
those of a 100 Gbit/s WDM system. This topic uses a 100 Gbit/s WDM system as
an example.
8.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Beyond 100G Coherent System
8.6 Checking Optical Power Commissioning Results
This topic describes how to check optical power commissioning results to ensure
stable and reliable network operation.
8.1 Commissioning Optical Power on Site

This chapter describes how to commission optical power on site.
8.1.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power

This section describes the basic operations, methods, and tools for configuring
optical power.

8.1.1.1 Basic Requirements

This section describes the basic requirements on commissioning optical power.
Basic requirements on commissioning optical power are as follows:
● After commissioning, the optical power should be in the range of the
minimum and maximum values.
● Certain optical power margins should be reserved during commissioning to
ensure that the power fluctuations in a range do not affect services.
● After commissioning, the optical power must meet the requirements for
system expansion.
Requirements of commissioning the CWDM network are as follows:
● The CWDM network does not support the OA (Optical Amplifier). Therefore,
for a CWDM network, only the optical power needs to be commissioned. The
OSNR and flatness do not need to be commissioned.
● Only the receive optical power of the OTU needs to be commissioned. Specific
commissioning requirements and procedures are similar to those for the
DWDM network.
During capacity expansion, the maximum number of wavelengths that you can
add or delete at one time is half the number of existing wavelengths or less. If
there is only one wavelength in the system, only one wavelength can be added at
a time.
8.1.1.2 General Commissioning Sequence

This section describes the general sequence of commissioning optical power.
General Sequence of Commissioning Optical Power

Optical power for NEs and boards is commissioned individually based on the
optical signal flow. During the commissioning, ensure that the line attenuation is
normal based on the requirements on optical power, gain, and insertion loss for
each board.
Generally, the optical power for the OTU board, optical amplifier (OA), and the
supervisory channel board is commissioned based on the corresponding optical
power requirements on the boards.
Optical Power Commissioning Procedures

Usually, the spans between two OTMs in an OptiX WDM system are considered as
one network segment. One network segment has two signal flow directions, the
transmit direction and the receive direction.
For an OptiX WDM system, the optical power for a network segment is
commissioned on a per-NE basis according to the signal flow.
First, commission the transmit optical power for one OTM. Then commission the
optical power for each downstream NE along the transmit direction. Finally,
commission the receive optical power for the destination OTM. After
commissioning the optical power along the transmit direction, commission the
optical power in the reverse direction of the system.

Project X is used as an example to describe how to commission the optical power

of an OptiX WDM system.
Figure 8-1 shows the networking diagram of Project X. A, B, C, D, E and F are

optical NEs (ONEs). The equipment forms a ring network. ONE A and ONE C are
back-to-back OTM stations, ONE B, ONE D, and ONE F are OLA stations, and ONE
E is an OADM station.
Figure 8-1 Networking diagram of Project X
:OTM :OLA : OADM
Project X consists of two network segments: A-B-C and A-F-E-D-C.
First, commission the optical power on the A-B-C network segment according to
the following sequence.
● Commission the optical power along the A-B-C signal flow:
– At ONE A, commission the optical power to ONE B.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power from ONE A.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power to ONE C.
– At ONE C, commission the optical power from ONE B.
● Commission the optical power along the C-B-A signal flow:
– At ONE C, commission the optical power to ONE B.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power from ONE C.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power to ONE A.
– At ONE A, commission the optical power from ONE B.
Based on the previous procedure sequence, commission the optical power for the
A-F-E-D-C network segment in both directions.
For details on how to commission the optical power of an NE, see 8.1.16 Example of
Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System.

8.1.1.3 Commissioning Tools and Instruments

The optical power meter and the optical spectrum analyzer are required for
commissioning optical power.
● Optical power meter: Used to measure the optical power on the client side
and the WDM side of the OTU, and measure the total optical power of the
● Optical spectrum analyzer: Used to measure the optical power, optical signal-
to-noise ratio (OSNR), and the central wavelength of each wavelength in the
Calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to measure the optical
power. Use the following method to verify the calibration:
Measure the optical power at the OUT optical port on the OTU by using the
optical spectrum analyzer. Compare it with the optical power obtained by
using the optical power meter. If the difference is less than 0.5 dB, the
calibration is acceptable. If the difference is more than 0.5 dB, recalibrate the
optical spectrum analyzer.
The optical power of a single wavelength in the multiplexed signals needs to be measured
by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The commissioning result is more accurate when this
method is used. When this method is used, the noise impact does not need to be
considered.
8.1.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTU board.
NOTICE
The overload of the APD receiver laser is -9 dBm. If the input optical power is
higher, the APD laser may be damaged. Therefore, it is recommended that you
insert the fiber loosely from the input optical port of the OTU during
commissioning. After commissioning, make sure the input optical power is lower
than the receiver overload before you insert the fiber.
8.1.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light

This section describes how to force the OTU board to emit light.
Prerequisites
The NE must be created on the NMS.

NMS

The WDM side of the OTU board by default is forced to emit light. If it does not
emit light, refer to the following procedure to query whether the board is forced
to emit light. If the board is not forced to emit light, set the board to emit light.
Precautions
NOTICE
The prerequisite for commissioning the ESC (Electric Supervisory Channel) is that
the OTU is forced to emit light.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer window, select the desired OTU and choose Configuration >
WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Optional: Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Automatic Laser Shutdown of
the optical port on the WDM side of the OTU to DISABLE.
Step 4 Set the Laser Status of the optical port on the WDM side of the OTU to OPEN.
Step 5 Click Apply.
----End
8.1.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU Board

This section describes how to adjust the input optical power of OTU board.

Optical power meter
Precautions
NOTICE
Before the equipment is powered on, verify that the fixed optical attenuator is
configured according to the configuration rules. Verify the input optical power of
the OTU (including the WDM side and client side) is lower than the receiver
overload to avoid damage to the optical module during commissioning. Note that
the overload of the APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm. Adjust the input optical
power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical
power is within the optimal range: from -14 dBm to -25 dBm.For the specifications
about the sensitivity and overload point of the OTU board, see the Product
Description.

● Adjust the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to
ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from -12 dBm
to -5 dBm; adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the client side of
the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range:
from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -2) dBm.
In the commissioning process, you should better commission the OTU received optical
power to the middle of the range of the above requirements.
For the Client-side CFP optical module, this ensures that the input optical power is within
the optimal range: from (Average receiver power per lane (Min) +10lgN+3) dBm to
(Average receiver power per lane (Max) +10lgN-2) dBm (where N is the number of
wavelengths of the input client-side multiplexed signal). For the 4x25Gbit/s CFP and
4x10Gbit/s CFP optical module, the value of N is 4 and 10lgN is 6. For the 10x10Gbit/s CFP
optical module, the value of N is 10 and 10lgN is 10.
For example: For the 100GBASE-LR4-10km(CFP) optical module, the average receiver
power per lane (Min) is -10.6dBm, the average receiver power per lane (Max) is 4.5dBm,
and the number of wavelengths is 4. Therefore, this ensures that the input optical power is
within the optimal range: from -1.6dBm to 8.5dBm.
For example: For the 100GBASE-10×10G-10km-CFP optical module, the average receiver
power per lane (Min) is -10.8dBm, the average receiver power per lane (Max) is 3.5dBm,
and the number of wavelengths is 10. Therefore, this ensures that the input optical power
is within the optimal range: from 2.2dBm to 11.5dBm.
● Confirm the optical preamplifier on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive
end has output the standard optical power of single wavelength. When this
occurs, the input optical power on the WDM side can be adjusted based on
the actual optical power by adding, changing or removing the fixed optical
attenuators.
● After commissioning, insert a fiber into the input optical port on the OTU
when the input optical power reaches a normal state.
8.1.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the tributary board.

Optical power meter
Before the optical signals of a single wavelength are sent to the corresponding
tributary board, adjust the input optical power by adjusting an MVOA or adding a
fixed attenuator at the RXn on the client side of the tributary board. This ensures
that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity + 3)
dBm to (overload point - 2) dBm.

For the Client-side CFP optical module, this ensures that the input optical power is within the
optimal range: from (Average receiver power per lane (Min) +10lgN+3) dBm to (Average
receiver power per lane (Max) +10lgN-2) dBm (where N is the number of wavelengths of the
input client-side multiplexed signal). For the 4x25Gbit/s CFP and 4x10Gbit/s CFP optical module,
the value of N is 4 and 10lgN is 6. For the 10x10Gbit/s CFP optical module, the value of N is 10
and 10lgN is 10.
For example: For the 100GBASE-LR4-10km(CFP) optical module, the average receiver power per
lane (Min) is -10.6dBm, the average receiver power per lane (Max) is 4.5dBm, and the number
of wavelengths is 4. Therefore, this ensures that the input optical power is within the optimal
range: from -1.6dBm to 8.5dBm.
For example: For the 100GBASE-10×10G-10km-CFP optical module, the average receiver power
per lane (Min) is -10.8dBm, the average receiver power per lane (Max) is 3.5dBm, and the
number of wavelengths is 10. Therefore, this ensures that the input optical power is within the
optimal range: from 2.2dBm to 11.5dBm.
A 100GBASE-ER4 optical module supports a maximum of 40 km transmission distance and is
mainly applicable to the scenario in which the transmission distance is 10 km to 40 km. For the
transmission distance less than 10 km, a 100GBASE-LR4 optical module is required. For a
100GBASE-ER4 (CFP) module, a fixed optical attenuator (FOA) can be added so that the total
receive optical power (P) is less than -4 dBm. To be specific, no FOA is required in case of P < -4
dBm, a 5 dB FOA is required at the receive end of the module in case of -4 dBm ≤ P ≤ 1 dBm,
and a 10 dB FOA is required at the receive end of the module in case of 1 dBm ≤ P ≤ 6 dBm.
8.1.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the line board.

Optical power meter
● Before the optical signals of single wavelength are accessed by the
corresponding line board, adjust the input power of the WDM-side optical
port IN of the line board by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator
to be within the optimal range: from -12 dBm to -5 dBm.
In the commissioning process, you should better commission the line board received optical
power to the middle of the range of the above requirements.
In the Colorless scenario, the total optical power at the receive end of the TNU2N402P
board is lower than +10 dBm.
● Generally the commissioning of the output optical power is not needed.
However, if the station is an OADM station or configured with wavelength
protection, adjust the VOA of the output port on the WDM side of the line
board to make the gain flatness for each add wavelength amplified by the
OAU to be less than 2 dB.
8.1.5 Commissioning Turbo WDM boards of OptiX OSN 9800

(200G/400G/800G)
After Turbo WDM boards are installed, you need to commission the Turbo WDM
boards. The Turbo WDM feature allows the system to automatically perform

commissioning on optical power, without any manual intervention. Users only

need to check the optical power of Turbo WDM boards
Prerequisites
Turbo WDM boards have been installed and fibers have been correctly connected.

NMS
When Turbo WDM is applied on the following recommended networks,
commissioning system power is not necessary. Instead, you only need to check
optical power for Turbo WDM boards.
● The NP400 board can be independently used in a 200G system where the
insertion loss is less than 20dB (60 km @ 0.3 dB/km) and no OA board is
configured to support the transmission of 200G services
● The NP400 board can work with the NP400E board in a 400G system where
the insertion loss is less than 20dB (60 km @ 0.3 dB/km) and no OA board is
configured to support the transmission of 400G services.
● The NP400E board must work with the NP400 board in a 400G system.
Commissioning Networking Diagram

Figure 8-2 shows the commissioning for a 200G network; Figure 8-3 shows the
commissioning for a 400G network.
Figure 8-2 Commissioning for a 200G network


Procedure
Step 1 Check the output optical power in each channel on the Turbo WDM board. If the
output optical power in any channel is inappropriate, replace the board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. Choose Configuration >
Optical Power Management from the left Function Tree.
2. Click Query.
3. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed showing that the operation was
successful. Click Close.
The NPO2 Turbo WDM board's WDM-side optical module launches proper optical power.
For details on proper optical power, see NP400/NP400E Specification in the Hardware
Description.
Step 2 Check input optical power of each channel on the Turbo WDM board. with
reference to 1. If the input optical power is abnormal, verify whether the line
attenuation complies with the design.
Input optical power at Turbo WDM board's WDM-side input optical interface is within the
range: (receiver sensitivity dBm) to (overload dBm). For details on sensitivity and overload,
see NP400/NP400E Specification in the Hardware Description.
----End

8.1.6 Commissioning Optical Power of Packet Service Board

This section describes how to adjust the input optical power of packet service
board.
Prerequisites
An packet service board cannot function as a master or slave subrack but an
independent NE.

Optical power meter
Context
For the packet service board specifications, see the Hardware Description.
● For the packet service board : adjust the input optical power at the RXn port
on the client side of the board to ensure that the input optical power is within
the optimal range: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -5) dBm.
● Confirm the optical preamplifier on the WDM side of the packet service board
at the receive end has output the standard optical power of single
wavelength. When this occurs, the input optical power on the WDM side can
be adjusted based on the actual optical power by adding, changing or
removing the fixed optical attenuators.
● After commissioning, insert a fiber into the input optical port on the packet
service board when the input optical power reaches a normal state.
8.1.7 Testing Specifications of an TDM Board

If the received optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the
equipment. When this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the
equipment can be damaged. By testing the specifications of the optical ports, you
can check whether the received/transmitted optical power for each optical port on
the equipment is normal.
The test items are the mean launched optical power and actual received optical
power of an optical interface board.
NOTICE
If the rate of the optical port is variable, add the logical port with the
corresponding rate through the NMS before testing the specifications of this
optical port.

8.1.7.1 Testing the Mean Launched Optical Power of Optical Interface

Boards
If the mean launched optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on
the equipment. When this occurs, the services are affected and the components of
the equipment can be damaged. This section describes how to test the mean
launched optical power of an optical interface board. This test is performed to
ensure that the mean launched optical power of each port is correct.
Prerequisites
The optical port to be tested must be enabled.
The optical port of certain TDM optical interface boards is disabled by default. Before
performing the test, you need to check whether the optical port to be tested is enabled.
Determine if it is enabled by doing as follows: In the NE Explorer window of the NMS or
NMS LCT, select the board to be tested. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface, and check
the status of the Laser Switch in the list. The status should be Open.
The optical fiber connections must be tested to ensure the optical fibers are
connected correctly.

Optical power meter, fiber jumpers with different connectors, optical fiber
connectors, fiber cleaning tools
Test Connection Diagram

Figure 8-5 shows the connections for testing the mean launched optical power of
an optical interface board.

Figure 8-5 Connection diagram for testing the mean launched optical power of an
optical interface board.
Precautions
During NE commissioning, avoid directly exposing your eyes to the laser light.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the optical fiber from the OUT port of the optical interface board to be
tested. Cap the removed optical fiber with a protective cap.
Step 2 Use the test jumper to connect the OUT port and the optical power meter.
The port of the optical power meter varies. Select a fiber jumper with the corresponding
connector.
Step 3 Identify the board feature code and the type of the corresponding optical port by
referring to the section that describes the board bar code in the Hardware
Description. Query the specifications of the corresponding optical port by referring
to the Hardware Description. By doing this, you can obtain the working
wavelength for the optical port to be tested.

Step 4 Set the test wavelength of the optical power meter according to the working
wavelength of the optical port.
Step 5 Check the value displayed on the optical power meter. Record the value when it
becomes stable. The recorded value is the mean launched optical power. It should
be within the range of the transmitted optical power for this optical port, specified
in the Hardware Description.
Step 6 If the actual transmitted optical power is outside the range, check and clean the
optical fiber connectors used for the equipment test and the optical power meter.
For more information, see "Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors"
in the Supporting Tasks. After cleaning the connectors, repeat Steps 1-5.
Step 7 After the test is complete, reconnect the optical fiber to the test optical port.
----End
8.1.7.2 Testing the Actual Received Optical Power of an Optical Interface

Board
If the received optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the
equipment. When this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the
equipment can be damaged. This section describes how to test the actual received
optical power for an interface board. This test is performed to ensure the actual
received optical power for each port is correct.
Prerequisites
● The test of optical fiber connections must be complete. Ensure that the
optical fibers are connected correctly.
● The test result of the mean launched optical power at the optical port must
be normal.
● The fibers for the opposite station must be routed to the ODF of the local
station. In addition, the opposite station must be commissioned and powered
on.

Optical power meter, optical fiber connectors

Figure 8-6 shows the connections for testing the actual received optical power.

Figure 8-6 Connection diagram for testing the actual received optical power for
an optical interface board
Procedure
Step 1 At the local station, remove the fiber jumper from the IN port of the optical
interface board. Connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter through the
fiber connector.
Step 2 Identify the number of the optical port by referring to the section that describes
the board bar codes in the Hardware Description. Query the specifications of the
corresponding optical port by referring to the Hardware Description. By doing this,
you can obtain the working wavelength for the optical port to be tested.
Step 3 Set the test wavelength for the optical power meter based on the working
wavelength of the optical port.
Step 4 Check the value displayed on the optical power meter. Record the value when it
becomes stable. The recorded value is the value for the actual received optical
power.
Step 5 Check whether the value of the actual received optical power is correct by
referring to the optical power range, which is specified in the Hardware
Description.
The actual received optical power should meet the following requirement:
Minimum sensibility + 3 dB ≤ Actual received optical power (measured value) ≤ Minimum
overload point – 5 dB
Step 6 If the received optical power is not correct, do as follows:

● If the received optical power is excessively low, check whether the fiber
connector, ODF fiber adapter, and optical attenuator are normal, or replace
the existing fixed optical attenuator according to the measured optical power.
For information about cleaning the fiber connector, see "Inspecting and
Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors" in the Supporting Tasks.
● If the received optical power is excessively high, check whether the optical
attenuator is normal or add an attenuator on the ODF. For information about
the values of the optical attenuators, see the Hardware Description and the
description about the actual received optical power in Step 5.

Step 7 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 until the measured value is normal.

Step 8 When the measured value is normal, reconnect the removed optical fiber to the
optical port under test.
----End
8.1.8 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier

Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the EDFA optical
amplifier board.
The EDFA optical amplifier board includes DAS1, HBA, OAU1, OBU1, , DAP, DAPXF
and OBU2.
● Five types of OAU1 are valid: OAU100, OAU101, OAU102, OAU103, OAU106
and OAU105.
● Three types of OBU1 are valid: OBU101, OBU103 and OBU104.
● One type of OBU2 is valid: OBU205.
● One type of DAS1 is valid: DAS1.
The relationship between the multiplexed signal and the single wavelength of the
optical amplifier board with regard to the optical power is as follows.
Optical power of multiplexed signal = Optical power of single wavelength + 10lgN
(where N is the number of wavelengths of the multiplexed signal)
Because the maximum output power of the HBA board is high (26 dBm), the end
face of a fiber at an optical port may be burned. To prevent this from happening,
the following two solutions can be adopted.
● 1. When there is direct fiber fusion splicing on the ODF, complete the
following operations:
– (1) Remove the flange on the ODF, and prepare to directly splice fiber 1
to fiber 2 on the ODF. See Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-7 Fiber splicing on the ODF
– (2) Cut off the redundant connectors on the fiber jumpers that are to be
spliced. Use a fiber stripper to remove the external sheath of the fiber

jumpers. If you break the 250 um bare fiber core, cut the fiber core at the
break and re-strip the fiber.
– (3) Use a fiber cutter to cut the fiber jumpers. Splice the fiber jumpers in
the standard single mode. The splice point must be free of flaws and
voids. If the splice point is not free of flaws and voids, re-splice the fiber
jumpers.
– (4) After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tube to
sheath the splice point. Also ensure that the fiber bending radius is
greater than 30 mm. The heat shrink tubes should be placed in the
special fiber splicing box in the equipment room and be fixed by using
the matched heat shrink tube slot.
● 2. When there is fiber splicing through the E2000-E2000 connector on the
ODF, complete the following operations:
– (1) Replace the original flange on the ODF with an LSH/APC-LSH/APC
(also called the E2000-E2000) flange. The flange can only be installed on
the ODF for the SC.
– (2) Use a Ø3 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper to connect the OUT
port of the FIU board to fiber 3 of the LSH/APC-LSH/APC flange on the
ODF. See Figure 8-8.
Figure 8-8 Fiber splicing on the line side
– (3) Cut off a Ø0.9 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper of 2 m long at an

intermediate point. Connect the cut end of one of the two fiber jumpers
to the client-side line fiber at point 4, as shown in Figure 8-8.
– (4) After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tube to
sheath the splice point. Also ensure that the fiber bending radius is
greater than 30 mm. The heat shrink tubes should be placed in the
special fiber splicing box in the equipment room and be fixed by using
the matched heat shrink tube slot. The redundant fiber needs to be
spooled on the fiber management tray after the splicing.
8.1.8.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Optical Amplifier Board

This section describes how to adjust the input optical power of the optical
amplifier board.
Adjust the average single wavelength input optical power of the IN port of the
optical amplifier board to the typical input power for single wavelength ±1 dB.

Ensure that the number of wavelengths whose optical power is higher than the
typical value is equal or close to the number of wavelengths whose optical power
is smaller than the typical value.
● Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11HBA is –19 dBm (40-
channel) and –13 dBm (10-channel).
● Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN51HBA is –21.8 dBm (96-
channel).
● Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN52DAP (with the optical
amplifier module TN51OACE106) is –8.3 dBm (48-channel) and –11.3 dBm
(96-channel).
● Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN52DAP (with the optical
amplifier module TN51OACE107) is –10 dBm (48-channel) and –13 dBm (96-
channel).
● Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN52DAPXF (with the optical
amplifier module TN51OACE106) is –8.3 dBm (48-channel) and –11.3 dBm
(96-channel).
● Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN52DAPXF (with the optical
amplifier module TN51OACE107) is –10 dBm (48-channel) and –13 dBm (96-
channel).
● Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OBU101/TN12OBU101
is –20 dBm (40-channel) and –23 dBm (80-channel).
● Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/
TN13OAU101 is –16 dBm (40-channel) and –19 dBm (80-channel).
● Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102
● Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN12OAU100 is –14 dBm
(40-channel) and –17 dBm (80-channel).
● Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN13OAU106 is –12 dBm
(40-channel) and –15 dBm (80-channel).
● Typical single-wavelength input power of the DAS1 is -16 dBm (40-channel)
or -19 dBm (80-channel).
If the average single wavelength input optical power before the input end of the
optical amplifier board is added with a VOA that is higher than the typical input
power of single wavelength, adjust the VOA before the optical amplifier board to
make the average single wavelength input optical power reach the typical value.

For the TN12/TN13 OA board and DAS1 board, the input end of the OA is not added with a
VOA, but instead uses the inner EVOA.
If the average single wavelength input optical power before the input end of the
optical amplifier board is added with a VOA that is lower than the typical input
power of single wavelength, no VOA is needed.
8.1.8.2 Adjusting the Gains for the Optical Amplifier Board

This section describes how to adjust the gains for the optical amplifier board.
Prerequisites
The commissioning of the optical power for the upstream board must be
complete.

NMS, optical power meter
For the optical amplifier board, set the gain to ensure that the mean output
optical power equals the nominal output optical power for single wavelength.
After setting the gain, use the optical spectrum analyzer to check whether the
mean output optical power of single wavelength is in the range of nominal output
optical power of single wavelength - 0.5 dBm to nominal output optical power of
single wavelength + 0.5 dBm. If it exceeds this range, fine tune the gain value.
Procedure
Step 1 Display the NE Explorer on the NMS.
Step 2 Select the desired optical amplifier board and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 4 In the Basic Attributes tab, query Nominal Gain Upper Threshold and Nominal
Gain Lower Threshold to get the nominal range for the gain.
Step 5 In the Basic Attributes tab, query Upper Threshold of Actual Gain and Lower
Threshold of Actual Gain to get the settable gain range for the OAU board.
Step 6 Ensure that the input power of the OAU is the average input power of single
wavelength. Calculate the gain value.
Gain = Nominal output power of single wavelength - Average input power of

single wavelength
The average per-channel input optical power is measured by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 7 Check whether the gain calculated in Step 6 is within the value range.
● If the calculated gain is less than the minimum settable gain, increase the
attenuation value of the VOA at the input end of the optical amplifier board.
This decreases the average input power of single wavelength to the standard
value.
● If the calculated gain is more than the maximum settable gain, decrease the
attenuation value of the VOA at the input end of the optical amplifier board.
This increases the average input power of single wavelength. If the gain
cannot meet the requirement, confirm the network design value with the
network designer.
● If the calculated gain is within the value range, decrease the attenuation
value of the VOA at the input end of the optical amplifier board to make
single-wavelength input optical power as close to maximum nominal single-
wavelength input optical power.
Step 8 According to the results in Step 6, set the Nominal Gain of the OAU1 board in the
Basic Attributes tab to ensure the single-wavelength output optical power meets
requirements.
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 Click Query. Query the Gain displayed on the NMS. If the gain difference of the
actual value and the set nominal value is within 0.5 dB, the setting is successful. If
the setting fails, check whether the gain is within the gain range.
----End
8.1.8.3 Specifications
The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating
wavelength range, channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output
power range and maximum output power of a single wavelength.
Table 8-1 Quick reference table for optical amplifier unit
Board Channel Nomin Input Power Range per Nominal single-

Name Gain (dB) al Channel (dBm) wavelength input optical
Chann power (dBm)
el Gain
(dB) 40 channels 80 channels 40 80
channels channels
OAU100 16 to 25.5 16 -32 to -14 -32 to -17 -14 -17
22 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -20 -23
25.5 -32 to -23.5 -32 to -27.5 -23.5 -26.5
DAS1/ 20 to 31 20 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 -16 -19

OAU101
26 -32 to -22 -32 to -25 -22 -25
31 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 -27 -30
OAU102 20 to 31 20 -32 to -19 -32 to -22 -19 -22


Chann power (dBm)
el Gain
channels channels
26 -32 to -25 -32 to -28 -25 -28
31 -32 to -30 -32 -30 -32
OAU103 24 to 36 24 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -20 -23
29 -32 to -25 -32 to -28 -25 -28
36 -32 -32 -32 -32
OAU105 23 to 34 23 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 -16 -19
30 -32 to -23 -32 to -26 -23 -26
34 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 -27 -30
OAU106 16 to 23 16 -24 to -12 -24 to -15 -12 -15
19 -24 to -15 -24 to -18 -15 -18
23 -24 to -19 -24 to -22 -19 -22
OAU107 19 to 27, 19 -25 to -12 -25 to -15 -12 -15

Maximum
total 22 -25 to -15 -25 to -18 -15 -18
output 27 -25 to -20 -25 to -23 -20 -23
optical
power
23dBm
19 to 27, 19 -25 to -13 -25 to -16 -13 -16

Maximum
total 22 -25 to -16 -25 to -19 -16 -19
output 27 -25 to -21 -25 to -24 -21 -24
optical
power
22dBm
19 to 27, 19 -25 to -14 -25 to -17 -14 -17

Maximum
total 22 -25 to -17 -25 to -20 -17 -20
output 27 -25 to -22 -25 -22 -25
optical
power
21dBm
OBU101 20±1.5 20 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -20 -23
OBU103 23±1.5 23 -32 to -19 -32 to -22 -19 -22
OBU104 17±1.5 17 -32 to -17 -32 to -20 -17 -20


Chann power (dBm)
el Gain
channels channels
OBU105 23±1.5 23 -24 to -16 -24 to -19 -16 -19
OBU205 23±1.5 23 -24 to -16 -24 to -19 -16 -19

NOTE
The DAS1/OAU1/TN12OBU1/OBU2 board supports a ±2.5 dB extended gain. The extended gain is only for the
temporary use because it affects the gain flatness.
Table 8-2 Quick reference table for CRPC

Board Channel Gain (dB) Maximum Pump
Name Power (dBm)
G.652 fiber G.653 fiber LEAF fiber
CRPC03 >10 N/A N/A 29.5
ROP01 N/A N/A N/A 29.5
RPC03 >10 >16 N/A 31
Table 8-3 Quick reference table for TN11HBA

Boar Chann Typical Input Power of a Nomina Channel
d el Gain Single Wavelength (dBm) l Input Allocation (nm)
Nam (dB) Power
e 80 40 10 Range
channel channel channel (dBm)
s s s
TN11 29±1 -22 -19 -13 -25 to -3 1529 to 1561

HBA

Table 8-4 Quick reference table for TN51HBA

Boa Chan Typical Input Power of a Single Nomin Channel
rd nel Wavelength (dBm) al Allocation
Na Gain Input (nm)
me (dB) 96 80 40 10 Power
chann chann chann channe Range
els els els ls (dBm)
TN5 29±1 -21.8 -22 -19 -13 -25 to 1529 to 1561

1HB -2
A
Table 8-5 Quick reference table for RAU1/RAU2

Board Gain range (dB) Max. OUT port
Name optical power
G.652 LEAF/G. G.654B fiber (dBm)
fiber/G. 653/
654A TWRS/TW
fiber -C/
TWPLUS/
SMFLS/G.
656/
TERA_LIG
HT fiber
RAU1 19 to 33 19 to 35 19 to 29 20
RAU2 30 to 41 32 to 43 27 to 37 20
Table 8-6 Quick reference table for RAU1/RAU2

Board Name Gain range (dB) Max. OUT port optical
power (dBm)
G.652 fiber LEAF fiber
TN11SRAU01 22 to 30 22 to 28 20
TN11SRAU02 27 to 38 27 to 36 20
8.1.9 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier

This section describes the commissioning of and precautions for the deployment
of the Raman amplifier.
Table 8-7 provides the general commissioning procedures for CRPC and RAU1/
RAU2 board.

Table 8-7 General commissioning procedures for Raman board
No. Task CRPC The The The

board Raman Raman Raman
module of module of module of
RAU1/ RAU1/ RAU1/
RAU2 RAU2 RAU2
board board board
(Gain (Pump (Maximu
locking) power) m gain)
1 8.1.9.6 Y Y Y Y
Checking
the Fiber
Connectio
ns
2 8.1.9.7 Y Y Y Y
Connectin
g the Fiber
Jumpers
on the
Line Side
3 8.1.9.8 Y Y Y Y
Checking
the
Configurat
ion of the
IPA
Function
4 8.1.9.9 N Y Y Y
Configurin
g the
Working
Mode and
Fiber Type
for the
Raman
Board
5 8.1.9.10 N Y N N
Adjusting
the Gains
for the
Raman
Board
6 8.1.9.11 Y N Y N
Adjusting
the On-off
Gain of
the Raman
Board

No. Task CRPC The The The

board Raman Raman Raman
module of module of module of
RAU1/ RAU1/ RAU1/
RAU2 RAU2 RAU2
board board board
(Gain (Pump (Maximu
locking) power) m gain)
7 8.1.9.12 Y N Y N
Adjusting
the Gain
Spectrum
● "Y" indicates that the commissioning procedure should be performed.

● "N" indicates that the procedure need not be performed.
NOTE
The commissioning for the RAU1/RAU2 board involves both EDFA and Raman modules.
This topic only involves the Raman module. For the commissioning procedure for the EDFA
module, see .
8.1.9.1 Preparations
This section describes the requirements on the fiber line, precautions, and tools
required for commissioning the Raman amplifier.
Compared with general amplifiers, the Raman amplifier has a lower noise figure.
When general amplifiers and the Raman amplifier are used in one system, the
system can achieve better OSNR. The strong pump light output from the LINE
optical port on a Raman amplifier enters a fiber line. Therefore, disable the pump
laser on the Raman amplifier before the testing.
Before you enter the equipment room, perform the following operations:
● Wear laser-protective glasses (Class 4). Wear long-sleeve ESD coat, shoe
covers, and protective gloves.
● Confirm the number of adopted Raman boards. Be familiar with the fiber
connection between the local Raman boards and remote boards. Be familiar
with the connection between these fibers and the upstream/downstream
sites. Be familiar with the location of the connector. Take the drawings into
the equipment room.
● Prepare tools for fiber cleaning: CLETOP cassette cleaner, a video fiberscope
(400x or higher magnification). Clean solvent with wipes. Use only video
fiberscopes. For more information, see Inspecting and Cleaning Optical Fiber
Connectors and Adapters.
● NMS or Web LCT has been installed on the local engineer's PC before the
single station commissioning is performed. This section uses the NMS as an
example to describe the commissioning procedure.
After the CRPC board works properly, to connect the board to a subrack on
another NE, you must reset the board instead of removing and re-inserting the

network cable. The operation of resetting the CRPC board, however, may interrupt
services.
8.1.9.2 Safety Mechanism and Safety Precautions

The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. This section describes
the safety mechanism and safety precautions for a Raman amplifier.
Safety Mechanism
The raman pump laser output power level of the Raman board is CLASS 4,
indicating that the maximum output optical power of each optical interface is
above 27 dBm (500 mW).
In the DWDM system, an optical fiber break, an equipment failure or optical
connector removal may lead to the loss of optical signals. To prevent personal
injuries resulting from laser radiation, the system provides the IPA function. After
the IPA function is configured, the laser safety class of the Raman board is
HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the
optical port on the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
This ensures personal safety for maintenance personnel.
Huawei WDM equipment adopts the following safety mechanisms to prevent
human injury and equipment damage:
● When the system is configured with IPA function, the system determines
whether to enable or disable the lasers of Raman amplifiers according to the
fiber link status. It is recommended not to operate a laser manually on the
NMS.
● When a Raman laser is enabled, IPA cannot be deleted or disabled manually
on the NMS.
● On the NMS, view the value of Laser Status of a Raman board and the value
of IPA Status of IPA.
Safety Precautions
The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. Therefore, only an
engineer who has received trainings on WDM products and are familiar with
safety instructions can perform operations on WDM products. Take the following
precautions when using the Raman amplifier:
● Do not stare into the optical interface during the installation and
maintenance of the fiber, because the laser beam inside the optical fiber
would hurt your eyes.
● Do not insert or remove a fiber when the laser is enabled
When the laser of the Raman amplifier is enabled, do not insert or remove
the fiber connector. Otherwise, the laser may result in fire after the fiber
connectors are burned or there may be personal injuries especially to the
eyes.
● Clean the fiber surface.
The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. If the surface of the
fiber jumper is dirty, the filth of the fiber surface absorbs the energy and
heats. As a result, the jumper is easy to be damaged or burned, and the
system performance is affected.

● Perform cable testing.

The gain medium of the Raman amplifier is the transmission cable. Hence,
the type and quality of the transmission cable influences the performance of
the Raman amplifier. If the fiber, especially the end near the Raman amplifier
has the poor quality (big loss point or large reflection factor), the system
performance is greatly influenced, and may result in the line being burned.
Hence, testing the cable before enabling the Raman amplifier is necessary.
● Dedicate the LSH/APC fiber connector.
The reverse output optical power of the Raman amplifier reaches 30 dBm.
Hence, the fiber connector must be the dedicated LSH/APC fiber connector. If
the PC fiber connector is used, a large reflection is formed, which damages
the fiber connector.
● Do not bend the fiber.
The bend radius of the fiber jumper of the Raman amplifier should meet the
requirements (greater than 50 mm) and cannot be bent. Otherwise, the fiber
jumper will burn.
● Enable the laser of the Raman amplifier on the NMS.
For security consideration, if the laser is disabled after the Raman amplifier is
working normally, the Raman amplifier will stop working. You can issue the
corresponding command on the NMS to enable the laser of the Raman
amplifier.
● Review the jumper connection before enabling of the laser.
Before enabling the laser of the Raman amplifier, you must connect the
jumper at the input port and the corresponding ODF subrack jumper.
● Meet output optical power requirements.
When the Raman amplifier is used, the pump optical power is high. The
requirements of the near-end fiber increase directly with the optical power.
High optical power may bring damages to equipment and injuries to human
body. Hence for the CRPC board, and the Pump power mode of the RAU1/
RAU2 board, the power of the Raman pumping light should be as low as
possible on the premise that the on-off gain is not less than 10 dB.
8.1.9.3 Requirements on Cleanness of the Fiber Connector Endface

Before powering on the Raman amplifier, ensure that the endface of the fiber
connector is clean.
Use the fiber microscope to check the jumper fiber endface. You can see that the
clean fiber endface is a gray circle. Sometimes, there is a light gray small circle in
the middle of the gray circle, which is the fiber core, as shown in Figure 8-9 and
Figure 8-10.

Figure 8-9 Endface of clean fiber connector 1
Figure 8-10 Endface of clean fiber connector 2
Figure 8-11 shows the endface with black dust. Wipe the dust away with the
paper for cleaning the fiber. If the dust remains there, use the alcohol to clean it.
Never use the detergent or refractive index matching liquid other than the alcohol.
Otherwise, the bond in the fiber connector may be dissolved. If the dust still
remains there after cleaning, it indicates that this spot of the endface of the fiber
is damaged. If the damaged spot is the fiber core, it indicates that the fiber core is
burned-out. In this case, you need to replace the jumper. See Figure 8-12.
Figure 8-11 Endface of stained fiber connector

Figure 8-12 Endface of burnt-out fiber
8.1.9.4 Requirements on the Fiber Line

The additional loss of a single point on the fiber line should meet the
requirements.
Whether the single-point loss exceeds the threshold must be determined by performing a
bi-directional test. Use an OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) to test the
additional loss at both ends of the fiber line and calculate the average of the tested two
loss values.
Before the deployment of the Raman amplifier, OTDR must be used to determine if the
quality of the local 40 km optical cable meets the requirements of deployment.
● 0 km-20 km (0 mi.- 12 mi.): Do not use fiber connectors. The fibers should be
connected to each other by splicing. If the fiber connector is used,
components may be burned and the on-off gain of the Raman amplifier is
affected.
● 0 km-10 km (0 mi.-6 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.1 dB
(G.652) or 0.2 dB (G.655 LEAF, G.653, TW-RS, TW-C).
● 10 km-20 km (6 mi.- 12 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.2
dB (G.652) or 0.4 dB (G.655 LEAF, G.653, TW-RS, TW-C).
● 20 km-30 km (12 mi.- 18 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.4
dB.
● 30 km-40 km (18 mi.- 24 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 1
dB.
● Over 40 km (24 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 2 dB.
● The single-point return loss is not less than 40 dB.
8.1.9.5 Method for Testing the Fiber Cabling Quality

The section describes the method of testing the fiber cabling quality.

Prerequisite
Set the relevant parameters for the optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR). If
field parameters cannot be determined and standard G.652 optical fibers are used,
use the default OTDR settings.
Precautions
1. Before using OTDR, make sure that OTDR connects to the fiber connector on
the fiber cable side. OTDR cannot connect to the connector on the equipment
side. Make sure that the fiber between the opposite station and the optical
interface board is disconnected, to prevent damage to the receiving optical
modules because of high optical power. Caution: An optical power instrument
can tell us that the optical power of OTDR is low. However, because the light
from OTDR is not composed of continuous signals, the pulse peak power is
about 20 dBm. Hence, perform operations carefully to prevent damage to
human body or equipment.
2. Before testing a fiber, connect the output interface of OTDR to the fiber to be
tested by using a launch cable. Otherwise, the near-end connection loss
cannot be measured correctly. Decide the length of the launch cable based on
the test item. When you are going to test the fiber quality of a distributed
Raman fiber amplifier, use a launch cable with the length of 5 km or so.
When you need to test the near-end connection loss of a normal fiber, use a
launch cable with the length from 300 m to 2000 m.
3. Make sure that the fiber end is clean. Otherwise, the test result might be
affected. Before each test, clean the fiber end by using dedicated fiber
cleaning tools. Nondedicated cleaning solvent may dissolve the adhesives
inside fiber connectors.
4. Optical output interfaces of OTDR are normally of FC/PC or FC/APC type.
Make sure that the connector type of the fiber to be tested matches the
interface type of OTDR.

OTDR and fiber.
Procedure
Step 1 Before the test, use a 5-kilometer transitional fiber (the same type as the line
fiber) to connect the OTDR output interface to the fiber.
● Ensure that the endface of the fiber is clean. Otherwise, the measurements will be
affected.
● The OTDR test value contains a dead zone of a certain length. You can use a transition
fiber to avoid this dead zone, and thus the real attenuation curve of the transmission
fiber can be tested.
Step 2 First, test the loss of the entire fiber. It is recommended to use the automatic test
function of the OTDR. The parameters are set by the instrument.
Step 3 Test the cable near-end loss of the Raman amplifier manually. Set the basic
parameters for the fiber, for example, the refractive index n and the backscatter
coefficient η.

In general, the values of the two parameters are set by the fiber manufacturer. If they are
not set by the manufacturer, use the default values on the instrument, which will not affect
the inspection result of the fiber quality.
Step 4 Set the following parameters of the OTDR. Retain default values for other
parameters of the OTDR.
----End
Example
Parameter setting
Test the cable near-end loss of the Raman amplifier manually. Set the following
parameters manually for the OTDR.
● Wavelength select
The wavelength must be the same as the transmission wave length. In
general, it is 1550 nm.
Some OTDRs have two fiber interfaces, which are output interfaces of two different
wavelengths. Make sure that the fiber is connected to the correct interface before the
test.
● Pulse width
Choose the pulse width as narrow as possible. At the same time, ensure that
the fiber has no noise as far as 30 kilometers. You can test the narrowest
pulse width first and determine if the curve is smooth in the 30th kilometer. If
the curve is not smooth, it indicates that the fiber has noise. Then, choose a
wide pulse width to test. When there is no noise in the 30th kilometer, it
indicates that the pulse width is the correct one. See Figure 8-13.
Figure 8-13 Smooth OTDR curve indicating that the fiber has no noise

● Measurement range
The best measurement range is more than two times long of the tested fiber.
This prevents the far end of the fiber from affecting the near end in the test.
For some OTDRs, after you choose a pulse width, the measurement range
that you can choose has an upper limit. You must choose the maximum value.
● Probe time
The longer the probe time you set, the higher the signal-to-noise ratio. For
the test to the near end, you do not need to set a very long time. Thirty
seconds is long enough for the test.
Result Analysis
In the normal case, the slope of the fiber (a roll or several rolls) curve is the same
in the OTDR test. If the slope of a segment is steeper, it indicates that the segment
of fiber attenuates a lot. If the main body of the curve is irregular and the slope
changes frequently, is bent or arced, it indicates that the fiber is aging heavily and
cannot be used for communications. See Figure 8-14.
The OTDR describes the exception points of the fiber by events. The events are
grouped into two categories: reflection event and non-reflection event.
● The reflection events refer to the events that cause great reflection
magnitude, such as the loss and reflection caused by the active connector,
mechanical connector, or breakpoint in the fiber. The changes of the
backscattering level value determine the loss of the reflection event. The
reflection summit on the backscattering curve determines the reflection value.
Figure 8-14 shows the Fresnel reflection of the breakpoint at the end of the
fiber.
● Non-reflection events refer to the events that the loss is caused by the fusion
splice and micro-bend in the fiber. The events do not cause reflection. It is
represented in the OTDR test curve with a sudden falling step attached to the
backscattering level. Thus, the change in the y-axis represents the loss of the
event, such as the loss of the fusion splice point in Figure 8-14.
Figure 8-14 Analysis on the OTDR test results
The TN12RAU1 or TN12RAU2 board has a built-in OTDR laser and provides the
fiber connection detect (FCD) function. You can press the FCD button on the front

panel to trigger FCD. After installing a TN12RAU1 or TN12RAU2 board, inserting a

fiber to the board, and powering on the board to start the board software, you
can press the FCD button to perform FCD, regardless of whether logical boards are
configured. The FCD will last 30 seconds. The detection process and results can be
identified by the FCD indicator blinking frequency and indicator status. If the fiber
connection is normal, the FCD indicator is steady green.
NOTICE
When the automatic OTDR detection function is disabled for the pump laser on
the TN12RAU1 or TN12RAU2 board, the board cannot detect whether the end
faces of its fiber connectors are contaminated. As a result, fiber burning may occur
if the pump laser is turned on when the end face of a fiber connector on the
board is contaminated.
8.1.9.6 Checking the Fiber Connections

This section describes the method of checking the fiber connections of the Raman
amplifier.
Prerequisites
The fiber connections on the optical amplifier board must be correct.
Generally, the Raman amplifier is used in the case of extremely low input optical
power. When the SYS port of the Raman amplifier is connected to an optical
amplifier board, the variable optical attenuator (VOA) is not required and it
should be replaced with a fiber.

● Optical power meter.
● Optical fiber scope with 400x magnification. A video fiberscope is
recommended.
● CLETOP cassette cleaner.
● Clean solvent. Use Isoamylol or propyl. Alcohol or formalin cannot be used.
● Non-woven lens tissue, lint-free wipes, or fiber cleaning tissue. Non-woven
lens tissue is recommended.
● Compressed air.
● Special cleaning roll.
● Optical cleaning sticks or cotton swabs used to clean optical connectors.
Precautions
NOTICE
● Strictly comply with the following procedure to ensure the operation safety.
● The LINE port of the Raman board has extremely high output optical power. Be
very careful during operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the Raman board is in "power-off" state before any operation. Do not
completely insert the Raman board in the designated slot. That is, the board can
be placed in the designated slot but not plugged thoroughly. In this case, the
board will not receive power from the subrack.
Step 2 Determine if the SYS port of the Raman board is well connected to the IN port of
the FIU or optical amplifier board with fibers.
Step 3 Before you connect the line-side fiber to the LINE port of Raman board, ensure
that the fiber loss is normal and that the connection surface of the fiber is clean.
Check this with a video fiberscope (400x or higher magnification).
Step 4 The connection surface should have no dust or scratches. If there is any,
immediately replace the line-side fiber. It is recommended that the customer
prepares spare fibers.
----End
8.1.9.7 Connecting the Fiber Jumpers on the Line Side

This section describes how to connect the fiber jumpers on the line side of the
Raman amplifier.

Fiber cutter, fiber stripper, fusion splicer, heat shrink tubing
Precautions
NOTICE
● The Raman amplifier board must be powered off before the fiber jumpers are
spliced, and the personnel to splice the fiber jumpers must be experienced in
fusion splicing.
● Ensure that the endfaces of fiber connectors are clean before you install the
fiber connectors.
● The flange must be cleaned using an ultrasonic cleaner.
● To ensure the quality of fiber connectors, it is recommended that you insert and
remove an E2000-E2000 connector for less than 500 times.
Context
The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. In this case, if the
endface of a fiber connector inserted to a port on the Raman amplifier is
contaminated, the probability is high that the fiber endface is damaged. The high
output optical power can cause eye damage or skin burns in case of operator
error. The Raman amplifier has very strict requirements on the loss of the near-
end line fiber. The fiber should have no connector within the distance of 0 km to
20 km (12 mi.) and fibers should be connected to each other by means of fusion

splicing. There are two fiber splicing modes. (Select the slicing mode according to
the actual situations on site.)
Fiber Splicing Probabilit Risks of Difficulty Difficulty Preferenc

Mode on the y of Personal of On-Site of e Level
ODF Endface Injury Operation Maintena
Damage nce
Direct fiber None None Medium Low High

fusion splicing
on the ODF
Fiber splicing Low Very low Medium Medium Medium

through the
E2000-E2000
connector on
the ODFa
a: When fibers splice through the E2000-E2000 connector on the ODF, purchase
an E2000 ODF box for fiber routing and installation. For details, see the E2000–
ODF BOX Installation Guide.
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of direct fiber fusion splicing on the ODF, the procedure is as follows:
1. Remove the flange on the ODF, and ready to directly splice fiber 1 to fiber 2
on the ODF. The CRPC board shown is used as an example.
2. Cut off the redundant connectors on the fiber jumpers to be spliced, and use
a fiber stripper to remove the external sheath of the fiber jumpers. If you
break a 250 um bare fiber core, cut the fiber core at the break and re-strip the
fiber.
3. Add a heat shrink tubing to one of the fiber jumper to protect the melting
point after fiber splicing.
4. Use a fiber cutter to cut the fiber jumpers. Then, splice the fiber jumpers in
the standard single mode. The splice point must be free of flaws or voids.
Otherwise, re-splice the fiber jumpers.
5. After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tubing to
sheath the splice point. In addition, ensure that the fiber bending radius is
greater than 50 mm. The heat shrink tubing should be placed in the special
fiber splicing box in the equipment room and be fixed by using the matched
heat shrink tubing slot.

Step 2 In the case of fiber splicing through the E2000-E2000 connector on the ODF, the
procedure is as follows:
1. Replace the original flange on the ODF with an LSH/APC-LSH/APC (also
called E2000-E2000) flange.
2. Use a Ø3 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper to connect the LINE port of the
CRPC board to fiber 3 of the LSH/APC-LSH/APC flange on the ODF. The CRPC
board shown is used as an example.
3. Cut off a Ø0.9 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper of 2 m long at an

intermediate point. Add a heat shrink tubing to one of the fiber jumper that is
cut off or the customer line cable to protect the melting point after fiber
splicing. Then splice the cutoff end of the fiber with the customer line cable at
point specified by 4 in the figure above.
4. After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tubing to
sheath the splice point. In addition, ensure that the fiber bending radius is
greater than 50 mm. The heat shrink tubing should be placed in the special
fiber splicing box in the equipment room and be fixed by using the matched
heat shrink tubing slot. The redundant fiber after the splicing needs to be
spooled on the fiber management tray.
Step 3 Insert the Raman board thoroughly into the designated slot. If this is a new
cabinet that is installed, proceed in powering on the cabinet and the
corresponding subrack. If the cabinet and the subrack are already in service and
therefore powered on, see 8.1.9.8 Checking the Configuration of the IPA
Function.
----End
8.1.9.8 Checking the Configuration of the IPA Function

This section describes the procedure for checking the configuration of the IPA
function when you commission the Raman amplifier.
Prerequisites
When set Working Mode of the RAU1/RAU2 boards to Gain locking or
Maximum gain, you must set Fiber Type as the actual fiber type.

Precautions
NOTICE
The optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. It is recommended to configure

the IPA function should be previously. When a CRPC board is configured, set the
threshold for the detection board when configuring the IPA function with the
detection board. Before the commissioning at each station, disable the IPA
function and the laser of the Raman board.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management
from the Function Tree. For more information regarding IPA configuration, refer
to .
Step 2 Ensure that the IPA Status attribute of the IPA Group is Disabled. If not, set them
to Disabled and click Apply.
----End
8.1.9.9 Configuring the Working Mode and Fiber Type for the Raman Board
This section describes how to configure Working Mode and Fiber Type for the
RAU1 board.
Prerequisites
● The RAU1/RAU2 board must be working properly.
● When the LINE ports of the RAU1/RAU2 board is configured to Gain locking
or Maximum gain mode, you should set the Fiber Type to the type of
physical fibers that have been used.

NMS
Procedure
Step 1 Set Working Mode for the RAU1/RAU2 board as required.
1. Navigate to the NE Explorer. In the Function Tree, select the desired RAU1/
RAU2 board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface.
2. Click Advanced Attributes. Set Working Mode to Gain locking, Maximum
gain, or Pump power as required for the LINE port.
3. Click Apply.
For the OUT port of the RAU1/RAU2 board, Working Mode can be set to Gain locking or
Power locking.

Step 2 Set the fiber type to the type of physical fibers that have been used.
1. In the Advanced Attributes tab. set Fiber Type to the type of physical fibers
that have been used.
2. Click Apply.
----End
8.1.9.10 Adjusting the Gains for the Raman Board

This section describes how to adjust the gains for the RAU board.
Prerequisites
● The fiber connections on the RAU board must be correct.
● The commissioning must be performed after all the current services are
added.
● Return loss detection is enabled.
● The Raman module of the RAU board must work under Gain locking.

Optical power meter, NMS
Precautions
The return loss detection of RAU is enabled by default. If the RL_CRITICAL_LOW or

RL_CRITICAL_HI alarm is reported during commissioning, remove the alarm by referring to
Alarm and Event Handling.
Setting the RAU1 board gain

If the RAU1 board is used in the system, set the gain of the Raman module and
EDFA module for the different types of the fibers by referring to Table 8-8 and
Table 8-9.
Table 8-8 Setting the RAU1 board gain in a system using G.652 fibers
Loss(dB) Gain(dB)-Raman Gain(dB)-EDFA Remarks
19 5 14 When the line loss

is in the range of
20 6 19 dB to 24 dB
21 7 (smaller than 24
dB), keep the
22 8 EDFA gain at 14
dB and set the
Raman amplifier
gain to ensure
that the line loss

23 9 meets the
requirement.
L 10 L - 10 When the line loss

is in the range of
24 dB to 33 dB,
keep the Raman
amplifier gain at
10 dB and set the
EDFA gain to
ensure that the
line loss meets
the requirement.
Table 8-9 Setting the RAU1 board gain in a system using G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C
fibers
19 5 14 When the line loss

is in the range of
20 6 19 dB to 26 dB
21 7 (smaller than 26
dB), keep the
22 8 EDFA gain at 14
dB and set the
23 9 Raman amplifier
gain to ensure
24 10
that the line loss
25 11 meets the
requirement.
L 12 L - 12 When the line loss

is in the range of
26 dB to 35 dB,
keep the Raman
amplifier gain at
12 dB and set the
EDFA gain to
ensure that the
line loss meets
the requirement.
Setting the RAU2 board gain

If the RAU2 board is used in the system, set the gain of the Raman module and
EDFA module for the different types of the fibers by referring to Table 8-10 and
Table 8-11.

Table 8-10 Setting the RAU2 board gain in a system using G.652 fibers
22 10 20 22 <= Loss (L) <

30 dB
23
Ensure that the
24 gain of the
Raman and EDFA
25 modules keep
unchanged and
26
adjust the
27 attenuation of the
VOA between the
28 Raman module
and the EDFA
29 module to ensure
that the line loss
meets the
requirement.
L 10 L - 10 30 <= Loss (L) <=

41 dB
Ensure that the
gain of the
Raman module
consistently
remains at 10 dB
and adjust the
gain of the EDFA
module to ensure
that the line loss
meets the
requirement.
Table 8-11 Setting the RAU2 board gain in a system using G.653/LEAF fibers
22 12 20 22 <= Loss (L) <

32 dB
23
Ensure that the
24 gain of the
Raman and EDFA
25 modules keep
unchanged and
26
adjust the
27 attenuation of the
VOA between the
28 Raman module
and the EDFA

29 module to ensure
that the line loss
30 meets the
requirement.
31
L 12 L - 10 32 <= Loss (L) <=

43 dB
Ensure that the
gain of the
Raman module
consistently
remains at 10 dB
and adjust the
gain of the EDFA
module to ensure
that the line loss
meets the
requirement.
Setting the SRAU board gain

If the SRAU board is used in the system, set the gain of the Raman module and
EDFA module for the different types of the fibers by referring to Table 8-12~Table
8-15
Table 8-12 Setting the SRAU01 board gain in a system using G.652 fibers
22 14 8 22<=Loss<26dB
Ensure that the
23 15
gain of the
24 16 Raman module
consistently
25 17 remains at 8 dB
and adjust the
26 18
gain of the EDFA
module to ensure
that the line loss
meets the
requirement.
L 18 L-18 27<=Loss(L)<=30d
B

Table 8-13 Setting the SRAU02 board gain in a system using G.652 fibers
27 14 13 27<=Loss<31dB
Ensure that the
28 15
gain of the
29 16 Raman module
consistently
30 17 remains at 13 dB
and adjust the
31 18
gain of the EDFA
module to ensure
that the line loss
meets the
requirement.
L 18 L-18 32<=Loss(L)<=38d
B
Table 8-14 Setting the SRAU01 board gain in a system using LEAF fibers
22 14 8 22<=Loss<24dB
Ensure that the
23 15
gain of the
24 16 Raman module
consistently
remains at 8 dB
and adjust the
gain of the EDFA
module to ensure
that the line loss
meets the
requirement.
L 16 L-16 25<=Loss(L)<=28d
B
Table 8-15 Setting the SRAU02 board gain in a system using LEAF fibers
27 14 13 27<=Loss<29dB
Ensure that the
28 15
gain of the
Raman module
consistently
remains at 13 dB

29 16 and adjust the

gain of the EDFA
module to ensure
that the line loss
meets the
requirement.
L 16 L-16 30<=Loss(L)<=36d
B
Legend Information
Procedure
Step 1 Close the pump laser of the Raman board.
1. Select the desired RAU board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
2. Select By Board/Port (Channel).
3. Click the Basic Attributes tab, and ensure that the Laser Status of the LINE
ports of the Raman board WDM interfaces are Off. If not, set them to Off
and click Apply.
Step 2 Use an optical power meter to measure the actual input optical power on the
LINE port of the Raman board and check whether it is greater than 1 dBm. If it is
greater than 1 dBm, add a fixed attenuator to the transmit end of the upstream
site so that the input optical power on the LINE port meets the requirement. Note
that the input optical power on the LINE port of the RAU board must be within
the range of -40 dBm to +1 dBm. If it is greater than +1 dBm, the Raman amplifier
may be damaged.
Step 3 After repairing the fiber , open the pump laser on Raman amplifiers manually. In
the Basic Attributes tab, set the Laser Status of the LINE port of the Raman
board WDM interfaces are On, and click Apply.
Step 4 Set the gain of the RAU board by referring to Table 8-8, Table 8-9, Table 8-10
and Table 8-11.
1. Click Basic Attributes. Set Nominal Gain (dB) for the LINE and OUT ports
according to the actual line loss.

2. Click Apply.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Query the performance event about gain for the LINE port.
1. In the Ne Explorer, select the desired board and choose Performance >
Current Performance from the Function Tree.
2. Click Query.
8.1.9.11 Adjusting the On-off Gain of the Raman Board

This section describes how to adjust the on-off gain of the Raman board.
Prerequisites
● The fiber connections on the optical amplifier board must be correct.
● The commissioning must be performed after all the current services are
added.
● The Raman module of the RAU1/RAU2 board must work under Pump power.

Spectrum analyzer, NMS.
Precautions
The return loss detection of TN11RAU is enabled by default. If the RL_CRITICAL_LOW or

RL_CRITICAL_HI alarm is reported during commissioning, remove the alarm by referring to
RL_CRITICAL_LOW or RL_CRITICAL_HI.

The gain medium of the reverse Raman amplifier is transmission fiber, so the gain value
depends on the type, length, and attenuation of the transmission fiber. If the gain values
are required to be the same, different fibers should correspond to different optical power of
pumps. Set the initial optical power of the Raman amplifier during network commissioning
to the optical power values and the requirement of the on-off gain of each channel in the
following table.
Table 8-16 Recommended optical power values of Raman pump for different fiber
types
Board Type Fiber Type Optical Optical On-Off gain
Power of Power of
Pump Group Pump Group
LINE-1 LINE-2
CRPC G.652 +24.0 dBm +24.0 dBm 11 dB
G.655 LEAF +24.5 dBm +24.5 dBm 13 dB
G.653/TW- +23.5 dBm +23.5 dBm 13 dB

RS/TW-C
RAU1/RAU2 G.652 +24.5 dBm +24.5 dBm 12 dB
G.655 LEAF +25.0 dBm +25.0 dBm 14 dB
G.653/TW- +24.0 dBm +24.0 dBm 14 dB

RS/TW-C
Context
The on-off gain refers to the difference between the output optical power on the
SYS port of the Raman board when the pump laser is turned on and the output
optical power when the pump laser is turned off. During the calculation of the on-
off gain, optical noise must be measured using an optical spectrum analyzer and
be considered because it may have impact on gain calculation.
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure the pump laser of the Raman board is closed.
1. Select the desired CRPC/RAU1/RAU2 board and choose Configuration >
2. Select By Board/Port (Channel).
3. Click the Basic Attributes tab, and ensure that the Laser Status of the LINE
ports of the Raman board WDM interfaces are Off. If not, set them to Off
and click Apply.
Step 2 Disconnect the fiber between the SYS port of the RAMAN board and the IN port of
the FIU or optical amplifier board.
Step 3 Connect the fiber from the SYS port to the test port of the spectrum analyzer. Scan
the spectrum. Obtain the actual signal optical power and record it.

Step 4 Select the desired CRPC/RAU1/RAU2 from the left-hand Navigator Tree, and
choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 5 Select By Board/Port(Channel) and click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 6 Set the optical power of the pump laser to the recommended value.
Step 7 Open the pump laser on Raman amplifiers manually. In the Basic Attributes tab,
set the Laser Status of the LINE port of the Raman board WDM interfaces are On,
and click Apply.
Step 8 Calculate the on-off gain of the SYS port by using the following formula:
SYS on-off gain = SYS signal output power (Raman laser enabled) - SYS signal
output power (Raman laser disabled)
Before reconnecting the SYS port of the Raman board to the IN port of the FIU board, you
must disable the laser of the Raman and IPA.
Step 9 Adjust the on-off gain.
For the different fiber type, the on-off gain of each channel must be greater than the
requirement value, which is required by the Raman board. If not, adjust the on-off gain to make
it meet the requirements.
1. Select the desired CRPC/RAU1/RAU2 in the NE Explorer, and choose

Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click Advanced Attributes. Increase the Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm) of
the CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-1 port and the CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-2 port of Optical
Interface/Channel. Increase the optical power of both groups of pumps by
0.1 dBm respectively at a time until the minimum on-off gain of each channel
is higher than the requirement value.
For the /RAU1/RAU2 board, set the Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm) of the 9(LINE)-1
and 9(LINE)-2 port in the Advanced Attributes tab.
If the pump optical power is set too high, the PUM-LBC-HIGH alarm is generated. If this alarm
occurs, the pump optical power set is excessive and must be decreased. If this alarm occurs
while the gain does not reach the requirements, shut down the pump lasers and check the line
fiber. Replace or repair the line fibers if necessary.
----End
8.1.9.12 Adjusting the Gain Spectrum

This section describes the procedure for adjusting the gain spectrum of the Raman
amplifier.
Prerequisites

The commissioning must be performed after all the current services are added.
The Raman module of the RAU1/RAU2 board must work under Pump power.

Spectrum analyzer, NMS
Procedure
Step 1 Adjust the pump power to ensure that the gain spectrum meets the requirement.
● After adjusting the on-off gain to the requirement value, determine if the
gain flatness among all the wavelengths is within 3 dB. If yes, the gain
flatness requires no adjustment.
The requirement of the on-off gain of each channel of the Raman amplifier refer to Table
8-16.
● If the gain flatness among all the wavelengths exceeds 3 dB, proceed to the
next step to adjust the pump optical power according to the Raman gain
spectrum to improve the gain flatness.
Step 2 Find the wavelengths of the highest and lowest gains.
Step 3 If the short-wavelength gain is lower than the long-wavelength gain, increase the
optical power of pump laser group 1 to elevate the shortwave gain or decrease
the optical power of pump laser group 2 to lower the long-wave gain. Adjust the
pump optical power in steps of 0.1 dBm until the optical power difference meets
the requirement. That is, the gain flatness among all the wavelengths is within 3
dB.
Step 4 If the short-wavelength gain is higher than the long-wavelength gain, decrease
the optical power of pump laser group 1 to lower the shortwave gain or increase
the optical power of pump laser group 2 to elevate the long-wave gain. Adjust the
pump optical power in steps of 0.1 dBm until the optical power difference meets
the requirement. That is, the gain flatness of each wavelength is within 3 dB.
Step 5 Retest the on-off gains to determine if the on-off gain of each wavelength is
higher than the requirement value. If not, increase the optical power of both
pump laser groups 1 and 2 in steps of 0.1 dBm until the on-off gain of each
wavelength is greater than the requirement value.
If the pump optical power is changed, the on-off gains need be retested. If the on-off gain
of any wavelength is smaller than the requirement value, the optical power of both pump
laser groups 1 and 2 need be increased to meet the gain requirement according to the new
optical power rate between the two pump laser groups. The gain difference between the
two pump laser groups cannot change.
----End
8.1.9.13 Adjusting the Optical Power of Dummy Light

For the forward Raman amplifier commissioning, to ensure normal adding and
dropping wavelength and to ease the commissioning, dummy light must be

configured to fill the empty channel. This section describes how to adjust the
optical power of dummy light.
Prerequisites
You must be an NMS user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

NMS
For a system that cannot be fully configured with service wavelengths in the initial
phase, vacant channels must be filled with wavelengths that do not carry services,
or the optical power must be increased for one or more wavelengths that do not
carry services to ensure that the input optical power of optical amplifiers (OAs)
satisfies the system requirement. The wavelengths that do not carry any services
are called dummy light wavelengths.
The networking for producing dummy light depends on the channel spacing of the
system.
● 100 GHz channel spacing
The networking for producing dummy light is OA+ITL+OA+OD, as shown in
Figure 8-16.
In a system with 100 GHz channel spacing, only even wavelengths are generally deployed.
Therefore, in the following figure, only even wavelengths in the dummy light block are
transmitted from the TE port on the ITL board to the OA board and the odd wavelengths
transmitted from the TO port on the ITL board are not used.
Figure 8-16 Networking for producing dummy light (100 GHz channel
spacing)

● 50 GHz channel spacing

The networking for producing dummy light is OA+ITL+2xOA+2xOD, as shown
in Figure 8-17.
Figure 8-17 Networking for producing dummy light (50 GHz channel
spacing)
Requirements for Commissioning Forward Raman Amplifier Boards

Commissioning of a forward Raman amplifier is to adjust the pump power of the
amplifier and the signal power allocation for each channel of the amplifier. The
adjustment is determined by the system design for the spans. To commission a
forward Raman amplifier board, an optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) or an optical
spectrum analyzing board must be used at the receive end to determine in real
time whether the OSNR flatness and optical power flatness are as expected. It is
recommended that the OSNR flatness be smaller than 1 dB and the optical power
flatness meet the system requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 Before adjusting the optical power of wavelengths that carry dummy light, ensure
that the wavelengths that carry service signals provide the optimal performance.
For details, see .
Step 2 Set the EVOA attenuation for the M40V board's port connecting to the D40 board
to the maximum value.
Step 3 Set Working Mode to Power Locking for the first-level OA (OBU101) board. And
set Power Value to 0 dBm.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the OBU101 board. In the navigation tree, choose

2. On the Advanced Attributes tab, set Working Mode to Power Locking.

3. Set Power Value to 0 dBm.
4. Click Apply.
Step 4 Ensure the first-level OA (OBU101) board to forcibly emit light.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the OBU101 board. In the navigation tree, choose
2. Click Query.
3. Ensure Laser Status for the OUT port on the OBU101 board is On .
Step 5 Adjust the EVOA attenuation for the second-level OA (OAU101) board to the
minimum value, and then adjust the gain to ensure that the total output optical
power of the board reaches 20 dBm.
1. Right-click the NE housing the OAU101 board and choose NE Explorer from
the shortcut menu to start the NE Explorer.
2. Select the OAU101 board and in the navigation tree choose Configuration >
WDM Interface.
3. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for the VI port on the OAU101
board to the minimum value.
In the navigation tree, choose Configuration > Optical Power Management. On the right
side of the window, check the value of Input Power, which represents the optical power of
the IN port on the OAU101 board.
4. Click Apply.
5. Set Nominal Gain to 23dB (adjust the gain value according to the actual
optical power), and ensure that the total output optical power of the board
reaches 20 dBm.
6. Click Apply.
Step 6 Set the EVOA attenuation to 5 dB for the wavelength that carries dummy light
next to the wavelength that carries service signals on the M40V board.
Step 7 Fine-tune the EVOA attenuation for the wavelength that carries dummy light and
other wavelengths that carry service signals on the M40V board to ensure that the
board provides the optimal optical power balancing among the wavelengths.
Step 8 Repeat Step 6 through Step 7 to adjust the optical power of the remaining
wavelengths that carry dummy light one by one to ensure that the system will be
able to provide the optimal performance when a maximum of wavelengths are
provisioned.
----End
8.1.10 Commissioning the Optical Power of OA Boards

Intended for the Submarine Cable System
This topic describes how to commission the optical power of OA boards intended
for the submarine cable system.

Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "NMS operator" rights or higher.

NMS
FlexGrid Application Scenarios and Commissioning Procedure of the

Submarine Cable System
This topic assumes that the OA boards are OBU2. On the actual network, the OA
boards may be OAU2 or OBU2.
Figure 8-18 shows the FlexGrid application scenarios of the submarine cable
system.
Figure 8-18 FlexGrid application scenario
A back-end EVOA needs to be configured for the OBU2 board at point B.
When an OBU2 board is configured at B, perform the following procedure:

1. In the wavelength adding direction, create optical cross-connections to ensure
that the input optical power of the OA board satisfies requirements.
a. Create a single-site optical cross-connection from the transmit-end OTU
board to the east and set the attenuation of the VOA on each channel of
the WSM9 board to approximately 5 dB.
When a single-site optical cross-connection is created, OPA Mode must be set to

Manual.
b. Select the WSM9 board at point C and create board optical cross-
connections to ensure that the ASE board generates dummy light. Set the
attenuation of the VOA on each channel of the WSM9 board to
approximately 5 dB.

The following assumes that 16 wavelengths are received at point A and 80-
wavelength dummy light is generated at point D so that 96 wavelengths are finally
multiplexed. When board optical cross-connections are created, the parameters are
set as follows:
1. Select the AM port that connects the WSM9 board to the ASE board as the source
port and the OUT port on the WSM9 board as the sink port.
2. Select 80 wavelengths except the 16 wavelengths received at point A as the source
and sink wavelengths.
2. Commission the attenuation of each channel of the TM20 board at point A
shown in Figure 8-18 to ensure that the input optical power at point B1
reaches the single-wavelength nominal value.
3. Commission the optical power of the OBU2 board at point B shown in Figure
8-18.
– Set Working Mode to Gain Locking.
– Set the attenuation of the back-end EVOA on the OBU2 board at point B
so that the input optical power of the OBU2 board reaches the single-
wavelength nominal value when the wavelength from the OUT port at
point B2 passes through the WSM9 board at point C and arrives at the
OBU2 board at point E.
4. Commission the optical power of the dummy light and set the optical power
of the ASE board at point D shown in Figure 8-18.
– In NE Explorer, select the ASE board, choose Configuration > WDM
InterfaceAdvanced AttributesWorking Mode, and set the mode to Gain
Locking.
InterfaceAdvanced AttributesPower Value, and set Power Value.
The formula for calculating the total optical power of the ASE board is as follows:
Total optical power = Single-wavelength nominal input optical power of the
OBU2 board at point E in the downstream + WSM9 board insertion loss (12 dB)
+ 10 x log (5000 GHZ/Single-wavelength spectrum)
5. Commission the optical power of the OBU2 board at point E shown in Figure
8-18.
– Set Working Mode to APC.
6. In the wavelength dropping direction, ensure that the input optical power of
each OA board at the receive end reaches the single-wavelength nominal
value when single-site optical cross-connections are created.
For the OA board at point F, Working Mode must be set to APC. For the OA board at
point G, Working Mode must be set to Gain Locking.
When no OBU2 board is configured at point B, perform the following

procedure:
1. In the wavelength adding direction, create single-site optical cross-
connections to ensure that the input optical power of the transmit-end OA
board during wavelength adding satisfies requirements.

a. Create a single-site optical cross-connection from the transmit-end OTU

board to the east and set the attenuation of the VOA on each channel of
the WSM9 board to approximately 5 dB.
When a single-site optical cross-connection is created, OPA Mode must be set to

Manual.
b. Select the WSM9 board at point C and create board optical cross-
connections to ensure that the ASE board generates dummy light. Set the
attenuation of the VOA on each channel of the WSM9 board to
approximately 5 dB.
The following assumes that 16 wavelengths are received at point A and 80-
wavelength dummy light is generated at point D so that 96 wavelengths are finally
multiplexed. When board optical cross-connections are created, the parameters are
set as follows:
1. Select the AM port that connects the WSM9 board to the ASE board as the source
port and the OUT port on the WSM9 board as the sink port.
2. Select 80 wavelengths except the 16 wavelengths received at point A as the source
and sink wavelengths.
2. Commission the attenuation of each channel on the TM20 board at point A
shown in Figure 8-18 so that the input optical power of the OBU2 board
reaches the single-wavelength nominal value when the wavelength from the
OUT port on the TM20 board passes through the WSM9 board at point C and
arrives at the OBU2 board at point E.
3. Commission the optical power of the dummy light and set the optical power
of the ASE board at point D shown in Figure 8-18.
Locking.
InterfaceAdvanced AttributesPower Value, and set Power Value.
The formula for calculating the total optical power of the ASE board is as follows:
Total optical power = Single-wavelength nominal input optical power of the
OBU2 board at point E in the downstream + WSM9 board insertion loss (12 dB)
+ 10 x log (5000 GHZ/Single-wavelength spectrum)
4. Commission the optical power of the OBU2 board at point E shown in Figure
8-18.
– Working Mode must be set to APC.
– For details about the optical power commissioning method, see .
value when single-site optical cross-connections are created.
For the OA board at point F, Working Mode must be set to APC. For the OA board at
point G, Working Mode must be set to Gain Locking.

FixGrid Application Scenarios and Commissioning Requirements of the

Submarine Cable System
Figure 8-19 shows the FixGrid application scenarios of the submarine cable
system.
Figure 8-19 FixGrid application scenario
1. In NE Explorer, select the ASE boards at points A and B shown in Figure 8-19
to commission the optical power of the dummy light. Set the optical power of
the ASE board at point D shown in Figure 8-19.
Locking.
InterfaceAdvanced AttributesPower Value, and set Power Value to 20
dB.
2. In NE Explorer, select the M48V boards at points C and D shown in Figure
8-19 and set the attenuation of each channel to ensure that the input optical
power of the OAU2 board reaches the single-wavelength nominal value when
the light arrives at the OAU2 board at point E. For details about the optical
power commissioning method, see .
For the OA board at point E, Working Mode must be set to APC.

value.
For the OA board at point F, Working Mode must be set to APC.
Multi-order Raman Application Scenarios and Commissioning Requirements

in the Submarine Cable System
Figure 8-20 and Figure 8-21 describe the multi-order Raman application
scenarios in the submarine cable system.

Figure 8-20 Application scenario of transmit-end multi-order Raman boards
Figure 8-21 Application scenarios of receive-end multi-order Raman boards
Figure 8-22 Transmit-end combined application scenario
The actual networking may be any of the preceding application scenarios. This topic covers
all these scenarios.
1. In NE Explorer, select the ASE boards at points A and B shown in Figure 8-20
to commission the optical power of the dummy light. Set the optical power of
the ASE boards.


Interface > Advanced Attributes > Working Mode, and set the mode to
Gain Locking.
Interface > Advanced Attributes > Power Value, and set Power Value
to 20 dB.
2. In NE Explorer, select the V40 boards at points C and D shown in Figure 8-20
to set the attenuation value of each channel. Ensure that the incident optical
power can reach the single-wavelength nominal power when the lights reach
the OBU boards at point E. Then decrease the output optical power of the
OBU board by 2dB to prevent the optical fiber burning. For details on how to
commission the optical power, see .
3. Set the locked optical power of the RPC and ERPC boards in sequence (the
reference value for the locked optical power of the RPC board is set to the
minimum value, and the reference value for the locked optical power of the
ERPC board is 1 dB less than the minimum value in Table 8-17.) Then, start
the RPC and ERPC boards in sequence. After the RPC and ERPC boards are
started, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON port on the OBU
board at the receive end to test the OSNR of each wavelength. Adjust the
EVOA value for each single wavelength of V40 boards at points C and D at
the same time to make the OSNR flat at the receive end of each wavelength
and fluctuate within a range of no more than 0.4 dB.
Check whether the BER value of each service wavelength is within the FEC limit and
whether bit errors exist after the error correction. If the service fails and bit errors
occur, properly increase the output power of the OBU board at point E to ensure that
the OSNR at the receive end is flat and no bit errors exist for each service after the
error correction.
Table 8-17 Reference values for the locked optical power of the ERPC board
Fiber Type Reference Value Range of the Locked Optical
Power of the ERPC Board
G.652 34.7 dBm to 36.2 dBm
G.654B 35.7 dBm to 37 dBm
4. Gradually adjust the optical power of transmit-end amplifiers (as shown at

points E, F, and G in Figure 8-20) to achieve the optimal performance.
a. Adjust the amplifiers at the transmit end (the adjustment step is 0.1 dB
each time for ERPC and 0.5 dB for other amplifiers.) Record the receive-
end BER each time an amplifier is adjusted. If the BER decreases, the
adjustment is correct and can help increase the span, and you can
continue to adjust amplifiers in this direction. Otherwise, adjust amplifiers
towards the reverse direction.
b. To prevent the optical power of one amplifier from being adjusted too
high, after adjusting the amplifier once or twice, stop adjusting the
amplifier and begin to adjust the next amplifier. After all amplifiers are
adjusted, optimize them one by one again in the same manner until the
receive-end BER of each amplifier has no obvious change.

c. During the commissioning, ensure that the output optical power of

amplifiers is low whenever possible when the BER has no obvious
deterioration.
5. Jointly adjust the transmit-end amplifiers (as shown at points E, F, and G in
Figure 8-20). Jointly adjust the OBU board together with the ERPC board, and
the RPC board together with the ERPC board respectively to achieve the
optimal performance. The following uses the joint adjustment of the transmit-
end OBU and ERPC boards as an example.
a. At the transmit end, reduce the output optical power of the OBU board
whenever possible to improve the output optical power of the Raman
board.
b. Change the output optical power of the OBU board by a step of 0.5 dB.
After each output optical power adjustment, adjust the locked optical
power of the ERPC board and record the BER. The smallest BER
corresponds to the optimal values for the output optical power of the
OBU board and locked optical power of the ERPC board.
c. During the commissioning, ensure that the output optical power of
amplifiers is low whenever possible when the BER has no obvious
deterioration.
6. For the optical power adjustment of receive-end multi-order Raman boards,
points I, J, K, and L shown in Figure 8-21 are involved.
a. The commissioning method for dummy light is the same as the method
mentioned in step 1.
b. The commissioning method for the OBU board at point I is the same as
the method mentioned in step 2.
c. Set the locked optical power of the amplifiers at points J and K in
sequence (the reference value for the locked optical power of the RPC
board is set to the minimum value, and the reference value for the locked
optical power of the ERPC board is 1 dB less than the minimum value in
Table 8-17.) Then, start the RPC and ERPC boards in sequence. After the
RPC and ERPC boards are started, connect the optical spectrum analyzer
to the MON port on the OBU board at the receive end to test the OSNR
of each wavelength. Adjust the EVOA value for each single wavelength of
two V40 boards at the transmit end at the same time to make the OSNR
flat at the receive end of each wavelength and fluctuate within a range
of no more than 0.4 dB.
Check whether the BER value of each service wavelength is within the FEC limit
and whether bit errors exist after the error correction. If the service fails and bit
errors occur, properly increase the output power of the OBU at point E to ensure
that the OSNR at the receive end is flat and no bit errors exist for each service
after the error correction.
d. Gradually adjust the locked optical power of receive-end amplifiers (as
shown at points J and K in Figure 8-20) to achieve the optimal
performance.
i. Adjust the amplifiers at the receive end (the adjustment step is 0.1
dB each time for ERPC and 0.5 dB for other amplifiers.) Record the
receive-end BER each time an amplifier is adjusted. If the BER
decreases, the adjustment is correct and can help increase the spa,

and you can continue to adjust amplifiers in this direction.

Otherwise, adjust amplifiers towards the reverse direction.
ii. To prevent the optical power of one amplifier from being adjusted
too high, after adjusting the amplifier once or twice, stop adjusting
the amplifier and begin to adjust the next amplifier. After all
amplifiers are adjusted, optimize them one by one again in the same
manner until the receive-end BER of each amplifier has no obvious
change.
e. Adjust the EVOA value of the IN port on the OBU board at point L so that
the input optical power reaches the single-wavelength nominal value.
7. For the receive-end combined application scenario, points E, F, G, and H
shown in Figure 8-22 are involved.
a. The commissioning method for dummy light is the same as the method
mentioned in step 1.
b. The commissioning method for the OBU board at point I is the same as
the method mentioned in step 2.
c. Set the locked optical power of the amplifiers at points E, F, and G in
sequence (the reference value for the locked optical power of the PRC
board is set to the minimum value, and the reference value for the locked
optical power of the ERPC board is 1 dB less than the minimum value in
Table 8-17.) Start the ERPC, ROP, and RPC boards respectively. After the
amplifiers are started, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON
port on the OBU board at the receive end to test the OSNR of each
wavelength. Adjust the EVOA value for each single wavelength of two
V40 boards at the transmit end at the same time to make the OSNR flat
at the receive end of each wavelength and fluctuate within a range of no
more than 0.4 dB.
Check whether the BER value of each service wavelength is within the FEC limit
and whether bit errors exist after the error correction. If the service fails and bit
errors occur, properly increase the output power of the OBU at point E to ensure
that the OSNR at the receive end is flat and no bit errors exist for each service
after the error correction.
d. Gradually adjust the locked optical power of receive-end amplifiers (as
shown at points E, F, and G in Figure 8-20).
i. Adjust the amplifiers at the receive end (the adjustment step is 0.1
dB each time for ERPC and 0.5 dB for other amplifiers.) Record the
receive-end BER each time an amplifier is adjusted. If the BER
decreases, the adjustment is correct and can help increase the spa,
and you can continue to adjust amplifiers in this direction.
Otherwise, adjust amplifiers towards the reverse direction.
ii. To prevent the optical power of one amplifier from being adjusted
too high, after adjusting the amplifier once or twice, stop adjusting
the amplifier and begin to adjust the next amplifier. After all
amplifiers are adjusted, optimize them one by one again in the same
manner until the receive-end BER of each amplifier has no obvious
change.
e. Adjust the EVOA value of the IN port on the OBU board at point H so
that the input optical power reaches the single-wavelength nominal
value.

8.1.11 Commissioning the Optical Power of ESC Board

This section describes the basic requirements on commissioning the optical power
of the ESC board.
When the line board starts to work and the service is normal (or the WDM side of
the line board transmits light), the ESC route is set up.
By default the WDM side of the line board emits light forcibly. If it does not emit
light, see 8.1.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light to query whether the
board is forced to emit light. If the board is not forced to emit light, configure the
board so that it emits light forcibly.
8.1.12 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and

Demultiplexer Board
This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power
of the multiplexer and demultiplexer board.
8.1.12.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V Boards

of the M40V boards.
Tools, Equipment, and materials

Optical spectrum analyzer, NMS
Adjust the optical power and the flatness of OSNR by adjusting the built-in VOA
for each wavelength at the receive end to meet the requirements.
In the power adjusting station, you should reserve at least 2.5 dB for the mean attenuation of
single-wavelength channels.
● Adjust the attenuation of the VOA on each channel of the M40V at the
transmit end to 5 dB before commissioning.
a. In the NE Explorer and select the desired M40V board, choose
Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree.
b. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio
to 5dB.
c. Click Apply. A prompt appears telling you that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
● Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON port on the last OAU in
the signal flow. Then measure the optical power and the OSNR for each
channel in the WDM mode. Or connect the INx port of the MCA4/MCA8/
OPM8 board to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow. Then

measure the optical power and the OSNR for each channel on the NMS as
follows:
– Select the desired MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 board in the NE Explorer, choose
Configuration > Laser Spectrum Analysis from the left-hand Function
Tree.
– Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then
click Query.
– In Spectrum Data, query Optical Power (dBm) and OSNR(dB) for each
current wavelength.
● The MON port of the DAS1, RAU1, RAU2, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2 and CRPC board is a
1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual
signal power).
● The MON port of the HBA board is a 1/999 tap of the total composite signal at the
OUT port (30dB lower than the actual signal power).
● According to the optical spectrum figure, determine the channels with the
largest or the smallest optical power (or OSNR). Adjust the VOA for the
corresponding channels of the M40V to make the optical power (or OSNR)
near the average value.
● Ensure that the maximum difference of optical power among all the channels
is within 4 dB, and the maximum different of the OSNR among all the
channels is within 2 dB.
Generally the output optical power values of all OAUs do not have obvious changes after
this commissioning. If changes are obvious, adjust the VOA before the first OAU of the
signal flow to make the input optical power reach the standard value. There is no need to
adjust the successive OAUs. Ensure that the OSNR is flat and that the optical power is near
the standard value.
8.1.12.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of M48V Boards

of the M48V boards.

Adjust the optical power and the flatness of OSNR by adjusting the built-in VOA
for each wavelength at the receive end to meet the requirements.
● Adjust the attenuation of the VOA on each channel of the M48V at the
transmit end to 5 dB before commissioning.

a. In the NE Explorer and select the desired M48V board, choose

Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree.
b. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio
to 5dB.
c. Click Apply. A prompt appears telling you that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
● Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON port on the last OAU in
the signal flow. Then measure the optical power and the OSNR for each
channel in the WDM mode. Or connect the INx port of the MCA4/MCA8/
OPM8 board to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow. Then
measure the optical power and the OSNR for each channel on the NMS as
follows:
– Select the desired MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 board in the NE Explorer, choose
Configuration > Laser Spectrum Analysis from the left-hand Function
Tree.
– Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then
click Query.
– In Spectrum Data, query Optical Power (dBm) and OSNR(dB) for each
current wavelength.
● According to the optical spectrum figure, determine the channels with the
largest or the smallest optical power (or OSNR). Adjust the VOA for the
corresponding channels of the M48V to make the optical power (or OSNR)
near the average value.
● Ensure that the maximum difference of optical power among all the channels
is within 4 dB, and the maximum different of the OSNR among all the
channels is within 2 dB.
Generally the output optical power values of all OAUs do not have obvious changes after
this commissioning. If changes are obvious, adjust the VOA before the first OAU of the
signal flow to make the input optical power reach the standard value. There is no need to
adjust the successive OAUs. Ensure that the OSNR is flat and that the optical power is near
the standard value.
8.1.12.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU/SFIU Board

This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the insertion loss
of the FIU board.

Optical power meter, Optical spectrum analyzer

NOTICE
If fiber connectors or fiber adapters are contaminated, optical power

commissioning is seriously affected. Therefore, the two end faces and the fiber
adapter for every external fiber that is connected into the equipment through the
ODF must be cleaned. Perform the cleaning before inserting an external fiber to
an optical port on the equipment.
Note the insertion loss for the FIU boards:

● IN–>TC insertion loss = Input optical power of IN port – Output optical power
of TC port
● RC–>OUT insertion loss = Input optical power of RC port – Output optical
power of OUT port
● IN–>TM insertion loss = Input optical power of IN port – Output optical power
of TM port
● RM–>OUT insertion loss = Input optical power of RM port – Output optical
power of OUT port
Note the insertion loss for the SFIU boards:

● LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss = Input optical power of SYS1 port – Output
optical power of LINE1 port
● LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss = Input optical power of SYS2 port – Output
● LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss = Input optical power of OSC1 port – Output
● LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss = Input optical power of OSC2 port – Output
The optical power can be measured with an optical power meter or an optical
spectrum analyzer. The basic requirements for the measurements are as follows.
Method one: measurement with an optical power meter of the FIU/SFIU

● For IN–>TC insertion loss, the insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0
dB.
● For RC–>OUT insertion loss, measure the optical power of the OUT port when
disconnecting the fiber of the RM port. The insertion loss must be equal to or
less than 1.0 dB.
● For IN–>TM insertion loss, the insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5
dB.
● For RM–>OUT insertion loss, measure the optical power of the OUT port
when disconnecting the fiber of the RC port. The insertion loss must be equal
to or less than 1.5 dB.
● For LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE1 port
when disconnecting the fiber of the OSC1 port. The insertion loss must be
equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

● For LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE2 port
when disconnecting the fiber of the OSC2 port. The insertion loss must be
● For LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE1 port
when disconnecting the fiber of the SYS1 port. The insertion loss must be
● For LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE2 port
when disconnecting the fiber of the SYS2 port. The insertion loss must be
Method two: measurement with an optical spectrum analyzer of the FIU/SFIU

● For IN–>TC insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port with the
optical power of the TC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical
spectrum analyzer. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.
● For RC–>OUT insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port with
the optical power of the RC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical
● For IN–>TM insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port at 1510
nm with the optical power of the TM port at 1510 nm by using an optical
● For RM–>OUT insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port at
1510 nm with the optical power of the RM port at 1510 nm by using an
optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5
dB.
● For LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port with
the optical power of the TC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical
● For LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port
with the optical power of the RC port at a certain wavelength by using an
dB.
● For LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port at
1510 nm with the optical power of the TM port at 1510 nm by using an
dB.
● For LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port
at 1510 nm with the optical power of the RM port at 1510 nm by using an
dB.
8.1.13 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Board

of the FOADM board.
The commissioning requirements for the FOADM board are as follows.
● In the pass-through direction:

● In the drop wavelength direction, add an appropriate fixed optical attenuator

at the input end of the OTU. Make the drop wavelength meet the
requirements for the input optical power of the OTU.
● In the add wavelength direction:
8.1.14 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board

of the ROADM board.
This section describes how to commission the optical power of a ring network
using ROADM boards along the west-to-east signal flow. In general, the ring
network uses the following ROADM boards:
● WSD9+WSM9
● RDU9+WSM9
● WSMD4+WSMD4
● WSMD9+WSMD9
In the power adjusting station, you should reserve at least 2.5 dB for the mean attenuation
of single-wavelength channels.
● The automatic power adjustment mode can be chosen in creating optical cross-
connection. For applications not supporting automatic power adjustment, choose the
manual power adjustment mode.
● The optical power of the OUT port at the receive end and the rated optical power of the
IN port at the transmit end of the OAU have their default values on the NMS.
8.1.14.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+WSM9)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with
WSD9+WSM9.
Network with WSD9+WSM9

Figure 8-23 shows the diagram of a network with WSD9+WSM9.

Figure 8-23 Diagram of a network with WSD9+WSM9
1: West FIU 2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving

end
3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit 4: East FIU
end
TDC and RDC of the OAU are connected to the port of the DCM for dispersion
compensation or connected directly.
Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in the add, drop, and pass-
through wavelength directions.
● In the drop wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the
west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end. Set the optical power of the
OUT port of the west OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of
single wavelength. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the
attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 to ensure that the input
optical power of the OTU meets the requirements for the drop wavelength.
Automatic power adjustment can be realized when the WSD9 drops wavelength
directly to the OTU or through the D40 to the OTU.
● In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the
west FIU to the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the
optical power of the OUT port of the west OAU at the receive end to
maximum output power of single wavelength. Set the rated optical power of
the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of
attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 and WSM9 to ensure
that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the
requirements for the pass-through wavelength.

● I the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the
east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power
of the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to typical input power of
attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSM9 to ensure that the input
optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the
add wavelength.
When the OTU board directly adds/drops wavelengths, a VOA (in the dashed frame) needs
to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU board adds
wavelengths through the M40 board, the VOA is not required.
8.1.14.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+RMU9)

WSD9+RMU9.
Network with WSD9+RMU9

Figure 8-24 shows the diagram of a network with WSD9+RMU9.
Figure 8-24 Diagram of a network with WSD9+RMU9

end
end
MRx can be MR4, or MR2.

● Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in the add, drop, and pass-
through wavelength (the wavelength is added either directly or through the
MRx or M40V board) directions.
– In the wavelength-dropping direction: Create a single-station optical
cross-connection from the west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end.
The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of
the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 board to ensure that the optical
power of each drop wavelength sent to the OTU board meets the
specification requirements.
Automatic power adjustment can be used when the WSD9 drops a wavelength
directly to the OTU or drops a wavelength to the OTU board through the MRx or
D40.
– In the pass-through direction: Create a single-station optical cross-
connection from the west FIU to the east FIU. The system then
automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each
channel of the WSD9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU
at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through
wavelength.
– In the wavelength-adding direction (the OTU board adds wavelengths
directly): Create a single-station optical cross-connection from the east
OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU. The system then automatically
calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each port of the
RMU9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit
end meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
● When wavelengths are added through the MRx board or the M40 board, the
optical power needs to be manually adjusted.
When wavelengths are added through the M40/M40V board, an optical
amplifier needs to be configured between the TOA and ROA ports on the
RMU9 board. And a VOA needs to be configured between the ROA port and
the optical amplifier. When wavelengths are added through the MRx board,
the TOA and the ROA ports on the RMU9 board are connected to each other
directly by a fiber.
Adjust the VOA between the OTU and the MRx or M40 board to ensure that
the input power flatness of the add wavelengths and the pass-through
wavelengths on the east OAU at the transmit end meet the system
requirements.
● In the case of a network with WSD9+RMU9, to implement the APE function,
the RMU9 board has certain requirements on configuration. These
requirements are as follows:
– Configure the VA1 or VA4 board between the OTU and RMU9 boards
when the OTU board adds wavelength directly to the RMU9 board. In this
case, the APE function can be automatically implemented.
– When a multiplexer board, through which the OTU adds wavelength to
the RMU9 board, needs to be configured, configure the M40V board. In
this case, the APE function can be automatically implemented.
– If the VA1, VA4, or M40V board is not used, the APE function cannot be
implemented.

8.1.14.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (RDU9+WSM9)

RDU9+WSM9.
Network with RDU9+WSM9

Figure 8-25 shows the diagram of a network with RDU9+WSM9.
Figure 8-25 Diagram of a network with RDU9+WSM9

end
end
● Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in add wavelength, pass-
through wavelength, and drop wavelength through the D40 board.
– In the drop wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection
from the west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end. Set the optical
power of the OUT port of the west OAU at the receive end to maximum
output power of single wavelength. The system then automatically
calculates and adjust the fixed optical attenuators between the OTU and
the D40 board to ensure that the input optical power of the OTU meets
the requirements for the drop wavelength.
– In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from
the west FIU to the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set
the optical power of the OUT port of the west OAU at the receive end to

maximum output power of single wavelength, and set the rated optical
power of the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to the typical
input power of single wavelength. The system then automatically
calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the
WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit
end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength.
– In the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from
the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated
optical power of the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to
typical input power of single wavelength. The system then automatically
calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the
WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit
end meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
When the OTU board directly adds/drops wavelengths, a VOA (in the dashed frame)
needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU
board adds wavelengths through the M40 board, the VOA is not required.
8.1.14.4 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMDx+WSMDx)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with
WSMDx+WSMDx.
Network with WSMDx+WSMDx

This section describes the commissioning requirements for the WSMDx. In this
section, the network diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an
example for illustration purposes. The commissioning requirements for multi-
dimensional grooming are similar. Figure 8-26 shows the diagram of a network
with WSMDx+WSMDx.

Figure 8-26 Diagram of a network with WSMDx+WSMDx

end
end
● In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports of the WSMDx board are
not shown. These two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in the other
direction.
● The single-wavelength signals are transmitted directly to the AMn optical port by the
OTU board.
The commissioning requirements for the WSMDx are as follows:
● In the drop wavelength direction, manual power adjustment is required.
You need to select and configure a fixed attenuator at the IN optical port of
the OTU board on the east and west receive ends respectively, based on the
input optical power range of the OTU board. By doing this, the input optical
power to the OTU board can meet the OTU design requirement. The optical
power of the VOA (in the dashed frame) between the demultiplexer and
WSMDx should be adjusted so that the input optical power is within the
nominal input range of the optical amplifier. If the input optical power is
already within the nominal input range of the optical amplifier before the
VOA is added, the VOA is not required.

● If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the

receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.
● If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive
end and an APD module is configured on the WDM side of OTU at the receive
end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.
● If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU
and VOA in the dashed frame need to be configured.
● In pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and
from the east FIU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates
and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMDx to
ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the
● In add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to
the east FIU and from the west OTU to the west FIU. The system then
automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each
channel of the WSMDx to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at
the transmit end meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly, a VOA (in the solid frame) needs to
be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds
wavelengths through the M40, the VOA is not required.
8.1.14.5 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (DWSS20+TM20/

TD20)
DWSS20+TM20/TD20.
Network with DWSS20+TM20/TD20

This section describes the commissioning requirements for the DWSS20. In this
section, the network diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an
with DWSS20+TM20/TD20.

Figure 8-27 Diagram of a network with DWSS20+TM20/TD20

end
end
● In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports of the DWSS20 board are
direction.
OTU board.
● In the drop wavelength direction:
a. Create the optical cross-connection from the west OTU at the transmit
end to the west FIU ,and the optical amplifier should be adjusted so that
the input optical power is within the nominal input range.
b. Set the attenuation of the VOA on the DWSS20 board to the minimum
value.
c. Tune the VOA of TD20 board so that the input optical power of the EDFA
on the TD20 board reaches the nominal value.
d. Adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each drop channel of the DWSS20
for power equilibrium.
e. Configure the fixed optical attenuator (FOA) equipped for the OTU
board, so that the input optical power of the OTU board is within the
range of -12 dBm to -5 dBm.
● In pass-through direction,

and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the DWSS20 to
● In add wavelength direction:
a. Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit
end to the east FIU and from the west OTU to the west FIU
b. Set the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the TM20 less than
6dB.
c. Adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the DWSS20 to
ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end
meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
8.1.14.6 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board

(DWSS20+MCS0816)
DWSS20+MCS0816.
Prerequisite
When an MCS0816 board is used, ensure that the optical NE where the MCS0816
board is installed normally communicates with the electrical NE where the line
board is installed. If the communication is abnormal, services cannot be
provisioned.
Network with DWSS20+MCS0816

This section describes the commissioning requirements for the DWSS20+MCS0816.
In this section, the network diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an
with DWSS20+MCS0816.

Figure 8-28 Diagram of a network with DWSS20+MCS0816

end

end
● In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports of the DWSS20 board are
direction.
OTU board.
● In the drop wavelength direction:
a. Create the optical cross-connection from the west OTU at the transmit
end to the west FIU ,and the optical amplifier should be adjusted so that
the input optical power is within the nominal input range.
value.
c. Configure the fixed optical attenuator (FOA) equipped for the OTU
board, so that the input optical power of the OTU board is within the
● In pass-through direction,

and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the DWSS20 to
● In add wavelength direction:
a. Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit
end to the east FIU and from the west OTU to the west FIU
value.
c. Set the attenuation of the VOA on the MCS0816 board to the minimum
value to make the optical path available.
d. Set the attenuation of the VOA on the OUT port of MCS0816 board to
the minimum value so that the input optical power of the EDFA on the
MCS0816 board reaches the nominal value.
NOTICE
● When the MCS0816 board is used together with the OPM8 board for
optical power detection, the communication between the optical NE
where the MCS0816 board resides and that where the OPM8 board
resides must be normal; otherwise, the OPM8 board cannot be used
for optical power detection.
● When the OPM8 board is connected to the MONO or MONI port of
the MCS0816 board, only one of OUT1 to OUT8 or IN1 to IN8 can be
detected. The MONO port detects OUT1 to OUT8 while the MONI
port detects IN1 to IN8. The port to be detected is specified on the
NMS. As shown in step 4 in the following figure, 1 indicates that OUT1
or IN1 is to be detected.
e. Adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the DWSS20 to

ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end
meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
8.1.15 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM

The single-wavelength input optical power of the DCM must be equal to or lower
than –3 dBm.

Prerequisites
Fiber connections on the DCM must be established properly.

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, fiber jumper
Procedure
Step 1 Measure the input optical power of the DCM. The single-wavelength input optical
power must be equal to or lower than –3 dBm.
Step 2 Measure the output optical power of the DCM.
Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss of the DCM. The insertion loss should be within the
specified range. Otherwise, replace the DCM.
Insertion loss of the DCM = Input optical power of the DCM – Output optical
power of the DCM
----End
8.1.16 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on

10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System
This section uses Project X as an example to introduce the optical power
commissioning procedures for the OTM, OLA and OADM stations.
NOTICE
Ensure that the ports and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean.
Otherwise, the system performance is affected.
● All the channels must be accessed with service signals or forced to emit light
before optical power commissioning. Once all the OTUs can emit light
normally, start the commissioning station by station.
● Enable the performance monitoring of NEs during optical power
commissioning. Compare the value reported by the NE and the value tested
by the instruments. Ensure that the two optical power values are the same.
The optical power is queried by using the NMS. The difference between the NMS value and
the value tested by instruments should be within 1 dB.
8.1.16.1 Example Description

This section describes the network of project X.
Figure 8-29 shows the network diagram of project X. The ONEs A, B, C, D, E and F
are the NG WDM systems which form the ring network. Among these ONEs, the
ONE A and ONE C are the back-to-back OTM stations. The ONE B, ONE D and
ONE F are the OLA stations. And the ONE E is the OADM station.

Figure 8-29 Network diagram of Project X
: OTM :OLA : OADM
In this commissioning example, the signal flow from west to east is used as an example to
illustrate the commissioning procedure. The commissioning method for the signal flow from
east to west is the same as the commissioning method for the signal flow from west to
east.
8.1.16.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station

This section describes how to commission the optical power at the transmit end of
an OTM station along the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisites
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed
optical attenuator, VOA, NMS

Set-up Diagram
Figure 8-30 Fiber connection of OTM station A
Fixed optical attenuator ODF side

VOA
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection
diagram. The optical fiber should be loosely inserted to the input port Rx on the
client side of the OTU.
Step 2 Send the client signal to the east OTU.
Step 3 Query the bar code on the front panel or manufacturing information of the board
to obtain the optical module information on the client side of the OTU.
Step 4 Obtain the launched optical power and optical module information on the client
side. Compare the launched optical power of the client equipment with the
received optical power on the client side of the OTU. If required, prepare the fixed
optical attenuator for later use.
Step 5 Measure the optical power of the fiber jumper connected to the RX port on the
client side of the OTU by using an optical power meter.
Step 6 Install a fixed optical attenuator before the input port on the client side of the
OTU to ensure that the input optical power of the OTU meets requirements.
Step 7 If the optical power of all input ports on the OTU meets the specification
requirements, insert a fiber into the RX port on the OTU and record the input
optical power at the RX port in the commissioning record.
Step 8 Check whether all of the east OUT ports on the WDM sides of all the east OTUs
emit light. If not, check whether lasers on the WDM sides of the OTU are enabled.
Step 9 Measure the optical power at the OUT port on the WDM side of the OTU by using
an optical power meter.
Step 10 Measure the input optical power at the following port by using an optical power
meter, and record the value in the commissioning record. If the variance between

the optical power of the port and the optical power at the OUT port on the WDM
side of the OTU is greater than 1 dB, check whether fibers are routed properly and
whether the fibers are clean.
● For OSN 9800, measure the input optical power at the Mn port on the M40V
by using an optical power meter.
Step 11 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the following board to
scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the attenuation of the VOA connected to the
output port on the OTU to adjust the optical power flatness of add wavelengths.
In this manner, ensure that the single-wavelength output optical power of the
M40 is consistent with the nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the
OA at the transmit end.
● For OSN 9800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the
M40V board.
Step 12 Record the optical power of each wavelength and multiplexed signal and calculate
the insertion loss of each wavelength for the following board. Check whether the
insertion loss of each wavelength meets the requirements after the wavelength
passes through the board. If the optical power is abnormal, check the fiber
connection to the Mn port.
● For OSN 9800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the M40V
board.
Step 13 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the West-Receive-to-East-
Transmit OBU1 by using a fiber jumper. Then scan the multiplexed signal and
measure the optical power at the IN port on the OBU1.
Step 14 Measure the optical power of each wavelength at the OUT port on the OBU1 by
using an optical spectrum analyzer. Check whether the mean output optical power
of a single wavelength is in the standard range.
Step 15 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1 according to the following
formula: Gain = Output optical power of a single wavelength - Input optical power
of a single wavelength. The gain flatness of a single wavelength must be lower
than 2.0 dB.
Step 16 Record the optical power at IN and OUT ports, input and output optical power,
and gain of each wavelength of the OBU1.
Step 17 Query the input and output optical power of a multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by
using the NMS. The variance between the power displayed on the NMS and the
power measured by using the optical spectrum analyzer must be smaller than 2.0
dB. Otherwise, replace the board.
Step 18 Measure the input optical power at the RC port on the FIU by using an optical
power meter. If the variance between the optical power at RC port on the FIU and
the optical power at the OUT port on the OBU1 is greater than 1 dB, check
whether the fibers are routed properly and whether the fibers are clean.
Step 19 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the FIU by using an optical
power meter (during the test, the RM port must be disconnected). Calculate the
insertion loss from the RC to OUT ports on the FIU. The insertion loss must be
equal to or lower than 1.0 dB.
Step 20 Measure the output optical power at the TM2 port on the SC2 by using an optical
power meter, and then measure the input optical power at the RM port on the

FIU. If the variance between the optical power at the two ports is greater than 1
dB, check whether the fibers are routed properly and whether the fibers are clean.
Step 21 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the FIU by using an optical
power meter (during the test, the RC port must be disconnected). Calculate the
insertion loss from the RM to OUT ports on the FIU. The insertion loss must be
equal to or lower than 1.5 dB.
Step 22 Measure the output optical power on the ODF side. Compare the value with the
output optical power at the OUT port on the FIU to check whether the fiber is
correctly routed.
----End
8.1.16.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA

This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east
signal flow at an OLA station.
Prerequisites
● The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.
● The optical power commissioning of station A at the transmit end must be
complete.

Set-up Diagram
Figure 8-31 Fiber connection of OLA station B
Fix optical attenuator ODF side

VOA

Procedure
Step 1 Test the optical power of the IN port on the west FIU with an optical power meter.
Compare the value with optical power of the OUT port on the east FIU of station
A to calculate the line attenuation between station A and station B on the line
side. If the actual line attenuation is larger than the line attenuation designed in
networking, check the line attenuation to determine whether the cable
attenuation is overlarge or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are faulty, clear
the fault by following the appropriate procedures.
Step 2 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power of the
TM port on the west FIU at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record
the optical power values in the commissioning record.
Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TM port of the west FIU. The
insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
Step 4 Test the input optical power of the RM1 port on the SC2 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer. Add a proper attenuator to make the input power less than –
3dBm. Record the input optical power of the RM1 port in the commissioning
record.
Step 5 Test the output optical power of the TM2 port of the SC2 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer. Record the output optical power of the TM2 port in the
commissioning record.
Step 6 Test the input optical power of the RM port and the output optical power of the
OUT port on the east FIU at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when
disconnecting the fiber to the RC port of the FIU board). Record the optical power
values in the commissioning record.
Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The
Step 8 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power of the TC
port on the west FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum
analyzer. Record the optical power values in the commissioning record.
Step 9 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TC port on the west FIU. The
Step 10 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN port on the
West-Receive-to-East-Transmit OBU to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the
VOA before the OBU to commission the mean input optical power of single
wavelength of the OBU to nominal value.
Step 11 Test and record the input and output optical power of the DCM. Calculate the
insertion loss of the VOA and DCM.
Step 12 The optical power commissioning method of the OBU is the same as that at the
transmit end of the OTM. For more information, see Step 13 through Step 17 in
8.1.16.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station.
Step 13 Test the input optical power of the RC port and the output optical power of the
OUT port of the east FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum
analyzer (when disconnecting the fiber to the RM port of the FIU board). Record
the optical power values in the commissioning record.

Step 14 Calculate the insertion loss from the RC port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The
----End
8.1.16.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End

signal flow at the receive end of an OTM station.
Prerequisites
● The optical power commissioning of station B must be complete.

Set-up Diagram
Figure 8-32 Fiber connection of OTM station C

VOA
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to fiber connection diagram.
The optical fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. See Step 1 in
8.1.16.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and
TM ports on the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 8.1.16.3 Commissioning
Optical Power of OLA.
Step 4 For optical power commissioning of the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 8.1.16.3
Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and
OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 8.1.16.3 Commissioning
Optical Power of OLA
TC ports on the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 8.1.16.3 Commissioning
Step 7 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON port on the last OAU in the
signal flow. Then measure the optical power and the OSNR of each channel in
WDM mode. Or connect the INx port of the MCA4/MCA8 board to the MON port
on the last OAU in the signal flow. Then measure the optical power and the OSNR
of each channel on the NMS by completing the following operations.
● Log in to NMS. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of the NE is displayed.
● Right-click the NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
window.
● Select the desired MCA4/MCA8 board, and choose Configuration > Laser
Spectrum Analysis from the left-hand Function Tree.
● Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click
Query.
● In Spectrum Data, query Optical Power (dBm) and OSNR (dB) for each
current wavelength display.
You can also connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN port on the
West-Receive-to-East-Transmit OAU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the optical power
and OSNR of each wavelength of the IN port on the OAU1.
Step 8 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the OUT port on the
West-Receive-to-East-Transmit OAU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the
gain of the OAU1 on the NMS to commission the launched optical power to the
maximum value for single wavelength for the OAU1.
For the methods and requirements of gain adjustment for the OAU, see Commissioning
Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board.
Step 9 Calculate the gains of each wavelength of the OAU1. Record the output optical
power, gain of each wavelength, and the input and output optical power of the
multiplexed signal.
Step 10 Check whether the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal is
compliant to the typical value by using the NMS.

Step 11 The tested OSNR of the output signals for the optical amplifier at the receive end
must be higher than the designed OSNR in the actual project.
Step 12 The commissioning method of the West-Receive-to-East-Transmit OBU and DCM

is the same as that of the OLA station. For specific procedures, see Step 10
through Step 12 in 8.1.16.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 13 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper for the following port
on the west board to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the input optical power
of each wavelength.
Step 14 Test the output optical power of each wavelength for the following port by using
an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 15 Calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength for the following boards. The
insertion loss must satisfy the following requirements and the maximum
difference between the insertion loss values must be lower than 2.0 dB. If the
difference is greater than 2.0 dB, replace the board with a new board.
Step 16 Test the input optical power for the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU. Check
whether the optical power for the IN port on the OTU is within the standard
range.
If a PIN receiver is used on the WDM side of the OTU, no fixed optical attenuator is needed.
If an APD is used on the WDM side of the OTU, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to
be added to ensure that the input optical power of the IN port of the OTU meets the
requirements. If the optical power does not meet the requirements, add, change or remove
the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the received optical power is within the standard
range.
Step 17 Securely insert the optical fiber into the IN port of the OTU after the input optical
power meets the requirements.
Step 18 Test the output optical power on the client side of the OTU and the optical power
of the ODF. Compare the two values to check whether the fiber jumper on the
client side is correctly connected. The fiber attenuation must be lower than 1 dB.
Step 19 Query the input and output optical power of each OTU by using the NMS. The
difference between the values on the NMS and the test values must be lower than
2.0 dB. The number of error corrections within 15 minutes for the board with FEC
function must be less than 100,000. If the number of error corrections is more
than 100,000, locate and correct the fault.
Step 20 If the client equipment accessed is new, test the 24-hour network-wide bit errors
of the client equipment. If the client equipment is not connected or not used, loop
back the TX and RX ports on the client side of all OTUs for station C on the ODF
side. In addition, a fixed optical attenuator needs to be added before the RX port.
Section 8.1.16.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station,

8.1.16.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA and 8.1.16.4 Commissioning Optical
Power of OTM Receive End show the commissioning process for the optical multiplex
section. The commissioning for the multiplex sections at OTM and OLA stations are similar
to these.
----End

8.1.16.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (Multiplexer Board

+Demultiplexer Board)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the FOADM station
along the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisites
Fiber connections and network configuration must be complete.

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, fibers, fixed
optical attenuator, variable optical attenuator (VOA), NMS computer
Figure 8-33 Fiber connection diagram of the FOADM station
Fixed optical attenuator Optical distribution frame (ODF)

VOA
Procedure
Step 1 For information on how to commission the received optical power of the FOADM
station using the multiplexer board and demultiplexer board, see 8.1.16.4
Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End.
Step 2 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical port on the M40 to scan
the multiplexed signals. Based on the tested optical power for each pass-through
wavelength, adjust the VOA in each pass-through channel. Adjust the optical
power flatness of the pass-through wavelength so that the single-wavelength
optical power input to the OBU1 is consistent with the nominal single-wavelength
input optical power.

Step 3 The optical power at the transmit end of the FOADM station is commissioned the
same way as the optical power at the transmit end of the OTM station. For more
information about the commissioning procedure, see 8.1.16.2 Commissioning
Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station.
----End
8.1.16.6 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (MRx+MRx)

This section describes how to commission the optical power along the west-to-
east signal flow in the FOADM station using the MR2+MR2 scheme.
Prerequisites
● The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

This section uses station E using the MRx boards as an example to describe the
optical power commissioning procedure for an FOADM station.
MRx can be MR4, or MR2.
Set-up Diagram
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board based on the fiber connection diagram.
The optical fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.
Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that for the OLA station. See Step 1 in
Step 3 For information about how to commission the optical power and calculate the
insertion loss of the IN and TM ports on the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in
Step 4 For information about how to commission the optical power of the SC2, see Step
4 and Step 5 in 8.1.16.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
insertion loss of the RM and OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in
insertion loss of the IN and TC ports on the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in

Step 7 The commissioning method for the OAU at the receive end and the DCM is the
same as the commissioning method for the OLA station. For more information,
see Step 10 through Step 12 in 8.1.16.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
The TDC and RDC ports on the OAU1 can connect to a DCM module. After input optical
power commissioning, set the gain to adjust the output optical power to the standard
value. The optical power, gain and OSNR are tested the same way as described previously.
Step 8 Test the output optical power of the following ports in the west after
commissioning the west OBU1 at the receive end. Determine the optical port with
the highest output optical power.
Step 9 Add a proper fixed optical attenuator at the receive end of the OTU to ensure that
the input optical power at the IN port on the OTU meets the requirements.
Step 10 Insert the optical fiber into the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU after the
input optical power meets the requirements.
Step 11 Test the optical power at the following ports by using an optical spectrum
analyzer.
Step 12 Calculate the following drop insertion loss.
Step 13 Test the input optical power of the east OBU1 at the transmit end.
Step 14 Test the optical power of the add wavelength for the east OTU with an optical
power meter.
Step 15 Test the input optical power for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end
by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Adjust the attenuation of the VOA on the
OTU to ensure that the input optical power of the add wavelength for the IN port
on the east OBU1 at the transmit end conforms to the typical input power for a
single wavelength.
Step 16 Test the optical power of the following ports by using an optical spectrum
analyzer.
Step 17 Calculate the add insertion loss as follows.
Step 18 Test the optical power for each output wavelength at the OUT port on the east
OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 19 Calculate the gain for each wavelength of the OBU1. Gain = Output optical power
of a single wavelength – Input optical power of a single wavelength. The gain
flatness for each wavelength must be lower than 2 dB.
Step 20 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signals of the OBU1
by using the NMS. The difference between the value on the NMS and the
measured value must be lower than 2 dB.
Step 21 For information about how to commission the optical power and insertion loss of
the RC and the OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 8.1.16.3
----End

8.1.16.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)

signal flow in the ROADM station in the WSD9+WSM9 mode.
Prerequisites

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSD9+WSM9)
Figure 8-34 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with

WSD9+WSM9)

VOA
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the
same wavelength at the same time.

Procedure
diagram. The optical fiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely
inserted.
Step 4 For optical power commissioning for the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 8.1.16.3
Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the RM and
Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and
Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same
as that of the OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 8.1.16.3
Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to west OTU at the receive
end, from the west FIU to the east FIU, and from east OTU at the transmit end to
the east FIU on the NMS.
Step 9 Adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelength. Method 1 is recommended
during deployment commissioning.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on
the NMS. The WSD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the drop
wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port of the
west OTU at the receive end meets the requirements.
After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at
the IN optical port on the OTU. If the actual power differs slightly from the power
required, use method 2 to fine-tune the power.
2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the
NMS. Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to
the drop wavelength of the WSD9 board. This ensures that the average input
power of the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end meets the
requirements.
Step 10 Test the optical power of IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical
power meets the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the
WDM side of the OTU.
Step 11 Adjust the optical power for the west pass-through wavelength. Method 1 is
recommended during deployment commissioning.
the NMS. The WSD9 and the WSM9 automatically adjust the optical power

for the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input
power of pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the
transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
the IN optical port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power
required, use the second method to fine-tune the optical power.
the pass-through wavelength of the WSD9 and WSM9 boards. This ensures
that the average input power of pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on
the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a
single wavelength.
Step 12 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west WSD9 board by
using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 13 Test the input and output optical power of the D40, and calculate the insertion
loss of it. The insertion loss of the D40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5
dB.
The insertion loss of D40 = the input optical power of D40 – the output optical power of D40
Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn port and the pass-
through loss from the IN port to the EXPO port of the east WSD9.
● Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value
of the inside VOA of the board
● When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSD9 board should
be equal to or less than 8 dB.
Step 15 Adjust the output power of the add wavelength for the east OTU. Method 1 is
the NMS. The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the add
wavelength for the east OTU. This ensures that the average input power of
add wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is
equal to the typical input power of single wavelength.
required, use method 2 to fine-tune the optical power.
NMS. Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA corresponding to
the pass-through wavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the
average input power of pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east
OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single
wavelength.

When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly, a VOA (in the solid frame) needs to
be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds
wavelengths through the M40, the VOA is not required.
Step 16 Test the input and output optical power of the M40, and calculate the insertion
loss of it. The insertion loss of the M40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5
dB.
Step 17 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports of the WSM9 by using an
Step 18 Calculate each add wavelength insertion loss from the AMn port to the OUT port.
Calculate the pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port of the WSM9.
● Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation
value of the inside VOA of the board
● When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSM9 board
should be equal to or less than 8 dB.
Step 19 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength for each output
wavelength of the OUT port for the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum
analyzer.
Step 20 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. The gain flatness of each
wavelength should be less than 2 dB.
Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1
by using the NMS. The difference between the values on the NMS and the test
values should be less than 2 dB.
Step 22 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation for the RC and
the OUT ports of the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 8.1.16.3
----End
8.1.16.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (RDU9+WSM9)

signal flow in the ROADM station in the RDU9+WSM9 mode.
Prerequisites

optical attenuator, VOA

Testing Diagram (Networking with RDU9+WSM9)

RDU9+WSM9)

VOA
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the
same wavelength at the same time.
Procedure
inserted.
Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. See Step 1 in

Step 7 The commissioning method for the west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the
same as that of the OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 8.1.16.3
Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to the west OTU at the
receive end, from the west FIU to the east FIU, and from the east OTU at the
transmit end to the east FIU on the NMS.
Step 9 When wavelengths are dropped through the D40 board, adjust the fixed optical
attenuators to meets requirements for the west drop wavelengths during
deployment commissioning.
In the scenario where the RDU9 is directly connected to the OTU, select Manual related to the
optical cross-connection mode on the NMS. Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA
corresponding to the drop wavelength of the RDU9 board. This ensures that the average input
power of the IN port for the west OTU at the receive end meets the requirements.
Step 10 Test the optical power of the IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical
Step 11 Adjust the optical power of the west pass-through wavelength. Method 1 is
1. Method 1: Select related to the optical cross-connection mode on the NMS.
The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the west pass-through
wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of the pass-through
wavelengths of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to
the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NMS. Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA corresponding to
average input power of pass-through wavelengths of the IN port on the east
OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single
wavelength.
Step 12 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west RDU9 board by
Step 13 Test the input and output optical power of D40, and calculate the insertion loss of
it. The insertion loss of the D40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn port and the pass-
through loss from the IN port to the EXPO port for the east RDU9.

Step 15 Adjust the output power of the add wavelength for the east OTU. Method 1 is
The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for
the east OTU. This ensures that the average input power for the add
wavelengths of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to
the typical input power of a single wavelength.
average input power of the pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the
east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single
wavelength.
When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the D40, a VOA (in the
solid frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When
the OTU adds wavelengths through the M40, the VOA is not required.
Step 16 Test the input and output optical power of the M40, and calculate the insertion
loss of it. The insertion loss of the M40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5
dB.
Step 17 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports for the WSM9 by using an
Step 18 Calculate each add wavelength insertion loss from the AMn port to the OUT port.
Calculate the pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port of the WSM9.
● Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation
value of the inside VOA of the board
● When the attenuation for the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss for the WSM9 board
should be equal to or less than 8 dB.
Step 19 Test the optical power of the IN port and the single wavelength for each output
wavelength for the OUT port of the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum
analyzer.
Step 20 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OBU1. The gain flatness of each
Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal for the OBU1
----End

8.1.16.9 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4)

signal flow in the ROADM station in the WSMD4+WSMD4 mode.
Prerequisites

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the WSMD4 board. In this
section, the networking diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used for
illustration purposes. The network providing multi-dimensional grooming can be
considered as multiple networks providing two-dimensional grooming.

WSMD4+WSMD4)

VOA

● In this diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports for the WSMD4 board are
not shown. The two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in other direction.
OTU board.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection for each board according to the fiber connection
inserted.
Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same
as that for the OLA station. For specific procedures, see Step 12 in 8.1.16.3
Step 8 Create a Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection from the west FIU to the east
FIU and create one from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the
NMS.
Step 9 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN ports for the west OTUs
individually. Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical
power for the west OTUs meets the requirements.
● If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and
VOA in the dashed frame need to be configured. If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is
configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not
required.
● If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and
an APD module is configured on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end, the OBU
and VOA are not required. Instead, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be
configured.
● The previous commissioning method is for the OTU board with a PIN photodiode. For
the OTU with APD, a 10 dB fixed attenuator needs to be configured.
● There are two types of optical receive modules: PIN and APD. The specific module type
can be identified by the bar code information pasted on the front panel. The APD had a
corresponding APD warning identifier on the panel of the board.

Step 11 Test the optical power of the IN and DMn ports for the west WSMD4 with an
optical power meter. Test the output optical power for the D40.
Step 12 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn ports for the west
WSMD4, and calculate the insertion loss for the D40. The insertion loss for the
D40 should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
● For the WSMD4 board, Insertion Loss = Insertion Loss when the inside attenuation is
zero + Attenuation value of the internal VOA of the board.
Step 13 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths
for the WSMD4. Method 2 is recommended during deployment commissioning.
The WSMD4 automatically adjusts the optical power for the add wavelength
of the east OTU and the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the
OAU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single
wavelength.
NMS. Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the WSMD4
board. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port for the east
wavelength.
Step 14 Test the output optical power of the AMn and OUT ports for the east WSMD4 by
Step 15 Calculate the add insertion loss and the pass-through loss from the AMn port to
the OUT port for the east WSMD4.
Step 16 Test the single wavelength optical power of the IN port and single wavelength
optical power of each output wavelength for the OUT port of the east OAU1 by
Step 17 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OAU1. The gain flatness for each
Step 18 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal for the OAU1
----End

8.1.16.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD9+WSMD9)

signal flow in the ROADM station in the WSMD9+WSMD9 mode.
Prerequisites
● To make the OTU emit light normally, all channels must be accessed with
services or must be forced to emit light.

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber adapter, Fiber, Signal
analyzer (selected according to the actual service type), such as SDH/SONET
analyzer, Fixed optical attenuator, Variable optical attenuator, NMS
Testing Diagram (Networking with WSMD9+WSMD9)

This section describes the commissioning procedure based on the network in
Figure 8-37. If the system is required to support the 1588 clock, see
Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMDx+WSMDx) for the
commissioning procedure.

WSMD9+WSMD9)

Optical ports AM2–AM8 and DM2–DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-
connect boards in other dimensions.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection for each board according to the fiber connection
inserted.
Step 2 Test the optical power of the LIN port on the west DAS1 with an optical power
meter. Compare the value with optical power of the OUT port on the east FIU of
station D to calculate the line attenuation between station D and station E on the
line side. If the actual line attenuation is larger than the line attenuation designed
in networking, check the line attenuation to determine whether the cable
attenuation is overlarge or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are faulty, clear
the fault by following the appropriate procedures.
Step 3 Test the input optical power of the LIN port and the output optical power of the
TM port on the west DAS1 at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Record the optical power values in the commissioning record.
Step 4 Calculate the insertion loss from the LIN port to the TM port of the west DAS1.
The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
Step 5 Test the input optical power of the RX port on the DAS1 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer. Add a proper attenuator to make the input optical power less
than –3 dBm. Record the input optical power of the RX port in the commissioning
record.
Step 6 Test the output optical power of the TX port of the DAS1 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer. Record the output optical power of the TX port in the
commissioning record.
Step 7 Test the input optical power of the RM port and the output optical power of the
LOUT port on the east DAS1 at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer
(when disconnecting the fiber to the SIN port of the DAS1 board). Record the
optical power values in the commissioning record.
Step 8 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the LOUT port on the east DAS1.
The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
Step 9 Measure the optical power of each wavelength at the SOUT port on the DAS1 by
using an optical spectrum analyzer. Check whether the average output optical
power of a single wavelength is in the range of nominal optical power of a single
wavelength ± 2 dB.
Step 10 Create a single-station optical cross-connection from the west DAS1 to the east
DAS1, and create one from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east DAS1 on
the NMS.
Step 11 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN ports for the west OTUs
individually. Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical
power for the west OTUs meets the requirements.

Step 13 Test the optical power of the IN and DMn ports for the west WSMD9 with an
optical power meter. Test the output optical power for the D40.
Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn ports for the west
WSMD9, and calculate the insertion loss for the D40. The insertion loss for the
D40 should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
● For the WSMD9 board, Insertion Loss = Insertion Loss when the inside attenuation is zero +
Attenuation value of the internal VOA of the board.
Step 15 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths
for the WSMD9. Method 2 is recommended during deployment commissioning.
The WSMD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the add wavelength
of the east OTU and the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the
wavelength.
NMS. Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the WSMD9
board. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port for the east
wavelength.
Step 16 Test the output optical power of the AMn and OUT ports for the east WSMD9 by
Step 17 Calculate the add insertion loss and the pass-through loss from the AMn port to
the OUT port for the east WSMD9.
Step 18 Test the single wavelength optical power of the SIN port and single wavelength
optical power of each output wavelength for the LOUT port of the east DAS1 by
Step 19 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the DAS1. The gain flatness of each
wavelength must be lower than 2 dB.
----End
8.2 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

This chapter describes how to remotely commission optical power.

8.2.1 General Commissioning Sequence

This section describes the general sequence for commissioning optical power.
Basic Conditions for Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

● The EVOA configured on the main optical path must be an EVOA board ( or
VA4).
● MCA boards must be configured at optical power monitoring points so that
you can query and analyze the optical spectrum through the NMS.
● Optical fibers on the entire network are properly connected. The attenuation
of the optical fibers is normal and the communication between all NEs and
the NMS is normal.
General Sequence for Commissioning Optical Power

Optical power of NEs and boards is commissioned individually based on the
optical signal flow. During commissioning, ensure that the line attenuation is
normal based on the optical power, gain, and insertion loss requirements for each
board.
Generally, the optical power of the OTU board, optical amplifier (OA), and the
supervisory channel board is commissioned based on the corresponding optical
power requirements for the boards.
Optical Power Commissioning Procedures

Figure 8-38 shows the commissioning procedure.
If the line attenuation is greater than the End of Life (EOL) specified in the design drawing,
check the internal fiber connections and external fiber attenuators.
If the customer raises specific requirements on fiber margin and provides the measured value:
the line attenuation ≤ EOL – required fiber margin.
If the customer provides only the EOL, it is required that the line attenuation only be smaller
than the EOL.

Figure 8-38 General commissioning flow
Before commissioning the optical power, determine optical power monitoring sites
and optical power commissioning stations on the network according to Figure
8-39.
Figure 8-39 Distribution of the stations for commissioning
OSA: Optical Spectrum Analyzer MCA: Spectrum Analyzer board
Consider the OTM, FOADM and ROADM stations as the optical power commissioning stations.
As the optical power for pass-through wavelengths on the FOADM stations cannot be
commissioned for equalization purposes, consider the FOADM stations as fibers during
commissioning.
If the optical power monitoring point is settled at the OTM or OADM station, the optical power
of the OLA stations does not need to be adjusted.

To achieve optical power equilibrium, the network needs to be divided according to the network
model, the start and end stations should be specified, and the power-adjusting stations should
be determined. When determining what stations will have optical power adjustment monitoring,
adhere to the following principles:
● If the number of spans between two power-adjusting stations is N, determine the power-
monitoring station in the middle of the span (N/2). If N is an odd number, the power-
monitoring point should be shifted (N/2±0.5). And configure MCA or OPM8 boards at the
transmit and received ends as required.
The WDM system commissions the optical power for each NE individually based
on the signal flow in each network segment. One network segment has two signal
flow directions, the transmit direction and the receive direction.
First, complete the optical power commissioning of one OTM in the transmit
direction. Then individually commission the optical power for each downstream
NE. Complete the optical power commissioning of the destination OTM in the
receive direction. Finally, complete the optical power commissioning for the other
signal flow in the reverse direction.
Project X is used as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning in
the following procedures:
8.2.1.1 Commissioning Procedure for the Chain Network

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the chain network.
Prerequisites
The fiber connection and Network configuration must be complete.
Network Diagram for the Chain Network

Figure 8-40 shows the commissioning procedure for the chain network.

Figure 8-40 Commissioning procedure for the chain network
: OTM : OLA : OADM
First, commission the optical power in the transmit direction of OTM station A.
Then commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow until
the optical power commissioning is complete in the west-to-east direction. For the
commissioning sequence, see Figure 8-40 (steps 1 through 7). Then commission
the optical power in the reverse direction, that is, in the east-to-west direction. For
the commissioning sequence, see Figure 8-40 (steps 7 through 13).
Commission the optical power along the A-B-C-D-E-F-G signal flow in the
following sequence.
Commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and then commission the
links:
● At station A, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths to ensure
that the input optical power for the OA at the transmit end is consistent with
the nominal input optical power for the OA.
● At station B, commission the B-from-A optical power to ensure that the input
optical power for the OA is consistent with the nominal input optical power
for the OA.
● At station C, commission the C-from-B optical power to ensure that the input
optical power for the OA at the receive end is consistent with the nominal
input optical power for the OA.
● At station C, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and the
pass-through wavelengths to ensure that the input optical power for the OA
at the transmit end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the
OA.
● At station D, commission the D-from-C optical power to ensure that the input
for the OA.
● At station E, commission the E-from-D optical power to ensure that the input

● At station E, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and the
pass-through wavelengths to ensure that the input optical power for the OA
at the transmit end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the
OA.
● At station F, commission the F-from-E optical power to ensure that the input
for the OA.
● At station G, commission the G-from-F optical power to ensure that the input
Equilibrate the optical power:
● If the MCA board is configured at station B, commission the optical power for
the add wavelengths at station A for the equilibrium based on the optical
power tested by the MCA board at station B. This ensures that:
Single-wavelength output optical power = (Nominal single-wavelength output
power ± 1) dBm
● If the MCA board is configured at station D, commission the optical power for
the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths at station C for the
equilibrium based on the optical power tested by the MCA board at station D.
This ensures that:
power ± 1) dBm
● If the MCA board is configured at station F, commission the optical power for
the add wavelengths at station E for the equilibrium based on the optical
power tested by the MCA board at station F. This ensures that:
power ± 1) dBm
Commission the receive optical power of the OTUs:
● Commission the receive optical power of the OTUs to be in the nominal range
of the receive optical power along the A-C-E-G span.
8.2.1.2 Commissioning Procedure for the Ring Network

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the ring network.
Prerequisites
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.
Network Diagram for the Ring Network

Figure 8-41 shows the commissioning procedure for the ring network.

Figure 8-41 Commissioning procedure for the ring network
: OLA : OADM
When the commissioning of 1–10 is complete, check the spectrum analysis results on the power-
monitoring sites in the B-D-F-H sequence. If the output optical power of each single wavelength
meets the equilibrium requirement, that is, the measured output optical power is the nominal
output optical power of a single wavelength plus or minus 3.0 dB, perform the commissioning in
a counter-clockwise direction, that is, steps 11 through 20. If the optical power of any board fails
to meet the equilibrium requirement, re-commission the optical power in a clockwise direction,
that is, steps 1 through 10. Do not proceed with the commissioning in a counter-clockwise
direction until the optical power for every board meets equilibrium requirements.
Before commissioning a ring network, select the start station and end station
according to the following principle:
● The start station or end station should be a station which adds or drops
wavelengths.

First, commission the optical power in the transmit direction of ROADM station A.
Commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow indicated
by arrows in the figure. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 8-41 (steps 1
through 10). Then commission the optical power in the reverse direction station by
station. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 8-41 (steps 11 through 20).
For details on the commissioning, see the corresponding commissioning
procedures on the chain network.
8.2.1.3 Commissioning Procedure for the Mesh Network

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the mesh network.
Prerequisites
The fiber connection and Network configuration must be complete.
Network Diagram for the Mesh Network

Figure 8-42 shows the commissioning procedure for the mesh network.

Figure 8-42 Commissioning procedure for the mesh network
: OLA : OADM
When the commissioning of steps 1 through 10 is complete, check the spectrum analysis results
on the power-monitoring sites in the B-D-F-H sequence. If the output optical power for each
single wavelength meets the equilibrium requirements, that is, the measured output optical
power is the nominal output optical power of a single wavelength plus or minus 1.0 dB, perform
the commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction, that is, steps 11 through 20. If the optical
power for any board fails to meet the equilibrium requirements, re-commission the optical
power in a clockwise direction, that is, steps 1 through 10. Do not proceed with the
commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction until the optical power for every board meets
equilibrium requirements.
Before commissioning the mesh network, divide the mesh network into chain
subnets and ring subnets. Then commission the subnets. Divide the mesh network
according to the following principles:

● Divide the mesh network into ring and chain subnets according to the
wavelength connection. The ring subnets should carry the most wavelength
connections, and the chain subnets should carry the least wavelength
connections. Determine the ring subnets first and then the chain subnets.
● Divide the mesh networks into large-scale ring subnets and small-scale chain
subnets when possible.
● When dividing the mesh network is complete, select the start and end
stations for each ring subnet. For other principles, see the corresponding
commissioning requirements on the ring network.
Divide the mesh network shown in Figure 8-42 as follows:
● Ring subnet: A-B-C-D-E-F-G-H-A
Commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow
indicated by the arrows in Figure 8-42 (steps 1 through 10). Then,
commission the optical power in the reverse direction station by station. For
the commissioning sequence, see Figure 8-42 (steps 11 through 20).
● Chain subnet: A-K-J-I-E
Commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow. For
the commissioning sequence, see Figure 8-42 (steps 21 through 25). When
commissioning the optical power for the chain network is complete, the
optical power at station E changes. Therefore, you need to measure and
analyze the optical power between the adjacent D and F stations. In addition,
you need to re-commission the optical power at station E for equilibrium
purposes. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 8-42 (steps 25 through
27). Then commission the optical power in the reverse direction along the
signal flow. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 8-42 (steps 28
through 32). Measure and analyze the optical power between station H and
station B. At station A, commission the optical power for equilibrium
purposes. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 8-42 (steps 32 through
34).
For details on the commissioning, see the corresponding commissioning
procedures on the chain network.
8.2.2 OTM/ROADM/OLA Station Commissioning Reference

This topic describes the single-station commissioning procedure of typical stations.
The following tables describe the single-station commissioning procedure of the
back-to-back OTM station, ROADM station, and OLA station providing that the
signal flow is from west to east. During the single-station commissioning, the
detailed process data needs to be recorded for further network operation and
maintenance reference.
Back-to-Back OTM Station (FOADM Station)

Figure 8-43 and Table 8-18 describes the testing diagram and single-station
commissioning procedure of a back-to-back OTM station. For a unidimensional
OTM station, steps 1 to 8 are the commissioning steps in the signal receiving
direction, and steps 9 to 15 are the commissioning steps in the signal transmitting
direction. 8.2.4.11 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical
Power at FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board) shows a
commissioning example.

Figure 8-43 Testing diagram of a back-to-back OTM station
Table 8-18 Commissioning procedure of a back-to-back OTM station
No. Board Port Step Test Result Reference

(dB/dBm) Standard
1 OAU IN Measure or a() Nominal

(receive query the input
end) optical optical
power. power
2 OAU VI Query and ATT1 ( ) -

(receive adjust the
end) attenuatio
n.
3 OAU IN Measure or a' ( ) Nominal

power. power
4 OAU OUT Adjust the Gain1 ( ) Close to

(optional) (receive gain. the
end) minimum
nominal
gain
5 D40 IN Measure or b() -

query the
optical
power.


(dB/dBm) Standard
6 OTU IN Measure or c() Range of

query the the input
optical optical
power. power
7 OTU IN Add fixed ATT2 ( ) -

(optional) optical
attenuators
(FOAs)
based on
the test
result of
step 6.
8 OTU IN Measure or c' ( ) Range of

(optional) query the the input
optical optical
power. power
9 OTU OUT Measure or d() Range of

query the the output
optical optical
power. power
10 M40V OUT Measure or e() Insertion

query the loss of
optical M40V = d -
power. e?
11 OAU IN Measure or f() Nominal

(transmit query the input
power. power
12 M40V Mn Adjust the ● ATT_M0 -

attenuatio 1()
n of each ● ATT_M0
wavelength 2()
adding and
pass- ● ...
through ● ATT_M4
channel. 0()

(receive adjust the
end) attenuatio
n.
14 OAU IN Measure or f' ( ) Nominal

power. power


(dB/dBm) Standard

end) minimum
nominal
gain
16 OAU OUT Measure or f" ( ) Nominal

(transmit query the output
power. power
ROADM Station
Mutiple boards, such as RDU9+WSM9, can be used to combine an ROADM
station. Figure 8-44 and Table 8-19 describes the testing diagram and single-
station commissioning procedure of a ROADM station using RDU9+WSM9. 8.2.4.7
Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at
ROADM Station C (RDU9+WSM9) shows a commissioning example.
Figure 8-44 Testing diagram of a ROADM station

Table 8-19 Commissioning procedure of a ROADM station

(dB/dBm) Standard
1 OAU IN Measure or a() Nominal

power. power

(receive adjust the
end) attenuatio
n.
3 OAU IN Measure or a' ( ) Nominal

power. power

end) minimum
nominal
gain
5 RDU9 IN Measure or b() -

query the
optical
power.
6 D40 IN Measure or c() Insertion

query the loss of
optical RDU9 = b -
power. c?
7 OTU IN Measure or d() Range of

query the the input
optical optical
power. power
8 OTU IN Add FOAs ATT2 ( ) -

(optional) based on
the test
result of
step 6.
9 OTU IN Measure or d' ( ) Range of

(optional) query the the input
optical optical
power. power
10 OTU OUT Measure or e() Range of

query the the output
optical optical
power. power


(dB/dBm) Standard
11 M40 OUT Measure or f() Insertion

query the loss of
optical M40 = e -
power. f?
12 WSM9 OUT Measure or g() Insertion

query the loss of
optical WSM9 = f -
power. g?
13 OAU IN Measure or h() Nominal

power. power
14 WSM9 OUT Adjust the ● ATT_w0 -

attenuatio 1()
n of each ● ATT_w0
wavelength 2()
adding
channel ● ...
and
wavelength
passing-
through
channel.

(receive adjust the
end) attenuatio
n.
16 OAU IN Measure or h' ( ) Nominal

power. power

end) minimum
nominal
gain
18 OAU OUT Measure or h" ( ) Nominal

(transmit query the output
power. power
OLA Station
Figure 8-45, Table 8-20 and Figure 8-46, Table 8-21 describe the testing diagram
and single-station commissioning procedure of an OLA station. For the

commissioning example of an OLA station, see 8.2.4.4 Commissioning the Link

Optical Power at OLA Station B.
Figure 8-45 Testing diagram of an OLA station

Table 8-20 Commissioning procedure of an OLA station

(dB/dBm) Standard
1 OAU VI Preset the Nominal -

attenuatio output
n of the optical
EVOA power of
the
amplifier
at the
upstream
station -
link
attenuatio
n-
Nominal
input
optical
power of
the
amplifier
at the OLA
station.
NOTE
If the
calculated
preset
value is a
negative
number,
preset the
attenuatio
n of the
EVOA to
the
minimum
attenuatio
n.
2 OAU OUT Measure or a() -

query the
optical
power.
3 OAU IN Measure or b() -

query the
optical
power.


(dB/dBm) Standard
4 OAU VI Query and ATT1 ( ) If the

adjust the actual
attenuatio attenuatio
n. n (a-b)
between
amplifiers
is smaller
than the
attenuatio
n specified
in the
engineerin
g design
document,
increase
the
attenuatio
n of the
EVOA so
that the
input
optical
power
reaches the
minimum
nominal
input
optical
power. If
the actual
attenuatio
n (a-b)
between
amplifiers
is greater
than the
attenuatio
n specified
in the
engineerin
g design
document,
decrease
the
attenuatio
n of the
EVOA so
that the
input


(dB/dBm) Standard
optical
power of
the
amplifier
reaches the
nominal
input
optical
power.
5 OAU IN Measure or b' ( ) -

query the
optical
power.
6 OAU OUT Adjust the Nominal Nominal

gain. Gain1 ( ) output
optical
power of
the
amplifier
at the
station -
Nominal
output
optical
power of
the
amplifier
at the
upstream
station +
(a-b')

Figure 8-46 Testing diagram of an OLA station (OBU1 cascaded)
Table 8-21 Commissioning procedure of an OLA station (OBU1 cascaded)
N Board Po Step Test Reference Standard

o. rt Result
(dB/
dBm)
1 OBU1 VI Adjust the - 0.7 dB

(receive attenuation to
end) the minimum
value.
2 OBU1 IN Measure or query a() Norminal Gain of OBU1 +

(receive the optical power. Norminal Gain of OBU2 =
end) Output optical power of
the amplifier at the
3 OBU1 O Measure or query b() upstream station - Input
(receive UT the optical power. optical power of OBU1 +
end) Output optical power of
4 OBU1 IN Measure or query c() OBU1 - Input optical
(transmi the optical power. power of OBU2 +
t end) Nominal single -
wavelength output optical
5 OBU1 VI Query and adjust ATT1 ( ) power of OBU2 - Nominal
(transmi the attenuation. single-wavelength output
t end) optical power at the
upstream station
6 OBU1 IN Measure or query c' ( )
(transmi the optical power.
t end)

N Board Po Step Test Reference Standard

o. rt Result
(dB/
dBm)
7 OBU1 O Measure or query d() NOTE

(transmi UT the optical power. Commission the two OBU
amplifiers as one amplifier.
t end) Query the output optical
power of the amplifier at
the transmit end of the
upstream station (Pout) and
the input optical power of
the OBU1 amplifier at the
receive end of the station
(Pin). Calculate the line
attenuation according to the
following formula: Line
attenuation = Pout – Pin.
8.2.3 Common Operations Required for Optical Power

Commissioning
When remotely commissioning optical power of a board, measure the optical
power for each channel on the board by using an optical spectrum analyzing
board. Then adjust the optical power by changing the attenuation of VOAs built in
the board and the gain of an optical amplifier board.
8.2.3.1 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of a line board.
8.2.3.1.1 Forcing the Line Board to Emit Light

This section describes how to force the Line board to emit light.
Prerequisites
The NE must be created on the NMS.

NMS
The signals accessed on the client side or the WDM side should be service signals
in actual transmission, or the optical signals generated by forcing the board to
emit light.

The WDM side of the Line board by default is forced to emit light. If it does not
emit light, refer to the following procedure to query whether the board is forced
to emit light. If the board is not forced to emit light, set the board to emit light.
Precautions
The prerequisite for commissioning the ESC (Electric Supervisory Channel) is that the Line
board is forced to emit light.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer window, select the desired Line board and choose
Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Optional: Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Automatic Laser Shutdown of
the optical port on the WDM side of the OTU to DISABLE.
Only the LWXS can set Automatic Laser Shutdown of the WDM side.
Step 4 Set the Laser Status of the optical port on the WDM side of the Line board to
OPEN.
Step 5 Click Apply.
----End
8.2.3.1.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Line Board

This section describes how to commission the input optical power of the Line on
the U2000.
Prerequisite
● The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.
● The ECC communication must be created.
● The commissioning of the optical supervisory channel must be complete.
● The optical cross-connections must be configured at the ROADM station.
If no (or EVOA in the drop wavelength channel) is configured before the IN port of the Line
board at the station, it indicates that a fixed optical attenuator is configured. In this case, check
only the receive optical power of the Line board. If the measured receive optical power of the
Line board is not within the required range, replace the fixed optical attenuator on site.

NMS

Procedure
Step 1 Query the input optical power of the Line board on the NMS.
1. Log in to the NMS. Double-click the stations to be queried in the Main
Topology. The Running Status of the stations to be queried is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
window.
3. Select the desired Line board, and choose Configuration > Optical Power
Management from the Function Tree.
4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
Step 2 Compare the queried input optical power of the Line board to the range of the
input optical power of the Line board.
● If the actual input optical power is higher than the upper threshold of the
input optical power of the Line board, increase the /EVOA attenuation for this
channel. The actual input optical power is then within the range of the input
optical power.
● If the actual input optical power is lower than the lower threshold of the
input optical power of the Line board, decrease the /EVOA attenuation of this
channel. After the attenuation is adjusted to the minimum value, if the actual
input optical power is still not within the range of the input optical power,
check the internal fiber connections.
Adjust the optical power of the EVOA as follows:

1. Log in to the NMS. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running
2. Right-click an NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
window.
3. Select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the left-hand Function Tree.
4. On the Basic Attributes tab page, double-click the field, and then enter an
appropriate value.
The adjustable range of the built-in attenuator for a board depends on the board type.
5. Click Apply. Click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.
For the 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s Line boards: adjust the input optical power at the IN port on the
WDM side of the Line board to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range:
from -11 dBm to -4 dBm; adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the client side of the
Line board to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity
+3) dBm to (overload point -5) dBm.
For the 100Gbit/s Line boards: adjust the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of
the Line board to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from -12 dBm
to -5 dBm; adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the client side of the Line board to
ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to
(overload point -5) dBm.

When commissioning the input optical power of the Line board at the ROADM station, you do
not need to configure the before the IN port on the WDM-side of the Line board. You need to
adjust only the EVOA for each drop channel of the WSD9.
----End
8.2.3.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OAU

This section describes how to adjust the gains for the optical amplifier board.
Prerequisites
The commissioning of the optical power for the upstream board must be
complete.

NMS, optical power meter
For the optical amplifier board, set the gain to ensure that the mean output
optical power equals the maximum output optical power for single wavelength.
After setting the gain, use the optical spectrum analyzer to check whether the
mean output optical power of single wavelength is in the range of maximum
output optical power of single wavelength - 0.5 dBm to maximum output optical
power of single wavelength + 0.5 dBm. If it exceeds this range, fine tune the gain
value.
Procedure
● On the NMS, set the gain for an OA board.
a. Display the NE Explorer on the NMS.
b. Select the desired optical amplifier board and choose Configuration >
c. Select Channel from the drop-down list.
d. In the Basic Attributes tab, query Nominal Gain Upper Threshold and
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold to get the nominal range for the gain.
e. In the Basic Attributes tab, query Upper Threshold of Actual Gain and
Lower Threshold of Actual Gain to get the settable gain range for the
OAU board.
f. Ensure that the input power of the OAU is the average input power of
single wavelength. Calculate the gain value.
Gain = Maximum output power of single wavelength - Average input power of single
wavelength.
The average per-channel input optical power is measured by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.

g. Check whether the gain calculated in f is within the value range.
▪ If the calculated gain is less than the minimum settable gain,

increase the attenuation value of the VOA at the input end of the
optical amplifier board. This decreases the average input power of
single wavelength to the standard value.
▪ If the calculated gain is more than the maximum settable gain,

decrease the attenuation value of the VOA at the input end of the
optical amplifier board. This increases the average input power of
single wavelength. If the gain cannot meet the requirement, confirm
the network design value with the network designer.
▪ If the calculated gain is within the value range, decrease the

attenuation value of the VOA at the input end of the optical
amplifier board to make single-wavelength input optical power as
close to maximum nominal single-wavelength input optical power.
h. According to the results in g, set the Nominal Gain of the OAU1 board in
the Basic Attributes tab to ensure the single-wavelength output optical
power meets requirements.
i. Click Apply.
j. Click Query. Query the Gain displayed on the NMS. If the gain difference
of the actual value and the set nominal value is within 0.5 dB, the setting
is successful. If the setting fails, check whether the gain is within the gain
range.
● On the NMS, set Rated Optical Power for an OA board.
a. Select the desired OA board, and choose Configuration > WDM
b. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down
list.
c. On the Advanced Attributes tab page, set the value in the Rated
Optical Power field as the nominal input optical power for a single
wavelength.
d. Click Apply.
● On the NMS, close the laser of the OUT port for the OA board.
list.
c. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Laser Status to Off.
d. Click Apply. Then click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog
box.
● On the NMS, enable the laser at the OUT port on the OA board.
list.
c. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Laser Status to On.

d. Click Apply. Then click Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog
box.
8.2.3.3 Adjusting Internal Attenuators on Boards

When a board has an internal attenuator, you can adjust the optical power of this
board by changing the attenuation of the internal attenuator. This section
describes how to adjust the attenuation based on engineering design documents.
Prerequisites
Impact on System
None

NMS
The electrical variable attenuator boards are the VA1, VA4, M40V, WSM9, WSD9,
WSMD4, and WSMD9 boards.
● The variable attenuator built in the WSM9 or WSD9 board can be adjusted only when the
board has been configured with routes.
● The variable attenuator built in the AMx port of the WSMD4 or WSMD9 board can be
adjusted only when the board has been configured with routes.
Procedure
1. Log in to the NMS. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running
2. Right-click an NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
window.
3. Select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the left-hand Function Tree.
4. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.
5. On the Basic Attributes tab page, double-click the Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio(dB) field, and then enter an appropriate value.
The adjustable range of the built-in attenuator for a board depends on the board type.
6. Click Apply.

8.2.4 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the

Chain Network
This section uses project X as an example to illustrate the optical power
commissioning procedures.

This section describes the networking for project X.
Figure 8-47 shows the networking diagram of project X. The ONEs A, B, C, D, E, F

and G are the WDM systems which form the chain network. Among these ONEs,
the ONE A and ONE G are the OTM stations, the ONE B, ONE D and ONE F are
the OLA stations, the ONE C is the ROADM station and the ONE E is the FOADM
station.
Networking Diagram of the Project X

Figure 8-47 shows the networking diagram of project X.
Figure 8-47 Networking diagram of project X
:OTM :OLA : OADM
In this commissioning example, the signal flow from west to east is used as an
example to illustrate the commissioning procedure. The commissioning method
for the signal flow from east to west is the same as the signal flow from west to
east.
Requirements on Incident Optical Power

Table 8-22 shows the incident optical power requirements based on a 10Gbit/s
single-wavelength system.

Table 8-22 Requirements on Incident Optical Power of the 10Gbit/s single-

wavelength system
Modul Numb G.652 G.655 G.653 TW- TW-C TW+ SMF-
e Type er of SSMF LEAF RS LS
Wavel
ength
s
NRZ 40 +4 +4 -5 +2 +2 -1 -3
80 +1 +1 -7 -1 -1 -1 -3
(D)RZ 40 +4 +4 -5 +2 +2 +1 -3
80 +1 +1 -7 -1 -1 -1 -3
The optical power listed in the table is expressed in dBm.
If a high-power optical amplifier with a total output optical power of 23 dBm is used on the
link, the incident optical power between the high-power optical amplifier needs to be increased
by 3 dB in the commissioning process. The optical power of 2 dBm listed in the table, however,
is changed to 4 dBm.
For other optical modules or fiber types, contact the product managers or network design
personnel to determine the incident optical power.
The dispersion of G.653 fiber is close to zero, which causes strong non-linear effects. Therefore,
the incident power is relatively low. Hence, in the WDM system based on the G.653 fiber, a
variable optical attenuator (VOA) must be added at the output end of the transmit optical
amplifier board. This ensures the per-channel incident optical power meets the requirement of
the G.653 fiber.

8.2.4.2 Commissioning Procedure

This section describes the procedure for commissioning optical power.
Commissioning Procedure for the Add-Wavelength and Link Optical Power

Table 8-23 lists the procedure for each site.
Table 8-23 Commissioning procedures

Proced From West to East
ure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(OTM) (OLA) (ROAD (OLA) (FOAD (OLA) (OTM)
M) M)
Commis Y N Y N Y N N
sioning
Optical
Power
for the
Add
Wavele
ngths
Commis N Y Y Y Y Y Y
sion
links

The optical power for single channel is not optimized at this step, but during equalization.
Before starting, set the attenuation of DEMUX to maximum, if EVOA is available.
The commissioning flowchart for the optical power of the OTM/OADM is shown in
Figure 8-48.

Figure 8-48 Commissioning procedure for OTM/OADM optical power
The commissioning flowchart for the optical power of an OLA is shown in Figure
8-49.

Figure 8-49 Commissioning procedure for OLA optical power
Commissioning Procedure for Optical Power Equalization

Table 8-24 lists the procedures for each site.

ure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
M) M)
Equaliz Y Ya Y Ya Yb Ya N
e
optical
power


● "a" indicates that the OLA station works as a monitoring station during the commissioning
process of commissioning the optical power for equilibrium purposes.
● "b" indicates that the optical power for each add channel at the FOADM station is
commissioned for equalization purposes.
The commissioning flowchart for equalizing wavelength optical power is shown in

Figure 8-50.
Figure 8-50 Commissioning procedure for equalizing wavelength optical power
Commissioning Procedure for Drop-Wavelength Optical Power

Table 8-25 lists the procedures for each site.


ure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
M) M)
Commis Y N Y N Y N Y
sion
receive
optical
power
of
OTUs

The commissioning flowchart for drop wavelength optical power is shown in

Figure 8-51.

Figure 8-51 Commissioning procedure for drop wavelength optical power
8.2.4.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM

Station A
This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station A that
is in the west-to-east signal flow.

Prerequisite
● The optical cross-connections must be configured at each station.

NMS
Testing Diagram
Figure 8-52 Fiber connections of OTM station A

EVOA
As shown in Figure 8-52, each EVOA can be considered as a EVOA board. If there is no EVOA on
the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, configure the
MVOA or add the fixed attenuator and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
Procedure
Step 1 Set Laser Shutdown to Disabled.
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of
NE Function from the Main Topology.
2. Click from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane to update the
Navigator Tree. Select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the
double-right-arrow button.

3. In the row of Laser Shutdown under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to
Disabled.
4. Click Apply. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light and close WDM-side
lasers for the other OTUs.
After the OTU board is installed in the subrack, the WDM-side laser of the OTU is automatically
enabled and is forced to emit light.
1. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE A is
displayed.
2. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
from the left-hand Function Tree.
4. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to Off. Click
Apply.
----End
Scenario 1: An EVOA Is Installed Before the Optical Amplifier Board

Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channel
to 5 dB.
The EVOA attenuation set at this point is the preset value. It is used to adjust the optical power
of each wavelength during commissioning of the optical power equilibrium.
1. Select the desired M40V board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to
5dB.
3. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed telling you that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
Step 2 On the NMS, set the gain of the OAU1 to the minimum nominal gain.
1. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set to 20.0dB.
3. Click Apply.
Step 3 On the NMS, query the input optical power of the OAU1 in the transmit direction.
1. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > Optical Power
Management from the left-hand Function Tree.
2. Click Query to query the Input Power of the OAU1.
3. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA board so that the actual input optical power
of the OAU1 reaches about -16 dBm, based on the Input Power of the OAU1
queried by using the NMS.

1. Select the desired EVOA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
the desired value.
3. Click Apply.
If the input optical power of the OAU cannot meet the requirements after adjusting the
attenuation of the EVOA, you can adjust the gain of the OAU to ensure that the output optical
power meets requirements.
In the Basic Attributes tab, Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Lower
Threshold (dB) indicate the adjustable range of the gain of the OAU1.
Step 5 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers for the other OTUs.

1. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to On.
3. Click Apply.
Step 6 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled.
3. In the Laser Shutdown row under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to
Enabled.
4. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
----End
Scenario 2: No EVOA Is Installed Before the Optical Amplifier Board

Step 1 On the NMS, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add
wavelength channel to 10 dB.
Step 2 Set the gain of the OAU1 to the minimum nominal gain.
Step 3 Query the input optical power of the OAU1 in the transmit direction.
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at the add wavelength channel
so that the input optical power of the OAU1 reaches the nominal input optical
power, based on the input optical power of the OAU1 queried by using the NMS.
Step 5 Shut down the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only
on the OTU that accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform the
commissioning based on Step 1 through Step 4.
Step 6 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths based on the preceding
steps.

Step 7 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the other OTUs.

1. Select the desired OTU boards, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to On. Click
Apply.
Step 8 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled.
Navigator Tree. Then select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click
the double-right-arrow button.
3. In the Laser Shutdown row under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to
Enabled.
4. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
----End
8.2.4.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station B that
Prerequisite

NMS

Testing Diagram
Figure 8-53 Fiber connections of OLA station B (OAU1)

EVOA
Figure 8-54 Fiber connections of OLA station B (OBU1+OBU1)

EVOA
As shown in Figure 8-53 and Figure 8-54, each EVOA can be considered as a EVOA board. If
there is no EVOA on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this
occurs, configure the MVOA or add the fixed attenuator and then perform the optical power
commissioning on site.

Scenario 1: Commissioning for the OLA (OAU1) Networking

Step 1 Calculate the link attenuation for this span of optical transmission line based on
the engineering design documents provided by the client.
Step 2 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA before the amplifier using either of the
following methods:
● Method 1: EVOA attenuation =Minimum nominal gain of the amplifier at the
OLA site – Line attenuation.
If the preset value calculated using method 1 is a negative number, directly preset the
EVOA attenuation to the minimum value and set the gain of the amplifier at the OLA
site as follows: Gain = Line attenuation + EVOA attenuation.
When method 1 is used and line attenuation changes, preferentially adjust the gain of
the amplifier at the OLA site. The following example describes how to adjust the gain:
Assume that the original gain of the amplifier is 20 dB. If line attenuation increases by
2 dB, adjust the gain of the amplifier to 22 dB (= 20 dB+2 dB).
● Method 2: EVOA attenuation = Design margin that meets customers' line
fiber requirements + Inherent insertion loss of the EVOA. Generally, the optical
fiber margin is set to 3 dB unless otherwise specified.
When method 2 is used and line attenuation changes, preferentially adjust the
attenuation of the EVOA before the amplifier. The following example describes how to
adjust the attenuation of the EVOA: Assume that the original attenuation of the EVOA
is 5 dB. If line attenuation increases by 2 dB, adjust the attenuation of the EVOA to 3
dB (= 5 dB – 2 dB).
For the operations on the NMS, see Setting the attenuation of the EVOA in "Commissioning
the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 3 Query the output optical power (Pout) of the OA at the upstream station A and
input optical power (Pin) of the OA at the downstream station B. Calculate the
attenuation between the two amplifiers according to the following formula:
Attenuation between the two amplifiers = Pout – Pin.
For operations on the NMS, see Querying the optical power of the OA in "Commissioning the
Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 4 If the actual attenuation between amplifiers is smaller than the attenuation
specified in the engineering design document, increase the attenuation of the
EVOA so that the input optical power reaches the minimum nominal input optical
power. If the actual attenuation between amplifiers is greater than the
attenuation specified in the engineering design document, decrease the
attenuation of the EVOA so that the input optical power of the amplifier reaches
the nominal input optical power.
Step 5 See Step 3, and calculate the attenuation between amplifiers after adjustment.
Step 6 Set the gain of the amplifier according to the following formula: Gain of the
amplifier = Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the station -
Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the upstream station +
Attenuation between amplifiers.

2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Nominal Gain according to the following
formula: Gain of the amplifier = Nominal output optical power of the
amplifier at the station - Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the
upstream station + Attenuation between amplifiers.
3. Click Apply.
Step 7 Optional: If the calculated gain exceeds the maximum gain that can be set for the
OAU, the output optical power of the OA cannot reach the nominal output optical
power. Therefore, set the gain to the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU.
Maximum gain that can be set = Maximum gain of the OA - Intermediate insertion loss.
Intermediate insertion loss = Output optical power of the PAOUT optical port - Input optical
power of the BAIN optical port.
2. In the Basic Attributes tab, click Query. Check Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold and Nominal Gain Lower Threshold to obtain the tunable range
of the gain for the OAU1.
3. Choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from the left-hand
Function Tree.
4. Click Query. Query and record the value of Output Power of PAOUT and the
value of Input Power of BAIN, and calculate the insertion loss.
5. Calculate the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU1 based on the
insertion loss.
6. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree.
7. In the Basic Attributes tab, set Nominal Gain to the maximum gain that can
be set.
8. Click Apply.
----End
Scenario 2: Commissioning for the OLA (OBU1+OBU1) Networking

Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA located before the OBU1 at the input end to
the minimum value (1 dB). For operations on the NMS, see Setting the
attenuation of the EVOA in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add
Wavelengths at OTM Station A". Commission the two OBU1 amplifiers as one
amplifier. Query the output optical power of the amplifier at the transmit end of
the upstream station (Pout) and the input optical power of the OBU1 amplifier at
the receive end of the station (Pin). Calculate the line attenuation according to the
following formula: Line attenuation = Pout – Pin. For the operations on the NMS,
see Querying the Optical Power of the OA in "Commissioning the Optical Power
of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

If the input optical power is within the input range of the optical power amplifier, you do not
need to adjust the optical power of the EVOA. Otherwise, you should adjust the attenuation of
the EVOA to make sure that the input optical power meets the requirements for the input
optical power of the optical power amplifier.
Step 2 Adjust the optical power of the EVOA between the two OBU1 amplifiers based on
the line attenuation, making the following formula valid. Output optical power of
the OBU1 at the receive end - input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit
end = fixed gain of the OBU1 + fixed gain of the OBU1 - line attenuation.
For operations on the NMS, see Setting the attenuation of the EVOA in "Commissioning the
----End
8.2.4.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Links
at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C
that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

NMS
For the technical specifications for each type of the board, see the specifications of
the boards..

Testing Diagram
Figure 8-55 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with

WSD9+RMU9)

EVOA
As shown in Figure 8-55, if the 80-wavelength system is used, it is recommended to add the
EVOA in the dashed frame.
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same
wavelength at the same time.
The preset values for the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-
wavelength input optical power of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of
amplifier board, see the specifications of the board

Procedure
Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA at each drop channel of the WSD9 on the
receiving side of the ROADM station to the maximum value.
1. Log in to the NMS. Double-click NE C in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of NE C is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
window.
3. Select the desired WSD9 board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
4. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio
to the maximum value (15.0).
5. Click Apply.
----End
Scenario 1: Wavelengths Are Directly Added from OTU to the RMU9 (OPA)
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers located before the receive-end WSD9
are used for compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the
commissioning method, see 8.2.4.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at
OLA Station B.
Step 2 On the NMS, set Rated Optical Power of a single wavelength for the OBU1 at
the transmit end based on the nominal input optical power of a single
wavelength, which varies with system (40-channel system or 80-channel system).
1. Select the desired OBU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Then set Rated Optical Power to -19.0.
The OBU103 (40 channels) is used as an example here.
3. Click Apply.
Step 3 Optional: If the OA at the transmit end is an OAU, set Rated Optical Power of
the OAU1 at the transmit end based on the nominal input optical power of a
single wavelength, which varies with system (40-channel system or 80-channel
system). For more information, see the specifications of the boards..
For operations on the NMS, see Step 2 .
Step 4 Set OPA Mode to Auto.

1. In the NE Explorer window. Choose the NE C, and choose Configuration >
Optical Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab. Right-click OPA
Mode and choose Auto for the desired optical cross-connections.
3. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
----End

Scenario 2: Wavelengths Are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (OPA)
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers located before the receive-end WSD9
OLA Station B.
the transmit end according to the nominal input optical power of a single
Rated Optical Power should be set for the OBU1 behind the M40V and the OBU1 behind the
RMU9. The recommended OBU to use behind the M40V is the OBU104.
the OAU1 at the transmit end according to the nominal input optical power of a
system). See the specifications of the board
----End
Scenario 3: Wavelengths Are Directly Added from OTU to the RMU9

(Manual Power Adjustment)
For operations on the NMS, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in

"Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and shut down the
WDM-side lasers for all the other OTUs.
Deactivate the optical cross-connections on WSD9 to block the pass-through wavelengths.

Activate the optical cross-connections after adjusting the add wavelengths.
For the operations on the NMS, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the

Step 3 On the NMS, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end.
1. Select the desired OBU1, and choose Configuration > Optical Power
2. Click Query to query the current input optical power of the OBU1.
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel of the RMU9
so that the single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit
end is the same as the nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the
OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers and the type of system should be
considered.)
For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see the specifications of the
boards..
1. Select the desired RMU9. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set the Optical Interface Attenuation
Ratio of the desired channel to the desired value.
3. Click Apply.
Step 5 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on
the OTU that accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform commissioning
based on Step 3 through Step 4.
Step 6 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on
the preceding steps.
Step 7 Disable the lasers on all the OTU boards with add wavelengths at the station. In
the pass-through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for
compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method,
see 8.2.4.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
Step 8 Optional: If the EXPO port of the WSD9 is connected to the EXPI port of the
RMU9, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each of pass-through
wavelengths channel to 7 dB.
1. Select the desired WSD9 board. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for
each wavelength in the pass-through direction to 7.0.
3. Click Apply.
Step 9 Optional: If the DM port for the WSD9 is connected to the AM port of the RMU9,
preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through
wavelength channel to 4 dB. In addition, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for
the RMU9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to the minimal attenuation
value.
Step 10 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs. For details, see Setting the Laser of
the OTU in "Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths at OTM
station A".

Step 11 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE

Function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM
Station A".
----End
Scenario 4: Wavelengths are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (Manual
Power Adjustment and the EVOA Appears in the Dashed Frame)

WDM-side lasers for all the other OTUs.
For operations on the NMS, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical
Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
to 5 dB.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Attenuation(dB) for each wavelength in
the add wavelength direction to 5.0.
3. Click Apply.
Step 4 On the NMS, query the input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V. For
details, see Step 3.
Step 5 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA after the M40V so that the single-wavelength
input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V is the same as the nominal
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1. (The models for the optical
amplifiers and the type of system should be considered.)
boards..
Step 6 On the NMS, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end. For
Step 7 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the RMU9
so that the single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the RMU9
is the same as the nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1.
For the technical specifications of each type of the amplifier board, see the specifications of the
boards..

Step 9 Adjust the optical power of all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on
Step 10 Disable the WDM-side lasers for all OTUs on the add channels.
Step 11 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for
RMU9, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through
Step 13 Optional: If the DM port of the WSD9 is connected to the AM port for the RMU9,
preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through
wavelength channel to 4 dB. In addition, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for
the RMU9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to the minimal attenuation
value.
Step 14 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs again. For details, see Setting the
Laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths
at OTM Station A".
Station A".
----End
Scenario 5: Wavelengths Are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (Manual
Power Adjustment and the EVOA Does not Appear in the Dashed Frame)

Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser of only one OTU to emit light, and shut down WDM-
side lasers for all the other OTUs.
Step 3 On the NMS, query the input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V. For
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the M40V
so that the single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V
(The models for the optical amplifiers and the type of system should be
considered.)

boards..
Step 5 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for each of the other wavelength add channels
for the M40V to the attenuation value of the EVOA in the wavelength add channel
mentioned in Step 4.
Step 6 On the NMS, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end. For
Step 7 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the RMU9
so that the single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the RMU9
boards..
Step 8 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU and enable the WDM-side laser on only
Step 9 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on
Step 10 Disable the WDM-side lasers for all OTUs on the add channels.
RMU9, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through
Step 13 Optional: If the DM port of the WSD9 is connected to the AM port of the RMU9,
preset the attenuation of the EVOA of the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength
channel to 4 dB. In addition, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the RMU9 at
each pass-through wavelength channel to the minimal attenuation value.
Step 14 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs. For details, see Setting the laser of
the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM
Station A".
Step 15 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled. For details, see Setting Automatic Disabling of
NE Function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at
OTM Station A".
----End
8.2.4.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link
at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9)
(WSD9+WSM9) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.

Prerequisite

NMS
Testing Diagram

WSD9+WSM9)

EVOA

Procedure
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the optical amplifier before the WSD9 at the receive
end is used to compensate the line optical attenuation. Commission the optical
power for the pass-through channel based on the procedure for 8.2.4.4
Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
Step 2 On the NMS, set Rated Optical Power for the OBU1 at the transmit end based on
the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength, which varies with the
system (40-channel system or 80-channel system).
Step 4 According to the analysis result of the optical power spectrum monitored on the
downstream station, adjust the EVOA for each add channel and pass-through
channel for power equilibrium purposes. For the specific commissioning steps, see
8.2.4.15 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station
D for Equalization.
----End
at ROADM Station C (RDU9+WSM9)
(RDU9+WSM9) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

NMS

Testing Diagram

RDU9+WSM9)

EVOA
Procedure
None.
Scenario 1: OPA
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers located before the receive-end RDU9


OLA Station B.
the transmit end based on the nominal input optical power of a single
1. Select the desired OBU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Then set Rated Optical Power to -19.0.
The OBU103 (40 channels) is used as an example here.
3. Click Apply.
the OAU1 at the transmit end based on the nominal input optical power of a
system).

1. In the NE Explorer window. Choose the NE C, and choose Configuration >
Optical Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab. Right-click OPA
Mode and choose Auto for the desired optical cross-connections.
----End
Scenario 2: Manual Power Adjustment


WDM-side lasers for all the other OTUs. If the pass-through wavelengths on the
RDU9 board are configured, block the pass-through wavelengths and ensure there
is no input light at the EXPI optical port on the WSM9 board.
Deactivate the optical cross-connections on WSM9 to block the pass-through wavelengths.

Activate the optical cross-connections after adjusting the add wavelengths.
For the operations on the NMS, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the
Step 3 On the NMS, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end.
1. Select the desired OBU1, and choose Configuration > Optical Power

2. Click Query to query the current input optical power of the OBU1.
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel of the WSM9
so that the single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit
end is the same as the nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the
OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers and the type of system should be
considered.)
1. Select the desired WSM9. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set the Optical Interface Attenuation
Ratio of the desired channel to the desired value.
3. Click Apply.
Step 6 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths on the WSM9 based on
Step 7 Disable the lasers on all the OTU boards with add wavelengths at the station. In
the pass-through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for
Step 8 Optional: If the EXPO port of the RDU9 is connected to the EXPI port of the
WSM9, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSM9 at each of pass-through
wavelengths channel to 7 dB.
1. Select the desired WSM9 board. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for
each wavelength in the pass-through direction to 7.0.
3. Click Apply.
Step 9 Optional: If the DM port for the RDU9 is connected to the AM port of the WSM9,
preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSM9 at each pass-through
Step 10 Activate the optical cross-connections on WSM9 to set up the pass-through

wavelengths.
Step 11 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs. For details, see Setting the Laser of
the OTU in "Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths at OTM
station A".

Station A".
----End

at ROADM Station C (WSMDx+WSMDx)
(WSMDx+WSMDx) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

NMS
Testing Diagram
Figure 8-58 Fiber connection of ROADM station (networking with WSMDx

+WSMDx)

EVOA

As shown in Figure 8-58, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or
VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs,
configure the MVOA or add the fixed attenuator and then perform the optical power
● In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports of the WSMDx board are not
shown. The two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in the other direction.
● The single-wavelength signals are transmitted directly to the AMn optical port by the OTU
board.
Procedure
Step 1 See the steps included in 8.2.4.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add
Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).
----End
8.2.4.9 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station D

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station D that
Prerequisite

NMS
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures included in 8.2.4.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at
OLA Station B.
----End
8.2.4.10 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at

FOADM Station E
This section describes how to commission the optical power of FOADM station E
Prerequisite



NMS
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see the specifications of the
boards..
Testing Diagram
Figure 8-59 Fiber connections of FOADM station E

EVOA
As shown in Figure 8-59, each EVOA can be considered as a board. If no or VA4 is configured
on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, add the
fixed attenuator and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
The preset values in the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-
wavelength input optical power for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type
of amplifier board, see the specifications of the boards..
Procedure

Step 2 Block all add wavelengths.
Step 4 On the NMS, query the output optical power for the receive-end amplifier OAU.
1. Select the desired OAU, and choose Configuration > Optical Power

2. Click Query to query the Output Power for the amplifier board.
Step 5 Enable the disabled WDM-side lasers on the OTUs. For details, see Setting the
Laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths
at OTM Station A".
Step 6 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled. For details, see Setting Automatic Disabling of
NE Function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at
OTM Station A".
----End

FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board)
Prerequisite

NMS
The optical power for the first wavelength after being adjusted is used as the
reference optical power during commissioning. In general, the longest wavelength
is selected as the first wavelength.

Testing Diagram
Figure 8-60 Fiber connection of FOADM station E

EVOA
As shown in Figure 8-60, each EVOA can be considered as a EVOA board. If no EVOA is
configured on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs,
Procedure
Step 1 Block the pass-through wavelengths.

Step 3 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and close WDM-side
lasers for all the other OTUs.
After the OTU board is installed in the subrack, the WDM-side laser for the OTU is automatically
enabled and is forced to emit light.
to 5 dB.

The attenuation set here is the preset value and is used to adjust the optical power for each
wavelength at the commissioning stage for the optical power equilibrium purposes.
Step 5 Set the attenuation of the EVOA before the OBU1 at the transmit end to the
minimum value.
Step 6 On the NMS, set the attenuation of the EVOA on this add channel based on the
input optical power for the OBU1 displayed in response to a query. This ensures
that the input optical power for the OTU is equal to the nominal input optical
power for a single wavelength.
Step 7 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser on
another OTU. Then perform commissioning based on Step 6.
Step 8 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths based on the preceding
steps.
Step 9 Block all add wavelengths.
Step 11 Unblock the pass-through wavelengths.
Step 12 At the upstream station, enable the WDM-side laser on only the OTU that
accesses the longest wavelength. Disable the lasers on the OTUs that transmit
pass-through wavelengths. Then, perform commissioning according to Step 6.
Step 13 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU and enable the WDM-side lasers on the
OTUs that access adjacent wavelengths. Then perform commissioning based on
Step 6.
Step 14 Adjust the optical power for all the other pass-through wavelengths based on the
preceding steps.
Step 15 Re-enable the lasers on the OTUs that transmit pass-through wavelengths, and
enable the lasers on OTUs that add wavelengths.

Station A".
----End
8.2.4.12 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station F

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station F that

Prerequisite

NMS
Procedure
Step 1 See the steps included in 8.2.4.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA
Station B.
----End
8.2.4.13 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OTM Station G

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station G that
Prerequisite

NMS

Testing Diagram
Figure 8-61 Fiber connections of OTM station G

EVOA
Procedure
Step 1 See the steps included in 8.2.4.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA
Station B.
----End
8.2.4.14 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA

Station B for Equalization
This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station A and
OLA station B that are in the west-to-east signal flow for equalization.
Prerequisite


NMS
After wavelengths are transmitted over a certain distance, the optical power for
different wavelengths differs greatly because the loss or gain varies according to
the components, boards, fibers, and the non-linear effects of fibers. As a result,
the input optical power of different wavelengths at the downstream optical
amplifier board (OAU) is different and the OSNRs of different wavelengths at the
receive end are different.
When the optical power variation is very great, the wavelengths with very low
optical power have much lower OSNR than the wavelengths with high optical
power once the wavelengths are transmitted in the system. To ensure that
wavelengths with the lowest optical power meet system requirements, you need
to increase the original OSNR tolerance. You must ensure that the optical power
at the intermediate station is flattened. For more information, see Figure 8-62.
Figure 8-62 Equalizing optical power at the intermediate station
Variable optical attenuator
Objectives of single-wavelength optical power commissioning:

● According to the engineering requirements, the optical power flatness for
each wavelength of the intermediate OAU must be ensured. The optical
power at the transmit end remains at a certain slope that is opposite to the
optical power slope at the receive end.
● According to the engineering requirement, the single-wavelength input optical
power must be within the range of nominal input optical power +/- 3 dB at
both the transmit and receive ends.

● When the attenuation of a channel is adjusted, the optical power of the adjacent channels
also changes. The number of affected adjacent channels depends on the attenuation
adjustment step. The number of affected adjacent channels increases when the attenuation
adjustment step increases. In general, when the attenuation adjustment step is equal to or
smaller than 1 dB, one adjacent channel on each side is affected (based on an 80-channel
system). The change in attenuation for the adjacent channels is the same as that for the
adjusted channel.
● It is recommended that the value of the attenuation adjustment step be smaller than 1 dB.
In addition, it is recommended that you adjust the attenuation channel by channel. Do not
repeatedly adjust the attenuation for a channel, and do not adjust the attenuation for
multiple channels simultaneously.
● Equalizing optical power at intermediate stations is intended to correct any unflat link
optical power resulting from accumulated unflatness of OAs and non-linear effects from
long distance transmission. When the optical power equalization is complete, the optical
spectrums at the transmit and receive ends are unflat (±3 dB). But each wavelength on the
line has almost the same optical power and OSNR, which results in the same transmission
performance.
Procedure
Step 1 The optical power equalization is commissioned by using the following methods:
● If the MCA is not configured at OLA station B, at the MON port for each
supervisory point OA, use the optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) to monitor the
optical power for each wavelength on receive end. Commission the EVOA for
each wavelength channel for the M40V at the upstream station A based on
tested data. Equalize the optical power of the channels. That is, verify that the
following formula is satisfied while the total output optical power remains
unchanged: Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal single-
wavelength output optical power ± 3.0 dBm.
● If OLA station B where the MCA is configured is considered as the supervisory
station, test the flatness of the optical power for each wavelength through
the MCA. Commission the EVOA for each wavelength channel of the M40V at
the upstream station A based on the tested data. Equalize the optical power
of the channels. That is, verify that the following formula is satisfied while the
total output optical power remains unchanged: Single-wavelength output
optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output optical power ± 1.0 dBm.
● Query the optical power of each wavelength through the MCA/OPM as
follows:
1. Log in to the NMS. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology and the Running
Status of NE B is displayed.
3. Select the desired MCA/OPM board, and choose Configuration > Laser
Spectrum Analysis from the Function Tree.
4. Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click
Query.
Step 2 Adjust the attenuation of the channel with the highest optical power and the
attenuation of the channel with the lowest optical power. Use a step of 0.5 dB
based on the spectrum analysis result of the MCA/OPM board. After the
attenuation is adjusted, the optical power for the two channels must satisfy the
requirement above. For the adjustment process on the NMS, see Setting the

attenuation of each channel of the M40V in "Commissioning the Optical Power

of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 3 Use the MCA/OPM board again to measure the optical power for each wavelength
and determine the wavelengths with the highest and lowest optical power. Then
equalize the optical power of the wavelengths based on Step 2.
Step 4 View the spectrum analysis result of the MCA/OPM board. If the deviation
between the optical power of each wavelength and the nominal single-
wavelength optical power must satisfy the requirement above, the optical power
for the wavelengths is equalized.
----End
Equalizing Optical Power (the MCA/OPM Board at the Transmit/Receive

End)
When the MCA/OPM boards are configured at the transmit and receive ends,
observe the following principles to commission optical power:
● When there are less than four (inclusive) spans and there is no ROADM
station on the link, commission the optical power at the transmit end to
ensure that the optical power is flattened at the transmit end.
● When there are more than four spans and there is no ROADM station on the
link, after flattening the optical power at the transmit end, ensure that the
system optical power is equalized.
● When there are more than four spans and there is an ROADM station on the
link, adjust the attenuation of all channels of the ROADM station (configured
with WSD9 and RMU9 boards, for example) to the same value. After
flattening the optical power at the transmit end, ensure that system optical
power is equalized.
● If there is an REG station on the link, divide the link into two spans with the
REG station as the dividing point. In this case, consider the REG station as
either the transmit end or the receive end.
Step 1 When the optical power at the transmit end is flattened and the commissioning at
the OLA station is complete, monitor the optical power for each wavelength by
using an MCA/OPM board at the receive end. Calculate the difference between
the optical power for each wavelength and the average optical power of the
wavelengths. The difference is actually the flatness deviation.
Equalize the optical power at an intermediate station in compliance with the principles of
"Commissioning the Optical Power at the Transmit End based on that at the Receive End".
Step 2 Check the optical power at the receive end. Identify the channel that has the
highest optical power as channel A, and identify the channel that has the lowest
optical power as channel B. If the optical power difference between the two
channels is greater than 6 dB, calculate the difference between the optical power
of channel A and the nominal single-wavelength optical power, and record it as X.
Also calculate the difference between the optical power of channel B and the
nominal single-wavelength optical power, and record it as Y. Then consider half of
X or Y as the target flatness deviation for commissioning the optical power at the
transmit end. See Figure 8-63.

Step 3 Commission the optical power at the transmit end. Increase the attenuation of
channel A for the M40V at the transmit end by X/2 and decrease the attenuation
for channel B by Y/2. After that, the flatness deviation at the transmit end has the
same absolute amount but the reverse value as the flatness deviation at the
receive end. See Figure 8-64.
Figure 8-63 Checking the optical power at the receive end
Figure 8-64 Commissioning the optical power at the transmit end
Step 4 Ensure that the total optical power remains unchanged when adjusting the optical
power flatness for each wavelength. To keep the total optical power unchanged,
decrease the highest optical power by 0.5 dB, but increase the lowest optical
power by 0.5 dB.
Step 5 Adjust the optical power of wavelengths sequentially. After adjusting the highest
and lowest optical power, query the optical power for the two wavelengths again.
If both the highest optical power and lowest optical power are within the range of
nominal input optical power +/- 3 dB, it indicates that the optical power for the

wavelengths is equalized. If they are not equalized, repeat steps Step 1 through
Step 4 to recommission the optical power again.
When the equalization of optical power is complete, if the average optical power for the
wavelengths is not equal to the nominal single-wavelength optical power, do not adjust the
optical power for each wavelength at the transmit end. Instead, check and adjust the total
optical power at the OLA station so that the average optical power is equal to the nominal
single-wavelength optical power.
----End
8.2.4.15 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station

D for Equalization
This section describes how to commission the optical power equalization of the
ROADM station C and OLA station D that are in the west-to-east signal flow for
equalization.
Prerequisite

NMS
Procedure
Step 1 At ROADM station C, set OPA Mode to Manual.
1. Log in to the NMS. Double-click NE C in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of NE C is displayed.
3. Choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection Management from the
Function Tree.
4. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab. Right-click OPA Mode,
and choose Manual for the optical cross-connections.
Step 2 For the information about querying the optical power spectrum supervisory of the
MCA, see Querying the optical power spectrum supervisory of the MCA
in"Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization of the OTM station A and OLA
station B".
Step 3 Adjust the EVOA of each add channel for the RMU9 (or M40V) based on the
optical power analysis result. The single-wavelength optical power for each add
wavelength is equalized.

Equalize the optical power for the channels. That is, make sure that the following formula is
satisfied while the total output optical power remains unchanged: Single-wavelength output
Step 4 Adjust the optical power equalization in the pass-through direction based on the
optical spectrum analysis result from the downstream supervisory station D.
Equalize the optical power for the channels. That is, make sure that the following formula is
satisfied while the total output optical power remains unchanged: Single-wavelength output
----End
8.2.4.16 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Station E and OLA Station

F for Equalization
and OLA station F that are in the west-to-east signal flow for equalization.
Prerequisite

NMS
The static optical add/drop multiplexer board cannot be used to commission the
optical power of the wavelength for the pass-through channels. Only the optical
power for the add wavelength at the local station can be commissioned.
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures included in 8.2.4.14 Commissioning the Optical Power at
OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization.
----End
8.2.4.17 Commissioning Optical Power (Without MCAs)

This section describes how to commission optical power for a network that has no
MCA board configured.

Prerequisites
● Fibers must be connected and network configuration must be complete.
● ECC communication must be established.
● Commissioning of an optical supervisory channel must be complete.
● The cross-connections at each station must be configured.
Tools, Meters, and Materials

NMS
If no MCA board is configured for the entire network, commission the optical
power for each wavelength to ensure that the optical power for each wavelength
is consistent with the nominal optical power for a single wavelength, and that the
performance of each wavelength is optimal.
● The commissioning must start at the station where the wavelength with the
worst BER performance is added.
● The wavelengths with better performance and involving fewer spans are
preferred for BER optimization.
Commissioning Procedure
Step 1 Shut down lasers on all OTU boards. Commission the optical power for each add
wavelength based on8.2.4.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add
Wavelengths at OTM Station A so that the optical power before entering the OA
at the transmit end is equal to the nominal optical power for a single wavelength.
Step 2 For the methods of commissioning an OLA station on the line, see 8.2.4.4
Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
Step 3 After commissioning and equalizing the optical power for each add wavelength at
a back-to-back OTM or OADM station on the line, suppress all add wavelengths.
In the case of an OADM station configured with a WSS module, commission the
optical power for each pass-through wavelength so that the optical power for
each pass-through wavelength is equal to the nominal optical power for a single
wavelength. For details about the commissioning methods, see 8.2.4.11
Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM
Station E (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board), 8.2.4.7 Commissioning
the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C
(RDU9+WSM9).
If an FOADM station (excluding the back-to-back OTM) is an intermediate station, commission

only the optical power for the multiplexed pass-through wavelength.
Step 4 After commissioning the optical power for each wavelength, test the total input
optical power of an OA at the transmit end to verify that it satisfies the following
formula: Total input optical power = Nominal input optical power for each

wavelength + 10logN (N represents the number of wavelengths) + input offset. If

the total input optical power fails to satisfy this formula, adjust the attenuation of
the VA1 board before the OA or the attenuation of the EVOA built in the OA to
ensure that the total input optical power meets requirements.
The offset value is determined by the number of wavelengths and OSNR and varies inversely
with the OSNR. The input offset is generally smaller than 0.5 dB.
Step 5 Optimize the performance of each wavelength because the optical power flatness
of each wavelength in a multiplexed wavelength cannot be measured. Ensure that
the system performance is optimal, and at the same time, ensure that the optical
power for each wavelength is equal to the nominal optical power for a single
wavelength, and that the multiplexed optical power remains unchanged.
----End
8.2.4.18 Commissioning Input Optical Power of OTU Boards

This section describes how to commission the input optical power of the OTU in a
west-to-east signal flow. Follow the commissioning sequence of A-C-E-G.
Prerequisite
If no EVOA in the drop wavelength channel is configured before the IN port of the OTU at the
station, it indicates that a fixed optical attenuator or MVOA is configured. In this case, check
only the receive optical power of the OTU. If the measured receive optical power of the OTU is
not within the required range, replace the fixed optical attenuator or adjust the MVOA on site.

NMS
Procedure
Step 1 Query the input optical power of the OTU on the NMS.
1. Log in to the NMS. Double-click the stations to be queried in the Main
Topology. The Running Status of the stations to be queried is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
window.
3. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > Optical Power
4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
Step 2 Compare the queried input optical power of the OTU to the range of the input
optical power of the OTU.

● If the actual input optical power is higher than the upper threshold of the
input optical power of the OTU, increase the EVOA attenuation for this
channel. The actual input optical power is then within the range of the input
optical power.
● If the actual input optical power is lower than the lower threshold of the
input optical power of the OTU, decrease the EVOA attenuation of this
channel. After the attenuation is adjusted to the minimum value, if the actual
input optical power is still not within the range of the input optical power,
check the internal fiber connections.
Adjust the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that the
input optical power is within the optimal range: from -12 dBm to -5 dBm; adjust the input
optical power at the RXn port on the client side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical
power is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -2) dBm. In the
commissioning process, you should better commission the OTU received optical power to the
middle of the range of the above requirements.
When commissioning the input optical power of the OTU at the ROADM station, you do not
need to configure the EVOA before the IN port on the WDM-side of the OTU. You need to
adjust only the EVOA for each drop channel of the WSD9.
For operations of the EVOA on the NMS, see Setting the attenuation of the EVOA in
----End
8.2.4.19 Commissioning OSNR

This section describes how to commission the OSNR for a wavelength.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.

OSNR Detection Based on Optical Doctor

After Configuring the OSNR Detection Based on Optical Doctor, you can read the
OSNR values of the wavelengths through the MCA board on the NMS as the
follow steps.
1. Select the desired MCA board, and then choose Configuration > Laser
Spectrum Analysis from the Function Tree.
2. Select the number for the desired channel from Port Number, and click
Query to read the OSNR of the wavelengths on the Spectrum Data.

The objective of OSNR commissioning is to ensure that the OSNR for every
wavelength is higher than the design OSNR tolerance. OSNR tolerance refers to
the tolerance at which the boards at the receive end cannot restore the error-free
carrier signals when the OSNR is lower than a specified threshold. In certain
special situations, this objective can be properly adjusted, but a certain OSNR
margin must be ensured. By adjusting the OSNR, the lowest OSNR for the
wavelengths that have the same source and sink can be improved. Note that the
wavelengths that have different sources or sinks have different OSNRs. The
detected OSNR value may be incorrect if there is a parallel OADM station using
M40/D40, WSMD4, or WSM9+WSD9 boards on the link. Therefore, OSNR
commissioning should be performed only when there is no parallel OADM station
on the link.
Procedure
Step 1 When adjusting the OSNR flatness, ensure that the total optical power after the
commissioning remains the same. During the commissioning, decrease the optical
power for the wavelength that has the highest OSNR by 0.5 dB, and increase the
optical power of the wavelength that has the lowest OSNR by 0.5 dB.
Step 2 The commissioning should be performed in a specific sequence. That is, you need
to recheck the existing wavelengths to identify the wavelength that has the
highest or lowest OSNR. Then continue the commissioning in the same way as
specified in Step 1. If the OSNRs for the two wavelengths are equal to the design
OSNRs, it indicates that the OSNR commissioning is successful.
If the OSNR remains the same or decreases after the optical power is increased, stop the
commissioning, analyze the cause, and then continue with specific commissioning.
----End
8.2.5 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long

Spans
This section describes how to commission a system with ultra-long spans.
Prerequisite

NMS

For the technical specifications for each type of the boards, see the specifications
of the boards..
Networking Diagram
Figure 8-65 shows the network topology of Project Y. In a chain network, optical
network elements (ONEs) 1 - 24 are the stations installed with the WDM
equipment. ONE 1 and ONE 24 are configured as OTM stations. ONE 2–6, 8–12,
14–19, and 21–23 are OLA stations. ONE 7 and 20 are ROADM station. ONE 13 is
an OEQ station.
Figure 8-65 shows the span loss and distance between NEs.
Figure 8-65 Service requirement matrix in Project Y
Commissioning Requirement
● In an ultra long-haul transmission system with multiple transmission spans,
divide the line into different commissioning spans according to service
stations and equalization stations (namely, ROADM and back-to-back OTM
stations) and then commission the system span by span. As shown in Figure
8-65, the network is divided into four commissioning spans.
● Determine the stations that can serve as optical power equalization stations.
For example, the stations represented as dotted rectangles in the figure.
● Determine the optical power monitoring station for each commissioning span
based on the principle of equalizing optical power at the middle of a
transmission link, for example, stations 4, 10, 17, and 22 (represented as
dotted rectangles).

Define the OTM, FOADM, and ROADM stations as optical power commissioning stations.
For an FOADM station, the optical power of pass-through wavelengths cannot be
equalized. Therefore, an FOADM station is regarded as a fiber during the commissioning.
If you select an OTM or OADM station as the optical power motioning station, skip the
step for equalizing optical power at an OLA station.
Before equalizing optical power, divide the network into different parts and select the
source and sink stations according to the network model. Then determine the optical
power adjustment station. The principles for selecting a station for monitoring optical
power on a line are as follows:
● If the number (N) of transmission spans between two optical power equalization
stations is greater than 4, determine the position of a monitoring station by dividing
N by 2 (N/2). If N is an odd number, determine the position of the monitoring station
according to N/2±0.5.
● If the number (N) of transmission spans between two optical power equalization
stations is equal to 4, determine the transmit end as the monitoring station.
● Commission the entire network from west to east. Then, commission the
entire network in the reverse direction.
Procedure
Step 1 For the steps for commissioning the add wavelength optical power at station 1
(OTM), see 8.2.4.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths
at OTM Station A.
Step 2 For the steps for commissioning the link optical power at station 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
(OLA), see 8.2.4.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
The input optical power of an optical amplifier (OA) cannot be out of the range of the total
optical power of the OA. That is, an OA cannot work with over-saturated optical power.
Step 3 For the steps for commissioning the add wavelength optical power and link optical
power at station 7 (ROADM), see 8.2.4.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of
the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (RDU9+WSM9) or
FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board).
Step 4 For the steps for equalizing the optical power for the span 1, see 8.2.4.14
Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for
Equalization.

● When the attenuation of a channel is adjusted, the optical power of the adjacent channels
also changes. The number of affected adjacent channels depends on the attenuation
adjustment step. The number of affected adjacent channels increases when the attenuation
adjustment step increases. In general, when the attenuation adjustment step is equal to or
smaller than 1 dB, one adjacent channel on each side is affected (based on an 80-channel
system). The change in attenuation for the adjacent channels is the same as that of the
adjusted channel.
● It is recommended that the value of the attenuation adjustment step be smaller than 1 dB.
In addition, it is recommended that you adjust the attenuation channel by channel. Do not
adjust the attenuation of for a channel repeatedly, or adjust the attenuation for multiple
channels simultaneously.
● Equalizing optical power at intermediate stations is intended to correct the unflat link optical
power due to accumulated unflatness of OAs and non-linear effects after long distance
transmission. When the optical power equalization is complete, the optical spectrums at the
transmit and receive ends are unflat (±3 dB), but each wavelength on the line has almost
the same optical power and OSNR and therefore has the same transmission performance.
Step 5 Commission the optical power in commissioning spans 2, 3, and 4 based on Step
1 through Step 4.
Step 6 Optimize the BER and OSNR for the entire network so that the system
performance of the entire network is optimal.
----End
8.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on

40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40 Gbit/s
(hereinafter referred to as 40G) OTM and OLA stations.
NOTICE
Ensure that the optical ports and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean.
Otherwise, system performance will be affected.
When commissioning the optical power, ensure that all channels configured for the project
access service signals, or that the WDM side is forced to emit light. By doing this, all the
OTUs can emit light normally. Then start the commissioning station by station.
The optical power queried on the NMS is general optical power. The difference between
this value and the value tested by instruments should be within 1 dB.
8.3.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System

This section describes the general rules and requirements for commissioning a 40G
system.

Requirements on Incident Optical Power

Table 8-26 shows the incident optical power requirements based on the 40Gbit/s
non-coherent transmission system.
Table 8-26 Requirements on Incident Optical Power of the 40Gbit/s non-coherent

transmission system
Modul Numb G.652 G.655 TW- TW-C G.653 TW+ SMF-
e Type er of LEAF RS LS
Wavel
ength
s
40G 40 +4 +2 +2 +2 -5 +1 -1
DQPS
K 80 +1 +1 +1 +1 -5 -1 -2
The optical power listed in the table is expressed in dBm, and is applicable to
optical amplifiers with total output optical power of 20 dBm.
If a high-power optical amplifier with a total output optical power of 23 dBm is used on the
link, the incident optical power between the high-power optical amplifier needs to be increased
by 3 dB in the commissioning process. The optical power of 2 dBm listed in the table, however,
is changed to 4 dBm.
A 40G signal is sensitive to non-linear effects. It is prohibited to randomly increase the optical
power of 40G signals. Also, it is prohibited to let an optical amplifier work in an abnormal state.
For information about the single-wavelength incident power for fiber G.653, see
Table 8-27.

The dispersion of G.653 fiber is close to zero, which causes strong non-linear effects. Therefore,
the incident power is relatively low. Hence, in the WDM system based on the G.653 fiber, a
variable optical attenuator (VOA) must be added at the output end of the transmit optical
amplifier board. This ensures the per-channel incident optical power meets the requirement of
the G.653 fiber.
Table 8-27 Single-Wavelength Incident Power for fiber G.653

Module Type Channel Spacing OAU Type Standard Single-
Wavelength
Incident Power
40G eDQPSK 100 GHz OAU101, -4 dBm

(no wavelength at 0AU103,
the zero dispersion 0BU103
point)
100 GHz OAU101, -5 dBm

(full configuration, 0AU103,
including the zero 0BU103
dispersion point)

(no wavelength at 0AU103,
the zero dispersion 0BU103
point)

(full configuration, 0AU103,
including the zero 0BU103
dispersion point)

Selection of Channels for Mixed Transmission of 10G and 40G Signals

In the system design, a 10G channel is separated from a 40G channel with an idle
channel in between. Therefore, do not configure a 10G channel as an adjacent
channel of a 40G channel.
40G channels are preferred for carrying medium or long wavelengths. After all the
medium and long wavelengths are allocated, properly allocate the short
wavelengths. 10G channels are preferred for carrying short wavelengths.
Mixed transmission of 10G and 40G signals are described as follows in the order of
the smallest impact to the greatest impact:
● Mixed transmission with maximum spacing between a 10G channel and a
40G channel.
– For G.652 fibers, the spacing is at least one channel.
– For G.655 fibers, the spacing is at least 400 GHz.
● One-side neighboring transmission. That is, a channel of 10G signals is
present on one side of a 40G channel.
● Two-side neighboring transmission. That is, a channel of 10G signals is
present on each side of a 40G channel.
● Do not apply mixed transmission of 10G and 40G signals when there are fiber
types other than G.652 and G.655.
Commissioning Rules
Observe the following rules when commissioning a 40G system:
● When commissioning the 40G system, the MCA boards or an optical spectrum
analyzer must be used in the commissioning to ensure that the optical power
is precisely commissioned.
● Optical power is commissioned based on the nominal optical power. It is
prohibited to improve the optical power performance by increasing the
transmit optical power in the initial engineering phase. During the
equalization of the system optical power, the actual incident optical power for
every section cannot deviate from the typical incident optical power over ±1.5
dB regardless of the fiber type. Otherwise, the system performance degrades
quickly and the BER before FEC increases rapidly.
● For an eDQPSK board, the residual dispersion compensation on a line must be
accurate to within ±5.0 km. (In a network using G.652 fibers, a 10 km or 5 km
DCM module must be used to ensure this level of accuracy.)
● The optical power at the IN optical port on a 40 OTU board must be within
the range of -11 dBm to -4 dBm.
● The objective of the system commissioning is to ensure the optical power
flatness and the OSNR flatness. When the difference between the OSNR
flatness and optical power flatness is small, the system OSNR flatness is
obtained by maintaining the optical power flatness.
● In the case of 40G system commissioning, adjust the optical power difference
between each wavelength in the middle of two equilibrium stations (stations
that balance the optical power, including ROADM, and back-to-back OTM) to
a value not more than ±1 dB.

● If equalizing optical power at intermediate stations, objectives of single-

wavelength optical power commissioning at the transmit and receive ends are
as follows:
– According to the engineering requirement, the single-wavelength input
optical power must be within the range of nominal input optical power
+/- 3 dB at both the transmit and receive ends.
● When the 10G signal and the 40G signal are mixed in transmission, the
general commissioning method is same as that for 40G system
commissioning. When the 10G signal is adjacent to the 40G signal, however,
make sure that the optical power of the 10G signal is not higher than the
nominal power of a single wavelength. If the 10G signal is stable for a long
time, commission the 10G signal power to a value 1 dB less than the power of
the adjacent 40G signal.
● In the mixed spectrum of the 40G signal and the 10G signal, the spectrum of
the 40G signal is wider and its amplitude is lower than that of the 10G signal.
Actually, the power of the 10G signal is equal to the power of the 40G signal.
Therefore, measure optical power of the 40G wavelength and the 10G
wavelength accurately, Figure 8-66 shows the mixed optical spectrum.
Figure 8-66 Mixed optical spectrum of 40G signals and 10G signals

When the system has more than 20 spans, the noise signal of the short wavelengths
increases and there is a great difference between OSNR flatness and optical power flatness.
Therefore, during the extra long-haul 40G transmission, avoid using short wavelengths. If
short wavelengths must be used, you need to consider the OSNR limits of the short
wavelengths when planning the network.
8.3.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System

This section describes the general process for commissioning a 40G system.
Figure 8-67 shows the process for commissioning a 40G system.
Figure 8-67 Process for commissioning a 40G system

8.3.3 Preparations for Commissioning
8.3.3.1 Checking Design Documents

Before starting the deployment commissioning, check the design documents to
ensure that the designs, such as dispersion configuration and compensation
method, PMD, OSNR, ITL configuration, and channel allocation for hybrid
transmission of 10G and 40G signals, meet the requirements for setting up a 40G
system.
The optical amplifier (OA) design for a 40G system is the same as that for an
Nx10G system. Compared with an Nx10G system, a 40G system has higher
requirements on incident optical power, dispersion compensation, OSNR, and
PMD.
Checking Span Information

Table 8-28 lists the information of each span on the link that needs to be
checked.
Table 8-28 Information of each span on the link
Numbe Item Satisfied or Not

r
1 The actual insertion loss of each fiber span is □Yes □No

lower than the insertion loss specified in the
design drawing.
Note: 3 dB insertion loss should be reserved
during the site survey. During the operation
and maintenance of the actual services, the
insertion loss should be lower than the design
value.
2 The actual distance of each fiber span is □Yes □No

consistent with the fiber distance specified in
the design drawing.
Note: If the actual fiber distance is inconsistent
with the fiber distance specified in the design
drawing, provide feedback to the marketing
personnel so that they can update the design
configuration to ensure accuracy.
Checking Dispersion Configurations

Check whether the dispersion compensation module (DCM) configured on each
optical path meets the actual dispersion compensation requirement. First, obtain

the dispersion value of each optical path from the parameter document for optical
paths. Then check whether the DCM specified in the System Configuration
Diagram at each station on the optical path can compensate dispersion properly
based on the following table. If a DCM fails to compensate the dispersion on the
optical path, provide feedback to the commissioning leader immediately.
Table 8-29 Dispersion configuration checklist for a G.652 fiber system

No. Checklist Check Result
1 Precompensation of 20 □Yes □No

km at the transmit end
2 The dispersion on the □Yes □No

line is compensated
equally and the
compensation deviation
does not exceed ±10 km.
Over-compensation (for
example, the 80 km
DCM is used on 65, 70,
or 75 km span) is
generally applied. When
under-compensation is
applied, compensation is
supplemented on the
first or second
subsequent span.
3 The compensation for □Yes □No

the chromatic dispersion
(CD) at a fiber entry
point on the line is
within the range of -30
km to -10 km.

the CD at the end point
on the line is in the
range of -5 km to +5 km.
Table 8-30 Dispersion configuration checklist for a leaf fiber system

1 No dispersion □Yes □No

precompensation is
provided at the transmit
end.

2 If ODB OTU boards are □Yes □No

used, overcompensation
of 10 km to 25 km is
applied to each span.
The dispersion of the
fourth or fifth span is 0
after periodic
compensation.
3 Over-compensation (for □Yes □No

example, the 80 km
DCM is used on 65, 70,
or 75 km span) is
generally applied. When
under-compensation is
applied, compensation is
supplemented on the
first or second
subsequent span.

the CD at a fiber entry
point on the line is
within the range of -100
km to +100 km.

the CD at the end point
on the line is in the
range of -5 km to +5 km.
Checking PMD Configurations

Check whether the PMD penalty on each optical path is within the range specified
in the engineering design. Check whether the PMD value for an optical path is
smaller than the PMD tolerance for the optical path against the parameter
document for optical paths.
Table 8-31 PMD configuration checklist

1 The PMD value for an □Yes □No

optical path is smaller
than the PMD tolerance
for this optical path.

Checking OSNR Configurations

The OSNR penalty for a network includes PMD penalty, dispersion penalty, and
individual device OSNR penalty. These OSNR penalties can be obtained from the
parameter document for optical paths. Compare the OSNR penalties specified in
this document with the system OSNR tolerance.
Table 8-32 OSNR configuration checklist

1 The sum of OSNR □Yes □No

penalty and aging
margin is smaller than
the system OSNR
tolerance.
Checking the Channel Allocation for Hybrid Transmission of 10G and 40G
Signals
Table 8-33 lists the 40G wavelength allocation items that need to be checked.
Table 8-33 40G wavelength allocation

Numbe Item Satisfied or Not
r
1 If there are sufficient idle wavelengths, 40G □Yes □No

signals use long wavelengths and 10G signals
use short wavelengths.
Checking ITL Board Configurations of a 40G System

Currently, only the TN11ITL04 board uses an interleaver at the transmit and
receive ends. Check the ITL board configurations against Table 8-34. If an ITL
board using an interleaver at the transmit and receive ends must be configured,
check whether the ITL board type in the engineering configuration is TN11ITL04.
The 40G DQPSK signal spectrum is comparatively wide. The 20 dB spectrum width is about 0.8
nm. Therefore, the signal overlapping in an 80-channel system is of major concern, and an ITL
board that uses an interleaver at the transmit and receive ends must be configured in an 80-
channel system.

Table 8-34 ITL configuration checklist for a 40G 80-channel system

1 The TN11ITL04 board is □Yes □No

used in a 40G ODB
system with 50 GHz
channel spacing.

used in a 40G DQPSK
system with 50 GHz
channel spacing.

used at an OADM
station to add/drop
DQPSK wavelengths with
50 GHz channel spacing.
4 An ITL board is used at a □Yes □No

WSS-based ROADM
station to add/drop
wavelengths with 100
GHz channel spacing.
8.3.3.2 40G Commissioning Meter

This section describes the types of test meters used to commission a 40G system.
Context
A 40G SDH analyzer, an optical spectrum analyzer, and a power meter are
required to commission a 40G system. Table 8-35 lists certain 40G SDH analyzers.
Table 8-36 lists certain optical spectrum analyzers intended for testing a 40G
system.
A 40G system requires high-precision optical power. Before using an optical spectrum analyzer,
calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer with respect to the optical power setting.

Table 8-35 40G SDH analyzers

Name Appearance
ONT-506
NX 4000
MP1797A
Table 8-36 Optical spectrum analyzers intended for 40G system testing
Name Appearance
MTS8000

Name Appearance
Agilent86145B/86142
AQ6370/6370B/6319/6317
8.3.4 Remote Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40Gbit/s

Single-Wavelength Non-Coherent System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40G OTM and OLA
stations on the NMS.

The commissioning of the 40G system has higher requirements when compared
with the commissioning requirements of a low-rate service line. In this example,
the system to be commissioned is a long-haul 40G link.
Networking Diagram
Figure 8-68 shows the network topology of Project H. In a chain network, optical
network elements (ONEs) A, B, C and D are the stations installed with the WDM
equipment. ONE A and ONE D are configured as OTM stations. ONE B and ONE C
are two OLA stations. There are several OLA stations between ONE B and ONE C.
10-channel 40G services are transmitted between ONEs A and D.
Figure 8-68 shows the span loss and distance between NEs. The G.652 fiber is
used as the line optical fiber.

Figure 8-68 Service requirement matrix in Project H
Wavelength Allocation Diagram

Figure 8-69 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of Project H. The solid line
represents the working channel and the dashed line represents the protection
channel.
Figure 8-69 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project H(OSN 9800)
Optical Amplifier Configuration Diagram

Figure 8-70 shows the configuration for an optical amplifier at each station in
project H.

Figure 8-70 Optical amplifier configuration diagram of project H
For the 40G DQPSK code patterns, an ITL board integrating two interleavers must be used in an
80-channel system for wavelength filtering.
8.3.4.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the

OTM Station
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTM station
Prerequisites
● You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.
● The fiber connections must be correct.
● All channels must be accessed with services or must be forced to emit light,
which makes the OTU emit light normally.

NMS
In this example, the specifications for the hardware are as follows:
● G.655 fiber is used as the line optical fiber.
● In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added.
● The type of OAU1 is OAU103 and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.

Testing Diagram
Figure 8-71 Fiber connections of the OTM station

EVOA
As shown in Figure 8-71, each EVOA can be considered as a EVOA board. If there is no EVOA
boards on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs,
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures included in 8.2.4.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the
Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A.
----End
8.3.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station and the
OTM Station at the Receive End
This section describes how to commission the link optical power of the OLA
station and OTM station at the receive end that are in the west-to-east signal
flow.
Prerequisites

NMS

Testing Diagram
Figure 8-72 Fiber connections of the OLA station (OAU1)

EVOA
Figure 8-73 Fiber connections of the OLA station (OBU1+OBU1)

EVOA

Figure 8-74 Fiber connections of the OTM station at the receive end

EVOA
As shown in Figure 8-72, Figure 8-73 and Figure 8-74, each EVOA can be considered as a
EVOA board. If there is no EVOA boards on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be
performed. When this occurs, configure the MVOA or add the fixed attenuator and then
perform the optical power commissioning on site.
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures in 8.2.4.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA
Station B.
----End
8.3.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization

This section describes how to commission the optical power equalization that is in
the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisites

NMS


Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures in 8.2.4.14 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM
Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization.
Step 2 Optional: When the link commissioning is complete, if the performance for a
certain wavelength is poor, improve the performance of this wavelength by
changing its optical power. In addition, reversely change the optical power of the
wavelength that has the best performance to ensure that the total optical power
remains unchanged. The changed optical power cannot exceed 2 dB.
When changing the optical power for the wavelength, increase or decrease the optical power.
Increasing the optical power or decreasing the optical power can improve wavelength
performance.
----End
8.3.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/s

Single-Wavelength Non-Coherent System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40Gbit/s (hereinafter
referred to as 40G) OTM and OLA, stations on site.

with the commissioning requirements for a low-rate service line. In this example,
Networking Diagram
Figure 8-75 shows the network topology of Project H. In a chain network, optical
network elements (ONEs) A, B, C, and D are the stations installed with the WDM
equipment. ONE A and ONE D are configured as OTM stations. ONE B and ONE C
are two OLA stations. There are several OLA stations between ONE B and ONE C.
10-channel 40G services are transmitted between ONEs A and D.
Figure 8-75 shows the span loss and distance between NEs. The G.652 fiber is

Figure 8-75 Service requirement matrix in project H

Figure 8-76 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of project H.
Figure 8-76 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project H
Optical Amplifier Configuration Diagram

Figure 8-77 shows the configuration of an optical amplifier at each station in
project H.

Figure 8-77 Optical amplifier configuration diagram of project H
In the case of the 40G DQPSK code patterns, an ITL board integrating two interleavers must be
used in an 80-channel system for wavelength filtering.
Commissioning Procedures
Table 8-37 Commissioning stations reference list

Station Commissioning Method and Fiber Connection Diagram
A Refer to 8.3.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of

the OTM Station
B, C Refer to 8.3.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA

Station
D Refer to 8.3.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of

the OTM Station
For the commissioning method for each station in project H and the fiber
connection diagram of each station, see Table 8-37. The commissioning is
performed in two directions:
Direction 1: A→B→C→D
Direction 2: D→C→B→A
Because the commissioning for the two directions are performed similarly, only
the commissioning for direction 1 is described in this document.

NOTICE
Before the equipment is connected to the line fiber at each station, you must
complete the following operations:
● Test the span loss to ensure the value is in accordance with the requirement
of the engineering design.
● Test the transmission distance of the line signals to ensure the value is in
accordance with the requirement of the engineering design.
● Check the type of the line fiber to ensure the value is in accordance with the
requirement of the engineering design.
If any one of the preceding operation is not performed, the system commissioning
will be affected. In this case, provide feedback to the appropriate personnel who
are in charge of that particular issue.
The fibers between the FIU and ODF subrack, the fibers between the service boards and
client equipment, and the fibers between cabinets are all external fibers that should be
routed on site.
8.3.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station

This section uses direction 1 as an example to describe how to commission the
optical power at the transmit end of the OTM. The objective of commissioning is
to ensure that the total transmit optical power meets the specification
requirements and that the optical power flatness for every wavelength is achieved.
Prerequisites

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Fiber adapter, Fixed
In this example, the hardware specifications are as follows:
Procedure
Step 1 Check if the fiber connections between boards are correct based on the fiber
connection diagram. Check if the fiber on each board is properly connected. If not,
correct the error immediately.

Step 2 Access real service signals on the client sides of all OTU boards.
Step 3 Obtain the information on the optical module of the OTU by referring to the bar
code on the front panel or the board manufacturing information.
Step 4 Ask the customer equipment engineer to provide the transmitting optical power
and the optical module equipment type. Compare the optical power with the
receiving optical power on the client side of the OTU to determine if the fixed
attenuator should be replaced. Record the receiving optical power on the client
side of the OTU.
Step 5 Check whether the WDM-side OUT ports on all OTUs emit light. If the OUT ports
do not emit light,
● check whether the accessed SDH/SONET services are normal or not. If the
services are abnormal, clear the fault.
Step 6 Test the output optical power of the OUT port on the OTU.
Step 7 Test the receiving optical power of the Mn port for the M40 and record the value.
Mn refers to the M31–M40 ports that are used in this example.

If the difference between the optical power and the optical power for the OUT port on the
OTU is greater than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fiber.
Step 8 Pre-adjust the attenuation of the Variable optical attenuator attached to the M40
to +3 dB to facilitate the fine-tuning of the attenuation in the subsequent steps.
Step 9 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical port on the M40 by
using a fiber jumper. Scan the M40 to output multiplexed signals and record the
optical power for every wavelength and the multiplexed optical power. Then
calculate the wavelength insertion loss for the M40 to check whether the
wavelength insertion loss of the M40 meets the specification requirements.
When calculating the wavelength insertion loss of the M40, note that the attenuation of
the M40 is pre-adjusted to +3 dB.
If the detected output optical power is abnormal, check whether the optical ports M31–
M40 are properly connected.
Step 10 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN optical port on the
OBU1 to an optical power meter. Adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuator
attached to the IN optical port on the OBU1 to ensure that the total input optical
power of the OBU1 is near –9 dBm.
According to the commissioning rules, commission the total input optical power of the
signals to ensure that the total optical power meets the specification requirements. Then,
ensure the optical power flatness for every wavelength so that the single-wavelength
optical power meets the standards. The total input optical power is calculated based on the
nominal single-wavelength optical power. The calculation formula is as follows: Total input
optical power = Nominal single-wavelength input optical power + 10logN (N equals 10). If
the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is -19dBm, the input total optical power
is -9 dBm.

Step 11 Test the output optical power at the OUT optical port on the OBU1, and ensure
that the total output optical power of the multiplexed wavelengths reaches near
+14 dBm.
The fixed gain of the TN11OBU103 is 23 dB. In the case, the input optical power of the IN
port on the OBU1 is -9dBm, so the output optical power of the OUT port is +14dBm.
The nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the G.655 fiber is +4 dBm, and the
maximum single-wavelength input optical power should be not more than +5.5 dBm.
Obtain the total output optical power by using the following formula: Total output optical
power = Single-wavelength output optical power + 10logN (N equals 10).
Step 12 Connect the OUT optical port on the OBU1 to the optical spectrum analyzer to
query the optical power for every wavelength. Adjust the wavelength attenuation
of the Variable optical attenuator attached to the M40 so that the output optical
power flatness is about 0.5 dB.
Step 13 Use an optical power meter to test the optical power at the RC port of the FIU
board and record the test result.
If the difference between the optical power at the RC port and the optical power at the
OUT port on the OBU1 is greater than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fibers.
Step 14 Test the optical power for the OUT port on the FIU (when disconnecting the fiber
from the RM port), and determine the RC-OUT insertion loss.
The RC-OUT insertion loss on the FIU = Input optical power of the RC on the FIU –
Optical power of the OUT on the FIU
Step 15 Test the output optical power for the TM port on the SC1 with an optical power
meter, and then test the input optical power for the RM port on the FIU. If the
difference between the two values is more than 1 dB, check the routing and the
cleanliness of the optical fibers.
Step 16 Test the output optical power for the OUT port on the FIU with an optical power
meter (when disconnecting the fiber from the RC port). Calculate the insertion
loss from RM to OUT port for the FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less
than 1.5 dB.
----End
8.3.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station

For the OLA station, you need to commission only the total optical power in terms
of the optical power commissioning.
Prerequisites


Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Signal analyzer,
Fiber adapter, Fixed optical attenuator, VOA, NMS
● The type of OAU1 is OAU103.
Figure 8-78 Fiber connections of OLA station B
Procedure
Step 1 Test the optical power for the IN port on the west FIU with an optical power
meter. Compare the value with the optical power for the OUT port on the east FIU
of station A to calculate the line attenuation between station A and station B on
the line side. If the actual line attenuation is larger than the line attenuation
designed in networking, check the line attenuation to determine whether the
cable attenuation is excessively high or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are
faulty, clear the fault immediately.
Step 2 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power for the
TM port on the west FIU at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TM port for the west FIU. The

Step 4 Test the input optical power of the RM1 port by using an optical spectrum
analyzer. Add a proper attenuator to make the input power less than –3 dB.
Step 5 Test the output optical power for the TM2 port of the SC2 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer. Record the input optical power for the RM1 port and the
output optical power for the TM2 port in the commissioning record.
Step 6 Test the input optical power for the RM port and the output optical power for the
OUT port on the east FIU at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The
Step 8 Test the input optical power for the IN port and the output optical power for the
TC port on the west FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum
analyzer. Record the optical power values in the commissioning record.
Step 9 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TC port on the west FIU. The
Step 10 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN optical port on the
west OAU1 to an optical power meter. Adjust the attenuation of the optical
attenuator attached to the IN optical port on the OAU1 to ensure that the total
input optical power for the OAU1 is about –10 dBm.
According to the commissioning rules, commission the total input optical power of the
signals to ensure that the total input optical power meets the specification requirement.
Then ensure the optical power flatness for every wavelength so that the single-wavelength
optical power meets the specification requirements. The total input optical power is
calculated based on the nominal single-wavelength optical power. The calculation formula
is as follows: Total input optical power = Nominal single-wavelength input optical power
+ 10logN (N equals 10). If the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is -20 dBm,
the input total optical power is -10 dBm.
Step 11 Query the output optical power at the OUT optical port on the west OAU1. Then
adjust the gain of the OAU1 on the NMS to ensure that the total output optical
power for the multiplexed wavelengths reaches near +14 dBm.
The nominal single-wavelength input optical power for the G.655 fiber is +4 dBm, and the
maximum single-wavelength input optical power should be not exceed +5.5 dBm.
The total output optical power for the multiplexed wavelengths can be obtained by using the
following formula: Total output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output optical
power + 10logN (N equals 10).
Step 12 Test the input and output optical power for the DCM and calculate the DCM
insertion loss.
DCM insertion loss = DCM input optical power – DCM output optical power
Step 13 Use an optical power meter to test the optical power for the RC port on the FIU
and record the value.
If the difference between the optical power and the optical power for the OUT port on the
OAU is greater than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fiber.

Step 14 Test the optical power for the OUT port on the east FIU (when disconnecting the
fiber to the RM port) and calculate the RC-OUT insertion loss.
The RC-OUT insertion loss on the FIU = Input optical power of the RC on the FIU –
Optical power of the OUT on the FIU
----End
8.3.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station

The commissioning rule for the OTM station is to "commission the optical power
at the transmit end based on the optical power at the receive end". At the receive
end of the OTM station, you need to commission only the total input optical
power. Then adjust the attenuation for every wavelength of the M40 at the
transmit end according to the optical power flatness at the receive end.
Prerequisites
● The fiber connections must be established properly.
● All channels must have service signals, or the laser on each channel emits
light forcibly to ensure that the OTU emits light normally.

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, fiber jumper,
flange, fixed optical attenuator, VOA, NMS

● The OAU1 type is OAU103. The OBU1 type is OBU103.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the fiber connections between boards are properly established and
whether the fibers on each board are tightly inserted. Immediately correct any
issues found.
Step 2 Measure the optical power of the FIU and the SC1 by referring to 8.3.5.2
Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station.
Step 3 Commission the optical power of the OAU1 by referring to 8.3.5.3 Commissioning
Optical Power of the OLA Station.
Step 4 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN port on the D40 to
an optical spectrum analyzer. Scan the multiplexed signal and record the optical
power for each wavelength.
Step 5 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the west D40 by using a
fiber jumper. Scan the multiplexed signal of the D40, and record the input optical
power for each wavelength.

Step 6 Measure the single-wavelength optical power at the Dn port on the D40 by using
an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the D40. The insertion loss must
be lower than 6.5 dB, and the maximum insertion loss variance between
wavelengths of the D40 must be smaller than 2.0 dB.
Step 8 Measure the input and output optical power of the DCM and then calculate the
insertion loss for the DCM based on the following formula:
Insertion loss of the DCM = Input optical power of the DCM – Output optical
power of the DCM.
Step 9 Measure the optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU. Check
whether the optical power at the IN port on the OTU is within the standard range.
Step 10 Securely insert the optical fiber into the IN port on the OTU after the input optical
power meets the specification requirements.
Step 11 Measure the output optical power on the client side of the OTU and the optical
power on the ODF side. Compare the two values to check whether the fiber
jumper on the client side is properly connected. The fiber attenuation must be
lower than 1 dB.
Step 12 On the NMS, query the input and output optical power of each OTU. The variance
between the optical power displayed on the NMS and the measured optical power
must be smaller than 2.0 dB. The system OSNR flatness must be near ±1 dB after
the commissioning. That is, the OSNR measured by the optical spectrum analyzer
must meet the specification requirements and the OSNR for every wavelength is
flat when the equalizing optical power for every wavelength is normal. In addition,
check whether the bit error rate conforms to the expected value.
Step 13 If the connected client equipment is new, perform the 24–hour BER test on the
client equipment. If the client equipment is not connected or not being used
currently, configure a loopback between the TX and RX ports on the client side for
every OTU at station C. In this case, a fixed optical attenuator needs to be
installed between the two ports.
8.3.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station, 8.3.5.3
Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station, and 8.3.5.4 Commissioning Receive-
End Optical Power of the OTM Station contain the process for commissioning an optical
multiplex section. The commissioning for the multiplex sections at OTM and OLA stations is
similar.
----End
8.3.5.5 Commissioning Optical Power for Equalization

This section describes how to commission the optical power for equalization.
Prerequisites
● All channels must carry services or must be forced to emit light, which makes
the OTU emit light normally.


Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Fiber adapter, Fixed
● The G.655 fiber is used as the line optical fiber.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the MON port on an OA at an OLA station to an optical spectrum
analyzer to scan the multiplexed signals. Then record the optical power for each
wavelength.
Step 2 Adjust the optical power for each add wavelength by changing the attenuation of
the VOA on each add channel to ensure that the optical power is flat. That is,
ensure that the optical power for one wavelength differs from that of another
wavelength at an intermediate station by less than 2 dB.
specific wavelength is poor, improve the performance for this wavelength by
changing its optical power. In addition, make the opposite change to the optical
power of the wavelength that has the best performance to ensure that the total
optical power remains unchanged. The changed optical power cannot exceed 2 dB.
Increasing the optical power or decreasing the optical power can improve the wavelength
performance.
----End
8.3.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System

This section describes how to commission the OSNR for a 40G System.
Prerequisites

NMS
Testing Method of Receive-End OSNR

The OSNR at the receive end can be tested either by using the scanning method
or the integral method.
Scanning Method

Table 8-38 OSN 9800

Module Type Channel RBW of the Span of the Remarks
Spacing Optical Optical
(GHz) Spectrum Spectrum
Analyzer Analyzer
Set Value Set Value
40G DQPSK 100 1 nm 100 GHz Odd

wavelengths
50 0.5 nm 100 GHz and even
wavelengths
are tested
separately.
Integral method
Table 8-39 OSN 9800

Module Type Channel RBW of the Span of the Remarks
Spacing Optical Optical
(GHz) Spectrum Spectrum
Analyzer Analyzer
Set Value Set Value
40G DQPSK 100 ● 0.02nm 0.8 nm The OSNR of

(minimum a single 40G
50 resolution 0.4 nm signal
for AQ wavelength
instrument obtained by
s) using the
● 0.06nm integral
(minimum method
resolution should be
for Agilent close to the
instrument specified
s) OSNR value in
the design
drawing. That
is, the
variance
between the
detected
OSNR and the
design value
must be
within the
range of -1 dB
to +1 dB.

The 40G optical spectrum is wide, and the tested OSNR deviates from the actual
OSNR greatly by using the scanning method. Thus, the integral method is
recommended for testing the OSNR.
The objective of OSNR commissioning is to ensure that the OSNR for every
wavelength is higher than the design OSNR tolerance, which refers to the
tolerance at which the boards at the receive end cannot restore the error-free
carrier signals when the OSNR is lower than a specified threshold. In certain
special situations, this objective can be properly adjusted, but a certain OSNR
margin must be ensured. By adjusting the OSNR, the lowest OSNR of the
wavelengths that have the same source and sink can be improved. Note that the
wavelengths that have different sources or sinks have different OSNRs. The
detected OSNR value may be incorrect if there is a parallel OADM station using
M40/D40, WSMD4, or WSM9+WSD9 boards on the link. Therefore, OSNR
commissioning should be performed only when there is no parallel OADM station
on the link.
Procedure
Step 1 When adjusting the OSNR flatness, ensure that the total optical power after the
commissioning remains the same. During the commissioning, decrease the optical
power of the wavelength that has the highest OSNR by 0.5 dB, and increase the
optical power of the wavelength that has the lowest OSNR by 0.5 dB.
Step 2 The commissioning should be performed in a specific sequence. That is, you need
to recheck the existing wavelengths to identify the wavelength that has the
highest or lowest OSNR. Then continue the commissioning in the same way as
specified in step 1. If the OSNRs for the two wavelengths are equal to the design
OSNRs, it indicates that the OSNR commissioning is successful.
If the OSNR remains the same or decreases after the optical power is increased, stop the
commissioning, analyze the cause, and then continue specific commissioning.
----End
Example
If a wavelength traverses a parallel OADM station, adjust the OSNR based on the
OEQ configuration modes and the OSNR tolerance listed in Table 8-40, and Table
8-41.

Table 8-40 OSNR tolerance for a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system

1. G.652 eDQPSK 100 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR
Tolerance Index (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included)
Fiber +4 dBm +4 dBm +4 dBm +4 dBm -

Input
Power
Dispersion -5 km to 5 -5 km to 5 -5 km to 5 -5 km to 5
Tolerance km km km km
Power OSNR OSNR OSNR OSNR

Equilibriu Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance
m (With (With (With (With
M40) M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)
Transmissi OSNR OSNR OSNR OSNR Typical

on hops Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance PMD
OSNR
Penalty
1 16.01 16.01 16.01 16.01 0.3
2 16.16 16.06 16.06 16.06 0.3
3 16.31 16.11 16.11 16.11 0.3
4 16.5 16.25 16.25 16.25 0.3
5 16.64 16.29 16.29 16.29 0.3
6 16.88 16.42 16.42 16.42 0.3
7 17.02 16.45 16.45 16.45 0.3
8 17.25 16.58 16.58 16.58 0.3
9 - 16.71 16.71 16.71 0.3
10 - 16.83 16.83 16.83 0.3
11 - 17.26 17.26 17.26 0.3
12 - 17.28 17.28 17.28 0.3
13 - - 17.4 17.4 0.3
14 - - 17.53 17.53 0.3
15 - - 17.65 17.65 0.3
16 - - 17.77 17.77 0.3
17 - - 18.09 17.99 0.3
18 - - 18.41 18.21 0.3


Input
Power

M40) M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)

OSNR
Penalty
19 - - 18.73 18.43 0.3
20 - - 19.14 18.74 0.3
21 - - 19.56 19.16 0.3
22 - - 20.08 19.68 0.3

Table 8-41 OSNR tolerance for a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system


Input
Power

M40) M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)

OSNR
Penalty
1 16.01 16.01 16.01 16.01 0.3
2 16.16 16.06 16.06 16.06 0.3
3 16.31 16.11 16.11 16.11 0.3
4 16.4 16.15 16.15 16.15 0.3
5 16.54 16.19 16.19 16.19 0.3
6 16.68 16.22 16.22 16.22 0.3
7 16.82 16.25 16.25 16.25 0.3
8 16.95 16.28 16.28 16.28 0.3
9 - 16.31 16.31 16.31 0.3
10 - 16.33 16.33 16.33 0.3
11 - 16.56 16.56 16.56 0.3
12 - 16.58 16.58 16.58 0.3
13 - - 16.7 16.7 0.3
14 - - 16.73 16.73 0.3
15 - - 16.85 16.85 0.3
16 - - 16.87 16.87 0.3
17 - - 17.19 17.09 0.3
18 - - 17.51 17.31 0.3



Input
Power

M40) M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)

OSNR
Penalty
19 - - 17.83 17.53 0.3
20 - - 18.14 17.74 0.3
In Table 8-40, and Table 8-41, "OSNR Tolerance (With M40)" indicates that the M40 board is
used at the transmit end, and that neither pre-equalization is applied nor is the OEQ station
configured on the line. "OSNR Tolerance (With M40V)" indicates that the M40V is used at the
transmit end for pre-equalization but no OEQ station is used on the line. "OSNR Tolerance
(With M40V+OEQ)" indicates that the M40V is used at the transmit end for pre-equalization
and one OEQ station is configured on the line. "OSNR Tolerance (With M40V+OEQ+OEQ)"
indicates that the M40V is used at the transmit end for pre-equalization and two OEQ stations
are configured on the line. The concept of the OEQ station covers the back-to-back OTM station
and ROADM station on the line. The configuration modes are designed in the engineering
design phase. During commissioning, you need to select an appropriate mode and commission
the optical power based on the OSNR tolerance given in the tables.
The OSNR tolerance given in Table 8-40, and Table 8-41 increases with the number of spans.
The maximum number of transmission spans is 20. That is, the regenerator section must be
terminated at the 20th transmission span. If the services on the network need to be transmitted
further, a regeneration board must be added.
The number of transmission spans (also called the number of transmission levels) corresponding
to the OSNR tolerance indicates how many times that a wavelength enters a transmission fiber
after being amplified by an optical amplifier. It is equivalent to the number of spans of the
transmission fibers or optical transmission sections (OTSs). Note that a fiber connection inside a
station is not considered a transmission span.
The OSNR tolerance given in Table 8-40, and Table 8-41 includes the "Typical PMD Penalty"
listed in the last column. The typical PMD penalty is obtained when the customer fiber PMD
coefficient is .

8.3.7 OSNR Penalties

If the system is still operating abnormally after the preceding commissioning tasks
are performed, you need to consider the OSNR penalty. With the OSNR penalty,
you can evaluate impacts of configuration nonconformance on the system to meet
system requirements.
The OSNR penalty (expressed in dB) covers various penalty types, such as, OSNR
penalty resulting from over-limit dispersion and PMD penalty resulting from over-
limit PMD. Currently, focus on the following types of OSNR penalties: power
penalty, hybrid transmission penalty, high-power hybrid transmission penalty, PDL
penalty, PMD penalty, and ROADM penalty.
Power Penalty
In the system design process, if a high-power amplifier is being used as required,
you need to consider the extra penalty due to an increase in the single-
wavelength signal power. This extra penalty is called the power penalty, and the
high-power amplifier in this context refers to an amplifier with the maximum
output power higher than +20 dBm.These high-power amplifiers include
TN11HBA, TN11OAU105, TN12OAU105, and TN11OBU205. If the amplifier has a
maximum output power of +20 dBm or less, you do not need to consider the
power penalty. If an amplifier has a maximum output power of +26 dBm, you
need to consider this amplifier in the 40G system as a separate span.
The power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system are as follows:

● The standard incident power configured for a single wavelength is +4 dBm.
● Table 8-42 lists the power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system.
Table 8-42 Power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system
Power Number of +23 dBm High-Power Amplifiers

Penalty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Nu 1 0.4 - - - - - - - - -
mb
er 2 0.4 0.4 - - - - - - - -
of 3 0.4 0.4 0.4 - - - - - - -
tran
smi 4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 - - - - - -
ssio
n 5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 - - - - -
spa
6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 - - - -
ns
7 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 - - -
8 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 - -
9 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 -


Penalty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
11 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
12 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
13 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
14 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
15 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
16 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
17 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
18 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
19 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
20 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
The power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system are as follows:

● In a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system, the standard incident power configured
for a single wavelength is +1 dBm.
● Table 8-43 lists the power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system.
Table 8-43 Power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system

Penalty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Nu 1 0.2 - - - - - - - - - -
mb
er 2 0.2 0.2 - - - - - - - - -
of 3 0.2 0.2 0.2 - - - - - - - -
tra
ns 4 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 - - - - - - -
mis
sio 5 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 - - - - - -
n
6 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 - - - - -
spa
ns 7 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 - - - -
8 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 - - -
9 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 - -
10 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 -
11 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0


Penalty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
13 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
14 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
15 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
16 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
17 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
18 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
19 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
20 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
Hybrid Transmission Penalty

In the case of a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system, if the standard incident power
for the entire regenerator section is +4 dBm, extra hybrid transmission penalties
must be considered. Table 8-44 and Table 8-45 lists the hybrid transmission
penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system.
Table 8-44 Hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system

Hybrid Transmission Adjacency Type
Penalty
One-Side Adjacency
100 GHz 200 GHz
NRZ (D)RZ NRZ (D)RZ
Number of 1 0.5 0.7 0.0

transmission
spans 2

Hybrid Transmission Adjacency Type

Penalty
One-Side Adjacency
100 GHz 200 GHz
NRZ (D)RZ NRZ (D)RZ
10
11
12
13 0.8 1.2
14
15
16
17 2.7 2.6
18
19
20

Hybrid Adjacency Type
Transmissi
on Penalty Two-Side Adjacency
100 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 200 200 GHz and 200
GHz GHz GHz
NRZ NRZ (D)R NRZ NRZ (D)R NRZ NRZ (D)R

+NR + Z+ +NRZ + Z+ +NR + Z+
Z (D)R (D)R (D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D)R
Z Z Z Z Z Z
Nu 1 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.5 1.6 1.6 0.0 0.3 0.3

mbe
r of 2
tran 3
smis
sion 4
span
s 5


Transmissi
100 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 200 200 GHz and 200
GHz GHz GHz

+NR + Z+ +NRZ + Z+ +NR + Z+
Z (D)R (D)R (D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D)R
Z Z Z Z Z Z
10
11
12
13 2.5 2.8 2.8 2.5 2.8 2.8 0.2 0.5 0.5
14
15
16
17 4.0 - - 4.3 - - 0.4 0.8 0.8
18
19
20
For a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system, if the standard incident power for the
entire regenerator section is +4 dBm, extra hybrid transmission penalties must be
considered. Table 8-46 and Table 8-47 lists the hybrid transmission penalties in a
40G eDQPSK 80-channel system.
Hybrid Transmission Penalty Adjacency Type
One-Side Adjacency
50 GHz 100 GHz
NRZ (D)RZ NRZ (D)RZ
Number of 1 0.6 0.7 0.3 0.3

transmission
spans 2

Hybrid Transmission Penalty Adjacency Type
One-Side Adjacency
50 GHz 100 GHz
NRZ (D)RZ NRZ (D)RZ
10
11
12
13 1.0 1.5 0.4 0.4
14
15
16
17 -
18
19
20


Transmissi
50 GHz and 50 GHz 50 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 100
GHz GHz

+NR + Z+ +NR + Z+ +NR + Z+
Z (D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D)R
Z Z Z Z Z Z
Nu 1 1.6 1.7 1.7 1.6 1.7 1.7 0.3 0.5 0.5

mbe
r of 2
tran 3
smis
sion 4
span
s 5
10
11
12
13 1.9 2.6 2.6 1.9 2.6 2.6 0.5 0.7 0.7
14
15
16
17 -
18
19
20

If both 40G and 10G signals are transmitted and high-power amplifiers are used on the
network, you need to consider the overall penalty instead of only the separate 40G/10G hybrid
transmission penalty and the power penalty caused by the high-power amplifier. For details, see
High-Power and Hybrid Transmission Penalty.
High-Power Hybrid Transmission Penalty

If high-power amplifiers (the maximum output optical power exceeds +20 dBm)
are used and 40G and low-rate signals are transmitted on a network at the same
time, you need to consider the OSNR penalty on the 40G signals. This type of
penalty is referred to as a high-power hybrid transmission penalty.
Table 8-48 and Table 8-49 lists the high-power hybrid transmission penalties in a
Table 8-48 High-power hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-

channel system
High-Power Hybrid Adjacency Type

Transmission Penalty
One-Side Adjacency
100 GHz 200 GHz
NRZ (D)RZ NRZ (D)RZ
Number of 1 1.5a 1.8a 0.8a 1.0a

transmissio
n spans 2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16


One-Side Adjacency
100 GHz 200 GHz
NRZ (D)RZ NRZ (D)RZ
17 -
18
19
20

channel system
High- Adjacency Type

Power
Hybrid Two-Side Adjacency
Transmissio 100 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 200 200 GHz and 200
n Penalty GHz GHz GHz
NRZ NRZ (D)R NRZ NRZ (D NRZ NRZ (D)R

+NRZ + Z+ +NR + )RZ+ +NRZ + Z+
(D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D (D)R (D)R
Z Z Z )RZ Z Z
Num 1 ● 1. ● 1. ● 1. ● 1 ● 1. ● 1. 1.0a 1.2a 1.2a

ber 5b 7b 7b . 7b 7
of 2 5 b
● 2. ● 2. ● 2. ● 2.
trans b
● 2.
3 2c 7c 7c 7c
missi ● 2 7c
on 4 .
span 2
s 5 c
10
11
12
13 -
14


Power
Transmissio 100 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 200 200 GHz and 200
n Penalty GHz GHz GHz
NRZ NRZ (D)R NRZ NRZ (D NRZ NRZ (D)R

+NRZ + Z+ +NR + )RZ+ +NRZ + Z+
(D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D (D)R (D)R
Z Z Z )RZ Z Z
15
16
17 -
18
19
20
● "a" indicates that one to five +23 dBm amplifiers are used. If more than five +23 dBm
amplifiers are used, reduce the number of these amplifiers to a value smaller than five.
● "b" indicates that one or two +23 dBm amplifiers are used.
● When no +23 dBm amplifier is used, see Hybrid Transmission Penalty.
● "c" indicates that three +23 dBm amplifiers are used. When the number of +23 dBm
amplifiers exceeds three, reduce the number of these amplifiers to a value smaller than
three.
Table 8-50 and Table 8-51 lists the high-power hybrid transmission penalties for a

channel system

One-Side Adjacency
50 GHz 100 GHz
NRZ (D)RZ NRZ (D)RZ
Number of 1 ● 1.3a ● 1.4a ● 0.2a ● 0.2a

transmission
2 ● 2.1b ● 1.5b ● 0.2b ● 0.4b
spans
3


One-Side Adjacency
50 GHz 100 GHz
NRZ (D)RZ NRZ (D)RZ
10
11
12
13 ● 2.6c
14 ● 2.7d
15
16
17 -
18
19
20


channel system
Power
Transmissi 50 GHz and 50 50 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 100
on Penalty GHz GHz GHz
NRZ NRZ (D NRZ NRZ (D)R NRZ NRZ (D)R

+NR + )RZ +NR + Z+ +NR + Z+
Z (D)R + Z (D)R (D)R Z (D)R (D)R
Z (D Z Z Z Z
)RZ
Nu 1 ● 1. ● 1. ● 1. ● 1. ● 1. ● 1. ● 0. ● 0. ● 0.
mbe 8a 8a 3 8a 8a 3a 3a 2a 2a
r of 2 a
● 2. ● 2. ● 2. ● 2. ● 2. ● 0. ● 0. ● 0.
tran ● 2.
3 5b 5b 5b 5b 0b 5b 4b 4b
smis 0
sion ● 0. ● 0. ● 0.
4 b
span 8c 6c 6c
s 5
● 1. ● 1.
6 2d 2d
10
11
12
13 -
14
15
16
17 -
18
19
20

● "a" indicates that one to three +23 dBm amplifiers are used. When no +23 dBm amplifier is
used, see Hybrid Transmission Penalty.
● "b" indicates that four to five +23 dBm amplifiers are used.
● "c" indicates that six to eight +23 dBm amplifiers are used.
● "d" indicates that nine to twelve +23 dBm amplifiers are used.
● When the number of +23 dBm amplifiers exceeds 12, reduce the number of these amplifiers
to a value smaller than 12.
PDL Penalty
If no ROADM station exists in a regenerator section, the OSNR tolerance
specification described in 8.3.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System
includes the PDL penalty in a normal situation. In this case, you do not need to
consider an extra PDL penalty.
If an ROADM station exists in a regenerator section, you need to consider an extra

PDL penalty caused by the WSS component at the ROADM station. In this case,
you need to consider a PDL penalty of 0.15 dB for each WSS component that a
40G eDQPSK wavelength traverses.
PMD Penalty
The "Typical PMD OSNR Penalty" value in the OSNR tolerance table in 8.3.6
Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System includes the typical PMD penalty,
which is given based on the fiber PMD coefficient of a

regenerator section. If customers provide the actual fiber parameter values or the
actual fiber PMD coefficient is greater than the provided PMD coefficient, you
need to calculate the PMD penalty based on the following formula, then
substitute the calculated PMD penalty for the "Typical PMD OSNR Penalty" value
in the OSNR tolerance table in 8.3.6 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System.
The calculated PMD penalty is used as the OSNR tolerance of the regenerator
section after the PMD penalty is considered.
The PMD tolerance is a key specification in a module test of a WDM system. As a random
function of optical wavelengths and time, the PMD may be different for different fibers at a
specified time. The differential group delay (DGD) is used to measure the PMD of a line. As a
statistical value, the DGD probability distribution must comply with the Maxwell distribution
rate when long fibers are used. As the maximum DGD value is three times the average DGD
value, you need to calculate the PMD value permitted by a fiber based on the maximum DGD
value.
In general, the actual PMD coefficient expressed in ps/(km)1/2 is given in

engineering design documents. Based on this PMD coefficient, you can calculate
the DGD value (ps) of each optical amplifier span and optical multiplex section.
For optical amplifier spans, the DGD calculation formula is
, where DGD represents the DGD value expressed in ps for

each span, PMD represents the PMD coefficient expressed in ps/(km)1/2 for each

span, L represents the span distance expressed in km, and L1/2 represents the
square root of the span distance.
For the multiplex section, the DGD calculation formula is
, where (DGDi) represents

the DGD value of each section and is expressed in ps, and Li represents the
distance for each section.
In a 40G system, a DCM module introduces a PMD penalty while compensating
for distributed dispersions. In addition, the board using a WSS component also
introduces a PMD penalty of 0.2 ps.
For example, there are X (an integer representing the quantity) multiplex sections
on the network. The DGD of these multiplex sections can be calculated by using
the formula, where i is an integer equal to or smaller than

X. In addition, there are M (an integer representing the quantity) DCM modules
and the PMD penalty introduced by each DCM module can be calculated by using
the formula, where j is an integer equal to or smaller than

M. Furthermore, there are N (an integer representing the quantity) boards
configured with WSS components. In this case, the DGD value of all the multiplex
sections can be calculated by using the
formula.
You can then convert the DGD value into the OSNR penalty by using the following
formulas: and
ROADM Penalty
Each WSS component at an ROADM station generates a certain OSNR penalty in
40G signals. In a regenerator section, the number of WSS components at the
ROADM stations that 40G signals traverse corresponds to an OSNR penalty. This
type of OSNR penalty is called the ROADM penalty. For the association between
the number of the WSS components and the OSNR penalty, see Table 8-52.

Table 8-52 OSNR penalty
Num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ber
of
WSS
Com
pone
nts
That
40G
Signa
ls
Trave
rse
Extra 0 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

Trans
missi
on
Penal
ty
8.3.8 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation

In a 40G system, you must accurately configure the fixed dispersion compensator.
You also need to use the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC) to adjust
dispersion precisely. In addition, you need to use TDC dispersion real-time
adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of transmission fibers caused by changes in
factors such as ambient temperature.
Prerequisites
● The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant
stations must be established correctly.
● The commissioning for the optical power for a 40G link must be complete.

NMS
Precaution
NOTICE
This operation may interrupt services.

When the optical power commissioning is complete, a 40G board generally starts
the automatic dispersion search. If the automatic dispersion search is not started,
manually start it for a 40G board on the NMS.
The turnable dispersion compensator module (TDCM) may report an OTU_LOF alarm or bit
errors in the process of the automatic dispersion search. This, however, does not indicate an
exception.
Procedure
● Search the best dispersion compensation value and apply the configuration to
the board.
In addition, determine whether the current dispersion compensation value is
correct based on the following principles.
– If the value is inside the range of -200 to +200, the dispersion
compensation is proper.
– If the value is outside the range of -200 to +200 but is inside the range of
-300 to +300, attention is required. The project manager should provide
feedback to the network design personnel.
– If the value is outside the range of -300 to +300, immediately provide
feedback to the project manager and ask the network design personnel
to optimize the design for the dispersion compensation module (DCM)
for the network.
a. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration >
Dispersion Compensation Management from the Function Tree.
b. Click Query. After confirmation, you can view the dispersion
compensation parameter.
c. Select the port, click Start Search. Click OK in the dialog box displayed.
The search status changes to Searching. After successful search, the
search status changes to The search is successful.
● After successful search, only the search status automatically changes. Other
parameters do not change until you query them.
● If you start searching the best value, you cannot set the dispersion compensation
value.
d. Click Query. After confirmation, you can query the best dispersion
compensation value.
e. Optional: Set Fine Tune Switch to Enabled.
After you enable the fine tune switch, the board may be fine tuned and the query
result of the dispersion compensation value may change.
f. Click Apply. After confirmation, apply the configuration.
● Manually set the dispersion compensation value and apply the configuration
to the board.

a. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration >

Dispersion Compensation Management from the Function Tree.
b. Click Query. After confirmation, you can view the dispersion
compensation parameter.
Table 8-53 Description for Dispersion Compensation Parameter

Port ● Equipment that Sets the board port of

supports the dispersion
master and slave compensation.
shelf management:
NE name-shelf
ID(shelf name)-
slot number-board
name-port
number(port
name)
● Equipment that
does not support
the master and
slave shelf
management: NE
name-slot number-
board name-port
number(port
name)
Dispersion -32768 to 32767 Displays the best

Compensation Value dispersion
(ps/nm) compensation queried
from the NE after
successful search or
the dispersion
compensation value
that you set.
Minimum Dispersion For example: -32768 Displays the

Compensation Value minimum dispersion
from the NE.
Maximum Dispersion For example: 32767 Displays the

Compensation Value maximum dispersion
from the NE.

Fine Tune Switch Disabled, Enabled Adjust dispersion

compensation value
in the fine adjustment
rage to reach the best
dispersion
compensation.
Search Status ● The search is not Displays the search

started status of the best
● Searching... dispersion
compensation.
● The search failed
● The search is
successful
c. Set Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm) and Fine Tune Switch.
● The dispersion compensation value must be in the range of the dispersion

compensation range.
● The dispersion compensation value and the best dispersion compensation value
can be fine tuned only if they are in the fine tune range.
d. Click Apply. After confirmation, apply the configuration.
----End
8.3.9 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G

System
This chapter describes the methods for analyzing and handling the common
problems that may happen in the process of commissioning a 40G system. You
need to analyze and handle the problems according to actual situations.
8.3.9.1 Incorrect Setting of Board Parameters

This section describes how to rectify incorrect setting of board parameters in the
deployment commissioning phase.
Handling Method
1. Determine if the service type configured on the client side of the board is
consistent with the actual service type. If not, change the setting (STM-256 is
the default service type).
2. Ensure that the FEC mode of the two interconnected boards is the same.
3. If OTN services are configured on the client side, the FEC mode of the
interconnected board is always FEC. If the 40G board is interconnected with
the OTU board on the client side, check the FEC mode of the OTU board.
Ensure that the FEC mode is set to FEC.

4. Ensure that the wavelength of the two interconnected boards is the same.
8.3.9.2 OSNR Failure

This section describes how to resolve the problem with the OSNR that are not up
to the design value in the deployment commissioning phase.
Handling Method
The integral method must be used to test the OSNR of a system to check whether
the OSNR is up to the network design value. If the input and output optical power
and gain for each OA on the network are the same as the network design values
but the OSNR is not, inform the project manager to provide this feedback to the
network design engineers.
Do not increase the optical power at the transmit end to increase the system OSNR. If you
increase the transmit optical power, the attendant nonlinear effects cause a sharp degrade in
the performance of the system. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether the system OSNR
fails.
8.3.9.3 Excessively High Incident Optical Power

This section describes how to resolve the problem of excessively high incident
optical power in the deployment commissioning phase.
Handling Method
A 40G system is sensitive to nonlinear effects. In general, a 40G system requires
that the incident optical power should be lower than 4 dBm. If the incident optical
power is higher than 4 dBm, nonlinear effects are caused and transmission
performance degrade occurs. In the fault identification process, check the output
optical power of each OA on the line to ensure that the actual output optical
power of each OA deviates from the nominal output optical power by at most
±1.5 dB.
8.3.9.4 Incorrect Dispersion Configuration

This section describes how to resolve the problem of incorrect dispersion
configuration in the deployment commissioning phase.
Handling Method
Regardless of whether the system is a 40G or 10G, the methods for handling a
dispersion problem are similar. To resolve a dispersion problem, add a fiber or
DCM at the receive end to change the system dispersion (note that the optical
power of the OTU boards and the OA boards in the system must remain
unchanged after you change the dispersion), and use the TDCM integrated in an
40G OTU board to automatically search for the optimal dispersion compensation
value (if possible, fine-tune the dispersion compensation). Ensure that the system
OSNR and optical power are normal. If the TDCM fails to automatically search for
the optimal dispersion compensation value, you need to adjust the DCM
configurations by referring to the dispersion configuration rules.

The TDCM integrated in a 40G OTU board has a requirement on a wavelength carrying the
receive optical signals. If this wavelength fails to match the TDCM, the dispersion adjustment
fails. Therefore, the wavelengths for the two interconnected 40G OTU boards must be the odd
wavelengths or even wavelengths.
8.3.9.5 Methods for Handling Other Faults

This section describes how to handle other faults in the deployment
commissioning phase.
Handling Method
● The performance of certain 40G channels degrades after the commissioning.
– Possible cause: The TDCM integrated in the relevant 40G boards fails to
adjust the dispersion compensation to the optimal value.
– Solution: Refer to the TDCM value of the channel that has good
performance and shares the same source and sink as the channel being
commissioned. Then adjust the TDCM value for a channel with poor
performance until the channel performance reaches the optimal value.
● All the 40G channels on a route cannot be set up, or the performance of all
these channels is poor after the commissioning.
– Possible cause 1: After the design, the fiber route or length on this link is
changed. A 40G system has a high requirement on dispersion
compensation deviation. After the fiber route or length is changed, the
existing DCM does not match the changed fiber length. As a result, the
40G channels on this link cannot be set up or the performance of these
40G channels is poor.
– Solution 1: If a fiber on a link is changed (for example, fiber length,
attenuation, and PMD), the changed parameter values must be provided
to design engineers for evaluation so that the design engineers can
determine whether to adjust the design.
– Possible cause 2: The relevant DCMs are connected incorrectly or the
relevant dispersion configurations are incorrect.
– Solution 2: Focus on the dispersion configurations on the network.
Compared with a 10G board, a 40G board has a higher rate and thus can tolerate a
narrower range of dispersion.
● For eDQPSK optical modules, the compensation for chromatic dispersion on a
line must be accurate to ±5.0 km. In a G.652 fiber network, a 10 km or 5 km
DCM must be used to ensure this compensation accuracy.
● All 40G channels on a route cannot be set up or the performance of these
channels is poor after the commissioning. In addition, this problem exists in
both directions of this route.
– Possible cause: The DCMs on the link are connected incorrectly, especially
the DCMs that are used for under-compensation or over-compensation.
– Solution: Check the input and output optical power for a DCM on the
NMS . Then calculate the attenuation of the DCM, or check the fiber

connections for a station at the site to determine whether the DCM at

this station is incorrectly connected.
● The OSNR for a 40G channel is lower than the design value after the
commissioning. (The OSNR for the 40G channel is obtained by using the
integral method.)
– Possible cause: The commissioning is not performed by using a normal
method, or the actual attenuation of a span on the link exceeds the
design attenuation value.
– Solution: Recommission this link. If the actual attenuation of a span on
the link exceeds the design attenuation value, adjust the fibers on this
span.
8.4 Commissioning the Optical Power of the 100G

Coherent System
This topic describes how to commission the optical power of coherent system.The
requirements and commissioning process for the incident optical power of a WDM
system whose single–wavelength rate is greater than 100 Gbit/s are the same as
those of a 100 Gbit/s WDM system. This topic uses a 100 Gbit/s WDM system as
an example.
8.4.1 Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the

Coherent Transmission System
This topic describes the specific requirements on optical transmission performance
of the coherent transmission system. This topic focuses on the overall
commissioning rules and the difference between the coherent transmission system
and non-coherent transmission system in the incident optical power
commissioning. In a coherent and non-coherent hybrid system, comply with the
rules for commissioning non-coherent signals with precedence.
Requirements and Commissioning Process for the Incident Optical Power of

the Coherent Transmission System
In an optical transmission system, after the optical power of the transmit-end OA
board is adjusted to the nominal output optical power, the incident optical power
needs to be determined and commissioned. (Fiber access scenarios include the
mainstream fiber access scenario and special fiber access scenario). For details
about the incident optical power counters, methods for determining the fiber
access scenarios and commissioning the incident optical power, and differences
between the fiber access scenarios in a coherent system, see Table 8-54, Table
8-55, and Table 8-57 respectively.

Table 8-54 Incident optical power counters in the C band

Chann G.652 LEAF G.653 TWRS TWC
el
Spectr
um
Width
of
Each
Modul
ation
Forma
t
M Ch M (H (L M (H (L M (H (L M (H (L M (H (L
od an ai ig o ai ig o ai ig o ai ig o ai ig o
ul ne ns h) w) ns h) w) ns h) w) ns h) w) ns h) w)
ati l tr Sp Sp tr Sp Sp tr Sp Sp tr Sp Sp tr Sp Sp
on Sp ea ec ec ea ec ec ea ec ec ea ec ec ea ec ec
Fo ec m ial ial m ial ial m ial ial m ial ial m ial ial
r tr In In In In In In In In In In In In In In In
m u ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci ci
at m de de de de de de de de de de de de de de de
W nt nt nt nt nt nt nt nt nt nt nt nt nt nt nt
idt O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
h pti pti pti pt pti pti pt pti pti pt pti pti pti pt pti
(G ca ca ca ic ca ca ic ca ca ic ca ca ca ic ca
H l l l al l l al l l al l l l al l
z) Po Po Po Po Po Po Po Po Po Po Po Po Po Po Po
w w w w w w w w w w w w w w w
er er er er er er er er er er er er er er er
(d (d (d (d (d (d (d (d (d (d (d (d (d (d (d
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m
) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
40 50 0. 3. – -1 – -3. -7 -5. – -2 – -4. -2. – -4.

G 5 5 .0 0 .0 0 .0 0 0 0
eP
D 10 3. – 0. 2. 3. 0. -7 -5. – -2 – -4. -2. – -4.
M 0 5 5 0 5 0 .0 0 .0 0 0 0
-
BP
SK
10 50 0. 3. – -1 0. -3. -7 -5. -1 -2 0. -4. -2. 0. -4.

0 5 5 .0 5 0 .0 0 0 .0 5 0 0 5 0
G
eP 10 3. 6. 0. 2. 3. 0. -7 -5. -1 1. 3. -1. 1. 3. -1.
D 0 5 5 5 0 5 0 .0 0 0 0 5 0 0 5 0
M
-
Q

Chann G.652 LEAF G.653 TWRS TWC

el
Spectr
um
Width
of
Each
Modul
ation
Forma
t
PS 20 -0. 2. – -2 -0. -4. – – – – – – – – –

K 0 5 5 .0 5 0
(5
x
37
.5
su
b-
w
av
el
en
gt
h)

Table 8-55 Incident optical power counters in the extended C band (Single
wavelength 40G/100G)
Chan G.652 LEAF G.653 TWRS
nel
Spect
rum
Width
of
Each
Modu
lation
Form
at
M C M (Hig (Lo M ( (Lo Mai (Hig (Lo Mai (Hig (Lo

o h ai h) w) ai H w) nstr h) w) nstr h) w)
d a n Spe Spe n ig Spe eam Spe Spe eam Spe Spe
ul n st cial cial st h cial Inci cial cial Inci cial cial
at n re Inci Inci re ) Inci dent Inci Inci dent Inci Inci
io el a dent dent a S dent Opti dent dent Opti dent dent
n S m Opti Opti m p Opti cal Opti Opti cal Opti Opti
F p In cal cal In ec cal Pow cal cal Pow cal cal
or ec ci Pow Pow ci ia Pow er Pow Pow er Pow Pow
m tr d er er d l er (dB er er (dB er er
at u e (dB (dB e In (dB m) (dB (dB m) (dB (dB
m nt m) m) nt ci m) m) m) m) m)
W O O d
id pt pt e
th ic ic nt
( al al O
G P P pt
H o o ic
z) w w al
er er P
(d (d o
B B w
m m er
) ) (d
B
m
)
4 5 1. 3.5 – -1 1. -3.0 -7.0 -5.0 – -2.0 1.2 -4.0

0 0 2 .0 2
G
e
P
D
M
-
B
P


nel
Spect
rum
Width
of
Each
Modu
lation
Form
at
S 1 4. 6.5 1.2 2. 4. 0.0 -7.0 -5.0 – -2.0 1.2 -4.0

K 0 2 0 2
0
1 5 1. 3.5 – -1 1. -3.0 -7.0 -5.0 -10 -2.0 1.2 -4.0

0 0 2 .0 2
0
G 1 4. 6.5 1.2 2. 4. 0.0 -7.0 -5 -10 1.0 4.2 -1.0
e 0 2 0 2
P 0
D 2 0. 2.5 – -2 0. -4.0 – – – – – –
M 0 2 .0 2
- 0
Q (5
P x
S 3
K 7.
5
s
u
b-
w
a
v
el
e
n
gt
h
)
Low special incident optical power is less than the mainstream incident optical power. It is
configured to reduce the nonlinear effect.
High special incident optical power is greater than the mainstream incident optical power. It
is configured to improve the OSNR. For example, in a G.652 fiber access scenario, you can
use OAU105 and OAU107.
In a capacity expansion scenario, the counters used for initial network

commissioning must be used for commissioning to ensure that the multiplexed

wavelength optical power remains unchanged. The following table lists the
counters of the previously used LEAF fibers.
Table 8-56 Incident optical power counters of the previously used LEAF fibers
Module Type Number of Incident Optical Power Counter

Wavelengths a
Leaf
40G ePDM-BPSK 40 -1/-3
100G ePDM-QPSK 40 -1/+1/+4
a: The first counter is the mainstream incident optical power. The values that
are smaller than the mainstream incident optical power indicate special incident
optical power (low), and those that are greater than the mainstream incident
optical power indicate special incident optical power (high), expressed in dBm.
Special incident optical power (low) reduces non-linear effects.
Special incident optical power (high) improves the optical signal-to-noise ratio
(OSNR).
Figure 8-79 Commissioning process for the incident optical power of the coherent
transmission system

● In the non-standard fiber access scenario, the commissioning objective is to make the actual
single-wavelength incident optical power at the incident optical power reference point be
equal to or smaller than the incident optical power counter.
● After being configured in the commissioning tool, the incident optical power reference point
is moved to a position after the FIU board. EVOA attenuation of the incident optical power
adjustment point = Single-wavelength nominal output optical power – 0.5 (FIU insertion
loss) – Incident optical power counter.
● The inherent insertion loss of EVOA is its minimum value, which can be queried on the NMS.
Commissioning Difference Between the Coherent and Non-coherent

Transmission Systems
Table 8-57 Commissioning difference between the coherent and non-coherent

transmission systems
Transmis Non-standard Fiber Access Standard Fiber Access

sion
System
Coheren
t system
Non-
coherent
system
: Incident optical power reference point : Incident optical power
adjustment point : Input optical power adjustment point of the receive-end

OA board at the downstream site
NOTE
a: In the practical coherent system, the EVOA of the input optical power adjustment point
of the receive-end OA board can be placed based on the network design. If the EVOA is
placed at the receive end of the site, its commissioning method is the same as that in a
non-coherent scenario.
NOTE
The figures describe the commissioning difference between the coherent and non-coherent
transmission systems in a signal flow, and in the opposite direction they are the same way.

Commissioning Rules for Incident Optical Power

Commissioning of incident optical power must comply with the following rules:
● Incident optical power counters are adjusted based on the network design.
● Incident optical power counters refer to the mainstream incident optical
power of each fiber by default.
● High special incident optical power and low special incident optical power are
used in special network scenarios. They must be adjusted based on the
network design.
● When adjusting incident optical power counters and optical power of the
downstream OA board, ensure that the incident optical power counters meet
requirements.
– If the output optical power of the downstream OA board meets the
requirement in case of the minimum gain, the upstream incident optical
power can be less than the incident optical power counters.
– If the output optical power of the downstream OA board does not meet
the requirement in case of the minimum gain, preferentially reduce the
upstream EVOA attenuation to a value within the range required by
incident optical power counters.
– If the output optical power of the downstream OA board still does not
meet the requirement, increase the gain of the downstream OA board.
Commissioning Rules for Coherent Transmission System

Observe the following rules when commissioning the coherent transmission
system:
● Optical power is commissioned based on the nominal optical power of the OA
board. It is prohibited to improve the optical power performance by increasing
the transmit optical power in the initial engineering phase.
● The optical power at the IN optical port on a 100G/40G OTU board must be
within the range of -12 dBm to -5 dBm.
● In the case of coherent transmission system commissioning, adjust the optical
power difference between each wavelength in the middle of two equilibrium
stations (stations that balance the optical power, including ROADM, and back-
to-back OTM) to a value not more than ±1 dB.
● If equalizing optical power at intermediate stations, objectives of single-
wavelength optical power commissioning at the transmit and receive ends are
the single-wavelength input optical power must be within the range of
nominal input optical power +/- 3 dB at both the transmit and receive ends.
● In a traditional WDM system, before a multiplexed wavelength is received by
the OA board, you need to adjust the EVOA of the OA board so that the
output optical power reaches the multiplexed-wavelength nominal optical
power. You can obtain the nominal optical power by querying the OA
specifications. In a flexible ROADM system, one fiber can transmit
wavelengths with various channel spacings. Therefore, the nominal optical

power of the OA board cannot be used as its output optical power. Instead,
you need to use a calculator to calculate the output optical power of the OA
board.
Commissioning Rules for Hybrid Transmission of 100G and 40G Coherent

Observe the following rules when configuring wavelengths:
● If there is only one channel spacing, channels are automatically planned and
allocated from long wavelengths to short wavelengths by default.
● If there are multiple channels, default channels are preferentially allocated.
– Hybrid transmission of 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing and 75 GHz
channel spacing: It is recommended that channels at a 50 GHz/100 GHz
channel spacing be allocated from short wavelengths and channels at a
75 GHz channel spacing be allocated from long wavelengths. The 50 GHz
channel spacing and 100 GHz channel spacing are considered as the
same type, and channels at a 100 GHz channel spacing are allocated only
after the allocation of channels at a 50 GHz channel spacing.
– Hybrid transmission of 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing and 62.5 GHz
62.5 GHz channel spacing be allocated from long wavelengths. The 50
GHz channel spacing and 100 GHz channel spacing are considered as the
– Hybrid transmission of 62.5 GHz channel spacing and 75 GHz channel
spacing: It is recommended that channels at a 62.5 GHz channel spacing
be allocated from short wavelengths and channels at a 75 GHz channel
spacing be allocated from long wavelengths.
– Hybrid transmission of 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing, 62.5 GHz
channel spacing, and 75 GHz channel spacing: It is recommended that
channels at a 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing be allocated from short
wavelengths, channels at a 62.5 GHz channel spacing be allocated from
intermediate wavelengths, and channels at a 75 GHz channel spacing be
allocated from long wavelengths. The 50 GHz channel spacing and 100
GHz channel spacing are considered as the same type, and channels at a
100 GHz channel spacing are allocated only after the allocation of
channels at a 50 GHz channel spacing.
● It is recommended that superchannels be allocated from long wavelengths.
Principles for setting guard bands in a G.652/LEAF fiber system: no guard band is
required for hybrid transmission of 100G and 40G BPSK signals.
Commissioning Rules for Hybrid Transmission of Coherent and Non-

Coherent Transmission Systems
● For a hybrid transmission system with dispersion compensation, the
requirements for incident optical power are the same as those for the non-
coherent transmission system.

● In adjacent mixed transmission of 100G signals and 40G/10G signals, it is

recommended that the optical power of 100G signals satisfy the following
conditions:
– Approximate to optical power of 40G signals.
– Larger than that of 10G signals but smaller than the nominal single-
wavelength optical power of the OA board.
● In the mixed spectrum of 100G signals, 40G signals and 10G signals, the
spectrum of 100G signals and 40G signals are wider and the amplitude is
lower than that of 10G signals. Actually, the power of 10G signals is equal to
the power of 100G signals and 40G signals. Therefore, measure optical power
of the 40G wavelength and the 100G wavelength accurately.
Principles for setting guard bands in a G.652/LEAF fiber system:
● No guard band is required for hybrid transmission of 100G and 40G DQPSK
signals.
● No guard band is required for hybrid transmission of 40G BPSK and 40G
DQPSK signals.
● For hybrid transmission of 100G and 10G/40G ODB signals, guard bands must
be configured and the 100G and 10G/40G ODB signals can neighbor each
other on only one side.
● For hybrid transmission of 40G BPSK and 10G/40G ODB signals, guard bands
must be configured and the 40G BPSK and 10G/40G ODB signals can
neighbor each other on only one side.
● The guard band configuration varies according to networks. You can contact Huawei
engineers to design the guard bands in practical applications.
● If the system has to transmit 100G, 40G DQPSK, and 10G signals together, a 40G DQPSK
signal can be filled in the space between a 100G signal and a 10G signal to function as the
guard band. Note that the guard band between the 100G signal and the 10G signal must
comply with the network design requirement.
8.4.2 Process for Commissioning coherent transmission system

This topic describes the general process for commissioning the coherent
transmission system.
Figure 8-80 shows the process for commissioning the coherent transmission
system.

Figure 8-80 Process for commissioning the coherent transmission system

method, OSNR, ITL configuration, and channel allocation for hybrid transmission ,
meet the requirements for setting up the coherent transmission system.
The preparations before commissioning the optical power of the coherent

transmission system are as follows:
● Check the design documents.
– Optical amplifier types and dispersion configuration and compensation
modes
– Channel allocation for mixed transmission signals
– Configuration of basic NE data such as NE IP and NE ID and station fiber
connection diagram
– Comparison between the planned designs and the actual designs on the
live network
● Prepare the following commissioning meters:
– Optical spectrum analyzer

– Optical power meter

– Other types of test meters as listed in Table 8-58.
Table 8-58 Analyzers
Name Appearance
JDSU ONT-503/ONT-603
EXFO FTB-500
● NMS:
– iManager U2000
8.4.4 Remote Commissioning Optical Power Of Coherent

System
This topic describes how to commission the single-channel 100G OTM, OLA and
ROADM stations on the NMS.

with the commissioning requirements of a low-rate service line. In this example,
This example is system equipped with OPM8. For the commissioning rules and
methods of a network that has no OPM or MCA, see Rules for Commissioning
the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission System and Example of
Commissioning Optical Power Based on the Chain Network.

Networking Diagram
Figure 8-81 shows the network topology of project K. In a chain network, optical
NEs A, B, C and D are WDM equipment. Optical NEs A and D are configured as
OTM stations. Optical NE B is an OLA station. Optical NE C is a ROADM station.
10-channel 100G services are transmitted between Optical A and D.
Figure 8-81 shows the span loss and distance between the NEs. The G.652 fiber is
Figure 8-81 Service requirement matrix in project K

Figure 8-82 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of project K.
Figure 8-82 Wavelength allocation diagram of project K
OA Configuration Diagram
Figure 8-83 shows the configuration for an OA at each station in project K.

Figure 8-83 OA configuration diagram of project K

OTM Station
This topic describes how to commission the optical power of the OTM station that
Prerequisite
which makes the OTU board emit light properly.
● The receive wavelengths of 100G OTU boards have been set.
● ECC communication has been established.
● Optical supervisory channels (OSCs) have been commissioned.
● Optical cross-connections have been configured at each station.

NMS

Testing Diagram

EVOA
configure the EVOA or add the fixed attenuator and then perform the optical power
Procedure
to 5 dB.
from the navigation tree.
5dB.
Click Close.
Step 2 Set up the optical path by adjusting the attenuation of the EVOA on the OAU106
the minimum value.
3. Click Apply.
3. Click Apply.
Step 4 Use the OPM board to scan the optical power of the OAU106 board and adjust
the attenuation of each channel on the M40V board so that the optical power of
each wavelength reaches the nominal optical power value and optical power
flatness is achieved.

The nominal input optical power (A) of each wavelength on the OAU106 board is -12 dB,
the gain (B) is +16 dB, and the nominal output optical power (C) of each wavelength is +4
dB.
Use the OPM board to scan the OAU106 board to obtain the output optical power of each
wavelength on the OAU106 board. Then adjust the attenuation of each channel on the
M40V board so that the output optical power of each wavelength is close to value C.
After adjusting the attenuation of each channel on the M40V board, use the OPM board to
scan the wavelength power. If the power difference of wavelengths is less than 3 dB, the
power flatness is satisfactory.
Step 5 Set the attenuation value of the EVOA connected to the OUT port of the OAU106
at the local station to 5 dB, so that the input optical power of the OAU106 board
at downstream station B reaches the nominal value.
To ensure that the input optical power of the OAU106 at downstream station B reaches the
nominal value, the attenuation value of the EVOA connected to the OUT port of the OAU106 at
the local station needs to be set to 5 dB. 2. Since the fiber access scenario for the transmit-end
OAU106 board is a coherent non-standard fiber access scenario, the attenuation value of the
EVOA connected to the OUT port of the OAU106 at the local station needs to be set to 3 dB.
Therefore, the attenuation value of the EVOA connected to the OUT port of the OAU106 at the
local station is set to 5 dB.
The EVOA attenuation value is calculated as 5 dB based on the following formula: Nominal
output optical power of the transmit-end OAU106 at station A (+4 dB) - Line attenuation
(+10 dB) - Insertion loss of the EVOA - Insertion loss of the transmit-end FIU (+0.5 dB) -
Insertion loss of the receive-end FIU (+0.5 dB) = Nominal input optical power of the
receive-end OAU106 at station B (-12 dB).
According to Coherent Transmission System Commissioning Principles.

A non-standard fiber access scenario is determined as follows:
● The transmit-end OA is OAU106, and the nominal single-wavelength output optical
power (a) is +4 dB.
● The system is a 40-wavelength system, a G.652 fiber is used as the line fiber, and the
incident optical power counter (b) is +0.5 dB.
● Because a is larger than b+0.5, the scenario is a non-standard fiber access scenario.
The attenuation value of the EVOA on the OUT port of the transmit-end OAU106 is set to 3
dB based on the following calculation: Attenuation value of the EVOA = a - Insertion loss of
the FIU (+0.5 dB) - b = 4 - 0.5 - 0.5 = 3 dB
----End
8.4.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station and OTM
Station at the Receive End
This topic describes how to commission the link optical power of the OLA station
that are in the west-to-east signal flow.

Prerequisite
which makes the OTU emit light properly.

NMS

● In the 40-wavelength 100G system, two pass-through wavelengths are
configured in practice.
● The types of OAU1 are OAU101 and OAU106.
Testing Diagram

EVOA

Procedure
Step 1 Adjust the input optical power of the OAU106 at the local station to the nominal
value. (Note that this step is not required in this example because the input
optical power has reached the nominal value after the transmit-end optical power
at the upstream station is adjusted.)
Step 2 Determine that it is a coherent non-standard fiber access scenario for the
transmit-end OAU106. Therefore, set the attenuation value of the EVOA on the
OUT port of the OAU106 to 3 dB.
According to Coherent Transmission System Commissioning Principles

● The transmit-end OA is OAU106, and the nominal single-wavelength output optical power
(a) is +4 dB.
The attenuation value of the EVOA on the OUT port of the transmit-end OAU106 is set to 3 dB
based on the following calculation: Attenuation value of the EVOA = a - Insertion loss of the FIU
(+0.5 dB) - b = 4 - 0.5 - 0.5= 3 dB
----End
8.4.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Drop Wavelengths and

Links at the ROADM Station
This topic describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C
that is in the west-to-east signal flow
Prerequisite

NMS


● In the 40-wavelength 100G system, 1 add wavelength and 2 pass-through
wavelengths are configured at the ROADM station in practice.
Testing Diagram
Figure 8-86 Fiber connections of ROADM station C

EVOA
Procedure
1. On the NMS, adjust the EVOA attenuation for the OAU101 board to the
minimum value and adjust the gain of the board to 27.5 dB, so that the input
optical power of the board reaches -23.5 dB.

a. Determine whether the gain needs to be adjusted. Generally an OA board

has the best optical performance when the gain is at the minimum. If the
minimum gain cannot compensate for the line loss, the gain needs to be
increased.
i. The nominal output optical power (a) of the upstream OA board is
+4 dB.
ii. Attenuation (b) between OA boards = EVOA attenuation at the
transmit end + Fiber attenuation + Attenuation of two FIU boards =
2.5 + 24 + 1 = 27.5 dB
iii. Actual incident optical power (c) of the OAU101 board = a - b = 4 -
27.5 = -23.5 dB
iv. When the gain range of the OAU101 board ranges is 20-31 dB, the
range of the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is from
-16 dB to -27 dB. Value c (-23.5 dB) ranges between -16 dB and -27
dB. Therefore, the minimum gain cannot be used and the board gain
needs to be adjusted.
b. Set the board gain.
i. Gain of the OAU101 board = Nominal output optical power for the
site - Nominal output optical power of the upstream OA board +
Attenuation between OA boards = 4 - 4 + 27.5 = 27.5 dB
2. Preset the attenuation to 3.0 dB for each pass-through wavelength on the
WSD9 board.
The preset attenuation is determined based on the following formula: Nominal single-
wavelength input optical power (B) of the transmit-end OA (EDFA on the TD20 board) =
Nominal single-wavelength output optical power (A) of the receive-end OA (OAU101) -
Inherent insertion loss (C) of the WSM9 board - Inherent insertion loss (D) of the RDU9
board - Single-wavelength attenuation for the WSD9 board
3. Set the attenuation of the VOA on the TD20 board to the minimum value to
make the optical path available.
4. Fine tune the attenuation of each channel on the WSD9 board so that the
input optical power of the EDFA on the TD20 board reaches the nominal
value.
5. Configure the fixed optical attenuator (FOA) equipped for the OTU board, so
that the input optical power of the OTU board is within the range of -13 dBm
to -5 dBm.
8.4.4.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Pass-through Wavelengths

and Links at ROADM Station
Prerequisite



NMS
Testing Diagram

EVOA

Procedure
1. Preset the attenuation to 3.0 dB for each pass-through channel on the WSM9
board on the main optical path.
wavelength input optical power (B) of the transmit-end OA (OAU106) = Nominal single-
wavelength output optical power (A) of the receive-end OA (OAU101) - Inherent insertion
loss (C) of the RDU9 board - Inherent insertion loss (D) of the WSM9 board - Single-
wavelength attenuation for the WSM9 board
2. Preset the attenuation to the minimum value for the EVOA attached to the IN
port on the OAU106 board on the main optical path (to make the optical
path available), and set the board gain to 23 dB.
1. The following describes the reason why the board gain is set to 23 dB: If the line loss is
20 dB (inherent insertion loss of the RDU9 board + that of the WSM9 board), the gain
must be set to at least 20 dB (in this scenario, the single-wavelength attenuation is
considered as 0 dB.) A 3 dB margin, however, must be reserved for the single-
wavelength attenuation for further flatness adjustment. Therefore, the gain is set to 23
dB.
2. When the board gain is set to 23 dB, the input optical power of the OAU106 board is
calculated as follows: Input optical power of the OAU106 board = Nominal single-
wavelength output optical power of the OAU101 board on the main optical power -
Inherent insertion loss of the RDU9 board - Inherent insertion loss of the WSM9 board -
Single-wavelength attenuation = +4 - 12 - 8 - 3 = -19 dB.
3. Determine that it is a coherent non-standard fiber access scenario for the
transmit-end OAU106. Therefore, set the attenuation value of the EVOA on
the OUT port of the OAU106 to 2.5 dB.
According to Coherent Transmission System Commissioning Principles.

power (a) is +4 dB.
incident optical power counter (b) is +1 dB.
● Because a is larger than b, the scenario is a non-standard fiber access scenario.
The attenuation value of the EVOA on the OUT port of the transmit-end OAU106 is set to
2.5 dB based on the following calculation: Attenuation value of the EVOA = a - Insertion
loss of the FIU (+0.5 dB) - b = 4 - 0.5 - 1 = 2.5 dB


ROADM Station
This topic describes how to commission the optical power of the add wavelengths
and links at the ROADM station.
Prerequisite

NMS

Testing Diagram

EVOA
Procedure
1. Preset the attenuation of each pass-through wavelength on the WSM9 board
to 5.0 dB.
wavelength input optical power (B) of the transmit-end OA (OBU104) = Nominal single-
wavelength output optical power (A) of the receive-end OTU board - Inherent insertion
loss (C) of the TM20 board - Inherent insertion loss (D) of the WSM9 board - Single-

2. If an EVOA is attached to the IN port of the OBU104 board, set the EVOA
attenuation to the minimum value to make the optical path available.
3. Use the OPM board to scan the optical power of the OBU104 board and fine
tune the attenuation for each add channel on the WSM9 board, so that the
output optical power of each wavelength is close to the nominal value.
4. Preset the EVOA attenuation to 8 dB so that the difference between the AM
port power and EXPI port power is within 5 dB.
The preset EVOA attenuation is determined as follows:

Single-wavelength input optical power on the AM port = Nominal single-wavelength
output optical power of the OBU104 board - EVOA attenuation
Single-wavelength power of the EXPI port = Nominal single-wavelength output optical
power of the OBU104 board - RDU attenuation
Single-wavelength input optical power of the AM port = Single-wavelength power of the
EXPI port. According to the preceding formulas, the EVOA attenuation is calculated as 8 dB.
5. Use the OPM board to scan the optical power of the OAU106 board and fine
tune the attenuation for each pass-through channel on the WSM9 board, so
that power flatness of add/pass-through wavelengths is achieved.

This topic describes how to commission the receive-end optical power of the OTM
station that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite
light forcibly to ensure that the OTU emits light properly.
● Ensure that the end face of fiber connectors on OTU boards is clean.
● The quality of the near-end 40 km optical cable has been checked using an
optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR), and the optical cable addresses
the deployment requirement.
● The line fiber quality has been tested and meets the requirement.
● Pigtails have been connected to the WDM side of Raman boards.
● The IPA configuration has been completed.

NMS

Testing Diagram
Figure 8-89 Fiber connections of OTM station D

EVOA
Procedure
In the following example, the Raman board is RAU201, the working mode of the board is Gain
locking, the fiber type is G.652, and the fiber attenuation is 30 dB. For other configurations of
the RAU201, the procedure may differ. For details, see Raman Amplifier Commissioning
Guideline.
Configuring the Working Mode and Fiber Type for the Raman Board
1. Ensure that the IPA Status attribute of the IPA Group is Disabled. If not, set
them to Disabled and click Apply.

2. Set Working Mode for the RAU201 board as required.

a. Navigate to the NE Explorer. In the Function Tree, select the desired
RAU201 board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
b. Click Advanced Attributes. Set Working Mode to Gain locking
c. Click Apply.
For the LINE port of the RAU201, Working Mode can be set to Gain locking, Maximum
gain, or Pump power.
For the OUT port of the RAU201, Working Mode can be set to Gain locking or Power
locking.
3. Set the fiber type to the type of physical fibers that have been used.
a. On the Advanced Attributes tab. set Fiber Type to the type of physical
fibers that have been used (that is, G.652).
b. Click Apply.
Adjusting the Gains for the Raman Board
1. Close the pump laser of the Raman board.
a. Select the desired RAU201 board and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the navigation tree.
b. Select By Board/Port (Channel).
c. Click the Basic Attributes tab, and ensure that the Laser Status of the
LINE ports of the Raman board WDM interfaces are Off. If not, set them
to Off and click Apply.
2. Use an optical power meter to measure the actual input optical power on the
LINE port of the Raman board and check whether it is greater than 1 dBm. If
it is greater than 1 dBm, add a fixed attenuator to the transmit end of the
upstream site so that the input optical power on the LINE port meets the
requirement. Note that the input optical power on the LINE port of the
RAU201 board must be within the range of -40 dBm to +1 dBm. If it is greater
than +1 dBm, the Raman amplifier may be damaged.
3. After repairing the fiber, open the pump laser on Raman amplifiers manually.
In the Basic Attributes tab, set the Laser Status of the LINE port of the
Raman board WDM interfaces are On, and click Apply.
4. Set the gain of the Raman unit on the RAU201 to 10 dB and the gain of the
EDFA unit to 20 dB. For other gain settings of the RAU201, see Adjusting the
Gains for the Raman Board.
a. Click Basic Attributes. Set Nominal Gain (dB)Standard Gain for the
LINE and OUT ports according to the actual line loss.
b. Click Apply.
5. Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA between the EFDA unit and Raman unit,
so that the optical power of the IN port on the RAU201 reaches the nominal
value: Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA so that the input optical power on
the IN port of the RAU201 on the main optical path reaches about -16 dBm ,
the input optical power can be queried on the NMS
a. Select the desired EVOA board, and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the navigation tree.

b. On the Basic Attributes tab, set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to

the minimum value.
c. Click Apply.
Adjusting the Receive Optical Power on the WDM Side of the OTU Board.
1. Configure the fixed optical attenuator equipped before the OTU board, so
to -5 dBm.
Subsequent operations:Set the IPA status attribute of the IPA group to

Enable,and click Apply.

This topic describes how to commission the optical power equalization that is in
Prerequisites

NMS
Procedure
performance.
----End

8.4.5 FAQs on Coherent System Commissioning

This section lists some frequently asked questions on coherent system
commissioning.The requirements and commissioning process for the incident
optical power of a WDM system whose single–wavelength rate is greater than 100
Gbit/s are the same as those of a 100 Gbit/s WDM system. This topic uses a 100
Gbit/s WDM system as an example.
Q1: What are the principles for commissioning a network carrying both
coherent and non-coherent wavelengths?
A: The principles are as follows:
● Such network can be commissioned in the same way as a non-coherent
network, without considering fiber access scenarios.
● In a scenario where 100G coherent wavelengths need to be added on a non-
coherent network for capacity expansion, the incident optical power can be
reduced to increase the OSNR margin of the 100G wavelengths and the
transmission distance without electrical regeneration. In this situation, the
optical power of single non-coherent wavelengths will be definitely reduced.
When this occurs, commission the network according to the network design.
Q2: What are the principles for commissioning the EVOA before the receive-
end OA, especially how to set the OA gain?
● The OA gain can be as small as possible. A small OA gain brings a better
OSNR value.
● The OA gain can be as small as possible under the condition that the single-
wavelength output optical power meets the requirement. Accordingly, the
EVOA attenuation can be set as small as possible (zero or even not set).
Q3: Can the OA gain be decreased to decrease the single-wavelength output
optical power and meet the incident optical power requirement?
A: No, it cannot. If the single-wavelength output optical power of the OA
decreases, the system OSNR will also decrease. If you increase the EVOA
attenuation to decrease the optical power, the system OSNR will not decrease.
Q4: Why cannot the incident optical power of coherent 100G single
wavelengths be too high?
A: 100G coherent signals have severe non-linear effects than non-coherent 10G
signals. Therefore, the incident optical power of coherent 100G single wavelengths
must be decreased.
8.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Beyond

100G Coherent System
NOTICE
Ensure that the optical ports and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean.
Otherwise, system performance will be affected.

8.5.1 Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the

Beyond 100G Coherent Transmission System
This topic describes the specific requirements on optical transmission performance
of the beyond 100G coherent transmission system. This topic focuses on the
overall commissioning rules and the difference between the coherent transmission
system and non-coherent transmission system in the incident optical power
commissioning. In a coherent and non-coherent hybrid system, comply with the
rules for commissioning non-coherent signals with precedence.
Requirements and Commissioning Process for the Incident Optical Power of

the Coherent Transmission System
In an optical transmission system, after the optical power of the transmit-end OA
board is adjusted to the nominal output optical power, the incident optical power
needs to be determined and commissioned. (Fiber access scenarios include the
mainstream fiber access scenario and special fiber access scenario). For details
about the incident optical power counters, methods for determining the fiber
access scenarios and commissioning the incident optical power, and differences
between the fiber access scenarios in a coherent system, see Table 8-59, Table
8-60, and Table 8-62 respectively.

Table 8-59 Incident optical power counters in the C band

Chan G.652 LEAF G.653 TWRS TWC
nel
Spect
rum
Widt
h of
Each
Modu
lation
Form
at
M C M (H (L M ( (L M (H (L M (H (L M (H (L
o h ai ig o ai H o ai ig o ai ig o ai ig o
d a n h) w) n ig w) ns h) w) ns h) w) ns h) w)
ul n st Sp Sp st h Sp tre Sp Sp tre Sp Sp tre Sp Sp
at n re eci eci re ) eci a eci eci a eci eci a eci eci
io el a al al a S al m al al m al al m al al
n S m In In m p In In In In In In In In In In
F p In cid cid In e cid cid cid cid cid cid cid cid cid cid
or e ci en en ci ci en en en en en en en en en en
m ct d t t d al t t t t t t t t t t
at ru e O O e In O O O O O O O O O O
m nt pti pti nt ci pti pti pti pti pti pti pti pti pti pti
W O cal cal O d cal cal cal cal cal cal cal cal cal cal
id pt Po Po pt e Po Po Po Po Po Po Po Po Po Po
th ic w w ic nt w w w w w w w w w w
( al er er al O er er er er er er er er er er
G P (d (d P pt (d (d (d (d (d (d (d (d (d (d
H o B B o ic B B B B B B B B B B
z) w m m w al m m m m m m m m m m
er ) ) er P ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
( ( o
d d w
B B er
m m (
) ) d
B
m
)
2 1 3. 6. 0. 2. 3. 0. – – – – – – – – –
0 0 5 5 5 0 5 0
0 0
G
1 5 0. 3. – -1 0. -3. – – – – – – – – –
6 0 5 5 .0 5 0
Q
A
M


nel
Spect
rum
Widt
h of
Each
Modu
lation
Form
at
2 -0 2. – -2 -0 -4. – – – – – – – – –
0 .5 5 .0 .5 0
0
(5
x
3
7.
5
s
u
b-
w
a
v
el
e
n
gt
h
)
2 7 2. 5. – 0. 2. -1. – – – – – – – – –
0 5 3 3 8 3 2
0
G 1 3. 6. – 2. 3. 0. – – – – – – – – –
Q 0 5 5 0 5 0
P 0
S
K
2 5 0. 3. – -1 0. -3. – – – – – – – – –
0 0 5 5 .0 5 0
0
G 6 1. 4. – -0 1. -2. – – – – – – – – –
8 2. 4 4 .1 4 1
Q 5
A
M
2 5 0. 3. – -1 0. -3. – – – – – – – – –
0 0 5 5 .0 5 0


nel
Spect
rum
Widt
h of
Each
Modu
lation
Form
at
0 7 2. 5. – 0. 2. -1. – – – – – – – – –
G 5 3 3 8 3 2
e
1 1 3. 6. – 2. 3. 0. – – – – – – – – –
6 0 5 5 0 5 0
Q 0
A
M
4 7 2. 5. – 0. 2. -1. – – – – – – – – –
0 5 3 3 8 3 2
0
G 1 3. 6. – 2. 3. 0. – – – – – – – – –
1 0 5 5 0 5 0
6 0
Q
A
M

Table 8-60 Incident optical power counters in the extended C band (Single
wavelength 200G/400G)
nel
Spect
rum
Width
of
Each
Modu
lation
Form
at
M C M (Hig (Lo M ( (Lo Mai (Hig (Lo Mai (Hig (Lo

o h ai h) w) ai H w) nstr h) w) nstr h) w)
d a n Spe Spe n ig Spe eam Spe Spe eam Spe Spe
ul n st cial cial st h cial Inci cial cial Inci cial cial
at n re Inci Inci re ) Inci dent Inci Inci dent Inci Inci
io el a dent dent a S dent Opti dent dent Opti dent dent
n S m Opti Opti m p Opti cal Opti Opti cal Opti Opti
F p In cal cal In ec cal Pow cal cal Pow cal cal
or ec ci Pow Pow ci ia Pow er Pow Pow er Pow Pow
m tr d er er d l er (dB er er (dB er er
at u e (dB (dB e In (dB m) (dB (dB m) (dB (dB
m nt m) m) nt ci m) m) m) m) m)
W O O d
id pt pt e
th ic ic nt
( al al O
G P P pt
H o o ic
z) w w al
er er P
(d (d o
B B w
m m er
) ) (d
B
m
)
2 1 4. 6.5 1.2 2. 4. 0.0 – – – – – –

0 0 2 0 2
0 0
G
1 5 1. 3.5 – -1 1. -3.0 – – – – – –
6 0 2 .0 2
Q
A
M


nel
Spect
rum
Width
of
Each
Modu
lation
Form
at
2 0. 2.5 – -2 0. -4.0 – – – – – –
0 2 .0 2
0
(5
x
3
7.
5
s
u
b-
w
a
v
el
e
n
gt
h
)
2 7 2. 5.2 – 0. 2. -1.2 – – – – – –
0 5 9 8 9
0
G 1 4. 6.5 – 2. 4. 0.0 – – – – – –
Q 0 2 0 2
P 0
S
K
2 5 1. 3.5 – -1 1. -3.0 – – – – – –
0 0 2 .0 2
0
G 6 2. 4.5 – -0 2. -2.1 – – – – – –
8 2. 2 .1 2
Q 5
A
M
2 5 1. 3.5 – -1 1. -3.0 – – – – – –
0 0 2 .0 2


nel
Spect
rum
Width
of
Each
Modu
lation
Form
at
0 7 2. 5.2 – 0. 2. -1.2 – – – – – –
G 5 9 8 9
e
1 1 4. 6.5 – 2. 4. 0.0 – – – – – –
6 0 2 0 2
Q 0
A
M
4 7 2. 5.2 – 0. 2. -1.2 – – – – – –
0 5 9 8 9
0
G 1 4. 6.5 – 2. 4. 0.0 – – – – – –
1 0 2 0 2
6 0
Q
A
M
Low special incident optical power is less than the mainstream incident optical power. It is
configured to reduce the nonlinear effect.
High special incident optical power is greater than the mainstream incident optical power. It
is configured to improve the OSNR. For example, in a G.652 fiber access scenario, you can
use OAU105 and OAU107.
In a capacity expansion scenario, the counters used for initial network

commissioning must be used for commissioning to ensure that the multiplexed
wavelength optical power remains unchanged. The following table lists the
counters of the previously used LEAF fibers.
Table 8-61 Incident optical power counters of the previously used LEAF fibers

Wavelengths a
Leaf
200G 16QAM 40 -1/+1/+4


Wavelengths a
Leaf
200G QPSK 40 +2/+4/-1
a: The first counter is the mainstream incident optical power. The values that
are less than the nominal incident optical power indicate the low special
incident optical power, and those greater than the nominal incident optical
power indicate the high special incident optical power, expressed in dBm.
Figure 8-90 Commissioning process for the incident optical power of the coherent
transmission system
● In the non-standard fiber access scenario, the commissioning objective is to make the actual
single-wavelength incident optical power at the incident optical power reference point be
equal to or smaller than the incident optical power counter.
● EVOA attenuation at the incident optical power adjustment point = Nominal single-
wavelength output optical power – 0.5 – Incident optical power counter. 0.5 indicates the FIU
insertion loss.
● The inherent insertion loss of EVOA is its minimum value, which can be queried on the NMS.

Commissioning Difference Between the Coherent and Non-coherent

Table 8-62 Commissioning difference between the coherent and non-coherent

transmission systems
Transmis Non-standard Fiber Access Standard Fiber Access
sion
System
Coheren
t system
Non-
coherent
system
: Incident optical power reference point : Incident optical power
adjustment point : Input optical power adjustment point of the receive-end

OA board at the downstream site
NOTE
a: In the practical coherent system, the EVOA of the input optical power adjustment point
of the receive-end OA board can be placed based on the network design. If the EVOA is
placed at the receive end of the site, its commissioning method is the same as that in a
non-coherent scenario.
NOTE
The figures describe the commissioning difference between the coherent and non-coherent
transmission systems in a signal flow, and in the opposite direction they are the same way.
Commissioning Rules for Incident Optical Power

Commissioning of incident optical power must comply with the following rules:
● Incident optical power counters are adjusted based on the network design.
● Incident optical power counters refer to the mainstream incident optical
power of each fiber by default.
● High special incident optical power and low special incident optical power are
used in special network scenarios. They must be adjusted based on the
network design.
● When adjusting incident optical power counters and optical power of the
downstream OA board, ensure that the incident optical power counters meet
requirements.

– If the output optical power of the downstream OA board meets the

requirement in case of the minimum gain, the upstream incident optical
power can be less than the incident optical power counters.
– If the output optical power of the downstream OA board does not meet
the requirement in case of the minimum gain, preferentially reduce the
upstream EVOA attenuation to a value within the range required by
incident optical power counters.
– If the output optical power of the downstream OA board still does not
meet the requirement, increase the gain of the downstream OA board.
Commissioning Rules for Coherent Transmission System

Observe the following rules when commissioning the coherent transmission
system:
● Optical power is commissioned based on the nominal optical power of the OA
board. It is prohibited to improve the optical power performance by increasing
the transmit optical power in the initial engineering phase.
● The optical power at the IN optical port on an OTU board must be within the
● In the case of coherent transmission system commissioning, adjust the optical
power difference between each wavelength in the middle of two equilibrium
stations (stations that balance the optical power, including ROADM, and back-
to-back OTM) to a value not more than ±1 dB.
● During Flex Grid commissioning, as the spectrum width of each wavelength is
different, the nominal optical power of each wavelength is also different. If
single-wavelength optical power is flattened at an intermediate site, the
commissioning objective at both transmit and receive ends is that the single-
wavelength optical power flatness of wavelengths with the same channel
spacing is within the range of the nominal single-wavelength input optical
power ±3 dB.
● In a traditional WDM system, before a multiplexed wavelength is received by
the OA board, you need to adjust the EVOA of the OA board so that the
output optical power reaches the multiplexed-wavelength nominal optical
power. You can obtain the nominal optical power by querying the OA
specifications. In a flexible ROADM system, one fiber can transmit
wavelengths with various channel spacings. Therefore, the nominal optical
power of the OA board cannot be used as its output optical power. Instead,
you need to use a calculator to calculate the output optical power of the OA
board.
Commissioning Rules for Hybrid Transmission of Beyond 100G and 100G/40G

Coherent Transmission Systems
Observe the following rules when configuring wavelengths:
● If there is only one channel spacing, channels are automatically planned and
allocated from long wavelengths to short wavelengths by default.

● If there are multiple channels, default channels are preferentially allocated.

– Hybrid transmission of 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing and 75 GHz
75 GHz channel spacing be allocated from long wavelengths. The 50 GHz
channel spacing and 100 GHz channel spacing are considered as the
– Hybrid transmission of 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing and 62.5 GHz
62.5 GHz channel spacing be allocated from long wavelengths. The 50
GHz channel spacing and 100 GHz channel spacing are considered as the
– Hybrid transmission of 62.5 GHz channel spacing and 75 GHz channel
spacing: It is recommended that channels at a 62.5 GHz channel spacing
be allocated from short wavelengths and channels at a 75 GHz channel
spacing be allocated from long wavelengths.
– Hybrid transmission of 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing, 62.5 GHz
channel spacing, and 75 GHz channel spacing: It is recommended that
channels at a 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing be allocated from short
wavelengths, channels at a 62.5 GHz channel spacing be allocated from
intermediate wavelengths, and channels at a 75 GHz channel spacing be
allocated from long wavelengths. The 50 GHz channel spacing and 100
GHz channel spacing are considered as the same type, and channels at a
100 GHz channel spacing are allocated only after the allocation of
channels at a 50 GHz channel spacing.
● It is recommended that superchannels be allocated from long wavelengths.
Observe the following rules when configuring guard bands in G.652 and LEAF
fiber systems:
● No guard band is required for coherent mixed transmission of beyond 100G
and 100G signals.
● No guard band is required for coherent mixed transmission of beyond 100G
and 40G BPSK signals.
● No guard band is required for coherent mixed transmission of beyond 100G,
100G, and 40G BPSK signals.
Commissioning Rules for Hybrid Transmission of Beyond 100G and Non-

coherent Transmission Systems
● In a coherent and non-coherent hybrid system, comply with the rules for
commissioning non-coherent signals with precedence. In special scenarios to
which the rules for commissioning non-coherent signals are inapplicable,
perform commissioning based on the actual plan and design results.
● For a hybrid transmission system with dispersion compensation, the
requirements for incident optical power are the same as those for the non-
coherent transmission system.

During the hybrid transmission of coherent and non-coherent transmission

systems, observe the following rules when configuring guard bands in G.652 and
LEAF fiber systems:
● For hybrid transmission of beyond 100G and 10G signals, guard bands must
be configured.
● No guard band is required for hybrid transmission of beyond 100G and 40G
DQPSK signals.
● For hybrid transmission of beyond 100G and 10G/40G ODB signals, guard
bands must be configured and the beyond 100G and 10G/40G ODB signals
can neighbor each other on only one side.
● The guard band configuration varies according to networks. You can contact Huawei
engineers to design the guard bands in practical applications.
● During the hybrid transmission of beyond 100G or 40G BPSk, 40G DQPSK, and 10G/40G
ODB signals, the 40G DQPSK signals can be filled in the space between the beyond 100G or
40G BPSK and 10G/40G ODB signals as a guard band. In addition, the guard band must
meet the network design requirement for the channel spacing between the beyond 100G or
40G BPSk and 10G/40G ODB signals.
8.5.2 Process for Commissioning coherent transmission system

This section describes the general process for commissioning coherent
transmission system.
Figure 8-91 shows the process for commissioning coherent transmission system.

Figure 8-91 Process for commissioning coherent transmission system

method, OSNR, ITL configuration, and channel allocation for hybrid transmission ,
meet the requirements for setting up the coherent transmission system.
The preparations before commissioning the optical power of the coherent
transmission system are as follows:
● Check the design documents.
– Optical amplifier types and dispersion configuration and compensation
modes

– Channel allocation for mixed transmission signals

– Configuration of basic NE data such as NE IP and NE ID and station fiber
connection diagram
– Comparison between the planned designs and the actual designs on the
live network
● Prepare the following commissioning meters:
– Optical spectrum analyzer
– Optical power meter
– Other types of test meters as listed in Table 8-63.
Table 8-63 Analyzers
Name Appearance
JDSU ONT-503/ONT-603
EXFO FTB-500
● NMS:
– iManager U2000
8.5.4 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems with

Coherent System
This section lists some frequently asked questions on coherent system
commissioning.The requirements and commissioning process for the incident
optical power of a WDM system whose single–wavelength rate is greater than 100
Gbit/s are the same as those of a 100 Gbit/s WDM system. This topic uses a 100
Gbit/s WDM system as an example.
Q1: What are the principles for commissioning a network carrying both
coherent and non-coherent wavelengths?

● Such network can be commissioned in the same way as a non-coherent

network, without considering fiber access scenarios.
● In a scenario where 100G coherent wavelengths need to be added on a non-
coherent network for capacity expansion, the incident optical power can be
reduced to increase the OSNR margin of the 100G wavelengths and the
transmission distance without electrical regeneration. In this situation, the
optical power of single non-coherent wavelengths will be definitely reduced.
When this occurs, commission the network according to the network design.
Q2: What are the principles for commissioning the EVOA before the receive-
end OA, especially how to set the OA gain?

● The OA gain can be as small as possible. A small OA gain brings a better
OSNR value.
● The OA gain can be as small as possible under the condition that the single-
wavelength output optical power meets the requirement. Accordingly, the
EVOA attenuation can be set as small as possible (zero or even not set).
Q3: Can the OA gain be decreased to decrease the single-wavelength output

optical power and meet the incident optical power requirement?
A: No, it cannot. If the single-wavelength output optical power of the OA

decreases, the system OSNR will also decrease. If you increase the EVOA
attenuation to decrease the optical power, the system OSNR will not decrease.
Q4: Why cannot the incident optical power of coherent 100G single
wavelengths be too high?
A: 100G coherent signals have severe non-linear effects than non-coherent 10G
signals. Therefore, the incident optical power of coherent 100G single wavelengths
must be decreased.
8.5.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of a 40-Wavelength

System Whose Single Wavelengths Are Beyond 100G
This topic uses an example of a 40-wavelength system whose single wavelengths
are beyond 100G (beyond 100G system for short in the following) to describe the
remote commissioning procedure of an OTM, OLA, and ROADM sites on the NMS.

A beyond 100G system must be commissioned in a more refined mode than a
system with a lower line rate. This example is a 40-wavelength system in which
multiple spans with beyond 100G links are of various distances.
This example is a system equipped with OPM8. For the commissioning rules and
the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission System.

Networking Diagram
NEs A, B and C are WDM equipment. Optical NEs A and C are configured as OTM
stations. Optical NE B is an OLA station. 3-channel 200G services are transmitted
between Optical A and C.
Figure 8-92 Service requirement matrix in project K

Figure 8-93 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of project K.
Figure 8-93 Wavelength allocation diagram of project K
Figure 8-94shows the configuration for an OA at each station in project K.

Figure 8-94 OA configuration diagram of project K

OTM Station
This topic describes how to commission the optical power of the OTM station that
Prerequisite
which makes the OTU board emit light properly.
● The receive wavelengths of beyond 100G OTU boards have been set.

NMS

Testing Diagram

EVOA
configure the EVOA or add the fixed attenuator and then perform the optical power
Procedure
to 5 dB.

5dB.
Click Close.
Step 2 Set up the optical path by adjusting the attenuation of the EVOA on the OAU106
the minimum value.
3. Click Apply.
3. Click Apply.
Here is used as an example of the OAU106. The minimum nominal gain is 16 dB, the nominal
single-wavelength input optical power is –12 dB (40 channels), and the nominal single-
wavelength output optical power is +4 dB (40 channels). For the technical specifications of the
amplifier, see the specifications of the boards..
Step 4 Use the OPM board to scan the optical power of the OAU106 board and adjust
the attenuation of each channel on the M40V board so that the optical power of
each wavelength reaches the nominal optical power value and optical power
flatness is achieved.
The nominal input optical power (A) of each wavelength on the OAU106 board is -12 dB,
the gain (B) is +16 dB, and the nominal output optical power (C) of each wavelength is +4
dB.
Use the OPM board to scan the OAU106 board to obtain the output optical power of each
wavelength on the OAU106 board. Then adjust the attenuation of each channel on the
M40V board so that the output optical power of each wavelength is close to value C.
After adjusting the attenuation of each channel on the M40V board, use the OPM board to
scan the wavelength power. If the power difference of wavelengths is less than 3 dB, the
power flatness is satisfactory.
Step 5 Set the attenuation value of the EVOA connected to the OUT port of the OAU106
at the local station to 5 dB, so that the input optical power of the OAU106 board
at downstream station B reaches the nominal value.

To ensure that the input optical power of the OAU106 at downstream station B reaches the
nominal value, the attenuation value of the EVOA connected to the OUT port of the OAU106 at
the local station needs to be set to 5 dB. 2. Since the fiber access scenario for the transmit-end
OAU106 board is a coherent non-standard fiber access scenario, the attenuation value of the
EVOA connected to the OUT port of the OAU106 at the local station needs to be set to 3 dB.
Therefore, the attenuation value of the EVOA connected to the OUT port of the OAU106 at the
local station is set to 5 dB.
The EVOA attenuation value is calculated as 5 dB based on the following formula: Nominal
output optical power of the transmit-end OAU106 at station A (+4 dB) - Line attenuation
(+10 dB) - Insertion loss of the EVOA - Insertion loss of the transmit-end FIU (+0.5 dB) -
Insertion loss of the receive-end FIU (+0.5 dB) = Nominal input optical power of the
receive-end OAU106 at station B (-12 dB).
According toCoherent Transmission System Commissioning Principles.

power (a) is +4 dB.
The attenuation value of the EVOA on the OUT port of the transmit-end OAU106 is set to 3
dB based on the following calculation: Attenuation value of the EVOA = a - Insertion loss of
the FIU (+0.5 dB) - b = 4 - 0.5 - 0.5 = 3 dB
----End
Prerequisite

NMS

Testing Diagram

EVOA
Procedure
Step 2 On the NMS,set the gain of the OAU106 to the minimum nominal gain.
1. Select the desired OAU106 board, and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the left-hand Function Tree.
3. Click Apply.

According to and Coherent Transmission System Commissioning Principles for OSN 9800,
(a) is +4 dB.
● Because a is larger than b + 0.5, the scenario is a non-standard fiber access scenario.
(+0.5 dB) - b = 4 - 0.5 - 0.5 = 3 dB
----End

This topic describes how to commission the receive-end optical power of the OTM
station that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite
light forcibly to ensure that the OTU emits light properly.
● The receive wavelengths of beyond 100G OTU boards have been set.
● Ensure that the end face of fiber connectors on OTU boards is clean.
● The quality of the near-end 40 km optical cable has been checked using an
optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR), and the optical cable addresses
the deployment requirement.
● The line fiber quality has been tested and meets the requirement.
● Pigtails have been connected to the WDM side of Raman boards.
● The IPA configuration has been completed.

NMS

Testing Diagram
Figure 8-97 Fiber connections of OTM station D

EVOA
Procedure
1. Set up the optical path by adjusting the attenuation of the EVOA on the
OAU106 board to the minimum value.
a. Select the desired OAU106 board, and choose Configuration > WDM

b. On the Basic Attributes tab, set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to

the minimum value.
c. Click Apply.
2. On the NMS,set the gain of the OAU106 to the minimum nominal gain.
a. Select the desired OAU106 board, and choose Configuration > WDM
b. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set to 16.0dB.
c. Click Apply.
Here is used as an example of the OAU106. The minimum nominal gain is 16 dB, the
nominal single-wavelength input optical power is –12 dB (40 channels), and the nominal
single-wavelength output optical power is +4 dB (40 channels). For the technical
specifications of the amplifier, see the specifications of the boards..
to -5 dBm

This topic describes how to commission the optical power equalization that is in
Prerequisites

NMS

Procedure

performance.
----End
8.5.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of an 80-Wavelength

System Whose Single Wavelengths Are Beyond 100G
This topic uses an example of an 80-wavelength system whose single wavelengths
are beyond 100G (beyond 100G system for short in the following) to describe the
remote commissioning procedure of an OTM, OLA, and ROADM sites on the NMS.

A beyond 100G system must be commissioned in a more refined mode than a
system with a lower line rate. This example is a 80-wavelength system in which
multiple spans with beyond 100G links are of various distances.
This example is a system equipped with OPM8. For the commissioning rules and
the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission System.
Networking Diagram
NEs A, B and C are WDM equipment. Optical NEs A and C are configured as OTM
stations. Optical NE B is an OLA station. 3-channel 200G services are transmitted
between Optical A and C.
Figure 8-98 Service requirement matrix in project N


Figure 8-99 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of project N.
Figure 8-99 Wavelength allocation diagram of project N
Figure 8-100shows the configuration for an OA at each station in project N.
Figure 8-100 OA configuration diagram of project N

ROADM Station
This topic describes how to commission the optical power of the add wavelengths
and links at the ROADM station.

Prerequisite
● The receive wavelengths of OTU boards have been set.

NMS
Testing Diagram
Figure 8-101 Fiber connections of ROADM station A

EVOA

Procedure
1. Preset the attenuation of each pass-through wavelength on the WSMDx
board to 5.0 dB.
wavelength input optical power (B) of the transmit-end OA (OBU104) = Nominal single-
wavelength output optical power (A) of the receive-end OTU board - Inherent insertion
loss (C) of the TM20 board - Inherent insertion loss (D) of the WSM9 board - Single-
2. If an EVOA is attached to the IN port of the OBU104 board, set the EVOA
attenuation to the minimum value to make the optical path available.
3. Use the OPM board to scan the optical power of the OBU104 board and fine
tune the attenuation for each add channel on the WSMDx board, so that the
output optical power of each wavelength is close to the nominal value.
4. Use the OPM board to scan the optical power of the OAU106 board and fine
tune the attenuation for each pass-through channel on the WSMDx board, so
that power flatness of add/pass-through wavelengths is achieved.
Prerequisite

NMS

Testing Diagram

EVOA
Procedure
Step 2 On the NMS,set the gain of the OAU106 to the minimum nominal gain.
1. Select the desired OAU106 board, and choose Configuration > WDM
3. Click Apply.

According to and Coherent Transmission System Commissioning Principles for OSN 9800,
(a) is +4 dB.
● Because a is larger than b + 0.5, the scenario is a non-standard fiber access scenario.
(+0.5 dB) - b = 4 - 0.5 - 0.5 = 3 dB
----End
8.5.6.4 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Drop Wavelengths and

Links at the ROADM Station
that is in the west-to-east signal flow
Prerequisite
● The receive wavelengths of OTU boards have been set.

NMS

Testing Diagram

EVOA
The preset values for the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-
wavelength input optical power of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of
the boards, see the specifications of the boards.

Procedure
1. On the NMS, adjust the EVOA attenuation for the OAU101 board to the
minimum value and adjust the gain of the board to 27.5 dB, so that the input
optical power of the board reaches -23.5 dB.
a. Determine whether the gain needs to be adjusted. Generally an OA board
has the best optical performance when the gain is at the minimum. If the
minimum gain cannot compensate for the line loss, the gain needs to be
increased.
i. The nominal output optical power (a) of the upstream OA board is
+4 dB.
ii. Attenuation (b) between OA boards = EVOA attenuation at the
transmit end + Fiber attenuation + Attenuation of two FIU boards =
2.5 + 24 + 1 = 27.5 dB
iii. Actual incident optical power (c) of the OAU101 board = a - b = 4 -
27.5 = -23.5 dB
iv. When the gain range of the OAU101 board ranges is 20-31 dB, the
range of the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is from
-16 dB to -27 dB. Value c (-23.5 dB) ranges between -16 dB and -27
dB. Therefore, the minimum gain cannot be used and the board gain
needs to be adjusted.
b. Set the board gain.
i. Gain of the OAU101 board = Nominal output optical power for the
site - Nominal output optical power of the upstream OA board +
Attenuation between OA boards = 4 - 4 + 27.5 = 27.5 dB
2. Preset the attenuation to 3.0 dB for each pass-through wavelength on the
WSD9 board.
wavelength input optical power (B) of the transmit-end OA (EDFA on the TD20 board) =
Nominal single-wavelength output optical power (A) of the receive-end OA (OAU101) -
Inherent insertion loss (C) of the WSM9 board - Inherent insertion loss (D) of the WSMDx
board - Single-wavelength attenuation for the WSD9 board
3. Set the attenuation of the VOA on the TD20 board to the minimum value to
make the optical path available.
4. Fine tune the attenuation of each channel on the WSD9 board so that the
input optical power of the EDFA on the TD20 board reaches the nominal
value.
to -5 dBm.
8.6 Checking Optical Power Commissioning Results

This topic describes how to check optical power commissioning results to ensure
stable and reliable network operation.
Check the optical power commissioning results one by one according to Table
8-64.

Table 8-64 Optical power commissioning checklist

N Check Item Related Operation
o.
1 Check whether the input and output optical ● When the input optical
power of each line board satisfy power cannot satisfy
requirements. requirements, check the
● For the requirements of the input optical attenuation of the
power, see Requirements for Line attenuator before the
Boards. input port of each OTU
board and check fiber
● For the requirements of the output optical connections or fiber
power, see Line Boards Specification on connector cleanness on
the WDM Side. the OCh trail.
Check whether the input and output optical ● When the output optical
power of each tributary board satisfy power cannot satisfy
requirements. requirements, replace
● For the requirements of the input optical the board or optical
power, see Requirements for Line module.
Boards.
● For the requirements of the output optical
power, see Tributary Boards Specification
on the Client Side.
2 Check whether the gain setting and input If the gain and input
optical power of each OA board satisfy optical power of the OA
requirements. To be specific, check whether: board can still be
● The gain of the OA board is equal to or optimized, optimize them
close to the minimum nominal gain. by referring to 8.2.3.2
Commissioning Optical
● The input optical power of the OA board Power of OAU.
is equal to or close to the nominal input
optical power.
3 Check whether the single-wavelength optical If the single-wavelength

power flatness is within the range specified optical power flatness is
by the following expression: nominal single- not within the permitted
wavelength optical power ± 3 dB. range, adjust the single-
wavelength optical power
by referring to 8.2.4.14
Commissioning the
Optical Power at OTM
Station A and OLA
Station B for Equalization
and 8.2.4.15
Commissioning Optical
Power of ROADM Station
C and OLA Station D for
Equalization.

N Check Item Related Operation

o.
4 ● No BEFFEC_EXC alarm exists. -

● The FEC_AFT_COR_ER of the link is 0.
● The FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT of the link
is 0.

Commissioning Guide (U2000) 9 Commissioning OLSP 1:1 Optical Line Protection
9 Commissioning OLSP 1:1 Optical Line

Protection
This topic describes how to commission OLSP 1:1 optical line protection in
different scenarios.
9.1 Commissioning Scenario 1: No OA Board Is Available on the Working and

Protection Trails
This topic describes how to commission OLSP 1:1 optical line protection when no
OA board is available on the working and protection trails.
9.2 Commissioning Scenario 2: OA Boards Are Available on the Working and
Protection Trails
This topic describes how to commission OLSP 1:1 optical line protection when OA
boards are available on the working and protection trails.
9.1 Commissioning Scenario 1: No OA Board Is

Available on the Working and Protection Trails
This topic describes how to commission OLSP 1:1 optical line protection when no
OA board is available on the working and protection trails.
Prerequisite
You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.
The fiber connections must be correct.
ECC communication has been established.
Optical supervisory channels (OSCs) have been commissioned.

NMS

Procedure
Figure 9-1 Commissioning procedure for OLSP 1:1 optical line protection
Fixed optical attenuator

EVOA
(Optional) Setting Incident Optical You can configure the

Related Operation Power incident optical power

9.2 Commissioning Scenario 2: OA Boards Are Available

on the Working and Protection Trails
This topic describes how to commission OLSP 1:1 optical line protection when OA
boards are available on the working and protection trails.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.
The fiber connections must be correct.
ECC communication has been established.
Optical supervisory channels (OSCs) have been commissioned.

NMS

Procedure
Figure 9-2 OLSP 1:1 protection commissioning procedure
Fixed optical attenuator

EVOA
(Optional) Setting Incident Optical You can configure the

Related Operation Power incident optical power

OSN 9800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform 10 Commissioning a Flexible ROADM Transmission
Commissioning Guide (U2000) System
10 Commissioning a Flexible ROADM

Transmission System
This topic introduces how to commission a flexible ROADM transmission system.
10.1 Optical Power Adjustment in the Wavelength Add Direction for a Flexible
ROADM Transmission System
This topic introduces optical power adjustment in the wavelength add direction for
a flexible ROADM transmission system.
10.2 Optical Power Adjustment in the Pass-Through Direction for a Flexible
This topic introduces optical power adjustment in the pass-through direction for a
flexible ROADM transmission system.
10.3 Optical Power Adjustment in the Wavelength Drop Direction for a Flexible
This topic introduces optical power adjustment in the wavelength drop direction
for a flexible ROADM transmission system.
10.1 Optical Power Adjustment in the Wavelength Add

Direction for a Flexible ROADM Transmission System
This topic introduces optical power adjustment in the wavelength add direction for
a flexible ROADM transmission system.
Prerequisites
Flexible ROADM optical cross-connections have been configured using the NMS.
Optical fibers have been connected and network has been configured.
OPM8 boards have been configured.

Networking Diagram and Commissioning Sequence (A->B->C->D)
Figure 10-1 Networking diagram and commissioning sequence
Legend Information
How to Use the Calculator

For a traditional WDM system, before a multiplexed wavelength is received at the
OA board, you need to adjust the EVOA at the IN port on the OA board, so that
the output power reaches the nominal multiplexed-wavelength optical power. You
can obtain the nominal value by querying the OA specifications. In a flexible
ROADM system, where wavelengths with various channel spacings are in the same
fiber, the nominal value of the OA board cannot be used as the output optical
power of the OA board. Use a calculator to calculate the output optical power of
the OA board. The following example introduces how to use the Calculator, as
shown in Figure 10-3.
For example, assume that the OA board is OBU103, calculate the output optical
power of the OUT port on the OA board at point B in Figure 10-1.

Figure 10-3 How to use the calculator
● Channel spacing, number of subcarriers, and number of system wavelengths: The calculator
provides the mappings between the channel spacing, number of subcarriers, and number of
system wavelengths. For example, a 50 GHz channel spacing corresponds to one subcarrier
and 80 system wavelengths.
● Single-wavelength nominal output optical power of OA: You can query the value from the
board specifications.
● Number of actually commissioned wavelengths: You can obtain the number from the
planning data. For example, as shown in Figure 10-1, from the networking diagram, four
wavelengths with 37.5 GHz spacing and two wavelengths with 75 GHz spacing are actually
commissioned.
● Total optical power by channel spacing and total optical power of channels: The calculator
automatically calculates the total optical power of channels by channel spacing and the total
optical power of all channels based on preset parameters.
1. In System Parameter Setting of the calculator, select the system type and
OA type.
2. Enter the numbers of various wavelength types in the Numbers of Actually
Commissioned Wavelengths fields. Enter 4 for wavelengths with a 37.5 GHz
spacing and 2 for wavelengths with a 75 GHz spacing.
3. In the Total Optical Power of Channels field of the calculator, the output
optical power value at the OUT port on the OBU103 board should be
adjusted to 8.78 dBm. The value is obtained automatically.
Commissioning Procedure 1: Equalizing Input Optical Power of the OA Board

(at Adjustment Points A and B)
1. Create single-site optical cross-connections from the transmit-end OTU board
to the FIU board.
2. Assume that the output optical power of the OTU board is -1 dB. Because the
nominal input optical power of the OA board at point B is close to the output
optical power at the DM port on the DWSS20 board, the EVOA before the IN
port of the OA board does not need adjustment. Set the EVOA value of the
OA board to 0 dB and use the TM20/DWSS20 board at point A to control the
single-wavelength attenuation. For example, set the attenuation value to 2
dB. Calculation formula: Attenuation of the TM20/DWSS20 board = Output
optical power of the DM port on the DWSS20 board - Nominal single-
wavelength input optical power of the OA board

Commissioning Procedure 2: Equalizing Input Optical Power of the OA Board

(at Adjustment Point C)
1. Because the nominal input optical power of the OA board at point C has a
difference of about 15 dB with the output optical power of the WSMD9
board, you are advised to set the EVOA value of the IN port on the OA board
at point C as shown in Figure 10-1 and set the EVOA values of all channels of
the WSMD9 board to 10 dB, ensuring the margin of each channel.
Commissioning Procedure 3: Adjusting Incident Optical Power (at

Adjustment Point D)
1. As shown in Figure 10-1, adjust the EVOA value at adjustment point D to
ensure that the actual incident optical power value is lower than or equal to
Incident Optical Power N.
● Only in a non-standard incident optical fiber scenario, incident optical power needs to
be commissioned.
● In a scenario where wavelengths with multiple channel spacings are mixed, as shown in
the preceding figure, select the Incident Optical Power N value of the wavelength
with the maximum Power Difference P value (Power difference = Single-wavelength
output nominal optical power of the OA – Incident optical power counter) as the
reference value for adjustment.
10.2 Optical Power Adjustment in the Pass-Through

Direction for a Flexible ROADM Transmission System
This topic introduces optical power adjustment in the pass-through direction for a
flexible ROADM transmission system.
Prerequisites

Networking Diagram and Commissioning Sequence (A->B->C)
Commissioning Procedure 1: Setting Total Optical Power of All Channels (at

Adjustment Point A)
1. As shown in Figure 10-4, at adjustment point A, adjust the EVOA attenuation
for the IN port on the OA board, so that the output optical power of the OA
board can reach the total optical power of the OUT port on the OA board.
2. Calculation formula at adjustment point A: Output optical power at the RC
port on the FIU board – EVOA attenuation at the IN port on the OA board (at
adjustment point A) + Gain of the OA board = Total optical power of the OA
board (calculated using the Calculator with reference to 10.1 Optical Power
Adjustment in the Wavelength Add Direction for a Flexible ROADM
Transmission System).
Commissioning Procedure 2: Equalizing Optical Power (at Adjustment Point

B)
1. At adjustment point B, adjust the VOA attenuation of each channel at pass-
through ports on the WSMD4 board to equalize optical power. Commissioning
objective: Single-wavelength optical power with the same channel spacing =
Nominal single-wavelength output optical power of the OA board ± 3.0 dB

Adjustment Point C)
● As shown in Figure 10-4, at adjustment point C, adjust the EVOA attenuation
for the IN port on the OA board, so that the output optical power of the OA
board can reach the total optical power of the OUT port on the OA board.
● Calculation formula at adjustment point C: Output optical power at the OUT
port on the WSMD4 board – EVOA attenuation at the IN port on the OA
board (at adjustment point C) + Gain of the OA board = Total optical power
of the OA board (calculated using the Calculator with reference to 10.1
Optical Power Adjustment in the Wavelength Add Direction for a Flexible
ROADM Transmission System).

10.3 Optical Power Adjustment in the Wavelength

Drop Direction for a Flexible ROADM Transmission
System
This topic introduces optical power adjustment in the wavelength drop direction
for a flexible ROADM transmission system.
Prerequisites
Networking Diagram and Commissioning Sequence (A->B->C)


Adjustment Points A and B)
1. As shown in Figure 10-5, adjust the EVOA attenuation of the OA board at
adjustment point A, so that the output power of the OA board can reach the
total optical power of the OUT port on the OA board. Calculation formula at
adjustment point A: Output optical power at the RC port on the FIU board –
EVOA attenuation at the IN port on the OA board (at adjustment point A) +
Gain of the OA board = Total optical power of the OUT port on the OA board
(calculated using the Calculator with reference to 10.1 Optical Power
Adjustment in the Wavelength Add Direction for a Flexible ROADM
Transmission System).
2. As shown in Figure 10-5, adjust EVOA attenuation of each channel on the
WSMD9 board at adjustment point A to equalize optical power.
Commissioning objective: Single-wavelength optical power with the same
channel spacing = Nominal single-wavelength output optical power of the OA
board ± 3.0 dB
3. As shown in Figure 10-5, adjust the EVOA attenuation of the OA board at
adjustment point B, so that the output power of the OA board can reach the
total optical power of the OUT port on the OA board. Calculation formula at
adjustment point B: Output optical power at the DM port on the WSMD9
board – EVOA attenuation at the IN port on the OA board (at adjustment
point B) + Gain of the OA board = Total optical power of the OUT port on the
OA board (calculated using the Calculator with reference to 10.1 Optical
Power Adjustment in the Wavelength Add Direction for a Flexible
ROADM Transmission System).
Commissioning Procedure 2: Adjusting Optical Power of Receive-End OTU

Board in Wavelength Drop Direction (at Adjustment Point C)
1. Adjust the VOA attenuation of each channel at drop ports on the DWSS20
board to equalize optical power. Commissioning objective: Single-wavelength
optical power with the same channel spacing = Nominal single-wavelength
output optical power of the OA board ± 3.0 dB
2. Adjust the built-in EVOA on the DWSS20 board until the input optical power
of the EDFA on the TD20 board reaches the nominal value, –16 dBm (40-
wavelength) or –19 dBm (80-wavelength).
3. Adjust the fixed optical attenuator equipped before the OTU board, so that
the input optical power of the OTU board is within the range of –12 dBm to –
5 dBm.

Commissioning Guide (U2000) 11 Commissioning the Network
11 Commissioning the Network
Commission the optical power for an entire network after the optical power for
the equipment in the network is commissioned. This chapter describes how to
commission the optical power for a network through a case study.
Network commissioning serves to:
● Connect all the NEs in the network in line with the engineering design plan.
● Test the services on the entire network to verify the service configuration.
● Test the required functions of the network, for example, orderwire and
protection switching.
● Test the quality of long-term communication of the network by monitoring
alarms and performance events.
11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms
Viewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an
exception on the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network.
11.2 Testing Protection Switching
This section describes how to test the protection switch function.
11.3 Testing System Features
The system features includes IPA.
11.4 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks
This section describes how to test the clock synchronization function at the
physical layer.
11.5 Testing IEEE 1588v2
This section describes the procedure for testing IEEE 1588v2 features and the
testing items.
11.6 Testing ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2
This section describes the procedure for testing ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 features
and the testing items.
11.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels
When the network transmits the Ethernet service, the availability of the Ethernet
service channels must be tested.
11.8 Testing Packet Service Channels

When a network transmits packet services, the availability of packet service

channels must be tested.
11.9 Testing Packet Ethernet Services
After configuring Ethernet services on a PSN network, you need to test Ethernet
services to check whether the configuration is correct.
11.10 Testing Orderwire
11.11 Testing CES Services
After configuring CES services, you need to test connectivity of end-to-end CES
services to ensure that they work properly.
11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing

Abnormal Alarms
Viewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an
exception on the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network.
Prerequisites
The NMS computer must communicate with the NE properly.
Tools, Meters, and Materials

NMS or Web LCT. When you need to view alarms on all NEs on the network, use
the NMS.
Querying Network-Wide Alarms on the NMS

1. Click the current critical alarm indicator (red) in the upper right corner
of the NMS to browse the current network-wide critical alarms.
The figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current critical
alarms. When the indicator is surrounded by a square frame , it indicates

that there are critical alarms to be acknowledged.

Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. In the case of on-site maintenance,
handle Critical and Major alarms before handling other abnormal alarms.
Analyze and handle alarms one by one according to the network situations. According to
network conditions, certain alarms are reported inevitably, whereas certain alarms cannot
be reported. For example, in general no service is accessed on the WDM side during
deployment commissioning. In this case, relevant alarms are reported inevitably. These
alarms, however, are cleared automatically after real services are accessed on the client
side.
In the commissioning and configuration phases of deployment, you need to analyze every
reported alarm. In general, focus on the following alarms:
● Optical power low or high alarm
● Temperature threshold-crossing alarm
● Abnormal communication alarm
● Bit error-related alarm
● Abnormal service alarm
2. Click the current major alarm indicator (orange) in the upper right
corner of the NMS to browse the current network-wide major alarms.
The figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current major

that there are major alarms to be acknowledged.
3. Click the current minor alarm indicator (yellow) in the upper right
corner of the NMS to browse the current network-wide minor alarms.
The figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current minor

that there are minor alarms to be acknowledged.
Querying the Current Alarms of an NE on the Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Alarm > Browse
Alarms from the Function Tree.
2. In the displayed window, click the Browse Current Alarms tab.
3. Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. For details, see the
description of the methods for analyzing and handling alarms by using the
NMS.
11.2 Testing Protection Switching

This section describes how to test the protection switch function.
For the working principle for each protection mode and the operating process, see
the Feature Description.

11.2.1 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the SCC/SCU

Boards
1+1 protection is configured to protect the SCC/SCU boards. This topic describes
how to test the 1+1 protection switching of the SCC/SCU boards, thus ensuring
that the protection switching is normal.
Prerequisites
The equipment must be configured with two SCC/SCU boards. The NE
commissioning data must be configured.

NMS
Procedure
Step 1 Double click the ONE icon on the Physical Map, and the NE Panel tab is displayed.
Step 2 Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer.
Step 3 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Configuration. Click Query. In the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close. The queried Active Board should
be the same as the Working Board.
Step 4 Select SCC Board 1+1 Protection, and then click Working/Protection Switching.
In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result
dialog box that is displayed, click Close.
Step 5 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same
as the Protection Board.
Step 6 Select SCC Board 1+1 Protection, and then click Restore Working/Protection. In
the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog
box that is displayed, click Close.
The 1+1 SCC board protection switching is non-revertive. When Protection Board is Current
Working Board, you need to remove the protection board, or click Restore Working/
Protection on theNMS to switch services back to the working board.
as the Working Board.
Step 8 After active/standby switching is completed, NE data must be manually uploaded.
----End
11.2.2 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the CTU Boards

1+1 protection is configured to protect the CTU boards. This topic describes how
to test the 1+1 protection switching of the CTU boards, thus ensuring that the
protection switching is normal.

Prerequisites
The equipment must be configured with two CTU boards. The NE commissioning
data must be configured.

NMS
Procedure
● On the NE panel, the CTU board marked with S is the Protection Board, and the other CTU
board is the working board. Active Board is the CTU board that is actually working.
The 1+1 CTU board protection switching is non-revertive. When Protection Board is Current
----End
11.2.3 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the CXP Boards

1+1 protection is configured to protect the CXP boards. This topic describes how to
test the 1+1 protection switching of the CXP boards, thus ensuring that the
protection switching is normal.
Prerequisites
The equipment must be configured with two CXP boards. The NE commissioning


NMS
Procedure
On the NE panel, the CXP board marked with S is the Protection Board, and the other CXP
board is the working board. Active Board is the CXP board that is actually working.
The 1+1 CXP board protection switching is non-revertive. When Protection Board is Current
----End
11.2.4 Testing M:N Protection Switching of the XCS/UXCS/

SXCL board
M:N protection is configured by using the cross-connect boards. This section
describes how to test the M:N protection switching of the XCS/UXCS/SXCL board,
thus ensuring that the protection switching is normal.
Prerequisites
All the cross-connect boards must be installed.
The NE commissioning data must be configured.


NMS
Procedure
Step 1 Double click the ONE icon on the Physical Map and the NE Panel tab is displayed.
Step 3 Choose Configuration > M:N Protection. Click Query > Query Protection Group
Status.
The Status of all the cross-connect boards are Normal. The Active Status of the working
boards is Actived, and the Active Status of the protection boards is Unactived.
Step 4 In the Slot Mapping Relationship, select the desired protection and working
boards and choose Function > Forced Switching. In the Confirm dialog box that
is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click
Close.
Step 5 Repeat Step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Status of the desired
protection board is Actived, and the Active Status of the desired working board is
Unactived.
Step 6 Select the desired cross-connect boards and choose Function > Clear Switching.
The M:N protection switching on the cross-connect boards is revertive.

Forced Switching action only support for working board.
Step 7 Repeat Step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Status of the desired
protection and working boards can be restored.
----End
11.2.5 Testing Load Sharing Protection of UCXCS/CCXCS

Load sharing protection of cross-connect boards prevents adverse impact on
services.
Prerequisite
All the cross-connect boards must be installed.

U2000
Legend Information

Procedure
Step 1 In Main Topology, right-click NE and choose NE Explorer. The NE Explorer is
displayed.
Step 2 Choose Configuration > Load Sharing Management > Board Load Sharing
Management in the Function Tree, and then click Query to query the value of
Board Command Status.
Step 3 Select any two cross-connect boards in a subrack for forced isolation.
A maximum of two boards can be forcibly isolated or manually isolated in a subrack.

Step 4 Query Board Work Status of the isolated cross-connect board.
Step 5 Select the isolated cross-connect board, change Force-Isolate to Auto, and click
Apply.

● The board working status can be Active, Isolate, or WTR.

● When Board Work Status is WTR, you can click Status Clearance to change Board
Work Status to Active.
Step 6 Repeat 2. The status of the cross-connect board is restored to Active.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
Subrack Restoration Mode Management:
1. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > Load Sharing Management >
Subrack Restoration Mode Management and change the Restoration
Mode and WTR Time(s) settings of the subrack.
: WTR Time(s) can be modified as required only when the Restoration Mode is
set to Restorable.

11.2.6 1+1Testing Optical Line 1+1 Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two OTM stations as an example to
describe the test procedure for the optical line protection switching.
Prerequisites
The optical line protection must be configured.
The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations
must be correctly established.
The equipment must be running normally.

U2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fiber adapter, optical attenuator
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the optical line protection switching is shown in Figure
11-2.
Figure 11-2 Testing the optical line protection switching
: Fixed optical attenuator
Procedure
● Connecting test instruments
a. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal
analyzer to the RX input optical port and to the TX output optical port on
the client side of the OTU respectively with a fixed optical attenuator in
between.
b. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical
port on the client side of the OTU with a fixed optical attenuator in
between to achieve the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure
11-2.

● Querying the normal channel status of station A
The related parameters of the OLP are configured on the NMS. For the
configuration procedures.
a. Log in to the NMS. Double-click the ONE icon of station A in the Main
Topology. The Running Status of the ONE is displayed.
b. Right-click the NE icon where the OLP board is located and choose NE
Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog box.
c. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > Port
Protection from the Function Tree.
d. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is
successful. Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the protection
group list in the right-hand pane.
e. Check the channel status of the optical line protection. If the NE name is
A, the Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–1(RI1/TO1)
and the Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2(RI2/
TO2). The Working Channel Status and the Protection Channel Status
are Normal.
● Testing the protection switching for the equipment
a. The optical line protection switching test can be performed using the
following two methods:
▪ Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber of the RI1 port of the
OLP board at Station A to perform the switching.
▪ Method 2: Forced switching. On the NMS, log in to station A. Right-

click the desired protection group, and choose Force to Protection
Channel to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog
box. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
b. Query the channel states of the optical line protection after the switching
at station A.
▪ Choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree.

Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is
▪ In the fiber removing mode, Working Channel is A–

Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel
is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel
Status is SF, and Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching
Status is SF Switched.
▪ In the forced switching mode, Working Channel is A–

Status and the Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching
Status is Force to Protection Channel.
c. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the OLP board and choose
Browse Current Alarms. The OLP_PS alarm must be reported.
d. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be
available.

e. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in step 1, the
following two modes can be used respectively:
▪ Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.
▪ Forced switching mode: Right-click the desired protection group in

the Protection Group, and choose Clear. Click Close in the operation
result dialog box.
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired

protection group and then choose Manual to Working Channel from the
shortcut menu. Then, right-click the protection group again, and choose Clear
from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
f. After the time set in WTR Time(mm:ss) field elapses, click Query. A
prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close. Switching Status of the protection group should be Idle.
----End
11.2.7 Testing Optical Line 1:1 Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two OTM stations as an example to
describe the test procedure for the optical line 1:1 protection switching.
Prerequisites
Creating Optical Line 1:1 Protection must be finished.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the optical line protection switching is shown in Figure
11-3.

Figure 11-3 Testing the optical line protection switching
Procedure
analyzer to the RX input optical port and to the TX output optical port on
the client side of the OTU respectively with a fixed optical attenuator in
between.
11-3.
The related parameters of the OLP are configured on the NMS. For the
configuration procedures.
successful. Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the protection
group list in the right-hand pane.
e. Check the channel status of the optical line protection. If the NE name is
A, the Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLSP–1(RI1/
TO1) and the Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLSP–
2(RI2/TO2). The Working Channel Status and the Protection Channel
Status are Normal.

● Testing the protection switching for the equipment

a. The optical line protection switching test can be performed using the
▪ Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber of the RI1 port of the
OLP board at Station A to perform the switching.
▪ Method 2: Forced switching. On the NMS, log in to station A. Right-

click the desired protection group, and choose Force to Protection
Channel to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog
box. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
b. Query the channel states of the optical line protection after the switching
at station A.


Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLSP–1(RI1/TO1), and Protection
Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLSP–2(RI2/TO2). Working
Channel Status is SF, and Protection Channel Status is Normal.
Switching Status is SF Switched.

Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLSP–1(RI1/TO1), and Protection
Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLSP–2(RI2/TO2). Working
Channel Status and the Protection Channel Status is Normal.
Switching Status is Force to Protection Channel.
c. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the OLP board and choose
Browse Current Alarms. The OLP_PS alarm must be reported.
available.
e. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in step 1, the
following two modes can be used respectively:

the Protection Group, and choose Clear. Click Close in the operation
result dialog box.

protection group and then choose Manual to Working Channel from the
shortcut menu. Then, right-click the protection group again, and choose Clear
from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
f. After the time set in WTR Time(mm:ss) field elapses, click Query. A
Close. Switching Status of the protection group should be Idle.
----End

11.2.8 Testing Intra-Board 1+1 Protection Switching

This section uses a network formed by two OTM stations as an example to
describe the test procedure for the intra-board 1+1 protection switching that is
achieved by using the OLP.
Prerequisites
The intra-board 1+1 protection must be configured.
must be established correctly.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the intra-board 1+1 protection switching is shown in
Figure 11-4.
Figure 11-4 Testing the intra-board 1+1 protection switching
Procedure
● Connecting test instruments.
a. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports for the signal
analyzer to the RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the
client side of the OTU respectively with a fixed optical attenuator in
between.
11-4.

c. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is
generated.
● Querying the normal channel status of station A.
a. Log in to the NMS. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The
Running Status of the ONE is displayed.
b. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
window.
c. Select the NE from the function tree and choose Configuration > Port
Protection.
d. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating the operation is successful.
Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane. The
switching status of intra-board protection and channel status should be
Normal.
e. Check the channel status of the intra-board 1+1 protection. If the NE
name is A, the Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–
1(RI1/TO1) and the Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–
12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). The Working Channel Status and the Protection
Channel Status are Normal.
● Testing the protection switching of the equipment.
a. The switching test of the intra-board protection can be performed using
the following two methods.
▪ Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber for the RI1 port of the
OLP board at Station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure
11-4.
▪ Method 2: Forced switching. In the protection group window for

station A, right-click the desired protection group, and choose Force
to Protection Channel to perform the switching. Click OK in the
displayed dialog box. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
NOTICE
In method 1, you must disconnect the fiber in the direction that the
signals are sent to the signal analyzer. Otherwise, protection switching
may be performed twice or no protection switching is performed.
b. Query the channel states of the intra-board 1+1 protection at station A.


Status is SF, and Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching
Status is SF Switched.

Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–1 (RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel

is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2 (RI2/TO2). Working Channel

Status and the Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching
Status is Force to Protection Channel.
c. In the NE panel for the station A, right-click the OLP board, and choose
Browse Current Alarms. The INTRA_OTU_PS alarm must be reported.
available with zero bit error generated.
e. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1,
use the following two methods:

the Protection Group, and select Clear. Click Close in the operation
result dialog box.

protection group, and choose Manual to Working Channel from the shortcut
menu. Then, right-click the same protection group again, and choose Clear from
the shortcut menu. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
f. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating the operation is successful.
Click Close. Switching Status of the protection group should be Idle.
----End
11.2.9 Verifying Client 1+1 Protection Switching

This topic uses a network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe
the procedure for verifying the client 1+1 protection switching that is achieved by
using OLP.
Prerequisites
Client 1+1 protection has been configured.
have been correctly established.
The equipment is running normally.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the client 1+1 protection switching is shown in Figure
11-5.

Figure 11-5 Testing the client 1+1 protection switching
Procedure
analyzer to the TI and RO ports on the client side of the OLP board with
a fixed optical attenuator in between.
b. At station B, connect the RO port to the TI port on the client side of the
OLP board with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the
loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 11-5.
c. Test the optical channel using the signal analyzer and ensure that no bit
error is generated.
● Querying the normal channel status of station A.
successful. Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand
pane.
e. Check the channel status of the client 1+1 protection. Working Channel
is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel
Status and Protection Channel Status are Normal.
● Testing the protection switching of the equipment by fiber removing.
a. Remove the fiber from the IN optical port for the working OTU1 board at
station A to trigger the switching, as shown in Figure 11-5.

NOTICE
In Method 1, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs signals to the
OTU1 board at station A. Otherwise, protection switching may be
performed twice or no protection switching is performed.
b. Query the channel status of the client 1+1 protection at station A.

successful. Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the right-
hand pane.
▪ In the fiber removal mode, Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–

105–12OLP–1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is A–
Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status
is SF and Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching Status is
SF Switched.
c. In the NE panel of station A, right-click the OLP board and choose
Browse Current Alarms. The CLIENT_PORT_PS alarm must be reported.
available, no bit error is generated.
e. To restore the test environment for the switching modes in step 1,
reconnect the fiber.

f. After the time set in WTR Time (mm:ss) field elapses, click Query. A
Close. Switching Status for the protection group should be Idle.
● Testing the protection switching of the equipment by forced switching.
a. The switching test for the client 1+1 protection can be performed using
the following methods: On the U2000, log in to the protection group of
station A. Right-click the desired protection group, and choose Force to
Protection Channel to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed
dialog box. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
b. Query the channel status of the client 1+1 protection at station A.

successful. Click Close. If the NE name is A.

Status and Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching Status
is Force to Protection Channel.
c. In the NE panel of station A, right-click the OLP board and choose
Browse Current Alarms. The CLIENT_PORT_PS alarm must be reported.


available, and no bit error is generated.
e. To restore the test environment for the switching modes in step 1, use the
following methods: right-click the desired protection group in the
Protection Group, and select Clear. Click Close in the operation result
dialog box.

f. After the time set in WTR Time (mm:ss) field elapses, click Query. A
Close. Switching Status for the protection group should be Idle.
----End
11.2.10 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two stations as an example to describe
the test procedure for the SW SNCP protection switching.
Prerequisites
The SW SNCP protection must be configured.

Set-up Diagram
● The diagram for testing the SW SNCP switching is shown in Figure 11-6.

Figure 11-6 Testing the SW SNCP protection switching
1, 2, 3, 4: OTU Board
Procedure
a. As shown in Figure 11-6, at station A, connect the output and input
optical ports of the signal analyzer to the RX input optical port and TX
output optical port on the client side of the OTU with the fixed optical
attenuator in between. At station B, connect the RX input optical port
and the TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with the
fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client
side.
b. Test the channel using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is
generated.
● Querying the normal channel status of the station A
b. Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer to display the NE
Explorer dialog box.

c. Select the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > WDM

Service Management from the Function Tree. Click SNCP Service
Control.
d. Click Query. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane.
Status of SW SNCP should be Normal State.
e. Check the channel status of the SW SNCP. Channel Status of Working
cross-connection is Normal, and Channel Status of Protection cross-
connection is Normal.
● Testing the protection switching of the equipment
a. The SW SNCP protection switching test can be performed using the
following two methods.
▪ Method 1: Fiber removing.

○ Remove the fiber of the IN optical port for the second working
OTU at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure
11-6.
▪ Method 2: Forced switching. In the SNCP Service Control window for

station A, select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In
the displayed menu, select Force to Protection to perform the
switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
NOTICE
In method 1, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs signals to the
signal analyzer at station A. Otherwise, protection switching may be
performed twice, or no protection switching is performed.
b. Query the channel status of the SW SNCP protection at station A.
▪ Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the

Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control, and click Query. A
prompt is displayed indicating the operation is successful. Click Close.
▪ In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of the working cross-

connection is SF, and Channel Status of the protection cross-
connection is Normal. Status of the protection group is SF
Switching.
▪ In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of the working cross-

connection is Normal, and Channel Status of the protection cross-
connection is also Normal. Status of the protection group is Forced
(from working to protection) switching state.
c. In the NE panel of station A, right-click the board and choose Browse
Current Alarms. The SW_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.
For details about the board that reports the SW_SNCP_PS alarm, see the Alarms and
Performance Events Reference.

e. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1,
use the following two methods:
▪ Forced switching mode: Select the working cross-connection, and

click Function. In the displayed menu, select Clear. Click OK in the
displayed dialog box.
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working
cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to
Working. Then, right-click the same working cross-connection again, and click
Function. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog
box.
f. Click Query. Status of the protection group should be Normal State.
----End
11.2.11 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two stations in which the tributary
board and the line board are jointly used as an example to describe the test
procedure for the ODUk SNCP protection switching.
Prerequisites
The ODUk SNCP protection must be configured.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the ODUk SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure
11-7.

Figure 11-7 Testing the ODUk SNCP protection switching
Procedure
analyzer to the RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the
client side of the tributary board with a fixed optical attenuator in
between.
port on the client side of the tributary board with a fixed optical
attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side.
c. Test the channel using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is
generated.
a. Log in to the NMS. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology. The
Running Status of the NE A is displayed.
b. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
window.
c. Select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management
from the Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control tab.
d. Click Query. Then, all ODUk SNCP protection groups are listed. Status of
the ODUk SNCP protection is Normal State.
e. Query the channel status of the ODUk SNCP protection. Channel Status
of the working cross-connection is Normal, and Channel Status of the
protection cross-connection is Normal.
● Testing the protection switching of the equipment by fiber removing.
a. Remove the fiber on the IN optical port of the working line board N1 at
station A to perform the switching.

NOTICE
In the fiber removing mode, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs
signals to the working line board N1 at station A. Otherwise, protection
switching may be performed twice or no protection switching is
performed.
b. Check the channel status for ODUk SNCP protection of station A

Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control, and click Query.

Switching.
c. In the NE panel of the station A, right-click the board and choose Browse
Current Alarms. The ODU_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.
e. To restore the test environment for the switching modes in step 1,
reconnect the fiber.
Working. Then, select the same working cross-connection again, and click
box.
f. After the WTR Time(mm:ss) elapses, click Query. Status of the
protection group should be Normal State.
● Testing the protection switching of the equipment by forced switching.
a. In the NE panel of the station A, choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management from the Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control.
b. Click Query.
c. In the SNCP Service Control window, select the working cross-
connection and click Function. In the displayed menu, select Force to
Protection to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog
box.
d. Check the channel status for ODUk SNCP protection of station A
▪ In the SNCP Service Control window, click Query.

a and d are forced switching mode by station. Performing the SNCP protection
forced switching by trail.

e. In the NE panel of the station A, right-click the board and choose Browse
f. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be
g. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1,
use the following methods:
▪ Select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the

displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
Working. Then, select the same working cross-connection again, and click
box.
h. After the WTR Time(mm:ss) elapses, click Query. Status of the
protection group should be Normal State.
----End
11.2.12 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network as an example to describe the test procedure for
the tributary SNCP protection switching. The ring network consists of two stations
in which the tributary board and the line board are jointly used
Prerequisites
The tributary SNCP protection must be configured.

U2000, optical fiber, fiber adapter, signal analyzer, optical attenuator
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the tributary SNCP protection switching is shown in
Figure 11-8.

Figure 11-8 Testing the tributary SNCP protection switching
: Fixed Optical Attenuator
Procedure
analyzer to the RX and TX ports on the client side of the tributary boards
with a fixed optical attenuator in between.
port on the client side of the tributary boards with a fixed optical
attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side.
c. Test the channel using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is
generated.
a. Log in to the NMS. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology. The
Running Status of the NE A is displayed.
b. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
window.
c. Select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management
from the Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control.
d. Click Query. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list.
Status of the tributary SNCP protection is Normal State.
e. Query the channel status of the tributary SNCP protection. Channel
Status of the working cross-connection is Normal, and Channel Status
of the protection cross-connection is Normal.
● Testing the protection switching of the equipment
a. The tributary SNCP protection switching test can be performed using the
▪ Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber in the TXn optical port
on the tributary boards T1 at station A to perform the switching, as
shown in Figure 11-8.

▪ Method 2: Forced switching. In the SNCP Service Control window for

station A, select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In
the displayed menu, select Force to Protection to perform the
switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
b. Check the channel status for tributary SNCP protection of station A

Function Tree, and click SNCP Service Control. Click Query. A
Close.

Switching.

c. In the NE panel of station A, right-click the board and choose Browse
e. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in step 1, use
the following two methods:
▪ Forced switching mode: Select the working cross-connection, and

click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the
displayed dialog box.
cross-connection and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to
Working. Then, right-click the same working cross-connection again, and click
box.
f. Click Query. Status of the protection group should be Normal State.
----End
11.2.13 Testing the Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection

Switching of the SXCL Boards
Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection is configured to protect the SXCL boards. This
topic describes how to test the 1+1 protection switching of the SXCL boards, thus
ensuring that the protection switching is normal.

Prerequisites
The equipment must be configured with two SXCL boards. The NE commissioning

NMS
Procedure
● On the NE panel, the SXCL board marked with S is the Protection Board, and the other
SXCL board is the working board. Active Board is the SXCL board that is actually working.
Step 4 Select Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection, and then click Working/Protection
Switching. In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.
Step 6 Select Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection, and then click Restore Working/
Protection. In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the
Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.
The Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection board protection switching is non-revertive. When
Protection Board is Current Working Board, you need to remove the protection board, or click
Restore Working/Protection on theNMS to switch services back to the working board.
----End
11.3 Testing System Features

The system features includes IPA.
11.3.1 Testing IPA

This section describes how to test the IPA function.
Prerequisites
Optical power commissioning must be complete.

The IPA must be configured.

U2000
The IPA can be rebooted by using three methods: automatic reboot, manual
reboot, start test.
This section uses the start test as an example to describe the procedure for testing
IPA.
IPA Verification Diagram

For the IPA verification diagram, see Figure 11-9.
Figure 11-9 IPA verification diagram
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the NMS. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of the ONE is displayed.
Step 2 Right-click the NE A icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
dialog box.
Step 3 Select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the Function
Tree.
Step 4 In IPA Protection in the right-hand pane, set the IPA Status to Enabled.
Step 5 Select NE B. See steps 2 through 4 to configure the IPA function.
Step 6 Remove the fiber of the output port on the OAU1.
Step 7 Log in NE A and NE B separately. In the function tree in the left-hand pane,
choose Configuration > IPA Management.

Step 8 In IPA Protection, select the desired IPA protection pair. Right-click the Status
column, and select Query State. The state Power off should display.
Step 9 Insert the fiber of the output port of the OAU1.
Step 10 In IPA Protection, click Start Test. A message indicating a successful operation is
displayed in the prompt dialog box.
Step 11 Click Close.
Step 12 In IPA Protection, select Status. Right-click Query State. Status is displayed as
IPA ended.
----End
11.3.2 Testing IPA of Raman System (RPC01/RAU1/RAU2/

SRAU/SRAPXF + Detection Board + Auxiliary Detection Board)
Prerequisites

U2000
reboot, start test.
IPA.

Figure 11-10 Diagram of applying IPA to a Raman system (Auxiliary Raman board
CRPC03/RPC03+ROP+Raman Amplifier RAU1/RPC01)

Procedure
Step 2 Right-click the NE B icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
dialog box.
Step 3 Select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the Function
Tree.
Step 4 In IPA Protection in the right-hand pane, check whether IPA Status is Enabled; if
it is Disabled, change it to Enabled.
Step 5 Select NE A. See Step 2 through Step 4 to configure the IPA function.
Step 6 In the NE Explorer, select the shutdown board on NE A. Choose Configuration >
WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Set Laser Status to Off for the site.
Step 7 Select NE A, then in the function tree in the left-hand pane, choose Configuration
> IPA Management.
Step 8 In IPA Protection, select the desired IPA pair. Right-click the Status column and
select Query State. Ensure that Status is Power off. The Result dialog box is
displayed. Click Close.
Step 9 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and laser control board at NE A.
Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Verify that Laser
Status for the boards are Off.
Step 10 Repeat Step 7 to Step 9 for NE B.
> IPA Management. In IPA Protection, click Start Test. The Warning dialog box is
displayed. Click Yes.
Step 12 A dialog box appears showing that the operation was successful. Click Close.
Step 13 Repeat Step 11 and Step 12 for NE B.
Step 14 In the NE Explorer on NE A, select the Raman board. Choose Configuration >
WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Manually turn on the pump laser on the
Raman board of NE A.
Step 15 In the NE Explorer on NE B, select the Raman board. Choose Configuration >
WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Manually turn on the pump laser on the
Raman board of NE B.
Step 16 In the NE Explorer of NE A, Click Query to review the Status. Ensure that Status is
IPA ended. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Step 17 In the NE Explorer of NE B, Click Query to review the Status. Ensure that Status is
Step 18 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and laser control board at NE A.
Status for the boards is On.

Step 19 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and laser control board at NE B.
Status for the boards is On.
----End
11.3.3 Testing IPA of Raman System (RAU1/RAU2/SRAU/

SRAPXF + Auxiliary Detection Board)
Prerequisites

U2000
Precaution
It is recommended that the local NE (NE A) selected during the verification be a
gateway NE (GNE).
If both NEs A and B selected during the verification are non-GNEs, ensure that the
function of automatically releasing laser shutdown is enabled for the non-GNEs.
To enable the function, do as follows:
3. In the row of Laser Shutdown under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to
Enabled.
4. Click Apply. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
reboot, start test.
IPA.


Figure 11-11 Diagram of applying IPA to a Raman system (RAU1 boards+14FIU

boards+OSC boards)
Procedure
Step 2 Right-click the NE B icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
dialog box.
Step 3 Select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management .
Step 4 In IPA Protection in the right-hand pane, check whether IPA Status is Enabled; if
it is Disabled, change it to Enabled.
Step 5 Select NE A. See Step 2 through Step 4 to configure the IPA function.
Step 6 In the NE Explorer, select the RAU1 board on NE B. Choose Configuration > WDM
Interface . Manually turn off the pump laser on the Raman board of NE B.
Step 7 In the NE Explorer, select the OSC board on NE A. Choose Configuration > WDM
Interface e. Manually turn off the laser on the OSC board of NE A.
> IPA Management.
Step 9 In IPA Protection, select the desired IPA pair. Right-click the Status column and
select Query State. Ensure that Status is Power off. The Result dialog box is
displayed. Click Close.
Step 10 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and OA board at NE A. Choose
Configuration > WDM Interface . Verify that Laser Status for the boards are Off.
Step 11 Repeat Step 8 to Step 10 for NE B.
Step 12 In the NE Explorer, select the OSC board on NE A. Choose Configuration > WDM
Interface . Manually turn on the laser on the OSC board of NE A.

When NE A is a non-GNE, turning off the laser on the OSC board may make the NE
unreachable. As a result, the laser on the OSC board on NE A cannot be turned on manually.
However, the function of automatically releasing laser shutdown is enabled in this scenario.
Therefore, the laser on the OSC board will be automatically turned on after the automatic
disabling time (the time can be set, for example, 5 minutes) elapses.
> IPA Management. In IPA Protection, click Start Test. The Warning dialog box is
displayed. Click Yes.
Step 14 A dialog box appears showing that the operation was successful. Click Close.
Step 15 Repeat Step 13 and Step 14 for NE B.
Step 16 In the NE Explorer of NE A, Click Query to review the Status. Ensure that Status is
Step 17 In the NE Explorer of NE B, Click Query to review the Status. Ensure that Status is
Step 18 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and OA board at NE A. Choose
Configuration > WDM Interface . Verify that Laser Status for the boards is On.
Step 19 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and OA board at NE B. Choose
Configuration > WDM Interface . Verify that Laser Status for the boards is On.
----End
11.3.4 Testing ALC

This section describes how to test the ALC function.
Prerequisites
The ALC Link must be created.

U2000, optical power meter
ALC Verification Diagram

For the ALC verification diagram, see Figure 11-12.

Figure 11-12 ALC verification diagram
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to NMS. Choose Configuration > WDM ALC Management from the Main
Topology.
Step 2 In WDM ALC Management, click the NG Complete Link tab. In the list of links,
select a link whose Status is Idle.
Step 3 On the NMS, query and record the line attenuation and node gain for stations A,
B, and C, also record the input and output optical power of OAU1, OAU2, and
OAU3.
Step 4 On the ALC link, adjust the variable optical attenuator (VOA) between stations A
and B to increase the attenuation between the two stations by 3 dB.
Step 5 Query the input and output optical power of OAU2 on the NMS. Compare the test
value with the input optical power value obtained before adjusting the VOA to
ensure that the test value is 3 dB lower. At the same time, check whether the
difference between the line attenuation value and node gain value of station B is
not less than 3 dB. Also check whether an event that indicates an ALC optical
power anomaly exists.
Step 6 When the link turns yellow, in the Link ID list, select the link and click Start
Automatic Link Adjustment to start the ALC adjustment. Also check whether the
ALC adjustment event occurs.
Step 7 After the ALC adjustment is complete, the link restores to the original color, and
an event that indicates the end of the ALC adjustment occurs.
Step 8 Query the input and output optical power for OAU2/OAU3 on the NMS. Compare
the test value with the value obtained before the adjustment is performed to
check whether they are the same. At the same time, check whether the line
attenuation value and the node gain value for station B are consistent. If that is
the case, it indicates that the ALC has been enabled.

If OAU1 is the adjustment board, use the following formula:

Adjustment range of OAU1 with DCM = Adjustment range of OAU1 without DCM - DCM
insertion loss - 1 dBm
----End
11.3.5 Testing APE

The APE function ensures the optical power flatness at the receive end, which
ensures the signal-to-noise ratio. The APE test is performed to determine if the
APE function is started.
Prerequisites
The system optical power commissioning must be completed.
The APE Link must be created.

U2000, VOA
When the flatness of the optical power for each channel at the receive end differs
significantly from that configured in deployment commissioning, the APE function
can automatically adjust the optical power of each channel at the transmit end.
This ensures that the flatness of the optical power at the receive end is closer to
that configured in deployment commissioning.
This section uses the M40V as an example to describe the APE function.
The following descriptions provide the details for commissioning the APE from
west to east. The commissioning of the APE from east to west is the same as the
commissioning from west to east.
The APE function testing configuration is shown in Figure 11-13.
Figure 11-13 APE function test configuration diagram

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to NMS. Configure the APE function on the NMS. Set the standard optical
power curve and the wavelength to be checked. Save the configuration data.
It is recommended to set the power unbalance threshold to 1.5 dB.
Step 2 Add more VOAs at any OTU WDM-side output port, and adjust the attenuation to
a minimum.
Step 3 Step up the attenuation of the VOA until the MCA detects that the optical power
of the channel has decreased by 3 dB.
● The attenuation of a channel is configurable. The attenuation of a channel must be

higher than the power unbalance threshold. It is recommended that the attenuation for
a channel be set to 3 dB.
● The ALC function may be enabled after the optical power decreases.
● After the MCA scan cycle, the APE event report dialog window is displayed indicating
that the power is unbalanced.
Step 4 On the NMS, select the desired NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Optical Power Equilibrium from the Function Tree.
Step 5 Click Query to review information about the created APE pair.
Step 6 Select the desired APE pair from the APE Pair list.
Step 7 On the NMS, click Start Regulation on the bottom to start the APE function.
After the APE adjusts the power, the difference between the system optical power
curve flatness at the receive end and the standard optical power curve flatness
should be less than the power unbalance threshold.
The APE completes adjusting the optical power within five minutes. After the adjustment,
the APE event report dialog window is displayed indicating that the adjustment is
successful.
Step 8 Remove the VOAs at the OTU WDM-side output port added in step 2.
Step 9 On the NMS, start the APE function by referring to step 7. After the APE adjusts
the power, the difference between the system optical power curve flatness at the
receive end and the standard optical power curve flatness should be less than the
power unbalance threshold.
The APE completes adjusting the power within five minutes. After the adjustment, the APE
event report dialog window is displayed indicating that the adjustment is successful.
----End
11.4 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks

This section describes how to test the clock synchronization function at the
physical layer.

Prerequisite
Fiber connections or clock cable connections between NEs must be established.
Clocks at the physical must be configured.

ANT-20 (or MP1550A, MP1552B, MP1570A, HP37718A) clock analyzer, frequency
meter, NMS
Testing Items
1. External clock source input/output and tracing test. This test checks whether
an external clock source is properly traced.
2. Synchronous clock active/standby switching test. This test checks whether the
active/standby clock protection functions properly.
3. Master/slave subrack cascading test (universal platform subrack). This test
checks whether a synchronous clock can function properly when multiple
subracks are cascaded.
Test Diagram
Figure 11-14 shows the diagram for the external clock source input/output and
tracing test.
Figure 11-14 Test Diagram
NE A is configured with clock board.
Testing Item 1: External Clock Source Input/Output and Tracing Test

Step 1 Configure NE A to trace an external clock source.

Step 2 Attach a clock analyzer to NE A and the external clock source to check whether
NE A properly traces the external clock source.
----End
Testing Item : Synchronous Clock Active/Standby Switching Test

Step 1 Perform an active/standby switching of the clock boards when an NE properly
traces a clock source. Then check whether the NE properly traces a clock source by
observing the data on the clock analyzer.
For OptiX OSN 9800 U64/U32/U16/M24/M12 subrack, perform an active/standby switching of

the CTU boards and then check whether the NE properly traces a clock source by observing the
data on the clock analyzer.
----End
Testing Item : Master/Slave Subrack Cascading Test (Universal Platform

Subrack)
Step 1 Connect the master subrack or the last slave subrack that didn't connect to the
original clock sourceto an new external clock source. Set the external clock as the
clock source for tracing.
Step 2 Attach a clock analyzer to the master subrack or the last slave subrack to check
whether the NE properly traces the external clock source.
Step 3 Disconnect the master subrack or the last slave subrack from the external clock
source. Configure the NE to trace the original external clock source on the NE.
Then check whether the NE traces this clock by observing the data on the clock
analyzer.
----End
11.5 Testing IEEE 1588v2

This section describes the procedure for testing IEEE 1588v2 features and the
testing items.
11.5.1 Testing Process

This section describes the general process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features.
Figure 11-15 shows the process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features.

Figure 11-15 Process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features
Precaution
● Before Starting Deployment:
– Examine the IEEE 1588v2 Networking Diagram for xxx Office carefully
and verify that the actual network configurations are the same as the
planned network configurations.
– Prepare required versions according to the version mapping requirements.
– Prepare and verify the Clock Configuration List for xxx Office.
– Make plans properly and obtain the necessary permits for on-site
operations in advance.
● Test Point Selection: perform the acceptance test using the TimeAcc-007 or an
IEEE 1588v2 time tester. Try to perform the test at the end of an IEEE 1588v2
link (a point farthest from a BITS device). Supply GPS signals to the
TimeAcc-007 or IEEE 1588v2 time tester. Calibrate the test instrument before
performing the test.

Procedure
1. Check configurations.
– After completing IEEE 1588v2-related configurations according to the
network design diagrams, check the configurations based on parameters
specified in the Clock Configuration List for xxx Office.
2. Formulate a commissioning plan. Determine a proper commissioning
sequence according to connections of OTN equipment to BITS devices and
OptiX PTN equipment.
– First commission BITS devices.
– Configure delay compensation along the BITS link and ensure that the
source of delay compensation ports is BITS.
– For a ring network, disable ports to trigger clock source switching and
record the switching. After delay compensation at the standby clock
tracing link is completed, restore configurations.
– For OptiX PTN equipment where IEEE 1588v2 has been provided,
configure delay compensation on all OTN boards before connecting OTN
equipment to OptiX PTN equipment.
3. Start commissioning on site. Start commissioning from BITS and determine a
proper commissioning sequence according to site conditions. Commissioning
at a site must cover all time/clock tracing links.
– Calibrate the instrument according to the instructions.
– Test time precision of BITS: To ensure time precision of OTN equipment,
observe performance of the BITS device and ensure that the clock source
satisfies requirements. After completing compensation for test cable
delay and antenna feeder delay, measure output at the 1PPS+TOD port
on the BITS device. If the maximum difference between measurement
values does not exceed 50 ns, delay compensation for the BITS device is
not required; otherwise, delay compensation for the BITS device is
required (in this case, contact BITS maintenance personnel).
After completing delay compensation for BITS input signals, restart the BITS device. It
takes the BITS device over two hours to become stable after the restart.
– Measure and compensate for asymmetry delay site by site. For details,
see 11.5.2 Testing Delay Compensation.
4. Perform short-term performance tests on site.
– To test short-term performance after asymmetry delay compensation is
completed at a site, boards can be reset (cold) after ensuring that
services will not be affected. For short-term performance specifications at
each site, see 11.5.3 Testing Items.
5. Examine the pre-test results and record the testing data.
11.5.2 Testing Delay Compensation

Prerequisites
All fibers or clock cables between NEs must be properly connected.
Clocks at the physical must be configured and commissioned.

The IEEE 1588v2 must be configured.

Time tester and NMS
Testing Diagram
Figure 11-16 shows the diagram for testing delay compensation.
Figure 11-16 Testing Diagram
Testing Delay Compensation for the Source Node (NE A, B)

The source OTN node is generally connected to the BITS device. They can be
interconnected in either of the following modes:
● Connected through a 2M clock port and a 1PPS+TOD port on a clock interface
board.
● Connected through a GE/10GE port on the tributary board.
Delay compensation is configured in a similar way in both modes. The detailed
1. Determine clock synchronization status of the source node.
a. In NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Clock > PTP
Clock > Clock Synchronization Attribute from the Function Tree.
b. Click Query. Check the query result to see whether the NE is tracing the
clock provided by the BITS device.
2. Measure delay.
a. After ensuring that the source node is tracing the clock provided by the
BITS device, verify time precision of the source node.
b. Set the port to be tested to a 1PPS+TOD output port.
c. When the test instrument is stably tracing the GPS, connect the test cable
to the TOD port on the OTN equipment. Considering the delay caused by

the antenna feeder and test cable, check the time displayed on the test
instrument 10 minutes later. When the maximum time difference does
not exceed 50 ns, record the time offset of the OTN equipment. Then,
configure asymmetry delay compensation using the U2000.
3. Compensate for delay. On the OTN equipment, delay may be caused by a
cable or service board.
a. Compensate for delay caused by a cable connecting the BITS device's
1PPS+TOD port to the OTN equipment. For the compensation modes, see
Setting Cable Transmission Distance Permitted by an External Time Port.
b. Compensate for delay caused by a service board. For the compensation
modes, see Configuring the Cable Transmission Deviation for the Clock
Port.
4. Calibrate delay. After delay compensation is completed, check the time
difference on the OTN equipment after 10 minutes. If the maximum time
difference does not exceed 100 ns, the delay compensation satisfies
requirements. Otherwise, configure delay compensation again.
Testing Delay Compensation for the Intermediate Nodes (NE A, B, C, D)

The method of measuring asymmetry delay at an intermediate node varies
according to the configuration.
● ST2+SFIU boards. This configuration simplifies asymmetry delay
compensation (no site-by-site compensation) during deployment. That is, you
only need to select sites for delay compensation and the maintenance
engineers will configure delay compensation at the selected sites. Adhere to
the following principles when configuring delay compensation during
deployment:
– Time will be transmitted to the downstream nodes and time must be
received over two or more paths.
– Delay compensation must be configured for OTN equipment connected
to OptiX PTN equipment and the OTN equipment must satisfy time
precision requirements.
– At a node, compensating for a time offset caused by path switching must
be completed. This ensures that the time reaching downstream nodes
satisfies requirements after time source switching.
As shown in Figure 11-16, each of sites A, B, and D provides one port for
transferring time sources to the downstream nodes and two or more ports for
receiving time sources. At these sites, delay compensation is required for path
switching. After the delay compensation, no more delay compensation is
required during maintenance.
● OTU service boards or ST2+FIU boards. This configuration requires site-by-site
asymmetry delay compensation and the compensation must cover all paths at
a site.
For example, site D in Figure 11-16 has two time tracing paths: B-C and D-C.
Compensate for delay on path B-C (for details, see Testing Delay
Compensation for the Source Node), switch the time source (by disabling a
port on path B-C), and then compensate for delay on path D-C. Finally,
enable the port on path B-C.

Test the time precision at the time output port on the intermediate node for 10
minutes. The time offset between the intermediate node and the GPS is within ±1
us.
Configuring Delay Compensation for the Sink Node and OptiX PTN
Equipment
OTN equipment may be connected to OptiX PTN equipment in either of the
following modes:
board used with the STG board.

1. Measure time precision of the OTN equipment.
a. Measure time offsets between adjacent NEs using the time tester. Then,
compensate for the delay generated at the input port of the ST2 board
on each downstream OTN NE based on the time offset as well as the
delay generated at the output port of the ST2 on each upstream OTN NE
with the same number with reversed polarity. For details, see Testing
Delay Compensation for the Source Node.
b. Test the time precision at the time output port on the sink node for 10
minutes. The time offset between the sink node and the GPS is within ±1
us.
2. Measure time precision of the OptiX PTN equipment.
a. On the OptiX PTN side, test the time offset between the OptiX PTN
equipment and the BITS device using the time tester. Then, compensate
for the delay generated at the TOD port on the OptiX PTN equipment
based on the time offset.
b. Test the time precision at the time output port on the OptiX PTN
equipment for 10 minutes. The time offset between the OptiX PTN
equipment and the GPS is within ±1 us.
11.5.3 Testing Items

This section describes the items to be tested in the testing of IEEE 1588v2 features.
Prerequisites
The IEEE 1588v2 must be configured.

Time tester and NMS

Testing Items
1. Time precision of interconnected OTN devices using ST2+SFIU boards test: To
verify that OTN devices with ST2+SFIU boards can ensure time precision by
overcoming asymmetry issues.
2. Long-term jitter in a physical clock synchronization mode test: To test long-
term stability when NEs work in physical clock synchronization mode.
3. Long-term jitter in PTP clock synchronization mode: To test long-term stability
when NEs work in PTP clock synchronization mode.
4. Time precision in case of fiber fault recovery test: To test the function of
restoring clock or time in case of an exception such as a fiber cut.
5. Active/standby clock board switching test. This test verifies that the active/
standby IEEE 1588v2 switching performs properly.
Select a testing item based on the actual network topology.
Test Diagram
Figure 11-16 shows the diagram for the testing items.
Testing Item 1: Time Precision of Interconnected OTN Devices Using

TN11ST2+SFIU Boards Test
Test To verify that OTN devices with TN11ST2+SFIU boards can ensure
Purpose time precision by overcoming asymmetry issues.
Test All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode.

Configur
ation
Test Time tester with a GPS receiver

Instrume
nt
Test 1. Test the time offset between two adjacent sites using the time
Procedur tester.
e 2. Test the time precision for 10 minutes.
3. Extend the fiber that transmits IEEE 1588v2 messages between
the two sites by more than 10 m (connect the fiber a new fiber
longer than 10 m using a fiber adapter).
Expected The time offset is within ±100 ns before and after the fiber is
Result extended.

Testing Item 2: Long-Term Jitter in a Physical Clock Synchronization Mode

Test
Test To test long-term stability when NEs work in physical clock
Purpose synchronization mode

Configur
ation

Instrume
nt
Test 1. Test the precision of the base station time for more than 8 hours
Procedur using the time tester.
e
Expected The time offset is within ±1 us.

Result
Testing Item 3: Long-Term Jitter in a PTP Clock Synchronization Mode Test

Test To test long-term stability when NEs work in PTP clock
Purpose synchronization mode.
Test All NEs work in PTP synchronization mode.

Configur
ation

Instrume
nt
e

Result
Testing Item 4: Time Precision in Case of Fiber Fault Recovery Test

Test To test the function of restoring clock or time in case of an
Purpose exception such as a fiber cut.
Test All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode or PTP

Configur synchronization mode.
ation


Instrume
nt
Test 1. On the sink site, test the time offset using the time tester.
Procedur 2. On the sink site, remove the WDM-side fibers that transmit IEEE
e 1588v2. Check for clock/time source switching alarms and
performance events generated on OTN and OptiX PTN devices
before and after the fibers are reinserted.
3. Use the time tester to test the base station time precision and
record it.
4. Recover the fiber connections.
Expected When time source protection is configured on the ring network, the
Result time offset is within 240 ns before a single-point fault occurs and
after the fault is rectified.
Testing Item 5: Active/Standby Clock Board Switching Test

Step 1 When the NE under test properly traces the clock source for another NE, perform
a switching between the active and standby clock boards on this NE.
Step 2 Check whether the traced clock source is switched from one NE to another. (Clock
source switching is not triggered in normal cases.) Use a test instrument to
measure the time synchronization performance for the NE. Determine whether the
time synchronization performance meets the clock source switching requirements
(The time offset is within 240 ns before and after the switching).
----End
11.6 Testing ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2

This section describes the procedure for testing ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 features
and the testing items.
11.6.1 Testing Process

This section describes the general process of testing ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2
features.
Figure 11-17 shows the process of testing ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 features.

Figure 11-17 Process of testing ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 features
Precaution
● Before Starting Deployment:
– Examine the ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 Networking Diagram for xxx Office
carefully and verify that the actual network configurations are the same
as the planned network configurations.
– Prepare required versions according to the version mapping requirements.
– Prepare and verify the Clock Configuration List for xxx Office.
– Make plans properly and obtain the necessary permits for on-site
operations in advance.
● Test Point Selection: perform the acceptance test using the TimeAcc-007 or an
ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 time tester. Try to perform the test at the end of an
ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 link (a point farthest from a BITS device). Supply GPS
signals to the TimeAcc-007 or ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 time tester. Calibrate
the test instrument before performing the test.

Procedure
1. Check configurations.
– After completing ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2-related configurations
according to the network design diagrams, check the configurations
based on parameters specified in the Clock Configuration List for xxx
Office.
2. Formulate a commissioning plan. Determine a proper commissioning
sequence according to connections of OTN equipment to BITS devices and
OptiX PTN equipment.
– First commission BITS devices.
– Configure delay compensation along the BITS link and ensure that the
source of delay compensation ports is BITS.
– For a ring network, disable ports to trigger clock source switching and
record the switching. After delay compensation at the standby clock
tracing link is completed, restore configurations.
– For OptiX PTN equipment where ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 has been
provided, configure delay compensation on all OTN boards before
connecting OTN equipment to OptiX PTN equipment.
3. Start commissioning on site. Start commissioning from BITS and determine a
proper commissioning sequence according to site conditions. Commissioning
at a site must cover all time/clock tracing links.
– Calibrate the instrument according to the instructions.
– Test time precision of BITS: To ensure time precision of OTN equipment,
observe performance of the BITS device and ensure that the clock source
satisfies requirements. After completing compensation for test cable
delay and antenna feeder delay, measure output at the 1PPS+TOD port
on the BITS device. If the maximum difference between measurement
values does not exceed 50 ns, delay compensation for the BITS device is
not required; otherwise, delay compensation for the BITS device is
required (in this case, contact BITS maintenance personnel).
After completing delay compensation for BITS input signals, restart the BITS device. It
takes the BITS device over two hours to become stable after the restart.
– Measure and compensate for asymmetry delay site by site. For details,
see 11.6.2 Testing Delay Compensation.
4. Perform short-term performance tests on site.
– To test short-term performance after asymmetry delay compensation is
completed at a site, boards can be reset (cold) after ensuring that
services will not be affected. For short-term performance specifications at
each site, see 11.6.3 Testing Items.
5. Examine the pre-test results and record the testing data.
11.6.2 Testing Delay Compensation

This section describes the delay compensation to be tested in the testing of ITU-T
G.8275.1/G.8273.2 features.

Prerequisites
The ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 must be configured.

Time tester and NMS
Testing Diagram
Figure 11-18 shows the diagram for testing delay compensation.
Figure 11-18 Testing Diagram
Testing Delay Compensation for the Source Node (NE A, B)

The source OTN node is generally connected to the BITS device. They can be
interconnected in either of the following modes:
board.

1. Determine clock synchronization status of the source node.
a. In NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Clock > PTP
Clock > Clock Synchronization Attribute from the Function Tree.
b. Click Query. Check the query result to see whether the NE is tracing the
clock provided by the BITS device.
2. Measure delay.

a. After ensuring that the source node is tracing the clock provided by the
BITS device, verify time precision of the source node.
b. Set the port to be tested to a 1PPS+TOD output port.
c. When the test instrument is stably tracing the GPS, connect the test cable
to the TOD port on the OTN equipment. Considering the delay caused by
the antenna feeder and test cable, check the time displayed on the test
instrument 10 minutes later. When the maximum time difference does
not exceed 50 ns, record the time offset of the OTN equipment. Then,
configure asymmetry delay compensation using the U2000.
3. Compensate for delay. On the OTN equipment, delay may be caused by a
cable or service board.
a. Compensate for delay caused by a cable connecting the BITS device's
1PPS+TOD port to the OTN equipment. For the compensation modes, see
Setting Cable Transmission Distance Permitted by an External Time Port.
b. Compensate for delay caused by a service board. For the compensation
modes, see Configuring the Cable Transmission Deviation for the Clock
Port.
4. Calibrate delay. After delay compensation is completed, check the time
difference on the OTN equipment after 10 minutes. If the maximum time
difference does not exceed 100 ns, the delay compensation satisfies
requirements. Otherwise, configure delay compensation again.
Testing Delay Compensation for the Intermediate Nodes (NE A, B, C, D)

The method of measuring asymmetry delay at an intermediate node varies
according to the configuration.
● ST2+SFIU boards. This configuration simplifies asymmetry delay
compensation (no site-by-site compensation) during deployment. That is, you
only need to select sites for delay compensation and the maintenance
engineers will configure delay compensation at the selected sites. Adhere to
the following principles when configuring delay compensation during
deployment:
– Time will be transmitted to the downstream nodes and time must be
received over two or more paths.
– Delay compensation must be configured for OTN equipment connected
to OptiX PTN equipment and the OTN equipment must satisfy time
precision requirements.
– At a node, compensating for a time offset caused by path switching must
be completed. This ensures that the time reaching downstream nodes
satisfies requirements after time source switching.
As shown in Figure 11-18, each of sites A, B, and D provides one port for
transferring time sources to the downstream nodes and two or more ports for
receiving time sources. At these sites, delay compensation is required for path
switching. After the delay compensation, no more delay compensation is
required during maintenance.
● OTU service boards or ST2+FIU boards. This configuration requires site-by-site
asymmetry delay compensation and the compensation must cover all paths at
a site.
For example, site D in Figure 11-18 has two time tracing paths: B-C and D-C.
Compensate for delay on path B-C (for details, see Testing Delay

Compensation for the Source Node), switch the time source (by disabling a
port on path B-C), and then compensate for delay on path D-C. Finally,
enable the port on path B-C.
Test the time precision at the time output port on the intermediate node for 10
minutes. The time offset between the intermediate node and the GPS is within ±1
us.
Configuring Delay Compensation for the Sink Node and OptiX PTN
Equipment
OTN equipment may be connected to OptiX PTN equipment in either of the
following modes:
board used with the STG board.

1. Measure time precision of the OTN equipment.
a. Measure time offsets between adjacent NEs using the time tester. Then,
compensate for the delay generated at the input port of the ST2 board
on each downstream OTN NE based on the time offset as well as the
delay generated at the output port of the ST2 on each upstream OTN NE
with the same number with reversed polarity. For details, see Testing
Delay Compensation for the Source Node.
b. Test the time precision at the time output port on the sink node for 10
minutes. The time offset between the sink node and the GPS is within ±1
us.
2. Measure time precision of the OptiX PTN equipment.
a. On the OptiX PTN side, test the time offset between the OptiX PTN
equipment and the BITS device using the time tester. Then, compensate
for the delay generated at the TOD port on the OptiX PTN equipment
based on the time offset.
b. Test the time precision at the time output port on the OptiX PTN
equipment for 10 minutes. The time offset between the OptiX PTN
equipment and the GPS is within ±1 us.
11.6.3 Testing Items

This section describes the items to be tested in the testing of ITU-T G.8275.1/G.
8273.2 features.
Prerequisites
The ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 must be configured.


Time tester and NMS
Testing Items
1. Time precision of interconnected OTN devices using ST2+SFIU boards test: To
verify that OTN devices with ST2+SFIU boards can ensure time precision by
overcoming asymmetry issues.
2. Long-term jitter in a physical clock synchronization mode test: To test long-
term stability when NEs work in physical clock synchronization mode.
3. Long-term jitter in PTP clock synchronization mode: To test long-term stability
when NEs work in PTP clock synchronization mode.
4. Time precision in case of fiber fault recovery test: To test the function of
restoring clock or time in case of an exception such as a fiber cut.
5. Active/standby clock board switching test. This test verifies that the active/
standby ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 switching performs properly.
Select a testing item based on the actual network topology.
Test Diagram
Figure 11-18 shows the diagram for the testing items.
Testing Item 1: Time Precision of Interconnected OTN Devices Using

TN11ST2+SFIU Boards Test
Test To verify that OTN devices with TN11ST2+SFIU boards can ensure
Purpose time precision by overcoming asymmetry issues.

Configur
ation

Instrume
nt
Test 1. Test the time offset between two adjacent sites using the time
Procedur tester.
e 2. Test the time precision for 10 minutes.
3. Extend the fiber that transmits ITU-T G.8275.1/G.8273.2 messages
between the two sites by more than 10 m (connect the fiber a
new fiber longer than 10 m using a fiber adapter).
Expected The time offset is within ±100 ns before and after the fiber is
Result extended.

Testing Item 2: Long-Term Jitter in a Physical Clock Synchronization Mode

Test
Test To test long-term stability when NEs work in physical clock
Purpose synchronization mode

Configur
ation

Instrume
nt
e

Result
Testing Item 3: Long-Term Jitter in a PTP Clock Synchronization Mode Test

Test To test long-term stability when NEs work in PTP clock
Purpose synchronization mode.
Test All NEs work in PTP synchronization mode.

Configur
ation

Instrume
nt
e

Result
Testing Item 4: Time Precision in Case of Fiber Fault Recovery Test

Test To test the function of restoring clock or time in case of an
Purpose exception such as a fiber cut.
Test All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode or PTP

Configur synchronization mode.
ation


Instrume
nt
Test 1. On the sink site, test the time offset using the time tester.
Procedur 2. On the sink site, remove the WDM-side fibers that transmit ITU-T
e G.8275.1/G.8273.2. Check for clock/time source switching alarms
and performance events generated on OTN and OptiX PTN
devices before and after the fibers are reinserted.
3. Use the time tester to test the base station time precision and
record it.
4. Recover the fiber connections.
Expected When time source protection is configured on the ring network, the
Result time offset is within 240 ns before a single-point fault occurs and
after the fault is rectified.
Testing Item 5: Active/Standby Clock Board Switching Test

Step 1 When the NE under test properly traces the clock source for another NE, perform
a switching between the active and standby clock boards on this NE.
Step 2 Check whether the traced clock source is switched from one NE to another. (Clock
source switching is not triggered in normal cases.) Use a test instrument to
measure the time synchronization performance for the NE. Determine whether the
time synchronization performance meets the clock source switching requirements
(The time offset is within 240 ns before and after the switching).
----End
11.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels

When the network transmits the Ethernet service, the availability of the Ethernet
service channels must be tested.
11.7.1 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using Laptops

You can perform the test by connecting laptops to both ends of the Ethernet
service. By doing this, you can test the availability of the Ethernet service channel.
Prerequisites
● You must be a NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.
● The Ethernet services must be configured and the port attribute is set to
"Access".

Two laptops on which the Windows operating system is installed, two straight-
through cables

Set-up Diagram
Figure 11-19 shows the diagram for testing the Ethernet service channels.
Figure 11-19 Testing the Ethernet service channels
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the network port of the laptop to the Ethernet service port of the
equipment according to Figure 11-19.
Step 2 Set the IP addresses for laptop A and laptop B. The two IP addresses must be set
in the same network section.
● Set the IP address for laptop A.
– IP address: 192.168.0.100
– Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
● Set the IP address for laptop B.
– IP address: 192.168.0.101
– Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
Step 3 Choose Start > Run on laptop A to display a dialog box. Enter the ping command:
ping 192.168.0.101 -n 20000 -l 64 -t.

● -n Num: transit Num packets to the laptop at the opposite end

● A window is displayed to provide the feedback "Reply from 192.168.0.101:
bytes=64 time=1ms TTL=255". This information indicates the Ethernet channel
is normal.
● If the displayed window provides the feedback Request timed out, it
indicates that the Ethernet channel is abnormal. Check the network cable

connection and the configuration of the Ethernet service. Correct the fault,
and then continue the test.
The value of time and TTL is determined by the actual test environment. The value
----End
11.7.2 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using the

Ethernet OAM Function
If the Ethernet board supports the OAM function, the OAM function can also be
used to test the availability of Ethernet service channels. Prerequisites.
Prerequisites
● The Ethernet service must be configured between sites.

NMS
Context
Before testing the availability of the Ethernet service channels by using the OAM
function, you must configure the OAM maintenance points on the two sites.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu.
Step 2 Select the Ethernet board in the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.
Step 3 In the right pane, click OAM Configuration. The OAM Configuration dialog box
is displayed.
Step 4 Click New. Then, select Create MD from the drop-down menu.
Step 5 In the New Maintenance Domain dialog box, set Maintenance Domain Name
and select Maintenance Domain Level.
Step 6 Click New. Then, select Create MA from the drop-down menu.
Step 7 In the New Maintenance Association dialog box, set Maintenance Domain
Name and Maintenance Association Name. Then close the OAM Configuration
dialog box
Step 8 Click New. In the New MEP Point dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters.

Step 9 In Ethernet Service OAM, right-click the created Ethernet service maintenance
point, and choose Performance Detect from the shortcut menu.
Step 10 The Performance Detect dialog box is displayed. In Send Mode, select the specific
mode. In Maintenance Point, set Source MP ID and Destination MP ID.
Step 11 Click Start Detect. The statistics of the performance is displayed in the Details.
View the results of the statistics. Then, determine the performance of the service
between the local equipment and the opposite equipment through Loss Ratio and
Delay.
Step 12 Change the length of the frame in Send Mode. Then, test and record the loss ratio
and delay of the packets with the length of 128, 256, 512, 1024, 1280, and 1518
bytes.
----End
11.8 Testing Packet Service Channels

When a network transmits packet services, the availability of packet service
channels must be tested.
11.8.1 Testing Tunnel Performance Using MPLS-TP Tunnel

OAM
The delay measurement (DM) functions in MPLS-TP tunnel OAM allow you to test
tunnel performance easily with a single mouse click, and does not require any
dedicated meters.

Prerequisites
● An MPLS tunnel is created and deployed. For details about how to create an
MPLS tunnel, see Configuring an MPLS Tunnel.
If the MPLS tunnel is created on a per-NE basis, search for the tunnel before
performing other operations..
● You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.

NMS
Only certain boards support MPLS-TP OAM. For details about these boards, see
Availability of MPLS-TP OAM in Feature Description.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > Tunnel > Manage Tunnel from the main menu.
Step 2 In the dialog box that is displayed, set filter conditions; for example, set Protocol
Type to MPLS and set Signaling Type to Static CR. Then, click Filter. Query all
MPLS tunnels that meet the filter conditions.
Step 3 Right-click the desired tunnel and choose Performance > Create Monitoring
Instance from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed Quick Monitor dialog box, click Close.
Step 5 In the Performance Monitoring Management window, after selecting the desired
instance, right-click the desired Tunnel in the Transmit Tunnel to choose Real
Time Monitoring.
Step 6 In the RTP for NE(xxx)-Tunnel(xxx) window, select the MPLS_TUNNEL_FD(us) or

MPLS_TUNNEL_FDV(us) to measure delay or delay variation between two MEPs
(DM).
----End
11.8.2 Testing PW Performance Using MPLS-TP PW OAM

The loss measurement (LM) and delay measurement (DM) functions in MPLS-TP
PW OAM allow you to test PW performance easily with a single mouse click, and
does not require any dedicated meters.
Prerequisites
● The PWE3 service is created and deployed. For details how to create a PWE3
service, see Managing PWE3 Services.


NMS
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > PWE3 Service > Manage PWE3 Service from the main menu.
Type to PW APS. Then, click Filter. Query all PWE3 services that meet the filter
conditions.
Step 3 After selecting the desired PWE3 service, in the Topology windows right-click the
working Tunnel route to choose View Real-Time Performance.
Step 4 In the RTP for NE(xxx)-L2VPN(xxx)-PW(xxx) window, select the

MPLS_TUNNEL_FD(us) or MPLS_TUNNEL_FDV(us) to measure delay or delay
variation between two MEPs (DM). And select the MPLS_PW_FL(pkt) or
MPLS_PW_FLR(%) to measures the number of packets lost or the rate of packets
lost between two MEPs (LM).
----End
11.9 Testing Packet Ethernet Services

After configuring Ethernet services on a PSN network, you need to test Ethernet
services to check whether the configuration is correct.
11.9.1 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Availability by Using

Ping Commands
You can perform the test by connecting the laptops to both ends of the Ethernet
service. In this way, you can test the availability of the Ethernet service channel.
Prerequisites
● The Ethernet services must be configured and the port attribute is set to
"Access".

● Two personal computers (PCs) on which the Windows operating system is
installed
● Two straight-through cables

Figure 11-20 shows the connection for testing the Ethernet service channels.

Figure 11-20 Connection for testing the Ethernet service channels
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the network port of the PC to the Ethernet service port of the equipment
according to the previous connection diagram.
Step 2 Set the IP addresses for PC 1 and PC 2. The two IP addresses must be set in the
same network section.
● Set the IP address for PC 1.
– IP address: 192.168.0.100
– Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
● Set the IP address for PC 2.
– IP address: 192.168.0.101
– Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Step 3 Choose Start > Run on PC 1 to display a dialog box. Enter the ping command:
ping 192.168.0.101 -n 20000 -l 64 -t.

● -n Num: transit Num packets to the PC at the opposite end

● If the displayed window provides the feedback "Reply from 192.168.0.101:
bytes=64 time=1ms TTL=255", Ethernet channel is normal.
● If the displayed window provides the feedback Request timed out, the
Ethernet channel is abnormal. Check the network cable connection and the
configuration of the Ethernet service. Rectify the fault, and then continue the
test.

The values of time and TTL are associated with the actual test environment. The value
----End
11.9.2 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Availability by Using

ETH-OAM
Use the Ethernet OAM function to test the connectivity of the Ethernet service to
ensure that the Ethernet service works normally. This section describes how to test
the connectivity of the Ethernet service by performing a loopback (LB) test.
Prerequisites
● Ethernet services are configured. For configuration details.
Precautions
The PW-carried E-Line service based on VLAN priority or VLAN switching does not
support the LB test function in Ethernet service OAM. To verify these services.

NMS
As shown in Figure 11-21, ETH-OAM has two protocol applications (IEEE 802.1ag
and IEEE 802.3ah) according to the application scenarios.
Figure 11-21 Application of IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah

● IEEE 802.1ag
It is used to test end-to-end Ethernet services, and is generally used at the
core layer of a network. For its detailed applications.
● IEEE 802.3ah
It is used to test the connectivity and performance of a physical link, and is
mainly used at the access layer of a network. For its detailed applications.
Procedure
conditions.
Step 3 Right-click the required PW-carried E-Line service and choose Ethernet OAM >
Ethernet OAM Test from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select LB test from the Measurement Type drop-
down list.
Step 5 In the dialog box that is displayed, select the source NE and sink NE, and click
Run.
Step 6 After the test is complete, click the LB Statistic Information tab to check whether
the service is available.
If the number of received packets and the number of transmitted packets are the same, the
service is available.
----End
11.9.3 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Performance Using ETH

OAM
The loss measurement (LM) and delay measurement (DM) functions in ETH OAM
allow you to test Ethernet service performance easily with a single mouse click,
and does not require any dedicated meters.
Prerequisites

● Ethernet services are configured. For configuration details.

NMS
Procedure
conditions.
Step 3 Right-click the desired PWE3 service and choose Ethernet OAM > Ethernet OAM
Test from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select LM Test or DM Test from the Measurement
Type drop-down list.
Step 5 In the displayed dialog box, select the source NE and sink NE.
Step 6 Click Run and view test results.
You can click LM to check packet loss rate or click DM to check delay in Ethernet services.
● ETH_CFM_FLR(%): E-Line service packet loss ratio.

● ETH_CFM_FL(pkt): E-Line service lost packets.
● ETH_CFM_FD(us): E-Line service delay.
● ETH_CFM_FDV(us): E-Line service delay variation.
----End
11.9.4 Testing Ethernet Packet Service Performance by Using

SmartBits
You can check whether packet loss has occurred on an Ethernet packet service by
looping back the service at one end and testing packet loss with a SmartBits at
the other end.
Prerequisites
● Ethernet services are configured according to actual situations.


Network Analyzer, NMS

Figure 11-22 shows how to test Ethernet packet service channels.
Figure 11-22 Connection diagram for testing Ethernet packet services
The connection diagram serves as a network model. In this example, an inloop at the MAC
layer is performed on an Ethernet port of NE1 and a SmartBits is connected to an Ethernet
port on NE2. In practice, SmartBits can be connected to any desired Ethernet board on
source and sink NEs.
Precautions
NOTICE
● Ensure that only the commissioning engineers are present during the test.
● Do not touch optical fibers, wires, or cables without permission.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect a SmartBits to an Ethernet port on NE2 according to the connection
diagram.
Step 2 Log in to the NMS. Start the 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring for
NE1 and NE2.
The performance monitoring is set to analyze and locate faults that occur during the test.
Step 3 Log in to the NMS. Perform an inloop at the MAC layer on an Ethernet port of
NE1.
Step 4 Use the SmartBits to transmit and receive packets.

● Packets with all 0s are regarded as special packets. Therefore, do not use packets of all
0s for testing transmitted and received packets.
● When the SmartBits transmits and receives packets for the first time, packet loss occurs
due to MAC address learning. Therefore, it is normal that the number of transmitted
packets is different from the number of received packets.
● In the tests subsequent to the initial one, if the number of transmitted packets is the
same as the number of received packets, the cross-domain service channels are normal.
● If packet loss occurs during the tests, troubleshoot the fault and then perform 24-hour
tests until the channels pass the tests.
----End
11.10 Testing Orderwire
11.10.1 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System

You can configure orderwire for NEs by using the NMS/Web LCT.
11.10.1.1 Setting the Orderwire Board

Before you configure the orderwire functions, you need to set the orderwire board
first.
Prerequisite
● The optical supervisory channel boards must be created.

NMS or Web LCT
The orderwire can be used only when the orderwire board is configured with the
NE.
Legend Information

Procedure on the NMS or Web LCT

1. Query the configurations of the orderwire board.
2. Set the orderwire board.
: Based on the network design, check whether Settings for the Second
Orderwire Phone needs to be set.
: Click Query. The values of the parameters are the same as the values that are
set.

11.10.1.2 Configuring Orderwire

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel,
you can configure orderwire for NEs.
Prerequisite
● SC1 or SC2 board has been configured.

NMS or Web LCT
Legend Information

1. Configure the orderwire.

: Call Waiting Time(s) should be set to the same value for all NEs with
orderwire communication. When the number of NEs is smaller than 30, set the value
to 5 seconds. Otherwise, set it to 9 seconds.
:
● The telephone number cannot repeat in the same orderwire subnet.
● Set the length of the telephone number according to the actual requirements.
The maximum length is eight digits and the minimum length is three digits. In
the same orderwire subnet, the number length must be the same.
● The length of the telephone number must be the same as that of the conference
call number.
11.10.1.3 Configuring Conference Calls

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that
allows concurrent voice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure
the conference calls for NEs.
Prerequisite

NMS or Web LCT
Legend Information

1. Configure the conference calls.

: In the Available Conference Call Ports pane, select the port where you want to
configure a conference call. If the optical ports that support conference call form a
loop, howler tone is generated. Hence, "releasing loop" is a must, that is, only one
optical port can be set for the conference call in a certain node.
2. Start the conference calls.
: The conference call number for all NEs must be the same, and must have the
same length as the orderwire phone number. If the orderwire phone number has four
digits, the conference call number is recommended to be 9999.
11.10.1.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets

When there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality
of the conversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the
conference calls are configured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets.

You can make the conference calls between NEs that are associated with the same
orderwire subnet.
Prerequisites
● Conference calls must be configured.

NMS or Web LCT
Set the length of the subnet number before dividing the orderwire subnet, which
can be of one or two digits. Then configure the subnet number. You can obtain the
subnet conference call number by overlaying the preceding digits of the
conference call number by subnet number. For example, if the conference call
number is 999 and the subnet number is 1, the subnet conference call number of
the subnet 1 is 199.
The optical ports with the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire
subnet.
Different optical ports on each NE can belong to different orderwire subnets.
Hence, an NE can belong to several orderwire subnet at the same time.
Legend Information

1. Set the Subnet No. Length.

: When the Subnet No. Length is set to 1, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the
Optical Interface is in the range of 0 to 9. When the Subnet No. Length is set to 2,
the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is in the range of 0 and 10 to
99.
2. Divide the orderwire subnets.
: The optical ports that have the same subnet number belong to the same
orderwire subnet.
: Click Query, and the operation result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The
parameter values of Subnet displayed in the window are the same as the ones set
previously.

11.10.2 Testing Orderwire Functions

Orderwire function tests consist of addressing call tests and conference call tests.
Prerequisites
● The orderwire is connected to the EOW port of the SC1/SC2/HSC1
● Orderwire on each NE must be configured.
● The orderwire phone set must be installed correctly at related stations.

NMS
Procedure
Step 1 Testing the addressing call.
1. At a station, use the orderwire phone to dial the orderwire of other NEs.
2. Check whether the orderwire phone rings at the called station.
3. Check the voice quality during the conversation. The voice must be clear and
without noise.
4. See the previous steps to test addressing calls at other stations.
Step 2 Testing the conference call.

1. At a station, use the orderwire phone to dial the conference call number.
2. Check whether the orderwire phone rings at the other station.
3. Check the voice quality during the conversation. The voice must be clear and
without noise.
4. See the previous steps to test conference calls at other stations.
● The subnet conference call covers only the optical ports that have the same subnet No. on
the network. The subnet No. for the optical port can be set on the NMS. The subnet
conference call number consists of the subnet No., which replaces the first one or two digits
of the network-wide call number. For example, if the subnet No. is 1, the subnet conference
call number is 199.
----End
11.11 Testing CES Services

After configuring CES services, you need to test connectivity of end-to-end CES
services to ensure that they work properly.
Prerequisites
● CES services must be configured as required.


● U2000, BER tester or SDH analyzer

Figure 11-27 shows the connection diagram for testing connectivity of CES
service. You can replace the SDH analyzer with a BER tester.
Figure 11-27 Connection diagram for testing connectivity of CES services
Procedure
Step 1 As shown in Figure 11-27, connect the CES service interface on PE1 to the BER
tester.
Step 2 Perform an inloop for the UNI that receives CES services on PE2 on the U2000.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired CES board and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > SDH Interface.
2. In the Basic Attributes tab, set Loopback Mode of the desired interface to
Loopback Local.
3. Click Apply.
Step 3 Perform a 24-hour bit error test.
Set the coding to HDB3 and pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) to 2 15-1 for the signals
transmitted by the BER tester.
Set the BER tester according to the encapsulation method that the CES services adopt and the
frame format that the E1 interface adopts. Set the timeslots on the BER tester consistently with
the CES service timeslots.
● If the CES services adopt the SATop method, you need to enable the BER tester to transmit
unframed signals, double-frame signals, or CRC-4 multiframe signals.
● If the CES services adopt the CESoPSN method and the interface adopts the double-frame
format, you need to enable the BER tester to transmit double-frame signals.
● If the CES services adopt the CESoPSN method and the interface adopts the CRC-4
multiframe format, you need to enable the BER tester to transmit CRC-4 multiframe
signals.
Step 4 Test the performance of the CES services. That is, check whether bit errors occur in
the CES services in the 24-hour period.

Step 5 Check for the alarms associated with the CES services. If there is any, see the
Alarms and Performance Events Reference to clear the alarms.
Step 6 Release the inloop that is set on the interface on PE2. Set Loopback Mode of the
desired interface to Loopback None.
Step 7 Reconnect the cable to the CES service interface on PE1.
----End

Commissioning Guide (U2000) 12 Testing Bit Errors Using A Signal Analyzer
12 Testing Bit Errors Using A Signal

Analyzer
The network-wide bit error test must cover all the service channels in the network.
You can perform the bit error tests to the concatenated service channels or to the
service segments. There must be no bit error for 24 consecutive hours.
This section uses Project G as an example to illustrate the test for network-wide
bit errors. For the network diagram for Project G, see Figure 12-1.
Figure 12-1 Network diagram for Project G
: OTM : OLA : OADM
Each of the stations A, C and E have four OTU boards.
NOTICE
Before the test, make sure that the input and output optical power for each board
is in the optimal range, and that there is no abnormal alarm or performance
event.
12.1 Testing Single-Channel Bit Errors

To ensure that the network-wide bit error test is successfully complete, perform a
bit error test for each channel in advance.
12.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors
The all-channel bit error test is performed to ensure that all functional boards and
channels on a transmission link are normal.

12.1 Testing Single-Channel Bit Errors

To ensure that the network-wide bit error test is successfully complete, perform a
bit error test for each channel in advance.
Prerequisites
There must be no abnormal alarm or performance event in the entire network.
Tools, Equipments and Materials

Signal analyzer, fiber jumper, optical attenuator, fiber adapter
Set-up Diagram
For the bit error test for one channel, see Figure 12-2, Figure 12-3, and Figure
12-4.
Figure 12-2 Testing bit errors for one channel from station A to station E
Figure 12-3 Testing bit errors for one channel from station A to station C

Figure 12-4 Testing bit errors for one channel from station C to station E
Procedure
Step 1 See Figure 12-2, for station A, connect the receive and transmit optical ports of a
signal analyzer to the TX output optical port and RX input optical port with a fixed
optical attenuator in between.
Step 2 At station E, connect the TX output optical port to the RX input optical port with a
fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side.
Step 3 Use the signal analyzer to perform a 15-minute or 24-hour bit error test for the
service channel.
Step 4 If there are bit errors, clear the fault and perform a 15-minute or 24-hour bit error
test again until there is no bit error.
Step 5 See steps 1 through 4 and Figure 12-3 to perform 15-minute or 24-hour bit error
tests to all the channels between station A and station C.
Step 6 See steps 1 through 4 and Figure 12-4 to perform 15-minute or 24-hour bit error
tests to all the channels between station C and station E.
----End
12.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors

The all-channel bit error test is performed to ensure that all functional boards and
channels on a transmission link are normal.
Prerequisites
No abnormal alarm or performance event exists on the entire network.
Tools, Equipments and Materials

Signal analyzer, fiber jumper, optical attenuator, fiber adapter
Fiber Connection
At the local end, connect the output port on the signal analyzer to the RX port on
the first OTU or tributary board. After the signals are looped back from the

remote end, the signals are output from the TX port on the first OTU or tributary
board. This establishes the connection of a single channel. Connect the TX port on
the first OTU or tributary board to the RX port on the second OTU or tributary
board with a fixed optical attenuator in between. Then connect the second OTU or
tributary board to the third OTU or tributary board in the same way until OTU or
tributary board (N-1) is connected to OTU or tributary board N. Finally, connect
the TX port on the OTU or tributary board N to the IN port on the signal analyzer.
Precautions
NOTICE
● The number of cascaded OTUs or tributary boards should be less than or equal
to 13.
● There are five types of LC connector-shaped fixed optical attenuators: 15 dB, 10
dB, 7dB, 5 dB and 2 dB. According to the requirements for the optical power,
use the correct fixed optical attenuators when you perform the network
commissioning.
Set-up Diagram
This section uses Project G as an example to describe how to test bit errors on all
channels in cascading order. Figure 12-5 shows the testing diagram. The testing
diagram does not show the OLA and repeater stations because no signal is
inserted into or extracted from an OLA station or a repeater station.
Figure 12-5 Fiber connections for the all-channel bit error test

T: Tributary board
L: Line board
Procedure
Step 1 Use Figure 12-5 to connect the fibers according to the information inFiber
Connection.
Step 2 Use the signal analyzer to perform the 24-hour or 15-minute bit error test.
Step 3 If there are bit errors, clear the fault and perform a 24-hour or 15-minute test
again until there is no bit error.
----End

Commissioning Guide (U2000) 13 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data
13 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data
To ensure security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.
13.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods

You need to back up important NE data during daily maintenance. This ensures
that the SCC board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after the
NE data in the SCC board is lost or a power failure occurs on the equipment. This
section describes several NE data backup and restoration methods. You can select
the method as required.
13.2 Backing Up the NE Database to the CTU Board
You need to back up the NE database during daily maintenance, to ensure that
the CTU board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after a data
loss or equipment power failure. When you back up the NE database to the CTU
board, you actually back up the NE data in the DRDB database of the CTU board
to the Flash database. When the NE is restarted after a power failure, the CTU
board automatically reads the configuration from the FLASH and issues the
configuration to the boards.
13.3 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card
You need to back up the NE database during the daily maintenance. You can back
up the NE data in the DRDB database of the system control board to a CF card
manually, to ensure the automatic restoration of the operation after the data in
the DRDB database is lost on the system control board or a power failure occurs
on the equipment.
13.4 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client
This section describes how to back up the latest NE (configuration) data to the
NMS server or NMS client as required in case of NE maintenance or upgrade/
downgrade.
13.5 Restoring the NE Database from the System Control Board
When the database file is lost due to the NE maintenance or NE fault, you can
restore the NE data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up to the
Flash database on the system control board.
13.6 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card
restore the NE data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up on the
CF card.

13.7 Recovering Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client
This operation describes how to recover the device data from the NMS Server or
the NMS Client.
13.8 Disaster Restoration of NE Configuration Data
Disaster restoration of NE configuration data (disaster restoration for short) is a
function provided to restore service configurations in emergent cases. Disaster
restoration is a highly risky operation and may interrupt services. Therefor,
perform this operation under instructions of Huawei engineers.
13.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration

Methods
You need to back up important NE data during daily maintenance. This ensures
that the SCC board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after the
NE data in the SCC board is lost or a power failure occurs on the equipment. This
section describes several NE data backup and restoration methods. You can select
the method as required.
Comparison of Backup and Restoration Methods

The locations for backing up and restoring the NE database include the SCC board,
CF card, local server, and remote server. The data backup and restoration methods
vary according to storage locations. See Table 13-1.

Table 13-1 Data backup and restoration methods and application scenarios
Backup and Restoration Storage Application Scenario
Method
Back up/Restore the NE Flash database on the NE fault recovery

database to/from an SCC SCC board scenario such as data
board loss for an NE control
board, NE power-off, or
replacement of an NE
control board
● Backs up the NE
configuration data in
the control board (no
CF card is configured)
to the flash database.
During the
restoration, after a
warm or cold reset on
the control board, the
control board reads
the configuration
from the flash
database and issues
the configuration to
other boards.
● The backup procedure
is the same as that in
the scenario of
backing up NE data
to the CF card. If a CF
card is installed, NE
data is backed up to
the CF card because
the CF card has a
larger capacity than
the control board. If
no CF card is
available, NE data is
backed up to the
control board.
● NE data can also be
backed up to the flash
memory of the
control board to
ensure data security
in case of NE power-
off within half an
hour after NE
configuration
modification.


Method
Back up/Restore the NE CF card NE fault recovery

database to/from a CF scenario such as data
card loss for an NE control
board, NE power-off, or
replacement of an NE
control board
● Backs up the NE
configuration data in
the SCC board (a CF
card is configured) to
the CF card.
During the
restoration, the
database is restored
from the CF card to
the SCC board. After a
warm or cold reset on
the SCC board, the
memory database on
the SCC board is
updated. Then, after
the warm resets on
other boards, the NE
memory data is
issued to the boards.
● Frequent manual data
backup on the CF
card is not
recommended, for
example, do not
perform manual data
backup after each
configuration data
modification. This is
because the NE
automatically backs
up data every 24
hours, which meet
deployment and
maintenance
requirements, while
frequent backup
operations make CF
cards wear and
shorten their lifecycle.


Method
Back up the NE U2000 server or client Fault recovery or NE

configuration data to a upgrade/downgrade
U2000 server or client/ scenario
Restore the NE ● This method applies
configuration data from to quick NE
the U2000 server or configuration data
client restoration when both
the control board and
CF card are faulty.
● Backs up data before
an upgrade/
downgrade operation.
The data can be used
to restore the NE to
the original state
when an upgrade/
downgrade operation
fails.
Stores the data in the
computer where the
U2000 server or client
resides.
13.2 Backing Up the NE Database to the CTU Board

You need to back up the NE database during daily maintenance, to ensure that
the CTU board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after a data
loss or equipment power failure. When you back up the NE database to the CTU
board, you actually back up the NE data in the DRDB database of the CTU board
to the Flash database. When the NE is restarted after a power failure, the CTU
board automatically reads the configuration from the FLASH and issues the
configuration to the boards.
Prerequisite
You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.

NMS or Web LCT

Precautions
By default, the NMS automatically backs up the NE database into the flash memory every
30 minutes.

2. Back up the NE database to the system control board.

1. Select one or more NEs in the NE list. Click BackUp NE Database > BackUp
to SCC.
The NMS takes a few minutes to back up the NE database. Do not perform any
operation in the process of backup.
2. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
3. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

(Optional) Related Backing Up and This section describes

Operation Restoring the NE Data several NE data backup
and restoration methods.
You can select the
method as required.
13.3 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF

Card
You need to back up the NE database during the daily maintenance. You can back
up the NE data in the DRDB database of the system control board to a CF card
manually, to ensure the automatic restoration of the operation after the data in
the DRDB database is lost on the system control board or a power failure occurs
on the equipment.
Prerequisites
● You must have logged in to the NE as an NE user with "System Level"
authority.
● The system control board must be configured with the CF card.

NMS
Legend Information
Procedure

2. Manually back up one or more NEs database to a CF card.
13.4 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the

NMS Client
This section describes how to back up the latest NE (configuration) data to the
NMS server or NMS client as required in case of NE maintenance or upgrade/
downgrade.
Prerequisites
The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started.

NMS
● Backup operation can be performed only for multiple devices of same device
type.
● On selecting the device type in the device tree, all the devices and the device
type versions related to the device type is displayed in the NE View table.

● The files backed up from the server can be viewed in the Backup Information
tab.
Legend Information
Manually Backing Up NE Data

2. Manually back up the NE data.

● : The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are

selected.
● : By default the OSS Server is selected.

● If the OSS Server is selected, the selected device information is stored on the
NMS server.
● If the OSS Client is selected, click to select the location where the
device data are to be backed up.
3. When the backup operation is successful, the NMS creates the dbf.pkg file in
the NEName/yyyymmddhhmmss directory. "NEName" indicates the name of
the NE, "yyyymmdd" indicates the date when the backup is created, and
"hhmmss" indicates the time when the backup is created.
Saving and Backing Up NE Data as Required by the Default Policy

2. The NE data is saved and backed up as required by the default policy.

Saving and Backing Up NE Data as Required by the Customized Policy

2. The NE data is saved and backed up as required by the customized policy.
● : Select the desired NE by type from the drop-down list of NE type and NE
Version .
● : Select one or more NEs for configuring the save and backup policy in the
navigation tree below the NE Version drop-down list.
3. Set the policy information as required.

● If The Added NE's Policy Status is set to Enable, the DC performs the backup/save
operation on the newly added NEs (NEs moved from other policies to this policy) at
specified time points.
● If the The Added NE's Policy Status is set to Disable, the DC does not perform the
backup/save operation on the newly added NEs (NEs moved from other policies to this
policy) even at specified time points.
4. Click OK to complete the save and backup configurations for the specified NE.
13.5 Restoring the NE Database from the System

Control Board
restore the NE data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up to the
Flash database on the system control board.
Prerequisites
● You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.
● The NE data from DRDB Database must be backed up to Flash database on
the system control board.

NMS
Legend Information
Procedure on the NMS (OptiX OSN 9800)

1. Restore the NE database from the system control board.

: For a system control board in an OptiX OSN 9800 subrack, right-click the system
control board, and choose Warm Reset or Cold Reset from the shortcut menu that is
displayed.
13.6 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card

restore the NE data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up on the
CF card.
Prerequisites
You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.
The system control board must be with a CF card and the NE data from DRDB
database must be backed up to the CF card.


NMS
Legend Information
Procedure
2. Restore the NE database from the CF card.
● If the database is performing a scheduled backup task, a message will be displayed on

the NMS, indicating that restoring data from the CF card will fail. In this scenario, you
are advised to wait 5 minutes, and restore data again from the CF card after the
database finishes the scheduled backup task.
● NE data is backed up every 24 hours by default. The database data restored from the
CF card is the latest data backed up before the NE is unreachable. Therefore, it may be
different from the current actual data.

After the NE databases are restored, the NE software issues the data in the CF card to only
the system control board but not other boards. To ensure that the configurations in the
system control board and the configurations in other boards are consistent, you need to
perform warm resets on other boards.
13.7 Recovering Device Data from the NMS Server or

the NMS Client
This operation describes how to recover the device data from the NMS Server or
the NMS Client.
Prerequisites
● To perform the Recover operation from the server, the FTP/TFTP/SFTP server
is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started.
● To perform the Recover operation from the client, the parameter in File
Transfer Protocol between client and server area must be set and the file
transfer service must run in the normal state (FTP and SFTP are supported),
because files cannot be transferred directly between an NE and the client.
Instead, the files are transferred to the root directory for file transfer on the
server and then the server transfers the files to the specified directory on the
target NE or client.
● You cannot perform the Recover operation for multiple devices of different
device types.
● On selecting the device type in the device tree, all the device information
related to the device type is displayed in the NE View table.

NMS
Legend Information

Procedure
2. Recover the device data from the NMS server or the NMS client.

:
In the File Name drop-down list, select the file to be recovered. If the backup file is listed
in the File Name drop-down list, select the file to be recovered. If the backup file is not
listed in the File Name drop-down list, click Browse... to select the backup file in the
Select File dialog box.
●
1. If OSS Server is selected, select the appropriate backup file from the OSS server.
The selected backup file path is displayed in the Select File field.
2. If OSS Client is selected, click to select the backup file from the OSS Client.
The selected backup file path is displayed in the Select File field.
● :
1. When you select No Reboot, the NE will not be automatically restarted. In this
scenario, you need to manually activate the database.
2. When you select With Service Interruption, the NE will be automatically restarted.
After the NE restart, the data is restored and the database is activated
automatically.
:
To enable the backup data of service boards to be restored, select the Deliver To Board
check box.
Result
After the device data is recovered, right click the device in the NE View table.
Select Activation Database... to open the Activation Database dialog box, and
then click Start to activate the device database.
If you do not activate the software within five minutes after the restoration is successfully
complete, the NMS automatically rolls back the software and cancels the restoration
operation.
13.8 Disaster Restoration of NE Configuration Data

Disaster restoration of NE configuration data (disaster restoration for short) is a
function provided to restore service configurations in emergent cases. Disaster
restoration is a highly risky operation and may interrupt services. Therefor,
perform this operation under instructions of Huawei engineers.
Prerequisites
The NE configuration data for disaster restoration comes from the NMS database.
Therefore, before performing disaster restoration, check carefully to verify that the
configuration data on the NMS is complete and consistent with that on the NE. If
the configuration data is inconsistent, NE configuration data may be lost and
services may be interrupted when you perform disaster restoration.

Precaution
This function supports restoration of only key service configuration data but not
all configuration data. Therefore, after performing this operation, check and
complete the configuration data manually.

NMS
Procedure
No. Task Mandatory/Optional
1 Check whether the Mandatory

configuration data on Do not perform disaster
the NMS is complete. restoration if the
configuration data on
the NMS is incomplete.
2 Change the script export Mandatory

mode. Scripts exported from
the NMS can be used for
NE data restoration and
the NMS displays the
navigation path for
disaster restoration only
when the script export
mode is configured as
the NE data restoration
mode.
3 Assign permission to the Optional

NMS user to perform If the NMS user is an
disaster restoration. administrator, skip this
1. Choose task.
Administration >
NMS Security > NMS
User Management
from the main menu.
4 Back up tunnel service Optional

E2E data. If the NE is configured
1. Choose with tunnel services,
Configuration > SDH tunnel service E2E data
ASON > Lower Order must be backed up
E2E Service before disaster
Management from restoration. The backup
the main menu. In the data is used to restore
window that is ASON lower order E2E
displayed, click Data services after the disaster
Backup. restoration.

5 Export NMS Mandatory

configuration data. Export the configuration
1. Choose file of the target NE
Administration > from the NMS for
Back Up/Restore disaster restoration.
NMS Data > Import/
Export Script File
from the main menu.
6 Perform disaster Mandatory

restoration.
1. In the dialog box that
shows NMS script
exported successfully,
click Restore Data
with NE
Configuration File.
2. In the Restore Data
with NE
Configuration File
dialog box, click
Download to NE.
3. When the
downloading is
complete, click
Activate NE to
activate the NE
configuration file.
4. After the
configuration file is
activated, click Export
Logs.

7 Perform the following Mandatory

operations after disaster
restoration:
● Restore the script
export mode.
● Manually restore the
configuration data
that cannot be
restored during
disaster restoration.
● Upload NE data. This
operation is
mandatory.
● Manually restore the
configuration data
that cannot be
uploaded.

Commissioning Guide (U2000) 14 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment
14 Checklist for Commissioning During

Deployment
Correct setting and commissioning of each system parameter is the precondition

for ensuring normal network operation.
Check the configurations of NEs and boards according to Table 14-1 and rectify
inappropriate configurations, for example incorrect parameter settings and
incomplete parameter settings.
Table 14-1 Checklist for commissioning during deployment

Task Item
Basic NE and Communication between NEs on the network is normal,

network logins to the NEs are successful, and the settings of the basic
configuration communication parameters are the same as planned.
The settings of all service boards parameters, such as the

wavelength, FEC type, board mode, and port type, are the
same as planned.
All cross-connection configurations are the same as planned.
All logical fibers are created as planned.
All OCh trails are searched for and created.
The related network system functions, such as the functions

of synchronizing NE time with NMS time, monitoring
performance, and configuring the optical doctor, are correctly
configured based on the project plan.
Optical power Check whether the input and output optical power of each
commissioning line board satisfy requirements.
Check whether the input and output optical power of each

tributary board satisfy requirements.

Commissioning Guide (U2000) 14 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment
Task Item
Check whether the gain setting and input optical power of

each OA board satisfy requirements. To be specific, check
whether:
● The gain of the OA board is equal to or close to the
minimum nominal gain.
● The input optical power of the OA board is equal to or
close to the nominal input optical power.
Check whether the single-wavelength optical power flatness is

within the range specified by the following expression:
nominal single-wavelength optical power ± 3 dB.
● No BEFFEC_EXC alarm exists.

● The FEC_AFT_COR_ER of the link is 0.
● The FEC_UNCOR_BLOCK_CNT of the link is 0.
Service and Each service is correctly configured.

feature
configuration Protection schemes and system features are correctly
configured.
NE data NE data is correctly backed up on the NMS server or client.

backup

OSN 9800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform 15 Analyzing and Handling Common Deployment
Commissioning Guide (U2000) Problems
15 Analyzing and Handling Common

Deployment Problems
This chapter describes the methods for analyzing and handling the common
problems that may happen during the deployment process. You need to analyze
and handle problems according to actual situations.
15.1 OSC/ESC Conflict

This section describes workarounds and solutions to the problem associated with
frequent switching between OSC and ESC channels during the deployment
15.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports
Use the NMS to disable the unused auxiliary ports.
15.1 OSC/ESC Conflict

This section describes workarounds and solutions to the problem associated with
frequent switching between OSC and ESC channels during the deployment
Prerequisites

NMS
During the deployment commissioning phase, the commissioning of optical power
for a line board is not complete. When this occurs, the ECC link is unstable and the
OSC and ESC channels may be frequently switched. The symptoms are as follows:
● As shown on the NMS, the NE is occasionally unreachable. A query of the
WDM-side alarms for the corresponding OTU or line boards shows that the
power_high or power_low alarm is reported.

● Switching between different channels on the ECC link frequently occurs.
Legend Information

1. On the NMS, check the value of Communication Status. Then determine
which port fails in ESC communication after a check of the value of Port.
On the DCC Rate Configuration tab page, check whether Communication Status for
a channel whose Channel is GCC0, GCC12_18, GCC12_9, or RES_ODU is displayed as
Receiving Failed. If yes, this Port fails in ESC communication.
2. On the NMS, disable all the failed ESC channels on all the NEs on the
network.

:
● On the DCC Rate Configuration tab page, change the value of Enabled/Disabled
for all channels for the failed Port identified in step 1 to Disabled.
● If Communication Status for all channels on the specified Port is Normal, skip
the preceding sub-step.
3. After the entire system is commissioned and the optical power on the entire
line becomes stable, set the enable status of the ESC channels to Enabled. For
details, see step 2.
After the enable status of the ESC channels is set to Enabled, the supervisory channel on
the ECC route is automatically switched to the ESC channel.
15.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports

Use the NMS to disable the unused auxiliary ports.
Prerequisite
The commissioning of the entire system must be complete.

NMS
The auxiliary ports that are not currently used must be disabled. If they are
required in a subsequent phase, enable these auxiliary ports.
NOTICE
Disabling the unused auxiliary ports may make NEs go offline.

Legend Information

1. Set the unused serial port to disabled.
:
● Deselect the Enable Serial Port Access check box.
● If you select the Enable Serial Port Access check box, Baud Rate must be set. You
are advised to set Baud Rate to 19200.
2. Optional:
Set the unused ETH/NMETH port to Disabled.

: Set Enabled/Disabled of the unused port to Disabled.

3. Optional:
Set the two NMETH ports to disabled.
: Deselect the Enable Ethernet Access check box.

OSN 9800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform 16 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and
Commissioning Guide (U2000) Configuration
16 Reference Operations for the

Commissioning and Configuration
This chapter lists the reference operations for the commissioning and
configuration. You can perform proper operations according to the network
condition.
16.1 Configuring the NE Data

Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure
the NE first so that the NMS can manage and operate the NE.
16.2 Configuring Wavelength Grooming
This chapter describes the configuration of optical cross-connections. Flexible
service grooming at the optical layer is implemented through optical cross-
connections.
16.3 Configuring the NE Time
Time consistency between the NMS/Web LCT and NEs is very important for
troubleshooting and network monitoring. You should set the NMS/Web LCT time
and NE time before service configuration.
16.4 Performance Management
To ensure normal functioning of a network, the network management and
maintenance personnel should periodically check and monitor the network by
taking proper performance management measures.
16.5 Modifying the Attributes of NEs
After an NE is configured, you can modify the attributes of the NE based on the
following task sets.
16.6 Modifying the Boards Configuration
After a board is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the
board based on the following task sets.
16.7 Modifying the Fibers Configuration
After a fiber is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the
fiber based on the following task sets.
16.8 Creating a Single NE
After the NE is created, you can use the NMS to manage the NE. Although
creating a single NE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can

use this method regardless of whether the data is configured on the NE or not.
Creating NEs one by one is applicable no matter what way of communication an
NE adopts. The NEs that use serial ports to communicate do not support the NE
search function and you must create them one by one.
16.9 Creating Virtual NE
This section describes how to create virtual NE
16.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User
During a new deployment, after the root/lct NE user creates the NE, this user can
create another NE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.
16.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode
In Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs
and inside NEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating
fiber connections in the list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable
to the scenario where you create a few fiber connections only.
16.12 Configuring the Edge Port
An edge port refers to the port that is connected to another NE by fiber. Setting
an edge port is to set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this
NE and another NE.
16.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection
The intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board that performs
grooming at the optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through
the creation of single-board optical cross-connection.
16.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes
Port attributes of WDM boards need to be set to meet the engineering
requirements. Every board has its own specific parameters, but the parameters are
set in the same way. All port parameters can be queried.
16.15 Configuring Board SDH Interface Attributes
Configure the port attributes of SDH boards to meet the engineering
16.16 Monitoring Wavelengths by Using the Spectrum Analyzer Board
If the system requires the multi-channel spectrum analyzer board, you need to
enable the multi-channel spectrum analyzer board to monitor wavelengths. The
station that is configured with the multi-channel spectrum analyzer boards usually
uses the multi-channel spectrum analyzer boards to check the OSNR of a single
wavelength and check whether certain wavelengths are dropped.
16.17 Opening/Closing Lasers
This section describes the basic method of opening and closing lasers during the
detection of faults and the commissioning.
16.18 Open and Close the Laser on the SDH Board
You can turn off or turn on a laser when necessary. For example, if an optical port
does not carry services, you can turn off the laser to prevent hazardous laser
radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage. You can turn on the
laser when the optical port needs to carry services.
16.19 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards

If the wavelength received on the IN port of a board is inconsistent with that

specified by Receive Wavelength, services will be unavailable. When this occurs,
change the value of Receive Wavelength to the actual receive wavelength.
16.20 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)
The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser
when the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends
short pulse, rather than remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is
connected. In this way, the output optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents
eye injury.
16.21 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board
Automatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser
when there is no input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For
example, when an optical interface board does not bear services, a fault occurs on
the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost, the laser is automatically turned
off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the service life of the laser,
and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye
damage.
16.22 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board
damage.
16.23 Setting the NULL Mapping Status
Some OTU boards in the NG WDM equipment support the OTN NULL mapping
detection. For the channel where no signals are input, the NMS can be used to set
the NULL mapping status to Enabled. By checking OTN overheads, the channel
status in the network can be monitored.
16.24 Configuring Path Binding
By configuring path binding, you can realize inverse multiplexing of client side
signals to multiplex the higher order signal accessed from the client side to several
channels of lower order signals. In this way, the bandwidth of the optical port
decreases.
16.25 Locking Wavelength by WMU Board
the SCC. To achieve the function, the OTU board and NE where the monitored
wavelength is located must be configured on the , and the intra-subrack and inter-
subrack communication must be normal.
16.26 Querying and Setting the Service Type on the Client Side of a Board
You can query or set on the NMS the type of client services of a board to ensure
that the service type on the client side of the board is correct.
16.27 Setting the FEC Mode
This section describes the basic method for setting the FEC mode and thus having
the board work in the mode.

16.28 Enabling the FEC Function

This section describes the basic method for enabling the FEC function on a board.
16.29 Enabling and Disabling LPT
When the overhead byte supporting the LPT protocol is added in the frame format
of the WDM-side signals, the running status of the network access point or the
service network can be monitored.
16.30 Setting the Speed Level of Fans
This section describes how to set the speed level of fans.
16.31 Configuring Ethernet Boards
During the service configuration or test on an Ethernet board, the Ethernet board
attributes must be configured.
16.32 Configuring the PRBS Test
On the NMS, enable the meter board to send PRBS signals, and the client side and
WDM side of the auxiliary board to transparently transmit the PRBS signals. In this
way, you can perform the bit error test of the transmission link without connecting
a meter to the equipment during the deployment.
16.33 Managing NE Power Consumption
You can configure power consumption monitoring and energy conservation for an
NE, to ensure that energy conservation and environment protection can be
achieved when the NE runs in the normal state.
16.34 Measuring Trail Latency
The latency must satisfy high requirements for the transmission system. duration
of source-sink signal transmission can be learned by measuring the trail latency.
This helps appraise the trail transmission performance and determine a less time-
consuming trail to meet the short-latency requirements for a network.
16.35 Enabling the ASON Feature
The NE obtains the ASON feature after this feature is enabled. The ASON feature
is disabled by default during delivery.
16.36 Configuring Housekeeping Alarm Inputs
When there are alarm inputs on third-party equipment, the housekeeping alarm
input parameters must be set so that the alarms on third-party equipment can be
managed.
16.1 Configuring the NE Data

Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure
the NE first so that the NMS can manage and operate the NE.
16.1.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually

By configuring NE data manually, you can configure the board slot information of
an NE.
Prerequisite
● You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.


NMS
NG WDM equipment does not support NE preconfiguration.

1. Double-click the optical NE with unconfigured NE on the Main Topology.
Then, double-click the unconfigured NE in the left-hand pane and the NE
Configuration Wizard dialog box is displayed.
2. Select Manual Configuration and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is
displayed, indicating that manual configuration clears the data on the NE
side.
3. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that manual
configuration interrupts the service on the NE.
4. Click OK. The Set NE Attribute dialog box is displayed.
5. Optional: If you need to modify the NE Attribute, set NE Name, Equipment
Type, NE Remarks, Shelf Type, and so on.
● For OptiX OSN 9800 U32 slave subrack, Service Type and Cross-Connect Capacity
must be set based on the current license requirements. In addition, Service Type must
be the actual subrack type; otherwise, the NE cannot properly function.
● For OptiX OSN 9800 U64 slave subrack, Service Type and Cross-Connect Capacity
must be set based on the current license requirements. In addition, Service Type must
be the actual subrack type; otherwise, the NE cannot properly function.
6. Click Next, and the NE slot window is displayed.
7. Optional: Click Query Logical Information to query the logical boards of the
NE.
8. Optional: Click Query Physical Information to query the physical boards of
the NE.
9. Optional: Right-click on the slot to add a board.
10. Click Next to display the Send Configuration window.
11. Select Verify and Run as required and click Finish.
Verification involves running the verification command. Click Finish to deliver the
configuration to the NE and complete the basic configurations for the NE. After the
verification is successful, the NE starts to work normally.
12. On the Main Topology, double-click the optical NE where the NE configured
previously is located. select the NE in the left pane of the window to view the
board information of the NE. If the configured board information of the NE is
displayed in the right pane, it indicates that the NE is configured successfully.

16.1.2 Replicating the NE Data

You can replicate the data of an existing NE to a new NE, if the existing NE is
already configured and if the existing NE is of the same NE type and the same NE
version as the new NE.
Prerequisite
● The type and NE software version of the source NE must be consistent with
the type and software version of the replicated NE.

NMS
Procedure
1. Double-click the unconfigured optical NE on the main topology. Then, double-
click the unconfigured NE in the left-hand pane and the NE Configuration
Wizard dialog box is displayed.
2. Select Copy NE Data and click Next. The NE Replication dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the NE from the drop-down list and click Start. The Confirm dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the replication operation copies all the data
of the source NE.
After the NE data is replicated, only the data on the NMS side is changed, but the
data on the equipment side is not changed.
4. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the replication
operation results in the loss of the original data of the NE to which the data is
copied.
5. Click OK to start the replication. The Result dialog box is displayed after a
few seconds.
6. Click Close.

16.2 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

This chapter describes the configuration of optical cross-connections. Flexible
service grooming at the optical layer is implemented through optical cross-
connections.
16.2.1 Basic Concepts

The equipment provide reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)
function. The NMS and Web LCT are used to configure the add/drop and the pass-
through state of channels, and thus the remote dynamic adjustment of channels is
enabled. Optical power equalization can be performed on pass-through and
adding wavelengths.
There are two schemes supported by the WDM equipment for wavelength
allocation:
● Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM)
● Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)
FOADM cannot reconfigure the wavelength allocation based on the requirements
of service development. The ROADM realizes the reconfiguration of wavelengths
by blocking or cross-connecting wavelengths, changing the static wavelength
allocation to a flexible and dynamic operation. Making use of the ROADM
technology, the NMS and Web LCT software adjusts the status of wavelengths
(add, drop or pass-through) to realize remote and dynamic adjustment of
wavelength status. The adjustment of a maximum of 80 wavelengths is supported.
Optical grooming is the configuration of logical wavelength routes, realized by

optical cross-connection. This function meets the user's requirement of managing
the services at the optical layer. Products provide flexible optical grooming. When
there are changes in the services, users need only to make configuration
accordingly on the NMS and Web LCT.
Different nodes adopt different methods of optical grooming. The three main
methods are listed as follows:
● WSD9 + RMU9 (WSM9): Mainly applied to inter-ring nodes and suitable for
multidimensional grooming. It supports the grooming of at most eight
dimensions.
● WSMD4+WSMD4: Mainly applied to inter-ring nodes and suitable for the
grooming in no more than four dimensions.
● ROAM (WSMD2): Applied to common nodes and suitable for two-
dimensional grooming.
Dimension refers to transmission direction. Two-dimensional grooming refers to wavelength

grooming in two transmission directions. Multidimensional grooming refers to wavelength
grooming in multiple transmission directions.
For more details of optical grooming, see the Product Description.

16.2.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow

This section describes the configuration process related to wavelength grooming.
Before configuring wavelength grooming based on the configuration flow,
complete the basic configuration of NEs according to the configuration flow of
creating a network.
Figure 16-1 Wavelength grooming configuration flow
Task Name Task Description
6.19 Required
Creating If the single-station cross-connection is configured, you can
Fiber create the logic fiber connection between NEs and between
Connections boards that are inside the NEs on the NMS. Or create the logic
in Graphic fiber connection between NEs on the NMS and the logic fiber
Mode connection between boards that are inside the NEs on the Web
LCT.
6.21 The inter-board service route can be established by creating the

Creating single-station optical cross-connection.
Single-
Station
Optical
Cross-
Connection
NOTE
The intra-board service route can be established by creating the board optical cross-
connection.

16.2.3 Configuring the ROADM

This section uses project R as an example to describe how to configure the
reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) on the NMS and Web LCT
when the WSS board is used.
16.2.3.1 Networking Diagram

Tangent rings are taken as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming
at the optical layer.
Project R adopts a tangent ring networking that comprises seven ONEs: A, B, C, D,
E, F and G. All of the ONEs are OADM stations. Figure 16-2 shows the networking
diagram of Project R.
Figure 16-2 Networking diagram of Project R
: OADM
In project R, the uni-directional services are allocated as shown in Figure 16-3.

There are two services between station B and station C. Between station A and
station B, station B and station D, station C and station D, station D and station E,
station D and station G there is one service respectively. All of the services are
STM-64 services.

Figure 16-3 Service allocation of Project R
16.2.3.2 Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation

This section describes the planning of network data, wavelength allocation and
board configuration of the project.
Service Signal Flow

Take station A and station C as an example to illustrate the configuration of
grooming at the optical layer in the WSD9+RMU9 mode and the ROAM mode.
The wavelength route at station A is shown in Figure 16-4. The wavelength route
at station C is shown in Figure 16-5.

Figure 16-4 Services at station A of Project R

Figure 16-5 Services at station C of Project R

Figure 16-6 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of Project R.
Figure 16-6 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project R

16.2.3.3 Configuration Process

This section describes the process of configuration between station A and station
C. For the configuration of other stations, see the description for station C.
Prerequisite
The related boards are configured.


Step 1 Station A configuration process
1. Click the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-
Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station
Optical Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand pane.
2. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed. Select
the corresponding source port and sink port of the optical cross-connect
service.
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click Create. The Create
Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the
button on the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No..
Open the Select Source Wavelength No. or Select Sink Wavelength No.
window. Select the wavelengths from the Available Wavelengths list. Click
to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Set the pass-

through service from west to north at station A for the service
12/1533.47/195.50 from station D to station F.
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Select the source slot, sink
slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source
Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Open the Select Wavelength window. Select the
wavelengths from the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the

wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Set the pass-through service from west to
north at station A for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station D to station F.
4. Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Optical
Cross-Connection window is displayed.
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click OK and the wavelength
selection is completed. The Create Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window
is displayed.

5. Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

6. Repeat steps Step 1.2 to Step 1.5 to create the pass-through service from
west to south at station A for the service 10/1532.68/195.60 from station D to
station E.
7. Repeat Step 1.2 to Step 1.5 to create the service added from the east at
station A for the service 18/1535.82/195.20 from station A to station B.
8. The created optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.
9. After all optical cross-connections are created, click Query in the Single-
Station Optical Cross-Connection window. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box displayed. All single-station optical cross-connections
configured are displayed in the Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection
window. Click a single-station optical cross-connection, the physical
connections of the single-station optical cross-connection are displayed in the
Detailed Physical Route window.
Step 2 Station C configuration process

1. Click the NE182 in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical
Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station
Optical Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand pane.
2. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click New. The Create
Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
button on the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No..
Open the Select Source Wavelength No. or Select Sink Wavelength No.
window. Select the wavelengths from the Available Wavelengths list. Click
to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Set the pass-

through service from west to east at station C for the service
12/1533.47/195.50 from station B to station D.
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Select the source slot, sink
slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source
Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Open the Select Wavelength window. Select the

wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Set the pass-through service from west to east
at station C for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station B to station D.
4. Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Optical
Cross-Connection window is displayed.
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click OK and the wavelength
selection is completed. The Create Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window
is displayed.
5. Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

6. Repeat Step 2.2 to Step 2.5 to create two services dropped from the west at
station C for the services 10/1532.68/195.60 and 8/1531.90/195.70 from
station B to station C.
7. Repeat Step 2.2 to Step 2.5 to create the service added from the east at
station C for the service 8/1531.90/195.70 from station C to station D.
8. After all optical cross-connections are created, click Query in the Single-
Station Optical Cross-Connection window. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box displayed. All single-station optical cross-connections
configured are displayed in the Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection
window. Click a single-station optical cross-connection, the physical
connections of the single-station optical cross-connection are displayed in the
Detailed Physical Route window.
----End
16.2.3.4 Enabling the Port Blocking Function

After the port blocking function is enabled, the VOA is set to the default value
(greater than 45 dB) and the port is blocked when no OCh trail is found at the
optical port that services traverse.
Prerequisite
● The TN11RMU9 board must be installed.
After the port blocking function is disabled, the attenuation remains the same.
When the port blocking function is enabled:
● If no optical cross-connection in automatic mode is configured at the port,
the port is in blocking state. In this case, the blocking function can be disabled
after the attenuation is adjusted manually.
● If optical cross-connections in automatic mode are configured at the port, the
OPA function automatically computes the attenuation according to the first
optical cross-connection that traverse the port. Then, the blocking function is
disabled at the port.
● After all optical cross-connections at the port are deleted, the port is in
blocking state.
When the port blocking function is disabled:
● The port is enabled with the port blocking function by default after being
powered on. However, the port blocking function is disabled after attenuation
is set.
● Attenuation at the port remains the same after optical cross-connections are
configured.

NMS or Web LCT

Legend Information

1. Enable the Port Blocking function.
: Select the optical port to be blocked, double-click the Block Port field, and
selectEnabled from the drop-down list.
16.3 Configuring the NE Time

Time consistency between the NMS/Web LCT and NEs is very important for
troubleshooting and network monitoring. You should set the NMS/Web LCT time
and NE time before service configuration.
16.3.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the NMS/Web LCT

and NEs
With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE
time and the NMS/Web LCT server time. In this way, the NMS/Web LCT is able to

record the correct time at which alarms occur and the correct time at which the
abnormal events are reported by NEs.
When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the NMS, the time at which such
alarms and events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then
the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of alarms is recorded in the NMS.
This may cause trouble in fault location. In addition, the wrong time with regard
to the occurrence of abnormal events is recorded in the NE security logs. To
ensure the NE time accuracy, the NMS provides time synchronization schemes:
synchronizing with the NMS server and synchronizing with the standard NTP
server.
The Web LCT improves the accuracy of NE time by synchronizing the NE time with the NMS
time.
● If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the NMS server, all NEs use the
NMS server time as the standard time. The NE time can be synchronized with
the NMS server time manually or automatically. The NMS server time refers
to the system time of the workstation or computer where the NMS server
resides. This scheme features easy operation, and is applicable in networks
that require a low accuracy with regard to time.
16.3.2 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with

the NMS Time
This section describes how to set automatic synchronization of the NE time with
the NMS time. After you set automatic synchronization of the NE time with the
NMS time, the NE time is automatically synchronized with the NMS time at
specified intervals.
Prerequisites
● You must have logged in to an NE.
● The NTP service must not be configured for the NMS and NEs.

Web LCT or NMS
Legend Information


1. Set the automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMS time in the
NE Explorer.
: Set Synchronous Mode to NM.
: Start Time cannot be earlier than the current time.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time
Synchronization from the Function Tree.
2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.
3. Set Start Time and Period (days), and then click Apply.
Start Time cannot be earlier than the current time.
16.3.3 Configuring the Standard NTP Key

On the NMS, you can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to
automatically synchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time. To
ensure that a reliable server is accessed, the NTP authentication function must be
started. In this case, you need to set the key and password, which are
authenticated together to check whether the server is reliable.
Prerequisites

NMS

The NTP authentication of the NE must be the same as the standard NTP server. If
the standard NTP server is configured with a key for authentication, the key of the
NE must be the same as the key of the server.
Legend Information

2. Configure the standard NTP key.
: Set Trusted to Yes

16.3.4 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP

Server Time
You can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automatically
synchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time.
Prerequisites
● The key and password of an NE must be set by using the standard NTP key
management function.
● The NE must support the standard NTP synchronization mode.

NMS
After you change the value of Synchronous Mode from NULL to Standard NTP,
when the modification is delivered to the NE, the time synchronization may be
successful though the encryption key is incorrect.
Legend Information

2. Synchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time.

:
1. Set the Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP.
2. Set the Standard NTP Authentication to Enabled.
:
1. In the pane at the bottom of the window, right-click, and then choose New from
the shortcut menu to create a standard NTP server.
2. If the Standard NTP Server Identifier is set to NE ID, enter the NE ID of the
standard NTP server and Standard NTP Server Key. If the Standard NTP Server
Identifier is set to IP, enter the IP address of the standard NTP server and the
Standard NTP Server Key.
: Click Query. Make sure that the parameter values of the NTP server are the
same as the ones set previously.
16.4 Performance Management

To ensure normal functioning of a network, the network management and
maintenance personnel should periodically check and monitor the network by
taking proper performance management measures.
16.4.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold

The NE reports an event when it detects that a performance value exceeds the
specified threshold. According to the requirement, you can set different
performance thresholds for a board. On the NMS, if you have already created a
performance threshold template, you can set performance thresholds for one or
more boards at the same time.
Prerequisite


NMS or Web LCT
Legend Information

1. Set the board performance threshold.

: In the Monitor Object pane, select the desired board, port, or channel.
: On the NMS, if you have already created a performance threshold template for
the boards, click Use Template and select the desired template. Click Open.
(Optional): Click Default to restore the default settings.
: Click Query. Confirm that the value of Threshold value is the same as the value
that is set.
16.4.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters

By setting performance monitoring parameters of a specified NE or board
properly, and starting the performance monitoring for this NE or board, you can
obtain the detailed performance record during the running of the NE or board.
This facilitates the performance status monitoring of services and NEs.
16.4.2.1 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board

You can set the monitoring status and the automatic reporting status of
monitored objects. The NMS/Web LCT monitors all the performance of board, but
the automatic reporting feature is disabled by default. You can modify the value of
the attribute according to the requirement.
Prerequisite

NMS or Web LCT
Legend Information

1. Set the performance monitoring parameters of a board.

: Select a condition from the Monitored Object Filter Criteria drop-down list.
: Set the Monitor Status. Click Apply.
16.4.2.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE

Prerequisite
The NE time must be synchronized with the NMS server time.

NMS

1. In the Main Topology view, choose Performance > Set NE Performance
Monitoring Time from the Main Menu.
2. Select NEs from the NE list. Click .

3. Select one or more NEs, and set the 15-Minute Monitoring and 24-Hour
Monitoring parameters according to the requirement.

a. Select Enabled.
b. Set the start time and date.
c. Optional: Select To: check box, set the end time and date.
● The start time must be later than the current time of the network management system
and the end time must be later than the start time.
● If the end time is not set, this indicates that the performance monitoring starts from
the start time and does not stop.
4. Click Apply and then click Close in the Result dialog box.
16.4.2.3 Viewing Statistics Group Performance of an Ethernet Port

To know the real-time statistics, you can view the statistic group performance data
of an Ethernet port.
Prerequisite
● You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher.
● The Ethernet service must be configured.
● The performance monitoring parameters must be set.

NMS

1. In the NE Explorer, select a desired board and choose Performance > RMON
Performance.
2. Click the Statistics Group tab.
3. Select a port from the Object drop down list.
4. Select the performance events. Set the Query Conditions and Display Mode.
5. Click Start and the result is shown.
16.4.2.4 Setting NE Performance Store Period

During the period of NE performance monitoring, you can change the number of
performance events that are displayed on the NMS by setting the NE performance
storage period.
Prerequisites

NMS

Legend Information
Figure 16-13 Legend information
Procedure
1. Right-click the selected NE in the Main Topology tab, select NE Explorer
from the shortcut menu to display the NE Explorer.
2. Query NE Performance Store Period.
3. Set NE Performance Store Period.

: Indicates the number of performance events that can be displayed on the NMS
during the NE performance monitoring period.
4. Optional: Set the Template of NE Performance Store Period.
– Creat a Template.
– Use the Template.

– Modify and save the Template.
– Delete the Template.

16.4.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers

After a network test or fault recovery but before the official operation, you need
to reset the performance register so that the system enters a new performance
monitoring period.
Prerequisite

NMS or Web LCT
Legend Information

1. Reset the board performance registers.

and : Select the ports and registers that you want to reset.

1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Reset Board
Performance Register from the Function Tree.
2. Select the registers that you want to reset.
3. Click Reset and the confirmation dialog box is displayed.
and : All registers supported by the NE are provided as options for setting
the register.
4. Click OK.
16.5 Modifying the Attributes of NEs

After an NE is configured, you can modify the attributes of the NE based on the
following task sets.
16.5.1 Modifying the NE Name

You can change the NE name as required. This operation does not affect the
running of the NE.
Prerequisites


NMS or Web LCT
Legend Information

1. Modify the NE name.
You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters,

symbols, and numbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the
interface, such as |, :, *, ?, ", <, and >.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute
2. Enter Name of the NE according to the customer planning, and then click
Apply.
You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters,

symbols, and numbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the
interface, such as |, :, *, ?, ", <, and >.
16.5.2 Modifying the Optical NE Name

You can change the optical NE name at any time as required with no effect on the
running of the NE.

NMS
Legend Information

Procedure
2. Modify the optical NE name.
An NE name can contain a maximum of 64 letters, symbols, and numerals, but cannot
contain the following special characters: | : * ? " < >.
3. After the optical NE name is changed successfully, the optical NE is displayed
by the new name on the Main Topology.
16.5.3 Modifying GNE Parameters

During the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the
GNE type or the communication address.


NMS
Precautions
NOTICE
This is a potential service affecting operation. Specifically, it may interrupt the

communication between a GNE and the NMS, and the communication between
the GNE and the non-gateway NEs that are managed by the GNE.
● It is not recommended to change the Port No..

● In the case of IP GNE, make sure that the IP address of the GNE is in the same network
segment as the IP address of the NMS. When the NMS server and the GNE are in
different network segments, you need to set the network port attributes of the router
through which the NMS server and the GNE are connected. In this way, the NMS can
log in to the GNE.
Legend Information


2. Close the displayed Filter dialog box. Click the GNE tab.
3. Specify GNE filter criteria.
4. Modify GNE parameter settings.
16.5.4 Changing the GNE for NEs

When the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain number
(the number is usually 50 and varies depending on different types of equipment),
change the GNE for certain NEs so that the communication between the NMS and
the NEs is not affected.

NMS
Precautions
NOTICE
This operation may interrupt the NE communication.

Legend Information
Procedure
2. Select an NE to be modified in the displayed Filter dialog box and click OK.
The NE is shown in the list of the NE tab.
3. Specify NE filter criteria.
4. Change the GNE for NEs.

16.5.5 Changing a GNE to a Non-GNE

When you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the NMS, you can
change the GNE to a non-GNE.

NMS
Impact on System
NOTICE
This operation may interrupt the service.
Legend Information
Procedure

2. Close the displayed Filter dialog box. Click the GNE tab.
3. Specify GNE filter criteria.
4. Change a GNE to a non-GNE.
Follow-up Procedure
After changing the GNE to a non-GNE, modify the attributes of the NE that uses
the GNE and select another GNE.
16.5.6 Changing a Non-GNE to a GNE

When you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the NMS, you can
change a non-GNE to a GNE.

U2000

Legend Information
Changing a Non-GNE to a GNE

2. Select an NE to be modified in the displayed Filter dialog box and click OK.
The NE is shown in the list of the NE tab.
3. Specify NE filter criteria.
4. Change a non-GNE to a GNE.

The NE is now changed to a GNE and appears in the GNE tab.
16.5.7 Deleting NEs

If you have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the NMS. Deleting an
NE removes all information of the NE from the NMS but does not affect the
running of the equipment.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" privilege or higher.
Fibers and cables connected to the NE must be deleted.
Service configuration to the NE must be deleted.

NMS or Web LCT
When the NE is not logged in, you can delete the NE on the NMS.
Legend Information

1. Delete a single WDM NE.

2. Delete NEs in batches.

a. Navigation path.

b. Delete NEs in batches.

1. In the NE List, select the NE you wish to delete, and click Delete NE.
2. Click OK.
16.6 Modifying the Boards Configuration

After a board is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the
board based on the following task sets.
16.6.1 Deleting Boards

To modify network or NE configurations, users can delete boards in the NE Panel
or Slot Layout.

Prerequisite
● The services and protection groups have been deleted.

NMS or Web LCT
Legend Information

1. Double-click an NE icon to open the NE Panel, and choose the desire subrack.
2. Delete boards.

After a board is deleted, the inactive NE-level optical cross-connections to the board
are also deleted.

1. In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout. Select the desired subrack.
2. Select the desired board and click Delete on the rightmost side.
After the board is deleted, the inactive single-station optical cross-connections are also
deleted.
16.6.2 Adding Boards

Prerequisite
● The NE has been created.
● There must be vacant slots on the NE Panel or Slot Layout.

NMS or Web LCT
Physical boards refer to the boards that are actually installed in a subrack. Logical
boards refers to the boards that are created on the NMS or Web LCT. After a
logical board is created, services can be configured on the board. Created services
are available only when the corresponding physical board is online.
Legend Information

1. In the Main topology, double-click an NE icon to open the NE Panel.
2. In the left pane on the NE Panel, select the NE for which logical boards need
to be added, and choose the desire subrack.


1. In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout.
2. Select the desired subrack, click a vacant slot, and select the desired board
from the list.
On the Web LCT, clicking Add Physical Boards adds corresponding logical boards on
all slots that house physical boards.
16.7 Modifying the Fibers Configuration

After a fiber is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the
fiber based on the following task sets.
16.7.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information

You can modify the name, attenuation, length, and medium type of a fiber/cable
according to its connection status and physical features.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.


NMS
Legend Information

2. Modify the fiber/cable information.

– Modify the name of a fiber.

– Modify the Length(km) of a fiber.
– Modify the Designed Loss(EOL)(dB) of a fiber.
– Modify the Medium Type of the fiber.

16.7.2 Deleting Fibers

When adjusting the network if you need to delete the NEs or change the links
between NEs, you need to delete the fiber connections between the NEs.
Prerequisite
There are no services on the fiber to be deleted.

NMS or Web LCT
Legend Information


2. Delete the fibers.
: To delete a fiber or cable from both the NMS database and the NE database,
right-click this fiber or cable and then choose Delete Fiber/Cable from the shortcut
menu.

NOTICE
The deletion of the fiber/cable will delete the related protection subnets, trails
and user-defined information. Exercise caution before you delete the fiber/
cable. You can export the script of the entire network first to avoid deletion by
mistake.

1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Fiber
2. Select the fiber you wish to delete, and click Delete.
3. Click OK.
16.8 Creating a Single NE

After the NE is created, you can use the NMS to manage the NE. Although
creating a single NE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can
use this method regardless of whether the data is configured on the NE or not.
Creating NEs one by one is applicable no matter what way of communication an
NE adopts. The NEs that use serial ports to communicate do not support the NE
search function and you must create them one by one.
Prerequisite

NMS or Web LCT
For NMS:
● First create a GNE, and then create a non-gateway NE.
● If the NE is not created properly or the communication between the NE and
the NMS is abnormal, the NE is displayed in gray color.
Legend Information


a.
b.
2. Create a single NE.
– Create a GNE.
– Create a subtending GNE.
The default NE user is root, and the default password is Changeme_123 or password.
3. Click OK, the cursor is displayed as "+", click on the blank space of the
physical view and the NE is created.
Result
After an NE is successfully created, the system automatically saves the
information, such as the IP address, subnet mask, and NE ID to the NMS database.

1. Click Add NE in the NE list. The Add NE dialog box is displayed.
2. Set the NE Type to Europe, enter the NE ID and Extended ID.
3. Select Gateway Type and set related parameters.
– If the gateway type is IP Gateway, set IP Address and Port.
– If the gateway type is Serial Port, set Port and Baud Rate.
You are advised to set Baud Rate to 19200bps.

– If the gateway type is SSL Gateway, set IP Address and Port.

4. Enter the User Name and the Password.
The default user name is lct and the default password is Changeme_123 or password.
5. Click OK. One entry is added in the NE list. Usually the NE communicates
normally and is in the Logged In state.
Postrequisite
follows:
● The communication between the NMS and the NE is abnormal. Check the
settings of communication parameters, such as the IP address of the NE and
NE ID.
NE user.
valid NE user.
16.9 Creating Virtual NE

This section describes how to create virtual NE
Prerequisite

U2000
Legend Information
Procedure on the U2000


a.
b.
2. Create Virtual NE.
3. Create virtual board type.

4. Add virtual board
16.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User

During a new deployment, after the root/lct NE user creates the NE, this user can
create another NE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.
Prerequisite
● The NE user must be created.
An NE user cannot log in to or manage an NE at the same time. After you use an
NE user to log in to an NE through a NMS/Web LCT server, if you use the same NE
user to log in to the same NE through another NMS/Web LCT server, the NE user
is forced to log out from the first NMS/Web LCT server.

NMS or Web LCT

Legend Information

2. Switch a logged-in NE user.

If Offline Switching is selected, the system does not check the user name and password,
and thus later login of the NE may fail, which causes the NE unreachable by the NMS.
Therefore, it is recommended not to select Offline Switching.

1. In the NE List, select one or more NEs that are logged in and click NE Logout.
The NE status becomes Not Logged In.
2. Click NE Login. The NE Login dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the User Name and the Password.

4. Click OK. In the NE List, the Login Status changes to Logged In.
16.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode

In Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs
and inside NEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating
fiber connections in the list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable
to the scenario where you create a few fiber connections only.
Prerequisite
● The board on relevant NEs must be created.
● The boards to be connected with the fiber or cable have been created.
● Before the creation of fibers, it is recommended that you set Configure
Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of the port on the
tunable OTU as the designed wavelength.

NMS
After the equipment commissioning is completed, the fiber connections might
exist on the NE. You can synchronize on the NMS the internal fiber connection
data of the NE with the NMS side.
Conflicting fibers see the different fibers configured on the NE and NMS sides.
Click Synchronize and Create Fiber/Cable, and then the conflicting fibers are
displayed in the and Uncreated Fiber in NE user interfaces. The conflicting fibers
cannot be synchronized between the NMS and the NE. In this case, based on the
networking design, delete the incorrect fibers. After that, click Create Fiber/Cable
and re-create the remaining fibers.
The NMS supports the ability to synchronize WDM fibers in batches. To do so: In the Main
Topology view, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > WDM Fiber/Cable Synchronization
from the Main Menu.

Step 1 Optional: Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode.
1. Create fibers in the synchronization mode.

: Click Synchronize, and the data of the internal fiber connections on the NMS
side and that on the NE side are displayed.
– Synchronized Fiber/Cable: Indicates the fibers that exist on both the NMS and NE
sides. NMS is the same as the fiber data on NEs.
– Uncreated Fiber in NMS: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side.
– Uncreated Fiber/Cable in NE: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NMS side.
– Fiber/Cable on the NE Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side.
– Fiber/Cable on the NMS Only: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NMS side.
: Handle different situations as follows:

– If uncreated fiber in NMS or uncreated fiber in NE exists, select all the fibers.
Click Create Fiber/Cable, and the dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The
synchronized fibers are displayed in the list of Synchronized Fiber/Cable.
– If conflicting fibers exist, fibers cannot be created. You can click Delete Fiber/
Cable to delete the uncreated fibers in NMS or uncreated fibers in NEs, and then
click Create Fiber/Cable to re-create the remaining fibers.
Step 2 Creating fiber connections in list mode.


2. Create the fiber connections in list mode.
: Select all the NEs you need to create fiber/cable.
:
1. Dual-fiber bidirectional fiber connections can be created on an NE to achieve
bidirectional transmission. When only one single-fiber unidirectional fiber connection is
created, a reverse fiber connection needs to be created.
2. Repeat this step to create multiple fiber connections.
: The source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot be edge ports.
----End

Postrequisite
After you create fiber connections, you need to scan wavelengths to ensure that
the fiber connections are correct and the line communication is available.
16.12 Configuring the Edge Port

An edge port refers to the port that is connected to another NE by fiber. Setting
an edge port is to set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this
NE and another NE.
Prerequisite

NMS or Web LCT
● The line-side ports of the FIU and the OTU do not need this configuration. By default,
such a port is a Fixed Edge Ports.
● If fiber connection between NEs has been added to a port, the port automatically
becomes the edge port of NEs.
● If fiber connection between boards that are inside the NEs has been added to a port,
the port cannot be configured as the edge port of NEs.
Legend Information

1. Configure the edge port.

When the operation is performed on the NMS, the Result dialog box is displayed,
indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
If you want to change the selected edge port, select the corresponding port from the
Selected Edge Ports, and then click to add the port to Available Edge
Ports.
16.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection

The intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board that performs
grooming at the optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through
the creation of single-board optical cross-connection.
Prerequisite

NMS or Web LCT
Legend Information


1. Create the board optical cross-connection.
: Select the Source Slot, Sink Slot, Source Port and Sink Port. Click the
button on the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Select the

wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths.

1. Click the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-
Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Board-Level Optical
Cross-Connection tab in the right-hand pane.
2. Click Create. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
button on the right of Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the

wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths.
4. Click OK. The Create Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection window is
displayed.
5. Click OK. The created single-board optical cross-connection is displayed in the
window.

16.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes

Port attributes of WDM boards need to be set to meet the engineering
Prerequisite

NMS or Web LCT
Legend Information

1. Configure the board WDM port attributes.

: When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be

queried and set from the perspective of function.
and : Select Basic Attributes, Advanced Attributes tabs. Double-click

corresponding parameter fields to enter or select parameters.
16.15 Configuring Board SDH Interface Attributes

Configure the port attributes of SDH boards to meet the engineering
Prerequisites

NMS or Web LCT

1. Configure the board SDH interface attributes.
: When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be

queried and set from the perspective of function.
: Double-click corresponding parameter fields to enter or select parameters.

16.16 Monitoring Wavelengths by Using the Spectrum

Analyzer Board
If the system requires the multi-channel spectrum analyzer board, you need to
enable the multi-channel spectrum analyzer board to monitor wavelengths. The
station that is configured with the multi-channel spectrum analyzer boards usually
uses the multi-channel spectrum analyzer boards to check the OSNR of a single
wavelength and check whether certain wavelengths are dropped.
Prerequisite
The multi-channel spectrum analyzer boards must be configured.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the MCA board and choose Configuration > WDM
Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel) and select Monitor Wavelength from the drop-
down list.
Step 3 Select the wavelength to be monitored on the board and set Wavelength
Monitor Status to Monitor. Click Apply.
Step 4 Select the board that is enabled for wavelength monitoring and choose
Configuration > Laser Spectrum Analysis from the Function Tree.
Step 5 Set Port Number and select the port to be analyzed.
Step 6 In Compensation Power(dBm), enter the optical power compensation value.
Then, click Refresh.
The default value is 20 dBm and the range is -10 dBm to 30 dBm.
Step 7 Click Query to start the spectrum analysis. The Spectrum Data, Spectrum
Waveform, and Profile are displayed in the user interface.
----End

16.17 Opening/Closing Lasers

This section describes the basic method of opening and closing lasers during the
detection of faults and the commissioning.
Prerequisites
To forcibly turn on the laser, you must first disable the automatic laser shutdown
(ALS) function. .
Impact on System
Closing the laser of the local board interrupts the services of the downstream
board.

NMS
Legend Information
Opening/Closing Lasers In the case of the WDM board

1. Open/Close the lasers in the case of the WDM board.

: Laser Status needs to be set to On or Off as required.
16.18 Open and Close the Laser on the SDH Board

You can turn off or turn on a laser when necessary. For example, if an optical port
does not carry services, you can turn off the laser to prevent hazardous laser
radiation exposure from causing permanent eye damage. You can turn on the
laser when the optical port needs to carry services.
Prerequisite
The related board must be created.

Precautions
NOTICE
If you turn off a laser, services may be interrupted or you may fail to log in to
certain NEs.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > SDH Interface
Step 2 Click By Board/Port (Channel) and select Port from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Double-click Laser Switch and set the laser status of each port to On or Off as
required.
Step 4 Click Apply. In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Prompt dialog box, click
OK.
Step 5 In the Result dialog box, click Close.
----End
16.19 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards

If the wavelength received on the IN port of a board is inconsistent with that
specified by Receive Wavelength, services will be unavailable. When this occurs,
change the value of Receive Wavelength to the actual receive wavelength.
Prerequisite

NMS or Web LCT
Legend Information

1. Configure the receive wavelength of boards.

: Select the corresponding wavelength according to the requirements.
16.20 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)

The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser
when the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends
short pulse, rather than remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is
connected. In this way, the output optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents
eye injury.
Prerequisite
Service Type of the board on the client side must be set to ISC1G or ISC2G.
Applies to TN12TQM, TN12LQMS, TN12LQMD, TN11LOM, TN12LOM, TN12LWXS,
and TN13LQM board.

NMS or Web LCT

Precautions
NOTICE
● Set the LPT Enabled and Automatic Laser Shutdown functions to Disabled
before the OFC function is enabled.
● The OFC function cannot coexist with protection.
Legend Information

1. Enable the open fiber control (OFC).
16.21 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM

Board

damage.
Prerequisite
The tributary board must be created.

NMS or Web LCT
Legend Information

1. Set the automatic laser shutdown on the WDM board.

: Click Query and the attribute of Automatic Laser Shutdown for the port or
channel are shown in the window.
: This operation may cause service interruption or NE login failure. You can
confirm the settings according to actual service requirement. When this parameter is
set to Enabled, the relevant laser on the client side of the board is shut down
automatically when an R_LOS alarm is reported from the WDM side of the board.
16.22 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH

Board
damage.
Prerequisite
The optical interface board must be created.

NMS/Web LCT (NMSis recommended)

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Automatic Laser
Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set Automatic Shutdown to Enabled. Set the On Period (ms), Off Period (ms)
and Continuously On-test Period (ms).
Step 3 Click Apply. The Resultdialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is
successful. Then, click Close.
----End
16.23 Setting the NULL Mapping Status

Some OTU boards in the NG WDM equipment support the OTN NULL mapping
detection. For the channel where no signals are input, the NMS can be used to set
the NULL mapping status to Enabled. By checking OTN overheads, the channel
status in the network can be monitored.

Prerequisite
The OTU boards or tributary boards and line boards must be configured. For
details, see Hardware Description.

NMS/Web LCT (NMSis recommended)
Figure 16-36 shows the common networking mode for NULL mapping detection.
Figure 16-36 Networking diagram for NULL mapping test
Precaution
NOTICE
The PRBS test and the NULL mapping test cannot be performed at the same time.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface
Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-
down list.
Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click the NULL Mapping Status and
select Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Start the NE Explorer of the opposite NE. Select a board and choose
Configuration > OTN Overhead Management > OPU Overhead.
Step 6 Check if the value of PT Received is the same as the PT to be received.
----End

16.24 Configuring Path Binding

By configuring path binding, you can realize inverse multiplexing of client side
signals to multiplex the higher order signal accessed from the client side to several
channels of lower order signals. In this way, the bandwidth of the optical port
decreases.
Prerequisite
Applies to the TN11TDX board.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Path Binding from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Configure, and the Configure Path Binding dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Configure relevant information of the path binding service, including the Slot ID,
Port ID, and Direction. Configure relevant information of the path binding service,
including the Slot ID, Port ID, and Direction.
For the bound path, ODU1-1 is required. If you want to select other paths as the bound
path, you must select paths in the order from ODU1-2 to ODU1-4 according to the actual
service situation.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are
set.
----End
16.25 Locking Wavelength by WMU Board

the SCC. To achieve the function, the OTU board and NE where the monitored
wavelength is located must be configured on the , and the intra-subrack and inter-
subrack communication must be normal.
Prerequisite

Ensure the normal DCN communication between NEs.

The WMU board must be created after the physical WMU board is installed.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the WMU board and choose Configuration >
Wavelength Monitoring Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Wavelength Monitoring Unit field, and choose an optical port of the
WMU board from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click Query. The information about the wavelength monitoring that has been
configured is displayed.
Step 4 Click New. The New Monitored Object dialog box is displayed. Select the NE and
the OTU board where the wavelengths to be detected are located.
Click New. The system displays all the OTU boards that are not configured with wavelength
monitoring but support wavelength monitoring.
Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 A message is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close.
The wavelength monitoring that has been created is displayed in the user
interface.
● If the logical fiber connections are configured, click Calculate OTU. The system
calculates all the OTU boards that have been logically connected based on the fiber
connection relationship. Click Apply so that the wavelength monitoring configuration of
the OTU boards is delivered.
● After you click Calculate OTU, if some of the displayed boards do not need wavelength
monitoring, click Delete to remove them one by one.
----End

16.26 Querying and Setting the Service Type on the

Client Side of a Board
You can query or set on the NMS the type of client services of a board to ensure
that the service type on the client side of the board is correct.
Prerequisites
Impact on System
May cause service interruption or NE login failure.

NMS
Legend Information
Procedure
1. Query and set the service type on the client side of a board.

16.27 Setting the FEC Mode

This section describes the basic method for setting the FEC mode and thus having
the board work in the mode.
Prerequisites
The board must be created.
Impact on System
When mode of the FEC selected for the upstream board is inconsistent with mode
of the FEC selected for the downstream board, the services may be interrupted.

NMS
Legend Information


1. Set the FEC mode.
16.28 Enabling the FEC Function

This section describes the basic method for enabling the FEC function on a board.
Prerequisites
The correlative board must be created.
Impact on System
None

NMS
There are two options for the FEC working state: enabled and disabled. The state
is enabled by default. Normally, the state should be enabled to ensure that the
board has the FEC function. The state is set to disabled only during the test for
evaluating the coding gain brought by FEC.
Legend Information


1. Enable the FEC function.
16.29 Enabling and Disabling LPT

When the overhead byte supporting the LPT protocol is added in the frame format
of the WDM-side signals, the running status of the network access point or the
service network can be monitored.
Prerequisite
The corresponding OTU units must be created.
The services on the boards must be normal and must be of no protection.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface

Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click the Basic Attributes tab. Enable or disable the LPT.
● To enable the LPT, select the desired Optical Interface/Channel, double-click
LPT Enabled, and choose Enabled from the drop-down list. Click Apply.
● To disable the LPT, select the desired Optical Interface/Channel, double-click
LPT Enabled, and choose Disabled from the drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The
value of LPT Enabled is the same as the one set previously.
----End
16.30 Setting the Speed Level of Fans

This section describes how to set the speed level of fans.
Prerequisite
Fan Speed Mode must be Adjustable Speed Mode.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Fan Attribute from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select a shelf for which you want to change the fan speed from the Subrack drop-
down list.
Step 3 Select Adjustable Speed Mode in the Fan Speed Mode pane.
Step 4 Set Fan Speed Level.
The values of Fan Speed Level are as follows:

● For the OptiX OSN 9800 U serial and M serial subracks: Stop, Low, Medium-Low,
Medium, Medium-High, and High.
Step 5 Click OK in the dialog box displayed. Click Apply.
----End
16.31 Configuring Ethernet Boards

During the service configuration or test on an Ethernet board, the Ethernet board
attributes must be configured.
Follow the process given below to configure an Ethernet board:

16.31.1 Configuring Internal Ports

The attributes of Ethernet ports need to be configured when Ethernet boards are
configured with services or used for tests. You can configure the internal ports
(VCTRUNK ports) for an Ethernet board.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet boards must be created.

NOTICE
To ensure the availability of an end-to-end Ethernet service, make sure that the
port attributes of the Ethernet boards at the two ends of the services are the
same.
The configuration items are different according to different boards.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and select Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface in the Function Tree. Select the
Internal Port option button.
Step 2 Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the TAG. Click Apply.
Step 3 Optional: Click Encapsulation/Mapping tab and set the port encapsulation and
mapping. Click Apply.
This tab is just for the EGSH board setting.

The GFP is the most widely applied general encapsulation and mapping protocol. It provides a
general mechanism to adapt higher-layer client signal flows into the transport network and can
map the variable-length payload into the byte-synchronized transport path. The client signals
can be protocol data units (PDU-oriented, such as IP/PPP and Ethernet), block code data (block-
code oriented, such as Fiber Channel and ESCON), or common bit data streams. The GFP
protocol complies with ITU-T G.7041.
Step 4 Click the Network Attributes tab and set the Port Type of the internal port. Click
Apply.

● In the case of UNI, the port processes the TAG attribute of 802.1Q and the port is with
the Tag Aware/Access/Hybrid attribute.
● In the case of C-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It
determines that the data packet carries C-VLAN tag and processes the data packet
based on the C-VLAN tag.
● In the case of S-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It
determines that the data packet carries S-VLAN tag and processes the data packet
based on the S-VLAN tag.
● When the working mode of a port is NNI mode, that is, when the port functions as a
network-to-network interface, it is used for connecting to another network node.
Step 5 Optional: Click Bound Path tab, click Query to browse the bound paths.
This tab is just for the EGSH board setting.
Step 6 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the Broadcast Packet Suppression
Threshold, Loop Detection, Loop Port Shutdown etc. parameters of the port.
● Broadcast packet suppression threshold is based on the proportion between the

broadcast packet and all packets. The value ranges from 10% to 100%, with an
increment of 10%.
set.
----End
16.31.2 Configuring External Ports

The attributes of Ethernet ports need to be configured when Ethernet boards are
configured with services or used for tests. You can configure the external ports for
an Ethernet board.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet board must be created.

Precaution
NOTICE
To ensure the availability of an end-to-end Ethernet service, make sure that the
port attributes of the Ethernet boards at the two ends of the services are the
same.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the appropriate Ethernet board and then select
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the
Function Tree. Select the External Port option button.
Step 2 Click the Basic Attributes tab and set the basic attributes of the external port.
● Working mode: If Working Mode at one end is set to Auto-Negotiation, Working

Mode at the other end also must be set to Auto-Negotiation. Otherwise, the services
are interrupted.
● MAC loopback and PHY loopback: They are used for locating faults and are service-
affecting. The two are mutually exclusive. When the value of MAC loopback is set to
Inloop, the value of PHY loopback is set to Non-Loopback automatically. The same
applies to the reverse case.
Step 3 Click Apply.

Step 4 Click Flow Control tab, set the Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode and
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode of the external port.
● Autonegotiation flow control mode: Select this mode when the working mode of the
port is Auto-Negotiation. Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control means the port only
transmits and does not receive flow control frames. Enable Symmetric Flow Control
means that the port is able to transmit and receive only PAUSE frames. Enable
Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control means that the symmetric or dissymmetric
flow control mode is selected according to the auto-negotiation.
● Non-Autonegotiation flow control mode: Select this mode when the working mode of
the port is not Auto-Negotiation. Enable Symmetric Flow Control means that the
port is able to transmit and receive PAUSE frames. Send Only means that the port is
able to transmit PAUSE frames only. Receive Only means the port is able to receive
PAUSE frames only.
Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the TAG of the port. Click Apply.
Step 7 Click Network Attributes tab, set the port attributes of the external port.
● In the case of UNI/NNI, the port processes the TAG attribute of 802.1Q and the port is
with the Tag Aware/Access/Hybrid attribute.
● In the case of C-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It
determines that the data packet carries C-VLAN tag and processes the data packet
based on the C-VLAN tag.
● In the case of S-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It
determines that the data packet carries S-VLAN tag and processes the data packet
based on the S-VLAN tag.

Step 8 Click Apply.

Step 9 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the Broadcast Packet Suppression
Threshold, Loop Detection, Loop Port Shutdown etc. parameters of the port.
● Broadcast packet suppression threshold is based on the proportion between the

broadcast packet and all packets. The value ranges from 10% to 100%, with an
increment of 10%.
Step 10 Click Apply.

set.
----End
16.32 Configuring the PRBS Test

On the NMS, enable the meter board to send PRBS signals, and the client side and
WDM side of the auxiliary board to transparently transmit the PRBS signals. In this
way, you can perform the bit error test of the transmission link without connecting
a meter to the equipment during the deployment.
16.32.1 PRBS Test

If no commissioning instruments are available in the network maintenance phase
or on a new network where no services are deployed, you can perform a self-
transmit and self-receive test using the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS)
function to check whether links on each section are normal by performing
loopback operations section by section.
During a PRBS application, a local board with the PRBS test function sends PRBS
codes and analyzes the PRBS codes loopbacked from the peer end. By comparing
the loopbacked PRBS codes with the PRBS codes that should be received according
to the theoretical calculation, the local board determines whether equipment and
the transmission line are normal. If a board on which a PRBS test has been started
does not receive the PRBS test signals that the board has sent, the board reports a
PRBS_LSS alarm. PRBS applications can be divided into four categories by signal
sending position, as shown in Figure 16-40, Figure 16-41, Figure 16-42 and
Figure 16-43 respectively.

Figure 16-40 PRBS application(on the client side): a client-side inloop of PRBS
signals transmitted by the tester board
Figure 16-41 PRBS application(on the client side): an ODUK loopback of PRBS
signals transmitted by the tributary board
Figure 16-42 PRBS application(on the client side): a client-side inloop of PRBS
signals transmitted by the tributary board

Figure 16-43 PRBS application (on the WDM side)
NOTICE
● When a PRBS test is in progress, only query operations can be performed, no

configurations can be delivered to involved boards, the involved boards cannot
carry any services, and the original services on the boards will be interrupted.
● Tester board: generates PRBS test signals and monitors the loopbacked PRBS test signals
from the remote board. By comparing the transmitted and received PRBS test signals,
the board determines whether the current link and equipment are normal. For example,
an OTU board that supports the PRBS function can be configured as a tester board to
send PRBS signals, as shown in Figure 16-40.
● Auxiliary board: connects a tester board and the network under test and transparently
transmits the PRBS test signals. On the auxiliary boards at the near end, PRBS Test
Status need to be set to Enabled, only when client-side services are other than OTN
services.
● When a tributary or line board is used as a tester or auxiliary board, cross-connections
need to be configured to form a service path.
● The PRBS test function is targeted for use during deployment and fault location. After
deployment and fault location, users must set PRBS Test Status to Disabled.
● PRBS codes vary according to the client-side service types. Therefore, to perform a
client-side PRBS test, users must ensure that the client-side service types for the tester
board and auxiliary board are the same.
The PRBS test is applicable to four networking modes, as provided in Table 16-1.

Table 16-1 PRBS applications

Test Mode Service Type Networking Diagram
Client- The OTN

side optical service/SDH
PRBS port services
test direction:
PRBS
signals
transmitt
ed by the
tester
board
The Non-OTN
backplan service
e
direction:
PRBS
signals
transmitt
ed by the
tributary
board
(an
ODUK
loopback
)
The OTN service

backplan
e
direction:
PRBS
signals
transmitt
ed by the
tributary
board (a
client-
side
loopback
)
WDM-side PRBS N/A

test

16.32.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary

Board
Before you configure a PRBS test on the meter board, set PRBS Test Status of the
auxiliary boards at the local and remote ends.
Prerequisite
The corresponding OTU must be configured.
The service type must be set according to the board type.
The WDM-side outloop, client-side inloop, or fiber loopback is configured on the

remote auxiliary board based on the networking requirements.

Precautions
NOTICE
● Create cross-connections between the IP port and the ClientLP port before
enabling the PRBS on the client side. Otherwise, the PRBS test will fail to be
enabled. Do not delete the created cross-connections after the PRBS is enabled.
● After the PRBS Test Status is enabled, do not perform any other operations,
such as modifying the service type, opening or closing a laser, or configuring a
loopback.
● After the PRBS test is complete, stop the test. Then, configure the PRBS Test
Status of the board to Disabled.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the OTU board which is used as an auxiliary board and
choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-
down list.
Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click PRBS Test Status field, and
select Enabled.

Step 4 Click Apply. A message is displayed indicating that the operation was successful.
Click Close.
Set the service type of the auxiliary board before configuring the PRBS test status.
----End
16.32.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter Board

In the PRBS test, the OTU sends out the PRBS code and monitors the PRBS code
that is looped back from the remote board. After comparing the PRBS code that is
sent with the code that is received, you can determine that the current link or
equipment is normal or not.
Prerequisite
Before enabling the PRBS test on the client side, ensure that the client-side lasers
of all OTU boards are turned on.
When enabling the PRBS test, you need to enable PRBS Test Status of the port on
the OTU board which is used as auxiliary board.


Precautions
NOTICE
When the PRBS test is performed, it is not allowed to access services. A PRBS test
is used only in deployment. After the deployment, set PRBS Test Status to
Disabled.
Before starting the PRBS function on the client side, create a cross-connection
between the IP and clientLP ports; otherwise, starting the PRBS function fails.
After the PRBS function is started, the cross-connection cannot be deleted.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the OTU board which is used as meter board and choose
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function tree.
Step 2 Select a channel or a port in the right pane, and set Duration and Measured in
Time.
Measured in Time: The unit is second, 10 minute, or hour. Select a proper unit based on the
actual situation.
Step 3 Optional: Choose Accumulating Mode. The test result is displayed in the
coordinates pane in an accumulative manner.
In a cumulative mode, the bit error value in the n second is the sum of the bit errors in the
previous n seconds.
Step 4 Click Start to Test. A dialog box indicating that this operation may interrupt the
service is displayed.
Step 5 Click OK to start the PRBS test.
Step 6 After the test is complete, view the test result in the coordinates pane.
● If the green histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the equipment is normally
working.
● If the red histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, bit errors exist on the line.
● If the yellow histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the line might be
interrupted or have loud noise.
----End
16.32.4 Performing the PRBS Test in E2E Mode

This topic describes how to perform the pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS)
test for an OCh trail in end-to-end (E2E) mode to determine whether the OCh
trail is properly working.

Prerequisite
Before enabling the PRBS test on the client side, ensure that the client-side lasers
of all OTU boards are turned on.
When enabling the PRBS test, you need to enable PRBS Test Status of the port on
the OTU board which is used as auxiliary board.

NMS
Precautions
When the PRBS test is performed, it is not allowed to access services. A PRBS test
is used only in deployment. After the deployment, set PRBS Test Status to
Disabled.
The PRBS test and the NULL mapping test cannot be performed at the same time.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > WDM Trail Management from the main menu.
At this moment, the Manage WDM Trail-[Main Window] window and the Set
Trail Browse Filter Criteria dialog box are displayed.
Step 2 Specify the filter criteria and click Filter All. Bidirectional OCh trails are displayed.
Step 3 Right-click the desired OCh trails and choose PRBS Test, and the PRBS Test

Step 4 Select one OCh trail and in the Set Test Parameters, set Duration and Measured
in Time.
Measured in Time: The unit is second, 10-minute, or hour. Select a proper unit based on the
actual situation.
Step 5 Optional: Select Accumulating Mode. The test result is displayed in the
coordinates pane in an accumulative manner.
In a cumulative mode, the bit error value in the n second is the sum of the bit errors in the
previous n seconds.
Step 6 Click Start to Test. A dialog box indicating that this operation may interrupt the
service is displayed.
Step 7 Click OK to start the PRBS test.
Step 8 After the test is complete, view the test result in the coordinates pane.

● If the green histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the equipment is normally
working.
● If the red histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, bit errors exist on the line.
● If the yellow histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the line might be
interrupted or have loud noise.
----End
16.33 Managing NE Power Consumption

You can configure power consumption monitoring and energy conservation for an
NE, to ensure that energy conservation and environment protection can be
achieved when the NE runs in the normal state.
16.33.1 Monitoring NE Power Consumption

You can monitor the power consumption of an NE, to ensure that the actual NE
configuration does not exceed the maximum power consumption.
16.33.1.1 Querying the Power Consumption of an NE

After you query the power consumption of an NE, if the power consumption
exceeds the threshold, you need to configure energy conservation for the NE in a
timely manner.
Prerequisites

You can use this function to query the power consumption threshold, and the
nominal and current power consumption of an NE.
You can query the power consumption of an NE on a per-subrack basis. The power
consumption of an NE is displayed in the NE/Shelf Name format.
The nominal power consumption of an NE is the sum of the nominal power
consumption of all boards on the NE.
The current power consumption of an NE is the actual power consumption of a
running NE.
Legend Information

Procedure
Step 1 Enter NE Power Option.
Step 2 Select NE and query the power.
----End

16.33.1.2 Querying the Power Consumption of a Board

You can query the power consumption of a board to learn the board that has
abnormally high power consumption, which causes high NE power consumption
or threshold crossing.
Prerequisites
.

NMS
● You can use this function to query the logical board status, board nominal
power consumption, physical board type, board current power consumption,
and other information.
● The nominal power consumption of a board is a fixed value and is coded in
the software.
● The current power consumption of a board is the actual power consumption
of a running board.
Legend Information
Procedure
Step 1 Enter Board Power option.

Step 2 Select board and query power consumption
----End
16.33.2 Configuring Energy Conservation for an NE

You can configure energy conservation for an NE to dynamically adjust the power
consumption of the NE. In this way, environment protection and energy
conservation are achieved.
Prerequisites

U2000

There are five power saving modes of an NE: Idle Boards, Idle Low Order Cross-
Connect Board, Idle Ports, Standby Cross-Connect Board, and Idle Cross-
Connect Bus. The default value for Idle Cross-Connect Bus is Enable Power
Saving, and cannot be changed. The modes Idle Boards, Idle Low Order Cross-
Connect Board, and Idle Ports can be set to Enable Power Saving or Disable
Power Saving. The item Standby Cross-Connect Board can be set to Hot
Standby or Warm Standby (the power saving state).
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration >
Power Management from the Main Menu. Click the Power Saving
Configuration tab.
Step 2 In the left-hand Physical Root, select one or more NEs, and click .
NOTICE
If you enable energy conservation for idle ports, the lasers of the unused optical
ports are completely turned off. If the optical ports carry services or DCN channels
even if the ports are not used, after you enable energy conservation, services may
be interrupted or communication faults may occur at the optical ports.
● If you enable energy conservation for an NE, you need to set the optical ports
to Unused. To achieve this, do as follows: In the NE Explorer, select the
corresponding board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree. Set Channel Use Status to Unused.
● You can set the optical ports to Unused regardless of whether the optical ports
carry services. When enabling energy conservation for idle ports, ensure that
the optical ports do not carry services or DCN channels before setting them to
Unused.
If you delete logical boards from an NE with energy conservation enabled or
disable all DCN channels, ESC communication and services will be affected.
Step 3 Set one or all of Idle Boards, Idle Low Order Cross-Connect Board, and Idle
Ports to Enable Power Saving.
● If you enable energy conservation for idle boards, energy conservation is enabled for the
standby boards which are not added with logical boards and not configured with
services on the subrack.
● If you enable energy conservation for a lower order cross-connect board that is not
used, when you configure a lower order cross-connection for the board, the lower-order
cross-connection is available after a delay of 1 or 2 seconds.
Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the set values.
----End
16.33.3 Viewing the Network-wide NE Power Consumption

Report
By viewing the network-wide power consumption report, you can learn the
network-wide power consumption statistics, annually-conserved energy, and other
information.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher.
Querying the network-wide NE power consumption is time-consuming. If the
number of NEs queried exceeds 100, a dialog box is displayed asking you whether
to continue.
The network-wide NE power consumption report is based on NEs instead of
subracks.

NMS
Legend Information
Procedure
Step 1 Enter Power Consumption Statistics Report Option.

Step 2 Select NE and query Power Consumption Statistics Report .
It is recommended that you do not select more than 100 NEs at a time. Otherwise, the
operation may take a long time.
Click Print to print the NE power consumption report.
Click Save As to save the report to any directory.
----End
16.34 Measuring Trail Latency

The latency must satisfy high requirements for the transmission system. duration
of source-sink signal transmission can be learned by measuring the trail latency.
This helps appraise the trail transmission performance and determine a less time-
consuming trail to meet the short-latency requirements for a network.

Prerequisites
● You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
● Only a bidirectional ODUk/ODUCn/OTUk/OTUCn trail supports latency
measurement.
● Deactivated or locked trails do not support latency measurement.
● For latency measurement on different paths, the tributary boards, line boards,
and regeneration boards involved must support the latency measurement
function.
● For all tributary boards that support latency measurement, the client-side
service type must be configured for the boards before latency measurement.
Otherwise, the latency measurement will fail.
● During the delay measurement, only one ODUk/ODUCn/OTUk/OTUCn
channel can be configured. And the delay measurement interval of the same
board must be longer than 3 minutes; otherwise, the delay measurement will
fail.
● During trail latency measurement, ensure that the measured trail is normal.
● The overhead bytes used during latency measurement are the same as those
of IEEE 1588v2 on the OTN interface. If these overhead bytes transmit IEEE
1588v2 protocol packets, the IEEE 1588v2 is interrupted so that services are
affected. Therefore, it is not recommended that you measure trail latency if
IEEE 1588v2 is used.

NMS or Web LCT
Context
Measuring a trail latency (duration of source-sink signal transmission) is
processing overhead.
The latency measurement function is used to measure the end-to-end round-trip

latency of an ODUk/ODUCn/OTUk/OTUCn trail, and the measurement result is
1/2 of the total round-trip latency. If ODUk SNCP is configured on a trail, the
measurement result is 1/2 of the total round-trip latency of the current working
path.
Ensure that there are input optical signals on the client side before latency
measurement. During the measurement, the NMS automatically inserts PM/TCM
layer overhead bytes for latency measurement to the source board. The overhead
bytes are transparently transmitted through intermediate NEs and looped back on
the sink. After the measurement, the NMS restores the original configurations.

The following figure shows the source and sink of an OTN electrical-layer
overhead.
● When services are not set up, you can use OTUk/OTUCn to measure the path
latency between optical ports. For an OTUk/OTUCn bidirectional trail, OTN
levels include TCM1, TCM2, TCM3, TCM4, TCM5, and TCM6. For details, see
Single-Source and Single-Sink Bidirectional Trail Latency Measurement on
the U2000.
● ODUk/ODUCn is used to measure the end-to-end path latency after services

are set up. For an ODUk/ODUCn bidirectional trail, OTN levels include PM,
TCM1, TCM2, TCM3, TCM4, TCM5, and TCM6. For details, see Multi-Source
and Multi-Sink Bidirectional Trail Latency Measurement on the U2000.
Legend Information
Single-Source and Single-Sink Bidirectional Trail Latency Measurement on

the U2000
1. Log in to the Manage WDM Trail-[Main Window] window.

2. Start Latency Test.
● The result of the latency test is displayed as the half of the bidirectional trail.
● When the operation succeeded but the Latency Test(us) is empty, indicating that
faults occur on the trail.

Multi-Source and Multi-Sink Bidirectional Trail Latency Measurement on the

U2000
1. Log in to the Manage WDM Trail-[Main Window] window.
2. Start Latency Test.

: For a multi-source and multi-sink bidirectional trail, select the source and sink
ends for the trail test.
● The result of the latency test is displayed as the half of the bidirectional trail.
● When the operation succeeded but the Latency Test(us) is empty, indicating that
faults occur on the trail.
16.35 Enabling the ASON Feature

The NE obtains the ASON feature after this feature is enabled. The ASON feature
is disabled by default during delivery.
Prerequisites
● The node ID must be set.
● The NE must be in the running state.
● The NE must be created on the NMS and the NE data must be already
uploaded.
● A unique node ID is allocated to each ASON NE to identify the NE in the
ASON network. In the same ASON network, node IDs cannot be duplicate or
in the same network segment as the IP address of the corresponding NE. The
format of a node ID is the same as that of an IP address. The node ID cannot
be 0.0.0.0, 1.2.3.4 or 255.255.255.255. Properly set the NE node ID before you
enable the ASON feature of the NE.
● After you enable the ASON feature, synchronize the NE data to keep the
consistency of data between the NMS and the NE.
● You can disable the ASON feature of an ASON NE according to the project
requirement. After you disable the ASON feature, the NE is possessed of only
traditional NE features.
To disable the ASON feature, the NE must meet the following requirements:
● The NE must be in the running state and does not have any ASON cross-
connection or ASON service residual
● The fiber between the local NE and the adjacent node must not carry ASON
services.
● The ASON feature has been enabled.
● The TE link information is correct and no exception occurs.
● The network is stable.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose ASON > ASON Feature Management
Step 2 Click Query to view the current enabling status of the ASON feature.
Step 3 Set ASON Feature to Enabled.
Set the ASON Feature to Disabled to disable the ASON feature.

After you enable the ASON feature, both the electrical-layer and optical-layer ASON
features will be enabled. Generally, only the electrical-layer or optical-layer ASON feature is
required on a network. To save system resources, you are advised to disable unneeded
ASON features. For example, you can disable the electrical-layer ASON feature for an
optical-layer ASON network.
Step 4 Click Apply. After you confirm the operation twice, a prompt appears telling you
that the operation was successful.
After you disable the ASON feature, synchronize the NE data to keep the consistency of
data between the NMS and the NE.
Click Query on the bottom right of the ASON Feature Management windows. If
Running is displayed in ASON Software Running Status, it indicates that the
ASON software is running normally.
----End
16.36 Configuring Housekeeping Alarm Inputs

When there are alarm inputs on third-party equipment, the housekeeping alarm
input parameters must be set so that the alarms on third-party equipment can be
managed.
Context
You can change the name for a port of housekeeping alarm inputs to add a user-
defined identifier for housekeeping alarm location information, so that users can
easily find the required alarms. Perform the following operations to change the
name for the port of housekeeping alarm inputs.

NMS
Legend Information


Configure the housekeeping alarm inputs.
● 9800 U series subrack
● 9800 M24
: Based on the actual alarm inputs, set Using Status, Alarm Mode, and Alarm
Severity of the housekeeping alarm input interface.
To change the name for a port of housekeeping alarm inputs, right-click in the channel
view of the board and choose Modify Port Name from the shortcut menu. After
housekeeping alarm inputs occur, select and right-click this port, and then choose Browse
Current Alarms from the shortcut menu. You can view that the user-defined port name is
displayed in the alarm location information.

OSN 9800 Commissioning Guide (U2000) 03

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

OSN 9800 Commissioning Guide (U2000) 03

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OSN 9800 Commissioning Guide (U2000) 03

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OSN 9800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide (U2000)

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

About This Document

Product Earliest Version

OSN 9800 V100R001C20

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if

Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if

Supplements the important information in the main

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by

Updates in Issue 03 (2019-11-14)

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

● The Connecting to NEs topic has been updated with descriptions of

Updates in Issue 02 (2019-03-20)

Updates in Issue 01 (2018-08-06)

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

About This Document................................................................................................................ ii

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

2.2.2.6 Using Shortcut Keys...................................................................................................................................................... 35

3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During Deployment (OptiX OSN

6 Configuring NE and Network (Network Management Center)................................ 90

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

6.18 Configuring Boards.......................................................................................................................................................... 156

7 Checking Networkwide Configuration.......................................................................... 205

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

8.2.1.2 Commissioning Procedure for the Ring Network............................................................................................. 312

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

9 Commissioning OLSP 1:1 Optical Line Protection.......................................................499

10 Commissioning a Flexible ROADM Transmission System........................................503

11 Commissioning the Network......................................................................................... 510

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

11.3.3 Testing IPA of Raman System (RAU1/RAU2/SRAU/SRAPXF + Auxiliary Detection Board).................543

12 Testing Bit Errors Using A Signal Analyzer................................................................. 587

13 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data..............................................................................592

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii

13.8 Disaster Restoration of NE Configuration Data.................................................................................................... 608

14 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment.................................................... 612

16 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration........................619

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

16.7 Modifying the Fibers Configuration...........................................................................................................................662

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv

16.36 Configuring Housekeeping Alarm Inputs.............................................................................................................. 722

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

1 Preparations for Commissioning

This chapter describes how to prepare for commissioning.

1.1 Safety Operation Guide

1.1 Safety Operation Guide

Issue 03 (2019-11-14) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols

Table 1-1 Symbols on the WDM equipment